--- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Helix Stadium Native Owner's Manual ![Full Plugin Window_1_4.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ea1991560ff3396c0288428d74064331e250be53741918b722bc0b09e857d1c3/Full%20Plugin%20Window_1_4.png?cb=21b98b10d8f76cf5a74755e7ba4fb6bf) **A Guide to the Features and Functionality of Line 6 Helix Stadium Native Plugin** Version 1.4 *** ** * ** *** **© 2026 Yamaha Guitar Group, Inc. All rights reserved.** Yamaha Guitar Group, Line 6, the Line 6 logo, Agoura, Ampeg, DL4, Helix, HX, SVT, Portaflex, POD, PROXY, Showcase, and Variax are trademarks or registered trademarks of Yamaha Guitar Group, Inc. in the U.S. and/or other jurisdictions. Apple, Apple Music, Mac, macOS, Logic, and Logic Pro are trademarks of Apple, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries and regions. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this product or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license. ASIO is a registered trademark of Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH. Intel is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. USB-C is a registered trademark of USB Implementers Forum, Inc. ASIO, Cubase, Nuendo, and VST are registered trademarks of Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH. Avid and Pro Tools are registered trademarks of Avid Technology, Inc **Note:** All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners, and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 is associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development. Please see [++**U.S. Registered Trademarks**++](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/u-s-registered-trademarks-list.md). *** ** * ** *** Rev. B \| v1.4.0 --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Amp and Preamp Blocks Helix Stadium Native comes loaded with a wide variety of Amp and Preamp models, including a set of Amps created with the all-new **Line 6** ^**®**^**Agoura™** modeling methodology, which sets a new benchmark for sonic detail and responsiveness. All Agoura Amp models from the latest Helix Stadium hardware devices are included in Helix Stadium Native---please see the introductory video below. Also included are classic, vintage, modern, special hybrid, and Line 6 Original Amps, with all the Amps and Preamps from the award-winning Helix family of multieffects. **Amp Models:** ![Guitar and Bass Amp Icons](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_75eeadaffdac15fd79104b8c815aef001a79638696ab06b50bb68dc2e8aae940/Guitar-Bass%20Amp%20Icons.png?cb=795974dbd69b4178bba5883ae15b823f) The GUITAR AMP and BASS AMP subcategories consist of the full amplifier, including its preamp, tone stack, and power amp components, expertly captured to preserve the amplifier's unique sonic signature and tonal range. An Amp model provides essentially the same experience as plugging into your favorite guitar or bass amplifier, to which you'll want to connect a speaker cabinet or IR (Impulse Response) speaker simulator to complete your amp tone. These subcategories include an ever-growing library of **Agoura™** amp models, in addition to the previous generation's award-winning HX amp models. **Legacy Amp Models:** ![Legacy Guitar and Bass Amp Icons](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_76f2f8b933c62615d5a51ab8291d116ecaec7abef9e1b773e8a4b9ac86a32f25/Legacy%20Guitar-Bass%20Amp%20Icons.png?cb=bd8e0560ff06bb312fac1ba953af2f3f) LEGACY GUITAR and LEGACY BASS amps are from original HX products; they've simply been moved to the Legacy category because an Agoura version of that same amp exists. And as more Agoura amps appear in firmware updates, you may notice their HX equivalents getting moved from the GUITAR AMP or BASS AMP subcategories to the LEGACY GUITAR or LEGACY BASS subcategories. In addition, Legacy amps \& preamps provide compatibility with imported Helix and HX presets (saved with Helix/HX firmware or Helix Native Plug-in, version 3.50 or later). Amps in the LEGACY GUITAR and LEGACY BASS are often the newest and best-sounding HX amps, and as a bonus, they use considerably less DSP than Agoura. **Preamp Models:** ![Guitar Bass Mic Legacy Preamp Icons](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_7d621baaaeb5b1270d25d617d6ddbb1b1321529df7124a20e8aef72fd291c5de/Guitar%20Bass%20Mic%20Legacy%20Amp%20Icons.png?cb=f60b0280723c8ce3930dcd7667b253fb) GUITAR, BASS, MIC, and LEGACY subcategories are included. As of this writing, all Preamp models are HX. They are captured at the preamp stage of the amplifier, where most tone shaping and initial gain staging occur. Volume levels between the different preamp models can vary significantly. This is normal and true to the preamp circuits of the actual amplifiers modeled. Adjust the Preamp's Drive and/or Volume controls to achieve your desired saturation and level output. ## Proxy™ Amp \& Preamp Clones ![Clone icon.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_257849e72e33c398ef131bfaf3c9bfb81a5d69ebe2873e176e1f964db5764ae9/Clone%20icon.png?cb=1734818172f1c4423b805bc99deea2e0) Helix Stadium Native also supports Amp, Amp+Cab, Preamp, and Distortion Clone files created in Helix Stadium hardware via the Line 6^®^ Proxy™ Cloning process. Clone files can be exported from Helix Stadium devices and used freely in your Helix Stadium Native presets. Please refer to the [**Proxy Clones**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/proxytm-clones.md) page for additional details on loading and using them in your presets. **Tip:** For the complete, up-to-date lists of all Amp, Cab, and Effect Models included in Helix Stadium products, along with the original gear they are based on, please see [***Helix Stadium Models***](https://line6.com/helix-stadium-models/) on the Line 6 website. Note that the Helix Stadium Native Intro version includes a subset of the Amp, Cab, and Effect models of the complete version. Please see the [**Helix Stadium Native Versions**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/welcome-to-helix-stadium-native.md) section. See the [**US Registered Trademarks List**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/u-s-registered-trademarks-list.md). All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners, and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 is associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development. ### Selecting an Amp or Preamp Model ![AmpModelListv1_4.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d6b6127d7c9d2942e0d62d35074495d695cdfa9ec1572438b0672533c923c8d5/AmpModelListv1_4.png?cb=ccb9743e1ff0f91764819832ac0c3400) An Amp model is selected in the Model Browser #### **Agoura and HX Type Amps** When the Amp category is selected in the Model Browser, when you scroll down the Guitar Amp or Bass Amp list from the top, the Agoura type amp models appear first. When in the List view, a line appears to indicate where the Agoura type amps end and the HX type amps begin, as shown below. ![Agoura Amps Indicator.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b00be5ff14f1b222b8f3296dff812a264325a1d4e9316a66b0597be45357988e/Agoura%20Amps%20Indicator.png?cb=bfe8f7459d1aa83dbb54feacc91ae93d) Agoura/HX amps indicator 1. **From the Model Browser, select the Amp or Preamp category in the left column.** **Note:** Up to two Amp, Preamp, or Clone blocks, in any combination, can be added to a path (and up to four Amp/Preamp/Clone blocks max per preset). Optionally, you can set [**Settings \> Hardware Compatibility Mode**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/the-plugin-window.md) to "Off" to remove this limit (but note that the preset will not be compatible with Helix Stadium devices). 2. Click the GUITAR AMP, BASS AMP, LEGACY GUITAR, or LEGACY BASS button ![Subcategory buttons - Amp category](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_7253ffb697fbec85f17686bfe01467577399d26586d0be6e648de5bb5b5b56b1/Subcategory%20buttons%20-%20Amp%20Model.png?cb=594eb9eea2613c39510f8eb65dc2e0ec) at the top of the model list column to quickly scroll to its subcategory, then choose the desired amp/preamp model from the middle column list. 3. **For Amp models, the Add Cab Block feature is enabled by default to automatically add a matching Cab block directly to the right of the Amp block** . You can manually toggle this switch for any Amp model in the Model Browser, as shown below. When the switch is **off** , no Cab block is automatically added. You can also add a Cab block manually---see [**Cab Blocks and Cab IRs**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/cab-blocks-and-cab-irs.md). ![Add Cab Block switch.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a918a0d3a09700cdb50e54ab21d74dbc049cf8ab9421269fc9442209af6cfaa3/Add%20Cab%20Block%20switch.png?cb=8034870bf35881d47d1b0b863cb53c16) The Amp Model \> Add Cab Block switch ### The Focus View for Amp \& Preamp Models For all Amp \& Preamp models, click the Focus View button ![the Amp Focus View Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d6e5e14b84ebbcc23f9e6cef136fe9d32f6c1b190684d3c94f97e81672b344f6/AmpFocusButton.png?cb=39e79608e411873a947c8e0fbdf72a29) to quickly and easily create settings using the Focus View XY graphical edit panel, as shown below. Please see the [**Focus View**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/the-focus-view.md) page for details. IMAGE - Amp Focus View ## Common Amp and Preamp Parameters Below is a list of parameters available on numerous Amp models. Please note that you may occasionally see additional and slightly different parameters for certain amps. We typically include the same parameters as included on the original amps we model, along with their functions and sometimes quirky interactions, which can make classic amps special! **Note:** Amp+Cab, Amp, and Preamp Clones offer their own parameter set. Please see the [**Proxy Clones**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/proxytm-clones.md) page. | **Parameter** | **Description** | |-----------------------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Bypass** | Click ![AmpBypass.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_270639d6148bef1a07c71c04e99bbe1cdb1145503cc47bc565f7caa714e9904e/AmpBypass.png?cb=652f8c650f1dcd032919097422ae2dc1) in the Edit Panel to turn the block on and off, independent of any footswitch assignment. | | **Channel** | Many Agoura amps have two or more amp channels baked in, letting you freely switch between them with the knob, parameter automation, or snapshots. | | **Drive** or**Gain** | Adjusts the amount of gain applied to the signal, which influences the level of distortion. Use lower settings for cleaner tones and higher settings for added distortion and increased volume levels. | | **Bass** **Mid** **Treble** | Adjusts the low, medium, and high frequency EQ of the tonestack, respectively. Note that some amps instead include only a simple **Tone** parameter and/or **High** **Cut** or **Low Cut** as alternative EQ parameters. Bass amp models often include **Low Mid** and **High Mid** controls rather than a single **Mid** knob. | | **Level** | Controls the overall level of the Amp or Preamp block. Unlike the Master volume, it has no effect on the block's tone. Tweaking an Amp block's Level parameter is a helpful method of balancing apparent preset levels against one another. | | **Presence** | Boosts the upper mid and high frequencies in the power amp, resulting in additional punch and bite and an overall brighter tone. | | **Master** | Controls the Master Volume of the amplifier. This parameter is highly interactive with all other parameters---the lower the Master is set, the less effect the other controls will have. Different textures can be achieved using the Master volume in combination with the amp's Drive/Gain and Level. Higher Master settings typically result in more "power tube" type saturation, which can alter the amount of distortion and affect the amp's "feel." | | **Level** | Adjusts the amplifier's overall output volume. Unlike Drive, Gain, Volume, and Master Volume parameters, the Level adjusts the overall volume with minimum distortion or coloration. The Level can be used to balance the overall volume between presets. | | **Sag** | Controls the amount of sag, or how much the power supply compresses or "droops" in response to striking the strings hard. Higher values provide more touch dynamics, sustain, and organic feel inherent in vintage tube amps; lower values offer a "tighter" responsiveness for a more modern feel. | | **Hum** | Adjusts the level of power supply hum that interacts with the signal. Preamp tube heaters in tube amps will leak a bit of 60 cycle hum into the audio signal. When this hum mixes with the distorted audio signal, a non-musical distortion is created at low levels. To some players, this low-level, non-harmonic distortion adds a bit of realism to the amp model. | | **Ripple** | Controls how much AC ripple interacts with your tone. Power amp circuits will sometimes let a little bit of rectified 120Hz hum (that the power supply filter caps can't quite fully remove) into the audio signal when the power supply is being pushed hard. Much like Hum, Ripple provides a bit of non-musical distortion to the power amp at distorted settings. | | **Bias** | Adjusts the bias of the power amp tubes, altering tonality and distortion characteristics. | | **Bias X** | Short for "Bias Excursion." Determines how the power amp tubes' voicing reacts when pushed hard. Set low for a tighter feel. Set high for more tube compression. This parameter is highly reactive with the Drive/Gain and Master settings. | | **Z PrePost** | Determines the location of speaker impedance characteristics in the power amp, primarily due to negative feedback. Higher values mean the effects of the interaction appear at the output of the power amp (Post), and lower values mean more of the effect is fed back to the input of the power amp (Pre). | | **Hype** | The Stadium Agoura Amp models were designed as accurately as possible to sound like the original amplifiers they are based on. However, this may not always be optimal for every situation. For example, when you want to tighten the low end, smooth the high end, or achieve a more modern tone and feel. Depending on the amp and/or amp settings, increasing Hype may subtly or dramatically adjust various behind-the-scenes parameters to make the amp sound and feel smoother, fuller, punchier, tighter, and/or more forgiving, but at the expense of accuracy. **See the following video for a quick demo of how the Hype control works on Helix Stadium devices.** | --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Automation/Controller Panel Enable the **Automation/Controller** button ![Automation button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5c3bf2ff323549c09f812736794549d889c5fc2cd92705a6221fdbbb3a8e8b10/Automation%20button.png?cb=33d42a65724d94d7c52ae5322fb18561) at the top of the plugin window to display its panel in the lower portion of the plugin window. Here you can manually create, edit, and reference all your automation, MIDI, and snapshot control assignments in one handy view for the current preset. The panel offers two sections: the **Assignment List** on the left, which shows all current assignments, and the **Inspector**on the right, where you can create new automation assignments and access additional options for existing ones. This page provides an overview of the Automation/Controller panel and its options for managing parameter automation and snapshot assignments. Please refer to the [**MIDI Control**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/midi-control.md) page for details on MIDI Learn and other alternatives for creating MIDI assignments. ![AutomCtrlAssign_Annotated.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d8a840d3950dbf55dc122e65eed25253c83ac3d4ac40d864891193b6afdd4c76/AutomCtrlAssign_Annotated.png?cb=05ea2ac4e88d3979d7963aa60ca8a4c1) The Automation/Controller Panel 1. **Automation/Controller Panel Title:** This title is displayed when the panel is enabled via the toolbar button ![Automation button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5c3bf2ff323549c09f812736794549d889c5fc2cd92705a6221fdbbb3a8e8b10/Automation%20button.png?cb=33d42a65724d94d7c52ae5322fb18561) . 2. **Panel Close:**Click to close the Automation/Controller Panel, returning to the Edit Panel display. 3. **Assignment List:** The left pane displays all existing parameter automation, MIDI, and snapshot control assignments for the current preset, listing the parent **Block** , the assigned **Parameter** , and the controller **Source**(Knob, Switch, Step, Snapshot, or MIDI CC types). When you select an assignment in this list, its editable settings appear in the Inspector pane to the right. 4. **Inspector Pane:**Displays the settings for the currently selected block or the currently selected assignment in the list at the left. 5. **Selected Block Indicator:**Displays the icon and name of the currently selected block (or the parent block of the currently selected assignment in the list at the left). 6. **Target Parameter Menu:** Select the desired parameter for creating an assignment or for editing the parameter's existing assignment settings. 7. **Automation Source Controller Menu:** Select the source controller for the selected parameter's assignment. Depending on the parameter type selected, the option in this menu will include Knob, Switch, or Step-type controllers. Please see the following [**Automation Assignment**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/automation-controller-panel.md#bcc52b0d-6840-4a1c-ade0-5dcd84622a76) section for details. 8. **Snapshot Control On/Off:** Select **On** to enable Snapshot Control for the selected parameter. 9. **MIDI CC Assignment:** Choose the desired CC number to create a MIDI control assignment for the selected parameter. Set to **Off** for no MIDI control.^\*^ See the [**MIDI Control**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/midi-control.md) page for details. ^**\***^**Note:** Some DAW hosts, such as Pro Tools^®^ and Logic Pro, require that a plugin be inserted on an "Instrument" type track rather than an Audio track for receiving MIDI Control input. Please refer to your DAW software documentation. ## Hardware Controller Assignments If you are importing a preset exported from a Helix Stadium XL or Helix Stadium device, the preset may include hardware-specific bypass and controller assignments (such as EXP Pedal or Footswitch types). These hardware-based bypass and controller assignments are not functional within Helix Stadium Native, but are retained in the preset for compatibility with the hardware devices. To display them in the Automation/Controller - Assignment List for reference, choose the **Show assignments** option in the [**Settings**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/the-plugin-window.md) **\> Hardware Compatibility \> Show hardware bypass/controller assignments menu** (by default, this option is set to Hide assignments). These assignments appear with a hardware icon at left and are dimmed (see below) since they are not editable in Helix Stadium Native, but you can clear them via the Clear Assignment commands from the preset within each assignment's right-click menu. ![AssignList-HardwareAssigns.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5c3e65692f64935bcb203833416fd789e688c31b46b1802410150b63314e7b00/AssignList-HardwareAssigns.png?cb=891a1cd2e7fc670e4c1704cc6d44db02) Hardware assignments are displayed as dimmed in the Assignment List **Note:**Undo/Redo does not track actions performed in the Automation/Controller Assign tab. ## **About Plugin Parameter Automation** Helix Stadium Native supports your host DAW application's features to read, write, and edit parameter automation, where the DAW can control the plugin's parameter values over time using editable track envelopes. Practically any Helix Stadium Native block's parameters can be automated, as can the plugin's Input and Output Level knobs and [**snapshots**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/working-with-snapshots.md). Most DAWs also allow you to record parameter automation in real-time, where you enter an automation "write" mode and changes to the selected plugin parameters are recorded and displayed on the track as adjustable envelopes. This allows all these parameter changes to be played back (using the host's track "read" mode option) and incorporated into your project's mixdown. Host DAW applications typically allow you to access the list of automatable parameters for a plugin via an automation parameter menu specific to the audio, instrument, or aux track where you have inserted the plugin. Each host DAW software offers parameter automation options slightly differently---please refer to your host's documentation. ### Automation Assignment Since Helix Stadium Native can include numerous parameters (depending on how many Amp \& Effects blocks you add within your preset), it uses a set of assignable Source controllers for mapping each parameter you want to automate. To follow are the "automatable" Helix Stadium Native controllers and parameters that will appear in your host DAW application's plugin automation menus. * **Knob 1-16 Controllers:** For assigning "variable" type controls, such as a Delay's Mix or an Amp's Drive parameter. * **Switch 1-16 Controllers:** For assigning switch type parameters with 2 states, such as a block's Bypass/Enable, or an Amp's Bright/Normal switch. **Note:**When assigning a block's Bypass to a Switch controller, the upper "On" position value in your DAW's automation lane represents the block as enabled, and the lower "Off" position as the block bypassed. * **Step 1-16 Controllers:** For assigning parameters that offer between 3 to 13 individual options, such as a Compressor's Ratio, or a Reverb's Room Size parameter. * **Large Step 1-16 Controllers:** For assigning parameters that offer between 14 and 25 individual options, such as a Delay's Note Sync parameter. * **Additional "Fixed" Controllers:** These Helix Stadium Native parameters require no automation assignment and automatically appear in the host's Automation Parameter menus: **Snapshot** ,**Input Level, Output Level** , and **Master Bypass**. (Note that some host DAW applications also offer their own "fixed controllers" within their automation menus that are also usable with Helix Stadium Native plugin, such as a Wet/Dry Balance or a plugin window Bypass.) **Note:** The following steps for creating Automation assignments are specific to the Automation/Controller Assign tab. Automation assignments can alternatively be created directly on a parameter's slider or knob within the Edit tab. Please see the [**Edit Tab \> Creating Assignments**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/edit-panel.md) section. Once an assignment is created, it can be edited in either panel. #### Creating an Automation Assignment Before you can utilize your DAW host's track automation for a Helix Stadium Native parameter, it is necessary to first assign the desired parameter to an automation Knob, Switch, Step, or Large Step-type controller in the plugin (see descriptions of these controller types in the preceding section). **Automating a Parameter:** 1. **Add and select a Simple Delay and select its block in the signal flow.** In this example, we will configure its Mix parameter for automation. 2. **Click the Automation/Controller button** ![Automation button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5c3bf2ff323549c09f812736794549d889c5fc2cd92705a6221fdbbb3a8e8b10/Automation%20button.png?cb=33d42a65724d94d7c52ae5322fb18561) **on the toolbar to display the panel.** 3. **In the Automation/Controller panel, click on the Target Parameter menu to see all of the Simple Delay's parameters---select the Mix parameter in the menu.** ![Automation Target Parameter Select.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ac4ee289e8dde9c040074fda6391ce636b50ebd920e0e96996404294c2e8bacf/Automation%20Target%20Parameter%20Select.png?cb=d2a4624023a2cad715fd7712bfe07bf4) Selecting the Delay's Mix parameter 4. **Click the Automation/Controller menu and select the desired "Knob" controller to which you want to assign your selected target parameter. We will select Knob 1.** ^**\***^ ^**\***^**Note:** As described above, for variable parameters such as Mix, Feedback, Volume, etc., the Automation/Controller menu offers **Knob 1-16** controllers. For switch parameters, the menu offers **Switch 1-16** controllers. For multi-option parameters, the menu offers **Step 1-16** or **Large Step 1-16** controllers for parameters with many options. ![Automation Knob Select.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b5d0a854ad74ff9711e08cd30d7ef3d3c5bc7ae1d619cded675e040328e47d2f/Automation%20Knob%20Select.png?cb=babfd894dbcae24300b8b4b5fdba03f8) Selecting a controller for the Mix parameter * The assigned block, parameter name, and Source controller are displayed in the Assignment List pane at the left, as shown below. ![Automation List.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_32c4fabb720dc0705763c40003b3e34b9910d263ad983e6ec0dac7814dc78e5b/Automation%20List.png?cb=e3aa8bb98f2b0a2f103862314ffc082e) The created assignment appears in the list in the left pane **Note:** Only one parameter can be assigned to any one Knob/Switch/Step automation controller at a time---choosing a controller with an existing assignment will ***replace*** the existing assignment. Or, choose **None**to remove an existing assignment. 5. **Now, access your host DAW app track's automation parameter menu and select the Helix Stadium Native Knob 1-assigned (Simp Dly:Mix) parameter to automate it.** ^**\***^ ![Cubse_SelectingKnob1Param.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_455306a2f292f2f15bd5074291152b773030cc3af36038c0fc89680b8689eeba/Cubse_SelectingKnob1Param.png?cb=4188fd9a2996890d5c893eba0e221757) Cubase - Selecting the Knob 1 (Simp Dly:Mix) automation source controller ^**\***^**Note:** In some DAW hosts, the assigned Knob/Switch/Step source controllers appear in their Automation Parameter menus with the assigned parameter's name. For example, in the Cubase images above, the source controller appears as "Simp Dly:Mix." In other DAW hosts, the source controller may appear just as "Knob 1." **In Pro Tools** , it is also necessary to open the plugin window header's **Plugin Automation Enable** dialog and manually "**Add**" each plugin parameter you want to appear in the track's parameter automation menu, as shown below. ![ProTools_Automation-AddDialog.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_3f5c310aa92a8d42479ae612b590a49d8eb0544b830236ca2f311d007f3c36da/ProTools_Automation-AddDialog.png?cb=c92bfa442fe783f286c431b01195e807) "Adding" the assigned Delay Mix parameter to enable it for automation in Pro Tools 5. An envelope line appears for the Simp Dly:Mix parameter on the track (your host app may require that you toggle an option to display it). Adding edit points and adjusting this envelope will now directly adjust the Simple Delay's assigned Mix parameter. ![Cubase_DelayMixEnvelope.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_dc8523e495564b1bcf727850af762f173fb2871d2c4a0270ee4b281bbe72d81f/Cubase_DelayMixEnvelope.png?cb=3e15d8b964abdbdb8df8043ba965084c) Cubase - Delay: Mix parameter automation envelope Repeat these steps to configure other Knob, Switch, or Step controllers to create additional automation assignments for parameters in other Amp, Cab, Effect, or Mix blocks. #### Automatic Controller Reassignment In most cases, if you change the model in the current block to a different model of the same category, the Automation assignment will automatically assign to the same parameter for the new model. For example, in the above steps, we've assigned the Simple Delay model's "Mix" parameter to Knob 1. If the block's model is changed to another delay, such as the Transistor Tape model, its Mix parameter is automatically assigned to the Knob 1 Automation controller. **Tip:** Alternatively, to configure a block's Enable/Bypass switch automation assignment, you can right-click directly on the block within the Signal Flow, or right-click on the model's Bypass button within the Inspector pane - Edit tab panel, and choose a Switch 1-16 controller from the **Automation**menu, as shown below. ![right-click block bypass.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e95dc5658675b2a645e47f0485f64265657169d13a079f28f0eb8d5de98f2ec0/right-click%20block%20bypass.png?cb=ae7bb60c30588b378881b8a0d32e6f52) ### Automating Snapshot Changes [**Snapshots**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/working-with-snapshots.md) allow you to store a number of settings, such as block bypass, parameter values, tempo values, and more, and then recall all snapshot-assigned settings simply by loading the respective snapshot via the plugin's Snapshot menu. Helix Stadium Native also lets you automate snapshot loading in real-time. Use the following steps to manually configure a snapshot automation assignment. 1. **Access your host DAW app track's automation parameter menu and select the Helix Stadium Native - Snapshot option.** (Unlike block parameters, the Snapshot parameter does not require assignment to a Knob/Switch/Step Source controller.) ![Logic_SnapshotAutomationSelect.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_fd2919a6d49001b0b5343a0880c181d777d1779f529d43e52952a3d6b82273e5/Logic_SnapshotAutomationSelect.png?cb=d81ca231b77145ef3a80bb818e17bc18) Choosing the Snapshot parameter for automation (Logic Pro) 2. **A "Snapshot" automation envelope line is added on the track**(your host app may require you to toggle an option to display it). Adding edit points and adjusting this envelope allows you to choose the Snapshot index number you wish to load. ![Logic_AutomationEnvelope.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b848de2acf5c7d5877194cffd512a51a4537a609bd20bdd7ee5e3f5bd85e2811/Logic_AutomationEnvelope.png?cb=592ae7e92aa9507abb467738f973f02c) A Snapshot automation envelope is being edited (Logic Pro) ## Writing Parameter Automation Most host DAW apps provide several "Read/Write" track automation modes, which typically appear as a set of options on the track (Off, Read, Write, Latch, Touch, etc.). ![ProTools_AutomationRead-Write.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_70306c13674817d94c27e4f0051658d1d315e8c782e43ec48496c1632354a899/ProTools_AutomationRead-Write.png?cb=9926a9ec8635b9b51bc51fff92cae467) Choosing the Track Automation Mode (Pro Tools) **When set to Read**(typically the default): The track will actively "play back" the automation envelope settings, and when set to "Off," it will ignore the automation envelope. **When a Write option is set as active on the track:**Play the track and manually adjust any Helix Stadium Native switch or slider within the plugin's Edit Panel that includes an automation controller assignment, and your moves are recorded to the track in real time. The parameter's envelope on the track has been edited with the adjustments you made. You can manually drag individual edit points to further edit the envelope after playback stops. ![ProTools_WrittenAutomation.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_7224d10bee7475a2a94a4615b7eea39b3082b04b49857e54a9749020a6c99412/ProTools_WrittenAutomation.png?cb=4fd4e6ddd493ad6cb63518b2c1f143a1) An automation envelope is written on the track for the adjusted parameter (Pro Tools) **Note:** Automation Assignments are saved with each preset. When Helix Stadium Native-saved presets are imported into Helix Stadium devices (via the Helix Stadium application), Automation Assignments are removed because they are not supported on the hardware. Snapshot and MIDI CC assignments are retained in the presets and are functional on the hardware. --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Block Types In the world of Helix Stadium, ***blocks*** are objects that represent various elements of a preset, such as amps, preamps, cabs, effects, splits, merges, inputs, outputs, and more. **Tap an empty position on a path to choose the type of block you wish to add.** ![Native_Blocks_v1_0.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8c5e58b32dc70c79a565f78c8ec77ef2dc0f95a23784471e7476d7109bbc10dc/Native_Blocks_v1_0.png?cb=a90cf97243b00a652aa29344ef57352f) Helix Stadium Native block types ^**\***^**Note:** The Looper and FX Loop type blocks are Helix Stadium hardware-only and disabled in Helix Stadium Native plugin. If these block types exist in a preset exported from a Helix Stadium device, they appear disabled but are retained in the Helix Stadium Native preset for hardware compatibility. The following pages include information and tips for using each Block type. **Tip: New for Version 1.4!** Several new Agoura**™** Amp and Effect models are added. Also see the [***Helix Stadium v1.4 Release Notes***](https://kb.line6.com/helix-stadium-1-4-release-notes) for details. **Agoura Amps** * **Brit SL100:** four different models are included here! Based on^\*^ Marshall^®^JMP 1959 Super Lead 100 heads from 1967, 1968, 1970, and 1971, each offering Normal, Bright, and Jumped Channels. ![Model_Icon_Amp_Guitar_Brit_SL100.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_91854079417c3112292c93494286272076cda165a882eb337678906350c0167d/Model_Icon_Amp_Guitar_Brit_SL100.png?cb=99db6126c4c9a19fd516ffd75cbbc131) Brit SL100 * **Omega Granophyre:** based on^\*^ Omega Ampworks™ Granophyre 100 Watt, 6L6 head, with Low and High inputs. ![Model_Icon_Amp_Guitar_Granophyre.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8095fe1cd32f547c425ec19c3a843cb74ff640c47dfe9ee9ae7776f19896164f/Model_Icon_Amp_Guitar_Granophyre.png?cb=cce0e260975635b1c3a93a9842f12922) Omega Granophyre * **Prosecutor:** Ben's new Agoura version of the original Helix Litigator amp. ![Model_Icon_Amp_Guitar_L6Prosecutor.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b136ddefaa7c085ea92f417a1e4a8cc648c195abfafd110aafb1b2941ff6a060/Model_Icon_Amp_Guitar_L6Prosecutor.png?cb=aafa4ce499382ef3d4d3562265cb8936) Prosecutor **Distortion Models** * **Rock Box Dist:** based on^\*^ the Z.Vex™ Box of Rock™ Distortion circuit. * **Rock Box Boost:** based on^\*^ the Z.Vex Box of Rock Boost circuit. ![Model_Icon_Distortion-RockBoxDistortion.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_7661191061ca44c3fdd34e51d5eeeec9b48e578d1222526c670448d0831a9724/Model_Icon_Distortion-RockBoxDistortion.png?cb=99ddc839874f128155bf3b00ff581e38) Rock Box, Distortion and Boost * **PortaBox 424:** based on^\*^ the JHS Pedals^®^ 424 Gain Stage. ![Model_Icon_Distortion_Portabox424.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_921b760a9a3fc624bc027f9df92ef0871b3ba2faa81f60136b5d45b0a18f4b50/Model_Icon_Distortion_Portabox424.png?cb=51cd97f2ea108a0e77ae655ea261385d) PortaBox 424 * **Mercator:** based on^\*^ the preamp circuit of the Ben Adrian Cartographer amp. ![Model_Icon_Distortion-Mercator.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e6dfe1ce0e03f3af8f16525660cff6d7580c3a640ff1e50c3a40579509b0ba81/Model_Icon_Distortion-Mercator.png?cb=20bb7833e7ff9dadfdfc91d4adbb3c07) Mercator **Modulation Models** * **Essex Vibe:** based on^\*^ the Vibrato circuit of the Vox^®^ AC-30 with Top Boost amp. ![Model_Icon_Modulation_EssexVibe.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d89c20aaad961609182add1e037c70725edc773edd6065d6521608e020de20a0/Model_Icon_Modulation_EssexVibe.png?cb=8cab729f20e02c2fe836e065b3ab3347) Essex Vibe * **Dimension W:** based on^\*^ the BOSS^®^ Dimension C DC-2W chorus. ![Model_Icon_Modulation_Dimension_W.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_3d72ff63b33aeda52ae98c2d5fad9f9719236cb313926a0ebeb93564dee16feb/Model_Icon_Modulation_Dimension_W.png?cb=1958e99cff69e0b32114f6e92325bae6) Dimension W For the complete, current lists of all Amp, Cab, and Effect Models included in Helix Stadium family products and the original gear they are based on, please see the **Helix Stadium Model List** below. ^\*^See [**U.S. Registered Trademarks**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/u-s-registered-trademarks-list.md). All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners, and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 is associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development. * [**Amp and Preamp Blocks**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/amp-and-preamp-blocks.md) * [**Cab Blocks and Cab IRs**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/cab-blocks-and-cab-irs.md) * [**Effect Blocks**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/effect-blocks.md) - Distortion, Delay, Reverb, Modulation, Dynamics, EQ, Pitch/Synth, Wah/Filter, and Volume/Pan * [**Proxy™ Clones**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/proxytm-clones.md) - Amp, Amp+Cab, Preamp, and Distortion clones created using the Helix Stadium hardware's Proxy feature are supported for use in Helix Stadium Native. * [**Input, Output, Split, and Merge Blocks**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/input-output-split-and-merge-blocks.md) * [**Favorite Blocks**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/favorites.md) Check out the following ***Performance*** video to hear some of the Helix Stadium Native Amps \& Effects in action! ## Helix Stadium Model List To follow is the complete, current list of Amp, Cab, and Effect models included in Helix Stadium products. To view this content directly on the Line 6 website, please visit: [**Line 6 \| Helix Stadium Models**](https://line6.com/helix-stadium-models/) --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Building and Editing Tones To follow are simple steps to get you started creating your own preset, including how to edit its models and signal path for customized tones to fit your workflow. **Tip:** A great way to start using Helix Stadium Native is to try out the selection of Factory Presets and get familiar with the tonal possibilities. Soon enough, you'll certainly want to start creating your own tone masterpieces, as covered in the following sections. ## Creating a New Preset **Click the Preset Menu and select New Preset, as shown below.** ![Preset Menu New Preset.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ca7a490e5ca89ffa225cbca0532cb3fae5bc56a2ff996e6fbb1833d2fcbd03f0/Preset%20Menu%20New%20Preset.png?cb=802f98f16e422403f36c5e969ac15e3e) Creating a New Preset A New Preset is loaded with an empty Signal Flow, awaiting your addition of Amp, Cab, and Effect blocks. ![New Preset Empty.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ea80a09f51fe320ab69ffdeae498ff743fd4094416b6a412edc2e1e01d453f9f/New%20Preset%20Empty.png?cb=de306cc3990e128233505e456a9dbe2d) An empty New Preset ### Adding Blocks #### **Add an Amp and Cab** 1. Click an empty location on the top path (Path 1A) where you want to add a block. 2. In the Edit Panel, click in the Model Browser and select the Amp model category. 3. Select a subcategory from the top toolbar of the Amp models column (Guitar Bass, Legacy, or Clone). * Optionally, Amp and Amp+Cab type Clones can be used for an Amp block. Please see the [**Amp \& Preamp Blocks**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/amp-and-preamp-blocks.md) page for adding Clone files. 4. Click on the desired Amp in the models column to load it. You'll instantly hear the loaded Amp model, and its adjustable parameters appear in the Edit Panel on the right. * By default, a matching Cab block is added along with your selected Amp. You can optionally disable the **Add Cab Block** switch to add only an amp. Please see the [**Amp \& Preamp Blocks**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/amp-and-preamp-blocks.md) section. 5. Click on the Cab block in the signal flow to edit its mic, position, and other parameters in the Edit Panel (as shown below, left). You can select a different Cab model---note that a cab block can use up to two Cab models. Also, see the [**Edit Panel**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/edit-panel.md) section. * Click the Focus View button ![Focus view button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_2370dec721d1962114668a7e0ce309494a815fd6aa276361f5e16fe72d6d27e9/Focus%20Button%20-%20Cab.png?cb=d4f8bc1256ede8a7e8b3ef78182c4e58) to use its graphical display to position the cab on the mic (shown below, right). Also, see the [**Focus View**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/the-focus-view.md)**.** * Optionally, Impulse Response files (IRs) can be used in a Cab block. Please see the [**Cab Models**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/cab-blocks-and-cab-irs.md) section for adding IR files. ![Edit Panel - Cab Model.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f871665a7d0edc429922123b7cb4cc741506815e5897fec7c7c8e5eec53743c5/Edit%20Panel%20-%20Cab%20Model.png?cb=36c28e8907df1544ee8b6e2ce9002da6) The Edit Panel - Cab model selected ![FocusView_BritV30CabModel.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f980d288358b25cf7a791762ad4f1a5dffed1808e3182c5fbfdab688aad323fa/FocusView_BritV30CabModel.png?cb=8195a113667cc544557bb78e760b2bdd) The Focus View - Cab model selected **Tip:** Once you've added a few blocks, it is recommended to click the Preset Menu, choose **Save Preset As**, and name and save the "New Preset" as a preset file on your computer. ![Save Preset As.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_46f8f905659f9641840c18c3e6d27fd064f9036e54c5fe93de65e581b383dfe3/Save%20Preset%20As.png?cb=cb1fce29e445f061ab0aff0e9218af40) Saving a new preset #### Add Some Effects 1. **Click on an empty location on the signal path again and use the Model Browser to add some Effect blocks.**There are a few general guidelines for effects placement, but also feel free to totally ignore them and experiment. **Note:** If you are using the Helix Stadium Native Intro version, some effects categories are dimmed and not selectable (Pitch/Synth, Wah/Filter, and Volume/Pan). This is expected, as the free Intro version's limited model set does not include models in these categories. See the [**Helix Stadium Native License Versions**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/welcome-to-helix-stadium-native.md#48fba6eb-cb8f-4a20-835f-29fd39ba3eba) section for additional details. * Add Pitch/Synth, Wah/Filter, Dynamics, and Distortion blocks before the Amp and Cab (in what we call "Pre" position). It's best to use mono models in the Pre position since Amp blocks are mono and will sum any incoming stereo signal. * Add Modulation, Delay, and Reverb blocks after the Amp and Cab ("Post" position), especially when using distorted amp settings, for a smoother overall sound. (Quite a few Modulation models sound different, but equally great, in the "Pre" position too.) * An EQ can be useful in many positions in the signal path; multiple EQ blocks can even be used to shape the sound and level of the signal feeding into an amp, before or after specific effects, etc. **Tip:** You can create **Favorites** for any Amp, Cab, or Effect block to save your specific parameter settings, making it easily available from the Favorites category. See [**Favorites**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/favorites.md). ![Saved Preseet.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9dc160c2f9ca7e25ea39788fa0937ecb3daf0cea66b4723e12deba9385f69409/Saved%20Preseet.png?cb=cdba8c0065e11cc32fdb286de8cb258d) A completed, saved preset Congratulations! You have now built a robust tone that you can start tweaking as desired... or just dive in and start playing. ### Editing Blocks 1. **Select a block to edit it:** Click on any block in the Signal Flow panel to select it, and its Bypass button ![Bypass Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_00cc91a5ba3a39869e58dbe26fc0d1d1141cff44dff346c84d78ed0c4d31c826/Bypass%20Button.png?cb=2af9a1398d1c68774acb5d33a3d031b6) and parameters appear in the Edit Panel for adjustment (shown below, left). Also, see the [**Edit Panel**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/edit-panel.md) section. * Click the Edit Panel's Focus ![Focus View button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b055eeaca8b57d115a24088bc5e3e3bfc668753302b82fb2e8829b4badeffcaf/Focus%20View%20button%20Distortion.png?cb=8f61daaba4679d93673a3eb9214c58b4) button to edit the current model using the Focus View (shown below, right). Please see the [**Focus View**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/the-focus-view.md) section for details. * Note that **Input** , **Output** , **Split** , and **Merge** type blocks can also be selected to access their options and parameters within the Edit Panel, such as the **Gate** \& **Trim** (Input blocks) and **Level** \& **Pan** (Split, Merge, and Output blocks). ![Edit Panel - Distortion.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1f17d1eded27bdf637bd8154d9a6b592883be5b795660982b63c26b0923e33fb/Edit%20Panel%20-%20Distortion.png?cb=530eab6f621372b654e4aca5fd0cb7fc) The Edit Panel - Distortion model selected ![Focus View Distortion.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a2dcf811b35a97439767dfe688e2ff7360abcbfc9c8f122efaaf9d93c8d57103/Focus%20View%20Distortion.png?cb=2d4d7d10798429892fc3258cb856e9f3) The Focus View - Distortion model selected **Tip: Quickly change an existing block between mono and stereo versions.**Say you have a mono Cosmos Echo with your settings all tweaked, but now want to change it to a stereo Cosmos Echo without losing your settings... 1. Click on the Delay block in the signal flow to select it. 2. The mono/stereo buttons ![mono-stereo buttons.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_52fb01e60a3ed36d1c67f275b666f96b5ee324c91edff30109eb1f0cde781199/mono-stereo%20buttons.png?cb=a6b411bb0abf848967782d69ef62dac7) to the right of the Cosmos Delay model name in the Inspector let you switch between versions. In this example, click the stereo button to change the mono Cosmos Echo to the stereo version. ![Effect mono to stereo.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_7e66997953dfb7bd4af11f8e08d0a33155eaa0c8cd5c5706c82f33b1aef04d76/Effect%20mono%20to%20stereo.png?cb=df0a6c3189a807f5cdf2a518ed948032) Changing a mono effect to stereo The stereo version of the model is then loaded with all your applicable parameter values and Automation/MIDI/Snapshot Controller assignments retained. You can do the same to change a stereo effect block to mono. (Note that Legacy, Clone, mono-only, and stereo-only type models do not offer this option.) 2. **Reposition a block:**Click and drag a block to change its position in the Signal Flow. * Drag left/right to move it to a new position on the current path. * Drag a block down slowly from the main path to create a parallel path and add the block to it. See [**Signal Path Routing**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/signal-path-routing-options.md) for details. * Right-click on a block to open its Action Menu, where several commands can be selected, such as to toggle its Bypass, create Automation and MIDI assignments, Copy, Paste, Clear, and more. * Hover your mouse cursor over a block to access its handy Bypass toggle (left) or Clear Block (right) button, as shown below. ![Block Hover Bypass and Clear Buttons](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c0a375362ea53dbac7bc71c420dd6fc1deb103b3cea3aca995c83c4aa616834a/Block%20Hover%20Buttons.png?cb=7b08692914fadb1307da9132c54727ea) 3. **Copy/Paste a block:** Right-click on any Amp, Cab, or Effect block and choose Copy from its Action menu. Click another path location to select it, then right-click and select **Paste** to copy the block there with its current parameter settings. * Any existing parameter Automation and MIDI Assignments are also copied/pasted. * For any existing parameters with Snapshot Control enabled, the "enabled" switch state is copied/pasted, but the parameter values stored with each snapshot are *not*. * If you select another existing block and choose **Paste** , this will *replace* the selected block. * Note that you can also **Paste** into a different preset. * For **Input** , **Output** , **Split** , and **Merge** -type blocks, **Copy** /**Paste** is also available, allowing the block's parameter settings to be copied \& pasted into a location with the same block type. 4. **Remove a block:** Click and drag a block up and out of the plugin window to clear it from your preset. Or, right-click and choose **Clear** , or hover over the block and click its "**X**" Clear button. ### Creating User Default Settings Whenever you add a block to your tone and select a model, all the model's parameters are loaded with a specific set of "Factory Default" values. If you find yourself constantly re-tweaking your commonly used models the same way, you can customize a model's "User Default" settings to define its new defaults (excluding Input, Output, Split, or Merge Mixer blocks' settings) so the model loads that way every time. ![User Default.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_608a20673778933c9c2b7e817195bbf5d1e43d5f6a00e15074e3531c2a99da11/User%20Default.png?cb=5acd4cadd2a04ebc6fbd62ad7624a2fa) Setting a block to User Default settings 1. **Select any block and tweak it exactly how you like:** Configure any of the model's parameters and bypass state. (Existing Automation, MIDI, and Snapshot assignments are ***not*** stored/recalled with the User Default settings.) 2. **Right-click the block to open its Action panel:** Select **User Default**. Your current parameter settings are now saved as the default for all future uses of the model. (Existing presets that already include the model are not affected.) * **To return a model to its original Factory Default settings:** Right-click the block, open its Action panel, and select the **Factory Default** command to reset it for future uses of the model. **Tip:** Alternatively, you can create a **Favorite** . This allows you to customize a model's parameters, bypass state, custom name, and more, and add it to the Favorites menu for easy access via the Model List. Please see [**Favorites**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/favorites.md) for details. --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Cab Blocks and Cab IRs By default, adding an Amp block with an Amp model automatically adds a matching cab block to ensure you attain the complete sound of a physical amp and speaker cabinet. Unlike in the world of physical amplifiers, Helix Stadium Native makes it easy to audition a multitude of classic and modern speaker cabs, with swappable mics and numerous parameters to tweak them further. You can also load Cab IRs (Impulse Responses) with or in place of Stadium' Native's Cabs, as covered on this page. A Cab block consists of any two of the following: * Guitar Cab Model * Bass Cab Model * IR (Impulse Response) Cab blocks are unique in that they can include two models, which also determines the block's mono or stereo functionality: * When one Cab or Cab IR is loaded, the Cab block sums its incoming signal to mono. * When two Cabs or two Cab IRs (or one of each) are selected in a single Cab block, the Cab block is stereo in and stereo out. * Also see the [**Signal Path Routing**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/signal-path-routing-options.md) page for tips on mono/stereo routing. **Tip:** For the complete, up-to-date lists of all Amp, Cab, and Effect Models included in Helix Stadium products, along with the original gear they are based on, please see [***Helix Stadium Models***](https://line6.com/helix-stadium-models/) on the Line 6 website. Note that the Helix Stadium Native Intro version includes a subset of the Amp, Cab, and Effect models of the complete version. Please see the [**Helix Stadium Native License Versions**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/welcome-to-helix-stadium-native.md#48fba6eb-cb8f-4a20-835f-29fd39ba3eba) section. See the [**US Registered Trademarks List**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/u-s-registered-trademarks-list.md). All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners, and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 is associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development. ## Hybrid Cabs from Original Helix Native/Helix/HX Helix Stadium Native does not include the older Hybrid Cab models from the original Helix Native plugin and Helix/HX devices (pre-version 3.50). When loading an original Helix Native/Helix/HX preset into Helix Stadium Native, any Hybrid Cab blocks are automatically converted to a new Cab. They may sound better right from the get go, but note that they will likely sound different. ## Selecting a Cab or Cab IR By default, when you add an Amp block and select an Amp model within it, a Cab block is automatically added to its right, and the "matched" Cab appears in the left tab of the Cab block. To disable this behavior, from the Model List, **set the Add Cab Block switch** to its off (left) position, as shown below**.** Also, see the [**Amp \& Preamp Blocks**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/amp-and-preamp-blocks.md) page. ![Add Cab Block switch.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_03249401e5e41ad968c954352f61c308b4d720e5515f803ba707c22a91999ae2/Add%20Cab%20Block%20switch.png?cb=8034870bf35881d47d1b0b863cb53c16) The Amp Model \> Add Cab Block switch **Note:** Amp Clone blocks do not offer the Add Cab Block option. If you are using an "Amp" type Clone (captured from an amplifier signal without a speaker cab simulation or IR), you'll want to manually add a Cab block following the Amp Clone block for a complete amp and cab tone. ### Adding a Cab Block Manually A Cab block includes two cab "slots," which are selectable at the top right of the Cab's Edit Panel. ![Model Browser Cab Select.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e1373406381c00700caf6362e94cde9d024438b6425796cfbcd0ffa9b9b65536/Model%20Browser%20Cab%20Select.png?cb=9dcef07332cb25b7a70bd1d87e4f9aa3) A Cab block is selected, showing its two tabbed "slots" 1. **In the Model Browser, select the Cab category in the left column.** **Note:** Up to four Cab blocks can be added to a path (up to eight per preset). Optionally, you can set [**Settings \> Hardware Compatibility Mode**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/the-plugin-window.md#fc6ee204-0d83-4be3-b863-6b87837bd8ac) to "Off" to remove this limit (but note that the preset will not be compatible with Helix Stadium devices). 2. Click the GUITAR CAB, BASS CAB, or CAB IR button ![Cab subcategory buttons](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_fe090aaf96db75166decd07bba526b544c9c3df19fca215189a05e49477a7400/Cab%20subcategory%20buttons.png?cb=25c353f6675e9dfcf884fbdfa0cda5f2) at the top of the model list column to quickly scroll to its subcategory. The Cab model or Cab IR you select is loaded into the left Cab block slot. * For a Guitar or Bass Cab Model, choose the desired model from the middle column list. * For a Cab IR, click the \ IR File Selector box at the top of the Edit Panel. (Note that you'll need to have added IR files to the designated IRs folder for them to appear in the IR File list---see the following [**Cab IRs**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/cab-blocks-and-cab-irs.md#cab-its) section.) 3. To add a second Cab or Cab IR to the block, click on the right cab tab on the header of the Cab Edit Panel, and repeat the above steps. **Note:** It is only possible to select **NO CAB** for the right Cab slot. 4. Once a Cab model or IR is added to the block, click on its respective left or right slot in the Edit Panel to access its parameters. See the following lists [**Cab Model and Cab IR Parameters**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/cab-blocks-and-cab-irs.md#3a3bfde9-73fd-4409-87ad-94d3cd59a8a7). * Right-click on any parameter slider/knob/switch in the Edit Panel for its Action menu options, such as resetting the parameter to its default, creating automation, MIDI Control, or Snapshot Control assignment, and more. Please also see [**Creating and Editing Tones**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/building-and-editing-tones.md). ![Cab parameter Action menu.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_3865cb5535db04ef6067ce0ad7dbd0850e59da22f91ebfbaefb9bb192e77ac98/Cab%20parameter%20Action%20menu.png?cb=04c98ff559a12ccaf20b7db4ab810b1b) The Cab parameter Action menu ### Focus View for a Cab Block Click on the Focus View button ![Cab Focus View Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5f3dea16faf2defc0b42fb95f8decaf983d9024d42908b8e83dfc5ef9612c821/CabFocusButton.png?cb=0490cda97504352c6b1cba235d3f0556) in the Edit Panel when a Cab block is selected to open its Focus View. * **When a Cab model is selected**, the Focus View provides a handy graphical editor, as shown below. Click and drag the Mic to set its Position and Distance relative to the Cab speaker, just as you would in the studio. Click the 0°/45° toggle to set the mic Angle. These parameters, along with all other Cab parameters, can also be adjusted within the sliders/knob in the Edit Panel. ![Cab Focus View.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_96409d1aa4f63b9ad948b9ea987b3bc6ac132d57f1b4973b42047f0581576f16/Cab%20Focus%20View.png?cb=fce0f42053371aa841f85afe268fedaf) Focus View - Cab model * **When an IR is selected** , the Focus View provides a frequency plot for the selected IR file for reference, as shown below. The IR parameters can be adjusted within the sliders/knob in the Edit Panel. Please see the [**Cab IRs**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/cab-blocks-and-cab-irs.md#cab-its) section below for more about using IRs. Also, see the [**Focus View**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/the-focus-view.md) page. ![CabBlock_IR-FocusView.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e669e56376e6e0dd20ea73ef471067b2754ad14a71553d7fd5905fabba999e86/CabBlock_IR-FocusView.png?cb=965a567ece55f3f851eed445f9c9dcff) Focus View - IR **The following options appear in the sidebar of the Cab block Focus View** * **User Default:** If you find yourself constantly re-tweaking your commonly-used Cabs the same way, **click User Default** t**o save the Cab's settings as its new defaults, so it always shows up the way you want.** See [**Creating User Defaults**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/building-and-editing-tones.md#8a49afab-601e-4148-8663-04420530740e). * **Factory Default:** If you've stored User Default settings for the selected Cab model or Cab IR, **click Factory Default to return it to its original default settings for all future uses**. * **Add to Favorites:** Once a Cab block is configured to your liking, add it as a Favorite to easily recall it from the Favorites category, with your saved settings intact for future presets. See [**Favorites**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/favorites.md). * **Amp\>Cab Link**(For Cab models only - An Amp block containing an Amp Clone is not linked): When enabled (the default), changing an Amp model will automatically recall a "matched" cab for the left tab of its linked Cab block. When a "linked" Amp and Cab are added to the signal flow, a gold "chain" icon appears beneath them to indicate the link when the Amp or Cab block is selected, as shown below. When off, changing the Amp model does not affect the Cab block. ![Linked Amp and Cab.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_cb92af071f359a481b9fbb37ab5557e8d9f6bbc801fc2371f9d3692e742f96b3/Linked%20Amp%20and%20Cab.png?cb=333d580b7545da53f579a637f5a8ceda) A linked Amp and Cab **Note:** The **Amp\>Cab Link** switch is only active when you add the Amp \& Cab with the Amp Model List's [**Add Cab Block**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/amp-and-preamp-blocks.md#a1ed75ba-fe54-4877-b44c-bec5da65a314) toggle. Note that Amp\>Cab Link is also not active when an Amp or Amp+Cab **Clone** is selected in the Amp block. The Cab block's right tab Cab model remains unchanged when **Amp\>Cab Link** is enabled unless you also have **Cab\>Cab Link** enabled (see the next item). * **Cab\>Cab Link** (For Cab models only): **Click the switch to "on" (right position) to link both sides of a Cab block.** When on, changing the left cab automatically loads the same cab on the right. * Changing the right Cab does not affect the left Cab. ### Cab IRs Instead of Cab models, you can load one or two Cab IRs to a Cab block. **Impulse Responses** , or "**IRs**" are mathematical functions representing the sonic measurements of audio systems (in this case, speaker cabinet and mic combinations)---resulting in very short audio files that can then be loaded into an IR loader to provide a virtual recreation of the entire system---cabinet, speaker, mic, and perhaps even some post-processing like EQ. #### Adding IRs for Helix Stadium Native IRs can be purchased from numerous online vendors, typically offering a wide assortment of guitar and bass amp speaker cabinets with various speaker types and mic options. **Helix Stadium Native supports IRs in WAV (.wav)** file format. Regardless of the source WAV file's length, sample rate, bit depth, and mono/stereo format, Cab IRs are processed internally as 2048-sample, 48kHz, 32-bit float, mono files. #### **More About IRs...** IR (.wav) files supported by Helix^®^ Stadium, Helix^®^, HX^®^, POD^®^ Go devices, as well as Helix Native and Metallurgy^®^ software, are also compatible with Helix Stadium Native. (Note that IRs \[.hir type files\] purchased from the Line 6 Marketplace are not supported in Helix Stadium Native at this time.) Your IR files must first be added to your Helix Stadium Native designated IRs folder on your computer to allow them to appear in the plugin's Model Browser. By default, this folder is at Documents \> Line 6 \> Helix Stadium Plugin \> IRs, but you can change this to a different folder via the plugin's [**Settings**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/the-plugin-window.md#fc6ee204-0d83-4be3-b863-6b87837bd8ac). When loading a preset that was saved with an IR file that does not currently exist in the pluign's IR folder, the Cab block's IR File Selector will appear as "**Unresolved** " ![Unresolved IR](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e415412093bdcfa1f9617cdc34511064c70bea2937c2b461d0b45a30d2bba811/Unresolved%20IR.png?cb=14ef950d58bb3ec8df0ef2a08f17c6b5) , with no IR file loaded. You can add the missing IR file to the plugin's IR folder, then click the "Unresolved" IR File Selector and load the IR (or, optionally, load any other IR file or Cab model in its place). #### Loading IRs in a Cab Block Once you've copied or moved IR files into the designated Helix Stadium Native - IRs folder (as covered in the preceding section), you can select, audition, and load an IR using the Model Browser. 1. **With a Cab block added to your preset's Signal Flow and selected, click the IR subcategory button, then click to select IR in the model list column.** 2. Click on the **\** File Selector field in the desired Cab Slot and select the IR file you want to load from the pop-up file list, as shown below. * Enter an IR name in the **Search field** ![Search Field](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_2b6f06ccbb04c0b7aaffcf535c3932fc72859c9b1ad7b6e2f614eeeacbf087a7/Search%20Field.png?cb=0df8c94fae79047563ce31f8467f3728) at the top of the list window to filter the list and more easily find the desired IR file(s). * Click an IR once to audition it; the file list window remains open. Click an IR twice to load it and close the list window. **Tip:** You can manually create your own folders within the designated IRs folder using the Finder (macOS) or File Explorer (Windows®) apps, and move your IR files to organize and manage them as desired. Folders appear at the top of the IR file list window; click on a folder to display its contents. Use the options at the top right to navigate your folders in the file list window: * Click the **Back Folder button** ![Back Folder button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_97b11138b20cc14fc29e1881ac825b004ec26de721ebcbbd0891b942d163b0ff/Back%20Folder%20button.png?cb=bf2bc2dcf27ca54a1bba9249e528b874) to select the parent folder of the currently selected folder. * Use the **Folder Select menu** ![Folder selection menu](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_54892aedb08b976262a1d307bb4b58d6dddb3345f061cb2f0f9267c95904e4a1/Folder%20selection%20menu.png?cb=132d7ea4f825f81801e74896530fc625) to select the desired folder. * Click the **View buttons** ![IR List View buttons.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_7b4232c08d59113964bffb3d69ea0e3c73bdf6dcaab1404ed3f1cbfaeb26c474/IR%20List%20View%20buttons.png?cb=e0e38f3cdd58c69d73e89e0ad0488c5a) to change between a List or Columns format for how the selected folder's contents are displayed in the window. (Note that the same File List window layout and controls are also used for the [**Preset Browser**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/presets.md#preset-browser) and [**Clone File selection**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/proxytm-clones.md).) ![IR File List.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a3338875da25f66e3c587157f96941b346c46b5c48bc30a59bba04721a196264/IR%20File%20List.png?cb=9412e151ec0d85d7bcd9a4d65f4cbdc7) Selecting an IR file 3. When an IR is selected in the list, there are a few options available at the bottom of the list window: ![IR File List - IR Selected.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f443a46789a78b158453339d33a725217db18047b8bab5715e201b2746cfa23e/IR%20File%20List%20-%20IR%20Selected.png?cb=fecbf4a84325ffae75c7b75daf15da10) An IR is selected in the file list. Options are available at the bottom of the window * ![Cab IRs button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_62a09b862037759984367b1f2d88e5c65bb879e1f962e90471cdc0a88e83f4a5/Cab%20IRs%20button.png?cb=35d71aff8982ba2bff61b9cd96fc285e) The current folder path is displayed at the bottom left. Click on the **Cab IRs** button to quickly return to the root of this main folder. * ![Show in Finder button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8b3f15eefff540ff03ecc0c9a046132c3cd41450ba81ba5d0076698b8a8306c1/Show%20in%20Finder.png?cb=d631e70fa0fce85cee86dbe565268a27) Click the **Show in Finder** button (macOS) or **Open in File Explorer**button (Windows®) to open the parent folder for the selected IR file in the Finder/File Explorer app window. * ![IR Select Snapshot Control switch](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ecac29b5bfeb401c6c385266741ff3384cae17fa49408eeb9137136d688c14a4/IR%20Select%20Snapshot%20Control.png?cb=d9e4f8ebbf5f5cd9834195dea180a3d7) Click to toggle the Snapshot Control switch to enable or disable selecting IRs per snapshot for the Cab block tab. When enabled (set to its correct position), the currently loaded IR file is recalled per snapshot, allowing you to configure up to 8 different IRs for the Cab block tab in the preset. Also, see the [**Snapshots**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/working-with-snapshots.md) page. 4. As with a Cab model, once an IR is added to the block, click its left or right tabbed slot in the Edit Panel to access its parameters. See the following list of **Cab IR Parameters**. * Right-click on any parameter slider/knob/switch in the Edit Panel to access its Action menu commands. * Click the Focus View button ![Cab Focus View Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5f3dea16faf2defc0b42fb95f8decaf983d9024d42908b8e83dfc5ef9612c821/CabFocusButton.png?cb=0490cda97504352c6b1cba235d3f0556) in the Edit Panel when an IR is selected to open its Focus View panel for additional options---see the preceding [**Cab Focus View**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/cab-blocks-and-cab-irs.md#cab-focus-view) section. 5. **To remove an IR:** Click the **Clear** button at the right of the IR File Selector to return to the "\" IR state, as shown below. Click the IR File selector again if you wish to select a different IR, or choose the Guitar Cab or Bass Cab category in the Model Browser and load a Cab model in the Cab slot. ![Clear IR Button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_645a7b7848e25a857a858686296c1818a2cb6072d7dda639344d016b2a0794ce/Clear%20IR%20Button.png?cb=1208067498803e9135acfd95ca355368) Clearing an IR file ## Cab Model and Cab IR Parameters Cab models and Cab IRs each offer their own set of parameters in the Edit Panel when selected, as shown in the following tables. ### Cab Model Parameters | **Cab Parameter** | **Description** | |-------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Bypass** | Click ![CabBypassButton.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c5a81c51518dad6924d86f2ed9493b6be9a169695bda752f5905f556e4ab08b6/CabBypassButton.png?cb=77314012e5bb199248d105db52a8fd4f) at the top right of the Edit Panel to turn the block on and off, independent of any footswitch assignment. Note that this bypasses both Cab models/IRs in the block. | | **Mic** | Selects the mic pointed at the cabinet. (Guitar and Bass cabs have different sets of mics available. Mic selection can have as big an impact on your tone as tweaking the Amp's tonestack or even applying an EQ block, so experimentation is key here. | | **Position** | Sets the lateral location of the mic in relation to the speaker cone, from the center of the speaker to the edge. The "Cab Edge" value may appear in a different location depending on the selected cab. | | **Distance** | Sets the distance of the mic from the speaker. Choose from 1.00" to 12.00" in 1/4" increments. | | **Angle** | Sets the angle of the mic relative to the front of the speaker cabinet. 0 degrees is pointing directly at the speaker; 45 degrees is pointing off-axis. | | **Low Cut** | Applies a low cut (high pass) filter, letting you remove all audio below a certain frequency. May be useful in removing undesirable low end rumble. | | **High Cut** | Applies a high cut (low pass) filter, letting you remove all audio above a certain frequency. May be useful in removing high end harshness. | | **Level** | Sets the overall level of the Cab. Use to adjust level against the other side of the Cab block. | | **Pan** | Controls the panning of the Cab between the left and right channels. For stereo setups, the Cab block can sound much wider if the two sides are panned opposite of one another ("Left 100" and "Right 100"). **Note:** It is best to keep this set to Center when using a single Cab or when mono output is desired. | | **Delay** | Delays the signal slightly to purposely impart a bit of phase incoherence or, at higher values, increase the Cab block's apparent stereo width (or, at extreme values, a bit of doubling effect). A little goes a long way here. When set to "Auto" (all the way left, before 0.0 ms), it approximates the delay through the air when changing the mic Distance parameter. For most use cases, however, we recommend leaving Delay set to "0.0 ms." | ### Cab IR Parameters | **Cab IR Parameter** | **Description** | |----------------------|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Low Cut** | Applies a low cut (high pass) filter, letting you remove all audio below a certain frequency. May be useful in removing undesirable low end rumble. | | **High Cut** | Applies a high cut (low pass) filter, letting you remove all audio above a certain frequency. May be useful in removing high end harshness. | | **Polarity** | Inverts the polarity of the signal. Using two Cab IRs from different 3rd party vendors or trying to blend a Cab with a Cab IR can sometimes result in a thin or anemic sound. Try setting Polarity to "Inverted" to see if it helps. | | **Delay** | Delays the signal slightly to time-align with the other side of the Cab block (helping to avoid phase issues). It can also be used to purposely impart a bit of phase incoherence or at higher values, increase the Cab block's apparent stereo width. A little goes a long way here. | | **Mix** | Controls the blend between the incoming "dry" signal and the Cab IR-processed "wet" signal. At 0%, no IR is heard; at 100%, no dry signal is heard. Normally, this should be left at 100%. | | **Level** | Sets the overall level of the Cab IR. This can be handy for balancing the level with the other Cab or Cab IR in the Cab block. | | **Pan** | Controls the panning of the IR between the left and right channels. For stereo setups, the Cab block can sound much wider if the two sides are panned opposite of one another ("Left 100" and "Right 100"). | --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Edit Panel The Edit Panel on the lower portion of the plugin window includes the **Model Browser** at the left, which provides all controls for perusing and loading Amp, Cab, and Effect models to your preset, and the **Parameter** **Editor** at the right, which provides access to all the currently selected model's parameters and quick automation/controller options. **Note:** When the Automation/Controller button ![Automation button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_3f6f6b19447e239fadb7e4934383abb05d23628240ad594d1667d9a2d269b307/Automation%20button.png?cb=33d42a65724d94d7c52ae5322fb18561) at the top of the plugin window is enabled, the Edit Panel is replaced by the [**Automation/Controller Panel**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/automation-controller-panel.md). ![ModelBrowser_Annotated.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ff43d667e2790750b0e1107c6fa3d5ef728ece57c3843daea507b4a8e3592bb7/ModelBrowser_Annotated.png?cb=81b731cfd8bd26f834ce1065f57aa532) The Edit Panel ## The Model Browser ### When Using the Helix Stadium Native Intro Version... The set of available categories and models in the **Intro** version is more limited than in the complete version. Therefore, several categories in the left column of the Model Browser (Preamps, Pitch/Synth, and Wah/Filter) remain dimmed since they include no available models. Within each selectable category, clicking **Get more models...** takes you to the Line 6 Online Store, where you can optionally purchase the upgrade to the complete version of Helix Stadium Native to expand the number of available models, as shown below. ![Free Version Unsupported Blocks.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b4828f9dd51c06119d7722ca01d1388a6818d9e4eb194d26fc069b7ea89df6c9/Free%20Version%20Unsupported%20Blocks.png?cb=c64f710e92fb74d38c74ce3f208d7bc3) A preset opened in the Intro plugin version with unsupported models As shown in the example above, the Distortion and Reverb blocks appear with "lock" icons, indicating they use models not included in the Intro version. You can click on one of these blocks and use the Model Browser to select an included model, if desired. 1. **Search:** Enter the type of Amp, Cab, or Effect in the Search Field ![Search Field](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_3dd937890bfdc0651659356986be0fa8f5ca624f8bf1f77609210e34a89a52bd/Search%20Field.png?cb=ad3b11e79fa73516f61ee2664b0e3e51) that you want to locate.\* All filtered results appear in the center model list column, grouped by category. ^**\***^**Note:**The search will include model and category names, model "Based On" brand names and descriptions, and names of any of your added Favorites. It will not include the names of Clone and IR files that you've imported into the plugin's corresponding folders. 2. **Subcategory and View Selectors:** Click on a subcategory to jump to the model list for the desired model subcategory. For example, the Amp list offers subcategories for Guitar, Bass, Legacy, and Clones ![Subcategory buttons - Amp category selected](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_74f74b8002f22d3908abcfea054f852e05c450b72ad5395cdd38f296e492c058/Subcategory%20buttons%20-%20Amp%20Model.png?cb=594eb9eea2613c39510f8eb65dc2e0ec) . Most Effect lists offer Mono, Stereo, and Legacy subcategories ![Subcategory buttons - Delay category selected](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_dd91ee7c92edb6578de2c1469c301fb2599699320507289c76acdd4f06d502b9/Subcategory%20buttons%20-%20Effect%20Model.png?cb=ffb0ec12fbbf9894108376f9f83a742d) . See the following **Gallery/List View Selector** description. **Note:** For the Amp category only, a three-dot menu button appears to the right of the Amp subcategory icons. Clicking on it displays the **Add Cab Block** switch, which, when enabled (the default), automatically adds a matched Cab block when adding an Amp Model, as shown below. Also see [**Amp and Preamp Blocks**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/amp-and-preamp-blocks.md). ![Add Cab Block switch.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ae9944379bbb7ced0dcd667fdf2a08990eb4ba8b88d2d11c119c9788ab04c327/Add%20Cab%20Block%20switch.png?cb=d599af21762a06842d4a752a94f65fbe) The Add Cab Block switch 3. **Model Categories:** Scroll through the left column's list of model categories and select one to view its models in the Model List column to the right. **Tip:** The **Favorites** category allows you to add your custom-configured models to its list. Once added, you can select a Favorite just like any other model, but all your preferred parameter settings, bypass state, and controller assignments are already configured. See the [**Favorites**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/favorites.md) page. 4. **Model List Column:** The list of models for the selected category is displayed in this column, divided into subcategories. Scroll through the list and click on it to load it into the currently selected block on the signal path above. * **Gallery/List View Selector:** Click the View selector at the top of the Model List column to display a Gallery View with detailed images of the modeled devices or a List View. ![ModeBrowser Gallery.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a2bffb2a7f02dcd614b1a2f90fe060394d9f2cec874973731bffafa2faf10db4/ModeBrowser%20Gallery.png?cb=d465c826ac573b6f6afe800005270308) Model Browser - Gallery View ![ModeBrowser List.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e085bdfa26a59095a7ff3715a99f1fe36c39e6bb9eb33db847381cd44cd195cd/ModeBrowser%20List.png?cb=779a63b05e12a2ea190e855eb4a0f66b) Model Browser - List View **Tip:** Plugin window sizing options... * Click and drag the drag bar ![The plugin window Drag Bar](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_89a42c9f4a1834643f5241231fb1551c6804a46435205cbcedb6d9211529af68/Drag%20Bar.png?cb=0949f4ffad5100c153ac0c0d8daa1844) at the bottom right corner of the plugin window to resize it, which can be helpful to show more Model Browser items and parameters. * Drag the horizontal line dividing the Signal Flow and Edit panels to adjust their heights as desired. * Drag the vertical lines dividing the Edit panel's Model Browser and Parameter Editor panes to adjust their widths as desired. * Click directly on the Model Category/Name at the top of the Edit Panel to toggle the parameter slider or knob pane to expand it to use the entire width of the window, as shown below. This mode provides access to more parameter controls. Click again to toggle back to the original width. ![EditPanel_Expanded.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_338dea669804f4d701a33e8dee9b0289420b59562f62bd3903f1b9dd2f373bc7/EditPanel_Expanded.png?cb=8d617e2a7f9c694a0aca23e651c18af1) The Edit Panel \> Parameter pane - expanded view mode ## The Parameter Editor 5. ![Focus View Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1239d8700692330ec42322412b0afc09296279da78c802ab2bece3022ce87f07/Focus%20Button.png?cb=bf1b66772dae47d03fa3b5b9090c2b5c) **View Focus Button:** Click the Focus button to display the Focus View within the top panel of the plugin window. The Focus View is a simplified graphical editor that replaces the Signal Flow panel. When open, click the button again to exit the Focus View. Refer to the [**Focus View**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/the-focus-view.md) page for details. 6. ![The Cosmos Echo Inspector header image](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1a2f4f0c1c448ef5dd072dab21b598e8ad081d44b6681a4ad85ca1a98c797683/Cosmos%20Echo%20Inspector%20header.png?cb=c06f4f1dae7f106b1bff3921d834445d) **Current Category, Model Name, and Subcategory:** The information about the currently selected model is displayed on the Edit Panel header. The model category symbol, model name, and its available model subcategory type symbols are shown from left to right: ![Mono Icon](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_358055d122aab8564650b6f80bd2e820308688aba198da472e7787f8f1f66134/MonoIcon.png?cb=4c061992d1db4f6e5f885799004397dd) Mono, ![Stereo Icon](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_52eb7727e274ba851e599259612bbf62a4a88ec4d5b216acf9fc5963a919e9ee/StereoIcon.png?cb=33b09015032587c4921af991ef895c3d) Stereo, or ![LegacyIcon.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1e91b44b356e0e2c355871b84f193b4bdeb38bb7d0620f069dcd4c0b7d8cc2a3/LegacyIcon.png?cb=07af164555b2dcb0a37962c8fe050cdf) Legacy. **Tip:**For effect models that are available in both mono and stereo versions, you can click the mono/stereo button to the right of the model name in the Inspector, as shown below, to quickly change between its mono and stereo versions: ![Effect mono to stereo.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9d2cb0338e41c83ad4ad41553ded8be7ac1518bab6d9a7714b25059d285aecfd/Effect%20mono%20to%20stereo.png?cb=df0a6c3189a807f5cdf2a518ed948032) Changing a mono effect to stereo The stereo version of the model is then loaded with all your applicable parameter values and Automation/MIDI/Snapshot Controller assignments retained. Note that stereo versions can sometimes include parameters not available in the mono version, such as Pan, Width, Spread, etc. (Note that Legacy, mono-only, and stereo-only type models do not offer this option.) 7. **Model Bypass:** Click ![Bypass Button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_2001143c0785a8bcfea4817be857b9803b7349dc28b1331a787aba0b01c0cfbc/Bypass%20Button.png?cb=9d82912e00b18f6f8fb1c0241f663be8) to toggle the selected model as bypassed (the button and all parameters are dimmed) or enabled (button is lit). 8. **Model Parameters:** The selected model's parameters are displayed as shown below. You can change the parameter display to use either sliders or knobs, as shown below. ![Edit Panel Sliders.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_60181f1ad83e0fa86e720596ce3435146110dfdf8cf0c0338a486b9d2a7ba971/Edit%20Panel%20Sliders.png?cb=c28e376a1028ef1fbfc2944c65c29277) Parameter display - Slider view ![Edit Panel Knobs.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5e57b518b78432157ad7bb94a9bfdb9c6b9f60782362038f918fb1dc69bdc900/Edit%20Panel%20Knobs.png?cb=6e3167bbd771e45ecc06e99be5a8b64f) Parameter display - Knobs view ### Mouse \& Key Modifier Shortcuts ⌨️ 🖱️Use the following handy actions to speed up your tasks in the Edit Tab. **Note:**Helix Stadium Native does not support keyboard shortcuts other than the modifier key items listed below. This allows your DAW host keyboard shortcuts to continue functioning (such as pressing the spacebar for DAW Play/Stop) even when the plugin window has focus. **On Any Type of Edit Panel - Parameter Control:** | **Action** | **Description** | |------------------------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Shift+Mouse Wheel** **or Shift+Trackpad drag** | When the mouse cursor is directly over a parameter slider, knob, or its numerical value, turning the mouse wheel/dragging on the trackpad adjusts its value. When the mouse cursor is directly over the vertical scrollbar at the right of the Edit Panel, turning the mouse wheel/dragging on the trackpad scrolls the panel contents vertically. (When the mouse wheel or trackpad are used ***without*** holding Shift, this scrolls the panel vertically, regardless the mouse pointer position within the Edit Panel.) | | **Right-click** | Show the control's pop-up menu. | | **Option+Click (macOS)** **Control+Click (Windows** ^**®**^**)** | Reset the parameter to its initial default value. | | **Shift+Click** | Enable/disable the parameter for Snapshot Control. | **On Any Edit Panel Slider Control (Slider View):** | **Action** | **Description** | |-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Double-Click the Parameter Name** | Displays the Parameter Panel, which includes a parameter description and adjustable controls. ![Amp Parameter Panel.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_41b4fd108627fe45b8de2afbbfe0898750ecbde83a98818b70de3e81da447dc6/Amp%20Parameter%20Panel.png?cb=684082f9d621d0aa2c59198e3ba563b5) The Parameter Panel for an Amp's Hype parameter | | **Command+Click and Drag a Slider (macOS)** **Control+Click and Drag a Slider (Windows)** | Adjust the parameter in fine value increments. **Note:**Also works for clicking on the up/down arrow buttons of a numerical parameter value control. | **On Any Edit Panel Knob Control (Knob View):** | **Action** | **Description** | |---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Double-Click Anywhere on Parameter** | Displays the Parameter Panel, which includes a parameter description and adjustable controls. ![Knob_ParameterPanel.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_63e6cb80288a52d2fd4ff00fb4fb23f42049f15c40dcae34fc6d3b2b0be50c64/Knob_ParameterPanel.png?cb=42309140553308c72c046c0a8068095e) The Parameter Panel for an Amp's Hype parameter | | **Command+Click and Drag a Knob (macOS)** **Control+Click and Drag a Knob (Windows)** | Adjust the parameter in fine value increments. **Note:**Also works for clicking on the up/down arrow buttons of a numerical parameter value control. | ### Creating Automation, MIDI, and Snapshot Control Assignments These assignments can be created using the right-click menu of any Edit Panel parameter control. Indicators are displayed in the slider and knob views for parameters that include assignments. Click on these indicator icons to edit the assignment's properties. Assigned parameters also display their numerical values in white text. **Note:** Also see the [**Automation/Controller Assign Panel**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/automation-controller-panel.md) page for additional details. #### Creating an Automation Assignment: Right-click on a slider, knob, switch, or segmented-type parameter control and select **Automation** from the pop-up menu. Depending on the type of parameter, a list of Knob 1-16 (for continuous parameters, such as Mix, Volume, Low Cut, etc. as shown below), Switch 1-16 (for on/off type parameters, such as Bypass, Bright, etc.), or Step 1-16 (for multi-selection, segmented type parameters, such as Compressor Ratio, Filter Type, etc.) ![Automation Assign-Edit Panel.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c3953b8dfedf69ae333c456e13db3bf3db9054bfcffc636f461d618c11ee830c/Automation%20Assign-Edit%20Panel.png?cb=b91213a7b39c4d4e709c407a8ae8713d) Creating an Automation Assignment in the Edit Panel * Once assigned, an "envelope" icon appears on a parameter slider or knob to indicate that the parameter has an automation assignment, as shown in red below. Click on the icon to edit or clear the assignment as needed. ![Automation Indicators.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ce142845cce2a3d207022219f6323826abef803008676599668bb17f62e283b5/Automation%20Indicators.png?cb=adea5a05b665bdaa17ae9b8510eb0ea6) Automation Assignment indicators #### Creating a MIDI CC Assignment: **Tip:** The following is a method for manually mapping a MIDI CC to an individual parameter. Alternatively, you can also use MIDI Learn. Please see the [**MIDI Control**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/midi-control.md) page for MIDI Learn instructions and additional MIDI details. Right-click on a slider, knob, switch, or segmented-type parameter control and select **MIDI** from the pop-up menu. Then, in the MIDI Assign pop-up, use the CC slider to select the desired MIDI CC for your assignment, as shown below. ![MIDI Assign EditPanel.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b1ce9fdab391c4898130e6fe952a6f5a32162d31150d3a9a6159a8906bd0bd91/MIDI%20Assign%20EditPanel.png?cb=77232f00591038745f8ab5f91b61384c) Creating a MIDI CC assignment for a Wah's Position parameter * A "MIDI" icon is displayed on the parameter slider or knob to indicate that it includes a MIDI assignment. Click on the MIDI icon to edit or clear the assignment as needed. Note that for continuous parameters, minimum and maximum value adjustments can be made using their controls that appear on the slider or knob, as indicated by the red arrows in the image below. ![MIDI Indicators.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e9daa401b839da8d76b6e4595e8d70357aebf540fe25e8fca4684a3f72f69467/MIDI%20Indicators.png?cb=27fad28443f0eaae12ecab7bb07f009e) MIDI Assignment indicators #### Creating a Snapshot Control Assignment: Right-click on a slider, knob, switch, or segmented-type parameter control and toggle the **Snapshot Control**switch in the pop-up menu. Setting the switch to the right enables Snapshot Control, and setting it to the left disables it. When enabled, you can set a different value for each of the eight Snapshots. By default, all parameters are set with Snapshot Control disabled, with the exception of the block's Bypass switch, which is enabled by default. **Tip:** Alternatively, to quickly enable or disable Snapshot Control, hold the **Shift** key and click on the desired parameter. Also, see the [**Working With Snapshots**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/working-with-snapshots.md) page. ![Snapshot Assign EditPanel.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e01c07db692aab2fbd9aec4d80dea50f7abec5a5dab4af372a2fa421530b19b0/Snapshot%20Assign%20EditPanel.png?cb=c3b76dd956a81f9a67c60e862ee77ae4) Enabling Snapshot Control on an Amp's Drive parameter A "camera" icon is displayed on the parameter slider or knob to indicate that the parameter is enabled for Snapshot Control, as shown below. ![Snapshot Control Indicator.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e884ffc564cbcb2123ab51433b474190475ef70ba516c8816c20d658c90fd1ab/Snapshot%20Control%20Indicator.png?cb=b3d670c37aa5f3bfa19f43f2a713bc48) Snapshot Control Assignment indicators --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Effect Blocks Helix Stadium Native's effect blocks offer hundreds of effects of all types, most of which are available in both **Mono** and **Stereo** versions. Also included are selected effects from the classic Line 6 DL4™, DM4™, MM4™, and FM4™ stompboxes, as well as M13^®^, M9^®^, and M5^®^ processors---these are offered within the Amp and Effect models' **Legacy** subcategory. **Tip!** For the complete, current lists of all Amps, Cabs, and Effects included in Helix Stadium family products, along with the original gear they are based on, please see the [***Helix Stadium Model List***](https://line6.com/helix-stadium-models/) on the Line 6 website. Note that the **Helix Stadium Native Intro** version includes a subset of the Amp, Cab, and Effect models of the complete version. Please see the [**Helix Stadium Native License Versions**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/welcome-to-helix-stadium-native.md) section. **Note:** Helix Stadium Native does not support the use of **Looper** models, which are available on Helix Stadium hardware. However, if a hardware preset loaded in Helix Stadium Native includes a Looper model, it will appear in the signal flow as disabled, as shown below. ![Disabled Looper.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_004869450fa13dbb1a5827fb6bf82ffe9d4c6bdb02f618203bbdbf8216cae292/Disabled%20Looper.png?cb=e9e3a7c211dd398159265debd7ae3ad4) Disabled Looper Any Looper block will be retained in the preset for hardware compatibility (unless you manually clear it). All other Helix Stadium hardware effect models are supported in Helix Stadium Native. ## ![Button_Distortion.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_74d52a3d575b8df050f0c2e3a24dad93dc9fe30f28bffd3ff8b69ee20791b55c/Button_Distortion.png?cb=2b15a26a65abd2d4017704d7b4ecec33) Distortion Boosts, Overdrives, Distortions, Fuzzes, and other forms of dirt. Helix Stadium Native also supports the use of Helix Stadium Distortion Proxy Clones. You can also add Distortion-type clone files to Helix Stadium Native---please see [**Proxy™ Clones**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/proxytm-clones.md) for details. ## ![Delay model Inspector button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_7d3cfa67bcfc604eee85907c26af7cf4197487d3583677d47b103fa529e9a4cc/Button_Delay.png?cb=c49c09e28f6f3143aaf4884a9b9ed2e4) Delay Echo and Delay units of all flavors: Slapback, Doubler, Tape Machine, Platter, Analog, Digital, Reverse, and more. Delay repeats (the Time parameter) can optionally be synced to host tempo, per preset, or per snapshot tempo. See the following **Common Effect Parameters** section. ## ![Reverb model Inspector button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_82de8bbd3f3d4cf6194132cbbb9d1ef85d686138283a5b8e6af58f03b7957e02/Button_Reverb.png?cb=2186e118bd6ad64959aed190a6a432ea) Reverb Ambiences of all types are offered: Room, Plate, Hall, Chamber, Spring, Shimmer, Nonlinear, and more. On some Reverb models, the Decay parameter can optionally be synced to host tempo, per preset, or per snapshot tempo. ## ![Modulation model Inspector button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_4bd9f43f7e375d5a34fc5145d38f02202ac85b83c8ee3e200ecb91ed8d090e3a/Button_Modulation.png?cb=a9b68e8acf9f0a8e14b7bbc0a70de813) Modulation Add some swirl and dimension with this large assortment of Modulation effects: Tremolo, Vibrato, Phase Shift, Flanger, Chorus, Rotary, and more. On most modulation models, the Rate/Speed parameter can optionally be synced to host tempo, per preset, or per snapshot tempo. See the following **Common Effect Parameters** section. ## ![Dynamics model Inspector button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e1e56d658db060853681de59e0e5029494568b5646fb0c7a9b7498438775c728/Button_Dynamics.png?cb=1678c61853b0a8153bb875609f54d027) Dynamics Level up with Dynamics tools for all stages of your signal flow: Compressors, Gates, AutoSwell, Feedbacker, and more. ### Using the Sidechain Parameter Many Helix Stadium Native Dynamics (and some Filter) models include a **Sidechain** **On/Off** parameter, which allows you to configure your DAW project to route the output of another audio, instrument, aux, bus track, or audio interface input as the "source" that triggers the model's gain reduction.^\*^ For example, you can add Helix Stadium Native on a Bass audio or instrument track, add a Dynamics \> Deluxe Comp to its signal flow, then route the output of the Kick Drum track (or a bus that the Kick Drum track is sent to) as the Sidechain source so that the Bass volume is "ducked" whenever the Kick Drum's level peaks to a specific threshold to allow the two tracks to mix together more evenly. Sidechain routing needs to be configured in your DAW host first. In some DAWs, a Sidechain menu in the plugin window header lets you select another audio track (as in Cubase or Logic Pro, shown below). ![Cubase Sidechain Select menu](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_946d6f629976e2d037d3701f47191928ff5a6d7e7b660ddd4633e4f4a5d22976/Cubase_Sidechain%20Select.png?cb=448face2bfb69b1a4f61ba6079563381) **Cubase:** Click the "Activate/Deactivate Side-chaining" button to enable it, then click the "Set Up Side-chain Routing" menu button at its right and select the project's Sidechain source track or bus. ![Logic Pro Sidechain Select.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1da629e6eb56c2cd817363e55f11d66de152106f911d426c169205a2b0179eca/Logic%20Pro%20Sidechain%20Select.png?cb=fc49d55ff41748a4093c484ea2dc1f10) **Logic Pro:** Click the "Side Chain" menu and select the project's source Audio, Instrument, Bus track, or Input . In some DAWs, Sidechaining entails routing the desired source track to a Send, Bus, or Aux destination. Then, the Send/Bus/Aux can be selected in the "Sidechain" or "Key" input menu in the header of the Helix Stadium Native plugin window, as with Pro Tools, shown below. ![Pro Tools Key Input menu](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_88bf3d16b795231051e0e9d512d243a4680fb8a18b0486d3be39f03827221122/Pro%20Tools%20Sidechain%20Select.png?cb=949a1b47e16451b129fba9bc44ecaa8d) **Pro Tools:** Click the "Key Input" selector and select the Sidechain source bus. Once the above routing is complete, set the Helix Stadium Native - Dynamics effect's Sidechain parameter to "On" to be triggered from the selected sidechain input, as shown below. ![Compressor Sidechain On.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e33afbd8595ada96609668bc3cdb7ee49738e76ccecbb9ddc9598149f69aa361/Compressor%20Sidechain%20On.png?cb=abe17c5653821483723316a800c4710d) Compressor model - Enabling the Sidechain parameter ### The Dynamics Focus View When the [**Focus View**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/the-focus-view.md) is enabled for any Dynamics model (other than the Autoswell and Feedbacker), a Gain Reduction meter is included in the view. As you adjust the Focus View or individual parameter settings, you'll see the yellow "GR" meter measure the amount of input-level reduction in real time, as shown below. ![Compressor Focus View GR.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a8de83105fb4796280f6b0889e6e2231258eed3868d2671c10651aa7c5e1f536/Compressor%20Focus%20View%20GR.png?cb=f70758c23d41cbb396179ed0182f4218) Focus View - a compressor model with its Gain Reduction meter ## ![EQ model Inspector button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1a4fcdcff0753fb5e32d9edfc1ef45072d3c4040db19726e8b1bc1cacc7f1330/Button_EQ.png?cb=7346694f3aea543809a855b74d9c0f6d) EQ Expertly sculpt and shape your tone with this assortment of Equalization tools. ## ![Pitch and Synth model Inspector button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1768c3bf4ab7e9dd26f4f8615cbb0a665cc8e319017b276420f1fc28657a957a/Button_PitchSynth.png?cb=df1cc77b7ed1cbcda82408527e082762) Pitch and Synth The Pitch-based and Synthesis models in this category offer a wide range of extreme effects, including pedal-controlled and polyphonic pitch shifting, intelligent harmonization, 12-string emulation, ring modulation, oscillating synth filters, and more. ## ![Wah and Filter model Inspector button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b53680e73712ec43520c651fced4cebc2f389d5d7023e14e967336022184a3a3/Button_WahFilter.png?cb=f3c651446d5a21cd75300cd495d25bb7) Wah and Filter A collection of classic wahs and a stash of familiar to bizarre filter-based effects are found here. **Note:** The Mutant Filter, Mystery Filter, and Autofilter models each include a **Sidechain On/Off** parameter, allowing the model to be triggered by the input of another audio, aux, or bus track in your DAW project. Please see the preceding [**Using the Sidechain Parameter**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/effect-blocks.md#sidechain) description for details. ## ![Volume and Pan model Inspector button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b41104f04b7e9a3680dba89195f89270bc40a46ff0acce1e3602d2fd79e60ea5/Button_VolumePan.png?cb=ced9b262a28753875ca3bde23fd312dd) Volume and Pan This category's tools are excellent for building tones with even greater functionality: Volume for a volume adjustment at any point in the signal flow, Gain for a clean boost, and Stereo Width, Imaging, and Pan for modifying your stereo image. ## Common Effect Parameters Given the sheer number of effect models available, it would take numerous pages to document all their parameters! However, many parameters are common among effects, so we've included a table here for your reference. Most Effect parameters are available for Automation, Snapshot, and MIDI Control assignment---please see the [**Automation/Controller Panel**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/automation-controller-panel.md) section. For details on editing Effect models, please refer to the [**Creating and Editing Tones**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/building-and-editing-tones.md) section. **Tip:** In the Edit Panel, double-click on the text name of any slider or knob to open its Parameter Description panel for helpful details, as shown below. ![Parameter description panel.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b57bc25b13f45d7f13f68b30039c890ece42ddcfce37ef141717a637b5432820/Parameter%20description%20panel.png?cb=4ba6ac96491425e8221a40a8ae8bdbec) The Parameter Description panel **Note:** Distortion clones offer their own set of parameters---please see [**Proxy Clones \> Clone Parameters**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/proxytm-clones.md). | **Common Parameter** | **Description** | |---------------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Drive / Gain** | Adjusts the amount of overdrive, distortion, or fuzz. | | **Bass** | Adjusts the low frequency level of the effect. | | **Mid** | Adjusts the midrange frequency level of the effect. | | **Treble** | Adjusts the high frequency level of the effect. | | **Speed / Rate** | Common in Modulation and some Delay and Reverb effects, adjusts the rate of amplitude or pitch modulation, with higher settings providing faster rates. **Click the little clock icon available on the Modulation Speed or Rate control to toggle the modulation as Synced to tempo (a note division value can be selected) or Not Synced (a Hz value can be selected), as shown below.** Also see [**Tempo Controls**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/the-plugin-window.md). Not all Rate parameters offer Sync, as they may be non-linear and highly interactive. ![Mod Tempo Sync button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c55eb4e5d3aca3d11164507b99fdf2f3675d083ced5dd8820f1c76838ca3a724/Mod%20Tempo%20Sync%20button.png?cb=ceda4f876229608683e261cfa3682561) Moulation model - Tempo Sync enabled | | **Time** | Found in Delays, adjusts the delay/repeat time, with higher settings providing longer delays. **Click the little clock icon available on the Time parameter's control to toggle the delay time as Synced to tempo (a note division value can be selected) or Not Synced (a millisecond value can be selected), as shown below.** Also see [**Tempo Controls**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/the-plugin-window.md). ![Delay Tempo Sync button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b9ad1cabd742da60bdbaf4bf26be6243cf8c10c9c223e61ad433bbab0e2b12ce/Delay%20Tempo%20Sync%20button.png?cb=659d4981161e7bc39624d3aa3c7865b2) Delay model - Tempo Sync enabled | | **Depth** | Adjusts the intensity of the modulation. Higher settings result in more extreme pitch bending, wobble, or throb, depending on the effect. | | **Feedback** | Adjusts the amount of delayed signal fed back into the effect. Higher settings can provide more dramatic textures. | | **Decay** | Sets the length of time the reverb effect sustains. | | **Predelay** | Determines the time before the reverb effect is heard. Can sometimes result in more definition between the dry and effected signals. | | **Scale** | On stereo delays, the Scale offers proportional control over the left \& right channel repeats. The left channel repeats follow the Time value, and the right channel repeats at some percentage of the left time. For example, if a delay's Time is set to 1 second and its Scale is set to 75%, the left channel will repeat at 1 second, and the right channel at 750 milliseconds (ms). | | **Spread** | Spread differs slightly among stereo delay effects. For most delays, it adjusts how widely the repeats bounce left and right. For example, with the Ping Pong Delay, 0 is centered (mono), and 10 is full left to right panning for the repeats. For modulated stereo delays, Spread affects the LFOs' (low frequency oscillators) stereo modulation behavior. At 0, the LFOs are in sync. At 10, the two LFOs are 180 degrees out of sync, so that when one side is modulating up, the other side is modulating down. | | **Headroom** | Some mod and delay pedals' internal signal paths exhibit a bit of grit, especially when placed after a high-gain amp block. Negative values increase the perceived amount of grit; positive values clean things up a bit. At 0dB, the model behaves like the original pedal. | | **Low Cut** | Filters a portion of the block's bass and/or treble frequencies, which can help remove rumble and/or high-end harshness. For delays, these typically affect the repeats only. | | **High Cut** | Filters a portion of the block's bass and/or treble frequencies, which can help remove rumble and/or high-end harshness. For delays, these typically affect the repeats only. | | **Mix** | Blends the effected "wet" signal vs. the "dry" signal passed through the block. When set to 0%, the path bypasses the effect completely. When set to 100%, the entire path is fed through the effect, and no dry signal is heard. | | **Level** | Adjusts the overall output level of the effects block. Be careful not to boost this parameter on multiple blocks, as digital clipping may occur. You should typically leave this at 0.0dB for most blocks. Where the original pedal's level or volume knob behavior doesn't really apply to dB values, 0.0-10 may be used. | | **Trails** | *Trails Off:* Any delay repeats or reverb decays are instantly muted when the block is bypassed. *Trails On:* Any delay repeats or reverb decays continue to fade out naturally when the block is bypassed or a different snapshot is selected. | | **Mono/Stereo Switching** | For effect blocks, click the mono/stereo button to the right of the model name in the Inspector ![Echo Mono to Stereo button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_3c8bd582a8acc1a383cce5b0441f955415acaf7000d61f77e98802d97cc2dfc5/Echo%20Mono%20to%20Stereo%20button.png?cb=16a3ff16ed783e21e31535faf655f3c4) to quickly change between its mono and stereo versions. Note that Legacy, mono-only, and stereo-only type models do not offer this option. | | **Sidechain** | Offered for all Dynamics models (except Feedbacker) and several Filter models, the *Sidechain* setting lets you configure the compressor/limiter/gate's Threshold to be triggered by the signal received at the block's input (Off, the default), or by one of several other input signal levels, such as an Instrument, Mic, Return, USB, or S/PDIF, as configured in your DAW host. This provides some different options for dynamic control, like ducking, where one sound---for example, a gate or compressor placed after a distortion or amp block might have difficulty reacting to the incoming signal, but setting Sidechain to that path's input can improve the effect's response. See [**Using the Sidechain Parameter**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/effect-blocks.md#sidechain). | **Tip:** We've meticulously recreated the effects of the classic and vintage pedals they're based on, typically including their quirks and all. Therefore, you might also find it helpful to visit manufacturer and enthusiast websites about the original pedals and read the specifics of their knobs and switches. --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Favorites ## About Favorites Scrolling through a seemingly never-ending list of Amps, Cabs, Clones, and Effects can be a slog, but it doesn't have to be. Helix Stadium Native lets you curate your favorite models from any category and organize them however you want. What's more, Favorites can remember all your meticulously dialed-in settings, as well as the block's bypass state, MIDI controller assignments, and the Snapshot Control switch states for parameters. Favorites appear at the very top of the Model List, so your favorite Distortion, Amp, Cab, Clone, Modulation, Delay, Reverb, etc., are found simply by clicking on this category. **Tip:** Favorites saved and exported from Helix Stadium devices (.hsf files) and from the original Helix Native plugin and Helix/HX family devices (.fav files) can be used in Helix Stadium Native. See the [++**Preset Compatibility**++](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/preset-compatibility.md) section for additional details. **Tip:** In addition to adding blocks as Favorites, you can also set any model's parameters to your preferred values and save them as the user default values for each time you load the model. See [**Creating User Default Settings**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/building-and-editing-tones.md#8a49afab-601e-4148-8663-04420530740e). **Note:** Input, Output, Split, and Merge-type blocks cannot be added as Favorites. ## Adding a Favorite 1. **Dial in any Amp, Cab, Clone, or Effect block exactly how you like it.** * If you want the block to automatically load bypassed, **bypass the block before adding it as a Favorite.** * Also, feel free to create MIDI Control assignments for any of its parameters, and enable the Snapshot Control for any parameters as desired. Favorites can store and recall these assignments. See the [**Automation/Controller Panel**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/automation-controller-panel.md)and[**Snapshots**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/working-with-snapshots.md)sections for details. 2. **Right-click on the block to open its Action Panel (shown below) and tap Add to Favorites...** * Alternatively, you can use the Focus View's Add to Favorites sidebar button to launch the Add Favorites dialog. ![Adding a Favorite.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b18062ad7c74dbbe93e2d0eaadfeb0b17ad644231a02f65dc602c7d8926e10c2/Adding%20a%20Favorite.png?cb=9eaa0ef06903e1afdca1b76c1de8ca63) Adding a Delay as a Favorite 3. **Configure the sidebar options in the Add to Favorites dialog as desired.** By default, the Favorite uses the block type as its name, or you can click in the Name field at the top and enter a custom name, as shown above. Once folders are added, you can move your saved Favorites between folders to organize them as desired using the Manage Favorites window. See the **Importing and Managing Favorites** section below. * **New Folder:** Optionally, if you want to add the Favorite to a new folder, click ![New Folder Sidebar button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_597040e2bb5fd58ed878570cf120050cc6740a2a39d37af47e91d2a6ee35cfeb/New%20Folder%20Sidebar%20button.png?cb=928d3b1993c645b33af6e1f6e328cadb) to create and name the folder. * **Toggle the sidebar options "On" to choose which you want stored with the Favorite (if any):** * **MIDI Assigns:** Retains all the block's MIDI Control parameter assignments. * **Snapshot Assigns:** Remembers which parameters are enabled for Snapshot Control.\* \***Note** : Favorites don't store and recall the actual parameter *values* for all 8 snapshots, only that the parameters are snapshot-enabled. Parameter Automation assignments are not stored or recalled with Favorites. 3. **Save your Favorite using one of the options:** * ![Overwrite button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_4e67a77d54e60b48c1f4db3fc55018efd9e2e337990d9d1543c10223af554103/Overwrite%20button.png?cb=25462c6f207f3d965d06728378c4070c) Select an existing Favorite in the dialog, then click to overwrite it with the current Favorite and its settings. * ![Save New button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_cfc42c1add8d0783bc2f0d1d33ae444c3736a791b11d331f43092240c5e00303/Save%20New%20button.png?cb=68dd0587206b4dc8ac77923eaea92ca0) Saves as a new Favorite file to the list. Note that if you already have subfolders created, click to select a folder first, then click Save New to save your Favorite in it. * ![Cancel button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9f6c287c1e68f531cf3c57ec355325b7438f2ddd1ea7b8949e8f9e6a1b007b81/Cancel%20button.png?cb=38454fb07c3d4c00f7b24a5055a92460) Click to exit the dialog without saving the Favorite. ## Using Favorites Once you've added Favorites, they appear in the Model List - Favorites category and can be added, moved, copied, and edited like any Amp, Cab, or Effect. Note that when you select a Favorite and add it to the preset, its name appears at the top of the Edit Panel with a white star to indicate it as a Favorite, as shown below. ![Delay Favorite Selected.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_7ccd92fb86a9818cb611a1e184e6153f54112ceb3f08e8d8d1258dc0def1ea8d/Delay%20Favorite%20Selected.png?cb=9166a70ee2aa63e7e2352d961b5b4ccf) A Delay Favorite is added to the preset Favorites' parameters, assignments, and snapshots can all continue to be edited via the Edit and Automation/Control Panels. To save changes to the Favorite file, right-click the Favorite block, select Add to Favorites, and use the **Overwrite** function to update the Favorite file in your library with your new settings. ## Importing and Managing Favorites When the Model List \> Favorites category is selected, click the ![the Manage Favorites button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_6ca9b4fd0efc4505df7a50aa2862b4d8e2774dc01fc3423d1cae85929ccf2b5d/Manage%20button.png?cb=7aa909a8a30067859a6ea5b3837b60d6) button to open the Manage Favorites dialog, as shown below. Here, you can import Favorites and manage your Favorites library. ![Manage Favorites Window.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e2d778b3ceb4c257fe6bcaea5dff230bcabc5416f4cd0706ecf492deade297ed/Manage%20Favorites%20Window.png?cb=4f4122295d0debe481c353d17269501e) The Manage Favorites dialog * To reorder Favorites within the dialog, simply click and drag them up or down in the list as desired. * Click the **Close button** ![The Close Dialog button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e51caeac22d2160872a00e0fc43bd8c0a9c3672a830e015da595131ca61f94b7/Close%20Dialog%20button.png?cb=3e5d0f146224b84579c1ef8e6b7ff82c) at the top right of the dialog to exit. * ![Search Favorites](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c4d99372ab6e522b409e78c54a6694d01701c2634d0a5a04a9fc1ae7e4b08283/Search%20Favorites.png?cb=0934f6613245337103f620e73673e620) Enter a model name, brand, effect type, etc., to filter the list of Favorites shown in the dialog. * ![Back Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_0c6af548f9f47ca86175ce0732950efcd94f2a8fe87790ed0ab844ef1e0b74be/Back%20Button.png?cb=d4408c79d85c310ae013eca2667bc1ad) Click to go back to the parent folder of the current folder you are viewing in the dialog. * ![Folder Select menu](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ac7408d283be07012e7d23896f06aaf35cf60d4e8b9571d07c15a79e262ed1eb/Folder%20Select%20menu.png?cb=17e41db4d286a3bd5333bfdfc4caf3ab) Expand the menu to select the folder's contents that you want ot view in the dialog. (Note that you can add subfolders using the **New Folder** button.) * ![List-Columns View button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_44a3cc6e30c160ed1dd02e6b99231215afcc34105e669e9cad71ef06391677dd/List-Columns%20View%20button.png?cb=558fa5446815f801ecd1564942ffdee9) Click the left button to view the dialog contents in a List view; click the right button to view the contents in a column view, with folders in the left column and their contents in the right column. * ![Add Folder button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_0d72675d062fdf079b17b2c15caf9520508f4b579383454660a8adbd8c3c2f0c/Add%20Folder%20button.png?cb=eaa895ea547e2c911ac3751074c44449) Create and name a custom subfolder in the plugin's Favorites library to categorize your added Favorites. Within the Manage dialog, click and drag your Favorites to move them between your subfolders. * ![Delete Favorites button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_6f692bfe930af91b41a4320cc17b96d8681abc9a0b1d2d82377de72ea4fad9c1/Delete%20Favorites%20button.png?cb=282f001bf3e1f575edf6bc8188811be4) Select one or more Favorites in the dialog, then click to permanently delete them from the library. * ![Rename Favorites button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8a24d6d41c8cda58b6f817f0d84a0af772edef4698eb1f05cd6591f7d9aaf391/Rename%20Favorites%20button.png?cb=766ea29243f8e717290f3d19acb9ed81) Select a Favorite in the dialog, then click to rename it. * ![Export Favorites button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_243edb0d216df0485e22e5646f2da51f78a8a8712487fdfa88ec37ece27a5bfc/Export%20Favorites%20button.png?cb=8feddcc7602a3ff5778af0723b3a0a19) Select one or more Favorites in the dialog and click to export them to a folder on your computer. Your exported plugin Favorites can then be imported into Helix Stadium devices using the free Helix Stadium application.\* See the [***Helix Stadium Owner's Manual***](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/helix-stadium-edit-application) for details. * ![Import Favorites button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c9c5f29fc4df8659b3cee8458b8b5233700f60873b801c0a8a11e0e07f9a7eb6/Import%20Favorites%20button.png?cb=832ce127846136d69b624a2972b465fd) Helix Stadium Native supports importing Favorites files created with Helix Stadium hardware (.hls files) and those exported from original Helix/HX hardware and the Helix Native plugin (.fav files).\* Note that you'll need to use the Export features in the Helix Stadium app, HX Edit app, and Helix Native plugin to first export the desired Favorite files to your computer. Then, click the ![Import Favorites button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c9c5f29fc4df8659b3cee8458b8b5233700f60873b801c0a8a11e0e07f9a7eb6/Import%20Favorites%20button.png?cb=832ce127846136d69b624a2972b465fd) button, browse to your exported Favorite files, and load them into the Helix Stadium Native plugin's library.\* ^**\***^**Note:**For Favorites (.hsf files) created in the Helix Stadium Native plugin, their saved MIDI and Snapshot Control type assignments are retained on export and import into the Helix Stadium Native plugin. For all Favorites created on Helix Stadium hardware (.hsf files) and on original Helix/HX devices or Helix Native (.fav files), all assignments are discarded and not available when the Favorite is imported into the Helix Stadium Native plugin. **For the Helix Stadium Native Intro version:** You can only import Favorites that were created using the Full Helix Stadium Native version, a Stadium device, or the original Helix Native plugin if the Favorite references Amp/Cab/Effect models included in the Intro version. --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Getting Started Ready to jump in? The following steps will help you add an instance of the Helix Stadium Native plugin to a host DAW application's audio track to get you up and running.^\*^You will find the Helix Stadium Native plugin within your host DAW application's plugin insert menus, along with all other audio effects plugins. The initial steps in any host DAW application are as follows. 1. **Create a Session or Project in your DAW host application.** 2. **Create at least one audio track.\*** Depending on your host DAW, it may offer options for "mono" or "stereo" audio tracks, or just a single audio track type that can record or import either mono or stereo audio. Either way, the Helix Stadium Native plugin can be added to the effects insert of your track. 3. **Record some unprocessed "dry" guitar into the audio track, or import an existing audio file into the track for playback.** 4. **Insert an instance of Helix Stadium Native on this track by selecting it from the host DAW track's effects insert menu. To follow, we've provided examples on several popular host DAW applications.** ^**\***^**Note:** The following steps show how to use Helix Stadium Native as an "insert effect" on an **Audio** type track in a DAW host application. Helix Stadium Native can also similarly be inserted on **Aux** , **Bus** , **Effect** , and **Instrument** -type tracks in most DAW host applications that offer them. Some hosts, such as Pro Tools^®^ and Logic Pro, require plugins like Helix Stadium Native to be inserted on an Instrument-type track if you want to configure the plugin to receive [**MIDI**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/midi-control.md) input for control of its parameters and/or [**Sidechain**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/effect-blocks.md#sidechain) input. ## Steinberg Cubase The Cubase^®^ application is offered for both macOS \& Windows^®^. Cubase supports the VST^®^3 plugin format on both. These steps are essentially the same for the Steinberg Nuendo^®^ application. 1. **Select your audio track within the Cubase project. Within the track's Inspector at the left of the track (or within the Cubase Mixer window's channel strip for this track), click on one of the slots' menus in the Inserts section.** 2. **In the Effects menu, choose Line 6 \> Other \> Helix Stadium Native. Note that Cubase offers both mono and stereo track types.**You can simply choose the Helix Stadium Native plugin, and it will conform to your Cubase track type. Helix Stadium Native plugin appears in the Effects Insert window. ![Cubase_PluginInsert.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_3a76298e254c2170f70380c11a4bc01d09b5969bbb2a246abf22ef4cc3cc9208/Cubase_PluginInsert.png?cb=e9cf2af170a32dbe39d9bff36b9b8b22) Cubase - Inserting Helix Stadium Plugin (VST3) 3. **Turn your monitoring system to a low level, then choose a factory preset from the plugin's Preset List and hit Play to hear the results.** ## Apple Logic Pro Logic Pro is an extremely popular host DAW for macOS. It supports the Apple Audio Units (AU and AUv2) plugin format. 1. **Select your audio track within the Logic Pro project. Within the track's Inspector channel strip (or within the Logic Pro Mixer window's channel strip for this track), click on the Audio FX track effects insert menu.** 2. **In the FX window, choose the Audio Units (AU) plugin format type and select Line 6 \> Helix Stadium Plugin.** ![Logic_InsertAU.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_4a72f3b34d6513c07f176e8eb0e3938b867a8622916d415862aab33ca1b362d0/Logic_InsertAU.png?cb=396d492f3ae5ed2b54a9078b0ca34f47) Logic Pro - Inserting Helix Stadium Plugin (Audio Units) 3. Note that Logic Pro offers both mono and stereo track types, which means you'll have different sub-options depending on your insert track's type: * **If inserting on a mono track:** Choose either **Mono** (the plugin output is summed to mono) or **Mono-\>Stereo**(the plugin's output is stereo). * **If inserting on a stereo track:** Select the **Stereo** option here, which provides stereo in/out processing. The **Dual Mono**option inserts two mono instances of the plugin (each accessed via the L and R buttons at the top of the plugin window). Each mono instance processes the stereo track's left and right channels independently, which can quickly consume a lot of CPU, so we don't recommend using it. 4. **Turn your monitoring system to a low level, then double-click a factory preset from the plugin's Presets tab and hit Play to hear the results.** ## Avid Pro Tools The Avid^®^ Pro Tools^®^ application is available for macOS \& Windows. It supports the Avid AAX plugin format. 1. **Select your audio track within your Pro Tools project. Within the track header at the left of the track (or within the Pro Tools Mixer window's channel strip for this track), click on one of the slot's menus in the Inserts section.** 2. **In the plugin menu, choose Helix Stadium Native.** Note that Pro Tools offers both mono and stereo track types. Therefore, you'll have different sub-options depending on your track's type, as shown below. ![ProToolsInsert.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_827450b9214325de1a35a91bd48bb5322b02b63bd32bc47f0826c37626f7f0b1/ProToolsInsert.png?cb=9ba0fa7005bd3af62ac28d80e34a9ef1) Pro Tools - Inserting Helix Stadium Plugin * **If inserting on a mono track** (as shown above): Choose either **mono** (the plugin's output is summed to mono) or **mono/stereo**(the plugin's output is stereo, assuming the track is routed to a stereo output). * **If inserting on a stereo track:** Only a **stereo** option is offered here, which provides stereo in/out processing. (Note that Pro Tools does offer a **dual mono**option for some plugins, but this is not supported by Helix Stadium Native. 3. **Turn your monitoring system to a low level, then double-click a factory preset from the plugin's Presets tab and hit Play to hear the results.** **Tip:**Most host DAWs also allow you to insert plugins on Send, Bus, or Aux track types. Host DAWs differ slightly in how they name and describe these track types. But their main purpose is to let you insert a single instance of your plugin and route the Output or Send from any number of audio tracks to it to process them with the same effect. This is the preferred way to process multiple tracks, since a single instance of your plugin uses less CPU than inserting an instance on each audio track! Please refer to your host DAW's documentation for details. Once you insert an instance of Helix Stadium Native and load a preset, the preset's contents are displayed within the **Signal Flow Window** , with model menus, parameters, and automation control options available within the plugin's **Automation \& Controller** tab view. This allows you to load \& customize any of the provided factory presets, create your own presets, configure automation controller assignments, manage presets \& Impulse Responses, as well as back up all your tones to your computer. Even better, all your saved creations can be transferred between the Helix Stadium Native plugin and the free Helix Stadium application, allowing them to be used on a Helix Stadium device as well. See [**Presets**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/presets.md) for details. ## Live Input Monitoring Another benefit of audio effects plugins is the ability to monitor your input signal through the plugin inserted on the track. This allows you to dial in the desired tone in Helix Stadium Native and hear your guitar (or other track input) processed in real time. Once you hit record, only your "dry" D.I. guitar signal is actually recorded into the track, which provides the huge benefit of completely changing the plugin settings right up until you do a final mix-down of the DAW project! **Note:** Activating the track's input monitoring is also necessary for using the Helix Stadium Native [**Tuner**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/tuner.md). Live Input Monitoring is a feature of your host DAW application and is typically implemented as follows. This example uses Steinberg Cubase---Each host DAW is slightly different, so be sure to consult your DAW application's documentation for details. 1. **Configure your audio track's input options to receive input from whatever physical input your guitar (or desired instrument) is plugged into.** 2. **Insert Helix Stadium Native on the track, as described in the previous section.** 3. **Set the track's Record Arm button to "on" so that the track receives audio input.** See image below. 4. **Activate the track's "Input Monitoring" feature.**This is typically a button found near the Record Arm button. This feature routes the live track input through the DAW track and all plugins inserted on it. (In some host DAWs, it is unnecessary to also activate the Record Arm just to hear the input signal.) ![Cubase Input Monitoring Button enabled](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_369d7083e8cac743516a5dbf2fb20b651d7e041e218c1299f79e173784cb11e3/Cubase%20Input%20Monitoring%20Button.png?cb=d9749aedea26774c22c6da9624a03d92) Cubase - Input Monitoring enabled **Note:** When using your track's "Input Monitoring" feature, you'll want to be sure to disable any "Direct Monitoring" signal on your audio interface (many interfaces offer an optional function that routes your input signal directly to its outputs, without going through the DAW software). This way, you'll hear ***only***the input signal fed through the Helix Stadium Native plugin. See your audio interface's documentation for details. 5. **Now, when you strum your guitar, you should hear your signal through the track with the Helix Stadium Native processing applied. Hit the Record button and try a pass at recording your performance.**Upon playback, experiment with further tweaks to the plugin settings! ### About Latency Since this input signal is being fed round-trip, into your audio interface, through the DAW software, and back out your audio interface's outputs, it is subject to some amount of "latency." Latency is the time between plucking a note on your guitar and hearing it through your monitoring system. Latency is primarily a function of your audio interface, host DAW software, and your computer's recording capabilities. You can generally achieve the lowest latency by reducing the buffer size in your DAW's audio interface driver settings. Please see your DAW's documentation for details. ## Optimizing the Input Level The level of the input signal entering the Helix Stadium Native plugin can affect the overall gain and saturation of your tones; therefore, it is essential to "gain stage" accordingly. Helix Stadium Native amp \& effect models are designed to receive "Instrument" level input signals, much like plugging an electric guitar directly into the same type of amp or effects pedal we modeled. The plugin automatically conforms to the track's input format and provides a matching mono or stereo Input Meter, as shown below. The following are several tips for achieving the optimal signal level. ![Input Meter mono](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d8d1c0a782ffa5c1d5f62ec3c6d84cb645d5f3bf5b4d91b1c5c0423c24e09308/InputMeter.png?cb=b3316860a7ead7bb710a99f23432d2aa) Input Meter - mono input ![Input Meter stereo](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_af8a7285336036ad39a4d64361489a8d7d1a8ccadb12ea54a53632c320521bd0/InputMeterStereo.png?cb=5ac33b4cd6f66bf62c649debd331fa48) Input Meter - stereo input * When recording "dry" electric guitar (or bass), use an audio interface with a "Hi-Z" or "Instrument" input. * To monitor your input signal level (or the playback level of any clips within your track), reference the **Input Level meter**within the plugin. * The **Optimal Input Range Indicator** (the lighter-shaded area on the left meter scale, indicating the -36 dB to -12 dB range)provides a guideline for setting your input level. * The multi-color**Input Meter** also provides guidance. Basically, strive to keep your input level at the top of the green range, and avoid the lower dark green (signal is too low) and the red (signal is too high). Please also see the **Input and Output Levels and Meters** section. * If your audio interface offers input-level adjustment, it is typically best to set it there for optimal level. If needed, adjust the plugin's**Input Level knob**to fine-tune the level. The plugin's Input and Output Level settings are saved per preset. * If your guitar has active or especially high-output pickups, enable your audio interface or preamp's input "pad," if available. * Clipping, as indicated when the red **Clip Indicator** at the top of the meter lights up, should ***always be avoided***on both the plugin's input and output. --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Hardware Compatibility DSP Limits The Helix Stadium Native plugin is, by default, set to a **Helix Stadium/Helix Stadium XL Hardware Compatibility Mode** , which incorporates Digital Signal Processing (DSP) management similar to that of the system used on the Helix Stadium hardware devices. That is, each Path 1 and Path 2 in a plugin instance has a maximum processing limit. This limit ensures presets are compatible across the plugin and Stadium hardware devices. Optionally, Hardware Compatibility can be set to "**Off** " in the [**Plugin Settings**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/the-plugin-window.md#plugin-settings), allowing you to exceed the Stadium hardware minimum and maximum block-type limits in your Helix Stadium Native presets.^\*^ Note that disabling Hardware Compatibility allows you to create a preset in a single plugin instance that can place significant CPU demands on your computer system, and the preset will not be compatible on Helix Stadium devices. ^**\***^**Note:** The **Helix Stadium Native Intro** version does not include the Hardware Compatibility "Off" option. Its presets are always created to be compatible with Helix Stadium/Helix Stadium XL devices. ## Dynamic DSP Since some models require many times more DSP horsepower than others, fewer heavy DSP models can be included in a preset when Helx Stadium Native's Hardware Compatibility mode is enabled. For most other modeling devices on the market, you are restricted to one amp, one reverb, one delay, etc. With Helix Stadium, we feel it's important to let you keep adding whatever you want, even if you may eventually run out of DSP for the current preset. Stadium Native's four paths (Path 1A, 1B, 2A, and 2B) each offer 12 block locations, for a total 48 block capacity. That said, there are some rules governing the number of certain types of blocks you can add to a preset: | **Block Type** | **Maximum Allowable Block Instances** | |---------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Amp, Preamp, or Clone** | Any combination, up to four per preset (two per path maximum). | | **Cab** | Up to eight Cab blocks per preset (four per path maximum). Note that each Cab block can include up to two Cab models, two Cab IRs, or one of each. | | **Polyphonic ("Poly") and high DSP type Effects** | Up to two Poly Effect blocks per preset (one per path maximum). These effect models include the Feedbacker (Dynamics), Poly Sustain (Delay), Poly Detune (Modulation), Poly Pitch, Wham, Capo, and 12 String (Pitch/Synth). | **To see which models can be added to the current Path, open the Model List.**When Hardware Compatibility mode is enabled, grayed-out items cannot be accommodated and are not selectable. ## Tips to Optimize DSP * Each of Stadium Native's two primary Paths (Path 1 and Path 2) utilizes its own independent DSP. If all of your blocks are on Path 1 (or on its split/parallel Paths 1A and 1B), you're only using half of your preset's available horsepower! To use two or more amps and more than a handful of effects, expect to use both Paths 1 and 2. An easy way to accomplish this is to set the Path 1 Output block to "Path 2A" to route Path 1 into Path 2 as a contiguous, serial Path. In fact, we've created two template presets---**Parallel Switch** and **Parallel Blend** ---with two Agoura amps in parallel spanning Paths 1 and 2 to optimize DSP, with plenty of room for pre (Path 1) and post (Path 2) effects. See the following [**Signal Path Routing**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/hardware-compatibility-dsp-limits.md) page for details. * Some block types use much more DSP than others, with Amp, Clone, Reverb, and Poly effect blocks being the most DSP-hungry. Cab, EQ, Dynamics, Volume/Pan, and Send/Return blocks use relatively little. * Some models may use more DSP than others in the same category. This is especially true with Agoura Amp models. * Instead of a parallel Path with two sets of separate Amp and Cab blocks, try adding a single Amp block followed by a Cab block that uses two different Cab models/Cab IRs to provide some substantial tone variations. * The stereo version of an Effect model will use approximately twice as much DSP as a mono version of the same model. Typically, you should use mono versions of effects that are placed before an Amp block, since the stereo signal is collapsed to mono when entering an Amp block. And, of course, if you're only using a mono output from Stadium, there is no need to use stereo models at all in your tones. * Some model categories have "Simple" blocks, which use less DSP than others. * Instead of toggling between two of the same Amp or Effect blocks (with different settings), use controllers or snapshots to instantly adjust parameters within a single block. --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Input, Output, Split, and Merge Blocks Although they may not seem as exciting as amps or effects, Input, Output, Split, and Merge blocks are integral to the sound and performance of your presets. Use these blocks to create parallel and extended serial routings, gain-stage your levels, and more. Refer to [**Signal Path Routing Options**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/signal-path-routing-options.md) for additional details. ## Input Blocks By default, all presets, even "empty" New Presets, include at least one Input block (at the left of Path 1A), but each preset can have up to four Input blocks (one each for Path 1A, 1B, 2A, and 2B). Click on any path's Input block to select its options. * **To Select the Input Source:** Choose **Host** to receive audio from the current track, or choose **None** for no audio input. * When **Host** is selected for a path's Input Block, its Trim and built-in Noise Gate parameters can be edited in the Edit Panel, as listed in the following table. | **Host - Input Block Parameter** | **Description** | |----------------------------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Trim** | Sets the path's input level. **Important!** Setting Trim to a value higher than 0.0 dB (or lower) effectively boosts (or attenuates) your signal into the first block, which may result in a less-than-accurate response. | | **Gate** | Turns the Input block's built-in noise gate on and off. By default, the Gate is **Off**. | | **Threshold** | Sets the noise gate's Threshold. The gate "opens" when the signal's level exceeds the Threshold, allowing audio to pass through. The gate "closes" when the signal's level drops below the Threshold. Adjust Threshold so that only softer, unwanted signals (such as noise or hum) are gated. | | **Decay** | Controls the length of time it takes for the open noise gate to close once the signal drops below the Threshold. Increase Decay if you want the gate to gradually lower the signal instead of chopping it off abruptly. | **Tip:** Within an empty New Preset, only the main Path 1A and Path 2A are shown. You can also create Paths 1B and 2B as parallel paths, each with its own Input block. See [**Signal Path Routing Options**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/signal-path-routing-options.md). ## Output Blocks By default, all presets, even "empty" New Presets, include at least one Output block (at the right end of Path 1A), but each preset can have up to four Output blocks (one each for Path 1A, 1B, 2A, and 2B). Click on any path's Output block to select its options. * **To Select the Output Destination:** Choose **Host** to receive audio from the current track, or choose a path destination (**Path 2A** , **Path 2B** , or **Path 2A+B** ) to route the current path's signal into the input of another path for an extended "serial" configuration. Optionally, choose **None** for no path output. * Once an output destination (other than **None**) is selected, the block's parameters are available in the Edit Panel, as listed below. | **Output Block Parameter** | **Description** | |----------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Pan** | Controls the balance between the left and right channels of the path's output. When set to Left 100, the signal is heard only from the left channel; when set to Right 100, it is heard only from the right. | | **Level** | Sets the path's overall output level. | ## Split and Merge Blocks **Split** and **Merge** blocks can be added to create parallel or dual paths, which can be very useful for isolating specific effects, creating alternate switchable routings, and more. See [**Signal Path Routing Options**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/signal-path-routing-options.md). All paths are stereo. When a **Split** block is added, it splits the signal into Path A and Path B in parallel. When a **Merge** block is added, it mixes Path B back into Path A. **Note:** The overall output level of the signal increases slightly with each additional parallel path. Adjust the Merge block's **Level** parameter for the desired output level. ### ![Block_SplitY.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_477fb8dfcdf2dad6811316c8a82218fa0c0f17906790342b2e40bd0bd7edae7e/Block_SplitY.png?cb=f6eab808f48efe9b6cd8ac12506d283e) Adding a Split Block 1. **Tap an empty area on Path 1A or Path 2A to select an empty block location.** 2. **Right-click on the empty location and choose Split.** (Optionally, the Split option can also be selected from the Model Browser's **None** category.) A **Split \> Y**block is added, and a Path B is created with its own Output block. * **Alternatively, drag an existing Amp, Cab, or Effect block down slightly, and it'll be added to a new parallel path B connecting to Path A with Split \> Y and Merge blocks.** 3. **To change the type of Split: Click on the Split block on the signal path and select one of the Split types (Y, A/B, Crossover, and Dynamic, as described below.** ![Split Block Types.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9ca35c7a8e0cdf56902f072b7e30b5420fb1a048cacb5db150e113bb1c58b736/Split%20Block%20Types.png?cb=131b36fadca0a04b4b80dd918acedebc) Split block types and their parameters are available in the Edit Panel * Adding a Split to the left of an existing Merge block on path A automatically joins the existing parallel path. * Multiple Split and Merge \> Mixer blocks can be added to Path A for several parallel paths, one after the other. For example, say you want the signal to split into parallel Amp blocks, merge into a dual Cab block, and later, split into parallel Delay and Reverb blocks, and then merge *again* before the Output. There's a lot of flexibility here. * To create a Path B Input block, **drag the Split down to Path B** ---or---**clear the Split.** **Tip:** Split block parameters can also be automated or controlled via MIDI CC---see [**Automation/Controller Panel**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/input-output-split-and-merge-blocks.md). #### ![Block_SplitY.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_477fb8dfcdf2dad6811316c8a82218fa0c0f17906790342b2e40bd0bd7edae7e/Block_SplitY.png?cb=f6eab808f48efe9b6cd8ac12506d283e) Split \> Y Adding a Split block adds a **Split \> Y** by default. With a Split \> Y block, the stereo input signal is sent to stereo Paths A (upper) and B (lower) evenly, but the **Balance A** and **Balance B** parameters can be used to separate the incoming signal into separate left (to Path A) and right (to Path B) channels. | **Split Y Parameter** | **Description** | |-----------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Balance A** | Adjusts the stereo balance (pan) of the signal sent to Path A (upper) and Path B (lower). To split the signal into separate left and right channels, set Balance A to **Left 100** and Balance B to **Right 100**. | | **Balance B** | Adjusts the stereo balance (pan) of the signal sent to Path A (upper) and Path B (lower). To split the signal into separate left and right channels, set Balance A to **Left 100** and Balance B to **Right 100**. | #### ![Block_Split_AB.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_595b6ace72463d7aed3ef88917164dd2762d6439fd0fed2e3c073c4ae27829ab/Block_Split_AB.png?cb=9ac22233c048291ae38c1082975e2937) Split \> A/B **Split \> A/B** allows for tactile control over which path your signal is routed to---Path A (upper) or Path B (lower). | **Split A/B Parameter** | **Description** | |-------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Route To** | Determines the amount of the signal sent to Path A (upper) vs. Path B (lower). When set to "Even Split," the signal is split evenly between the two stereo paths. | #### ![Block_Split_Crossover.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f525fdeaa4d26ac76e6f9de9607c3f99b4189c4053e0db70c7bd5cbdc83de720/Block_Split_Crossover.png?cb=93817be2d4801ef6637c34b7f3845602) Split \> Crossover Split \> Crossover splits the incoming signal into high- and low-frequency bands, allowing you to route and process them independently. For example, this can be useful with electric bass, where distortion may be applied only to the high frequencies, allowing the non-distorted low frequencies to pass through. | **Split Crossover Parameter** | **Description** | |-------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Frequency** | Determines the crossover point at which your signal is split into high and low frequencies. Any signal above this frequency is sent to Path A (upper); any signal below this frequency is sent to Path B (lower). | | **Reverse** | When **On** , reverses the path assignments (any signal *above* the crossover frequency is sent to Path B, any signal *below* the crossover frequency is sent to Path A). | #### ![Block_Split_Dynamic.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_61b87cd471a102e5da8a5a310a3adef2f4957fcf4a1c023896bf60b934089f58/Block_Split_Dynamic.png?cb=70715706d03540dd67921e016e956880) Split \> Dynamic Split \> Dynamic lets you route your signal based on input level or even your playing dynamics. For example, if Path A has Delay and Reverb blocks and Path B has a Distortion, playing softly (or rolling your guitar's volume knob back) will apply more Delay and Reverb, whereas playing harder (or rolling your guitar's volume knob up) will lower the Delay and Reverb and add Distortion. | **Split Dynamic Parameter** | **Description** | |-----------------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Threshold** | Determines the signal level above which gets routed to Path B. Softer input (signal below the Threshold) is routed to Path A; louder input (signal above the Threshold) is routed to Path B. | | **Attack** | Determines how quickly the signal is routed to Path B once reaching the Threshold. | | **Decay** | Determines how quickly the signal returns to Path A once it falls below the Threshold. | | **Reverse** | When **On**, reverses the path assignments (any signal above the Threshold value is sent to Path B, any signal below the Threshold value is sent to Path A). | ### ![Block_Merge.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d8f28d749b3179db2d5479c1ad74d12b5a395961100d6e9a90c5aae8dd8dd521/Block_Merge.png?cb=313383d05a5f74c9efc442393319e9de) Adding a Merge Block The purpose of a Merge block is to rejoin and mix the Path B signal back with Path A. Path B can be either rejoined after a Split block or when it exists as a complete parallel path with its own Input block. 1. **Tap an empty area on Path 1A or Path 2A to select an empty block location.** 2. **Right-click on the empty location and choose Merge.** (Optionally, the Merge option can also be selected from the Model Browser's **None** category.) 3. A **Merge**block is added, and a Path B is created with its own Input block (provided a Split block hasn't already been added to the Merge's left). * Note that there is only one type of Merge block, and Path B's output is routed to and mixed with Path A by the Merge block. * **Alternatively, drag an existing Amp, Cab, or Effect block down slightly, and it'll be added to a new parallel path B connecting to Path A with Split \> Y and Merge blocks.** ![Merge Block Parameters.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f94ec692c5920a041ac67b7a4866c5f9a7c09a02599aa968cdb53a2c7bfdd931/Merge%20Block%20Parameters.png?cb=75a2efecde03f424b6d0bd791fe88d38) A Merge block is selected, showing its parameters in the Edit Panel * Adding a Merge to the right of an existing Split block on path A automatically joins the existing parallel path. * Multiple Split and Merge \> Mixer blocks can be added to Path A for several split-parallel paths, one after the other. For example, say you want the signal to split into parallel Amp blocks, merge into a dual Cab block, and later, split into parallel Delay and Reverb blocks, and then merge *again* before the Output. There's a lot of flexibility here. * To create a Path B Output block, **drag the Merge down to Path B** ---or---**clear the Merge block.** #### ![Block_Merge.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d8f28d749b3179db2d5479c1ad74d12b5a395961100d6e9a90c5aae8dd8dd521/Block_Merge.png?cb=313383d05a5f74c9efc442393319e9de) Merge Parameters | **Merge Block Parameter** | **Description** | |---------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **A Level** | Adjusts the output level of Path A (upper). | | **A Pan** | Adjusts the left/right stereo balance of Path A (upper). When set to **Left 100** , only the left signal is passed through; when set to **Right 100**, only the right signal is passed through. | | **B Level** | Adjusts the output level of Path B (lower). | | **B Pan** | Adjusts the left/right stereo balance of Path B (lower). When set to **Left 100** , only the left signal is passed through; when set to **Right 100**, only the right signal is passed through. | | **B Polarity** | Inverts the polarity of Path B. Typically, this should be kept on the default "Normal" setting. | | **Level** | Adjusts the overall output level of the Merge block. | --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Installation and Authorization The first step is to log in to your **Line 6 User Account** . If you haven't already, go ahead and create one now at [**line6.com/account**](https://line6.com/account). All the cool kids have one, and it's free! Then follow the steps below. ![L6CreateAcct.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e9d55f2d37fbb13cbd2c474f881d6bb6ed08ff48bb4b1419df1866c880bf391a/L6CreateAcct.png?cb=e21a6d64bd1e91452fd6f6cdd12a8afb) Creating a Line6.com account **Note:**An Internet connection is required for license authorization on the computer where Helix Stadium Native is installed. ## Installation 1. Once signed in, head directly to the [++**Line 6 Online Store**++](https://line6.com/software-apps/) and purchase your Helix Stadium Native license for the complete version. Once purchased, the license is automatically deposited in your Line 6 account. Alternatively, proceed to the next step to install Helix Stadium Native, where you can choose the free 15-day trial or limited Intro version on its first launch. 2. At [**line6.com/software**](https://line6.com/software), select the Helix Stadium Native installer for your macOS or Windows computer, and download it. **Important!** Before installing Helix Stadium Native plugin, device drivers, or firmware, it is highly advised first to read the product's ***Release Notes*** (typically available within the product's download description). It is also advised to check the [**Knowledge Base and FAQs**](https://line6.com/support/page/kb/) regarding the latest macOS or Windows operating system support, updating, or especially for rolling back to older versions, since special install instructions may apply. 3. Once the download completes, exit your host DAW and all other applications, run the installer and read and follow its steps to complete the installation. Optionally, you can choose to install only the format(s) you require for your particular host DAW application. By default, all available formats are selected (for macOS: AU, VST3, and AAX, for Windows: VST3 and AAX). ![Installer_Formats.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a9e130632025b31ffe547b1f2b2c2299aa99f8b5f739ff2f3f1071788b535048/Installer_Formats.png?cb=96298429b671d85dd3ded871b82f38b6) Selecting plugin formats during installation (macOS) ![Installer-FormatOptions_Windows.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_92ada009c1f0374f85d70377c054eae3f7a787cc2a686eefd61f518dc7b1e893/Installer-FormatOptions_Windows.png?cb=025b33971302e147a7027a3315d59a05) Selecting plugin formats during installation (Windows) 4. Launch your host DAW application and it will typically scan and find the Line 6 Helix Stadium Native plugin and list it within its audio plugin insert menus. Insert the Helix Stadium Native plugin on a track within your DAW project (see [**Getting Started**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/getting-started.md)). 5. **Log in: Once launched, the log in screen is displayed, prompting you to log in using your Line 6 User Account username or email address and password.**Once logged in, you are presented with different options, depending on whether you've purchased the Helix Stadium Native license yet, as covered below. **Note:**Be sure to Log In using the same Line 6 Account you used when making the Helix Stadium Native license purchase! ![Initial Sign In Screen.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_552d2887c351583c234541700863f94d4396ee92af5980ff96a335ba8432a9aa/Initial%20Sign%20In%20Screen.png?cb=f6bf95c196bc2287cb2feb8d313eb384) The Log In screen ### If You Have Already Purchased a Helix Stadium Native License Once the Log In succeeds, your computer is immediately authorized with the software license from your line6.com account, and the **Full Helix Stadium Native** is ready to use. You will no longer be prompted to log in on each use of the plugin. Being actively signed in is then only necessary to deauthorize your computer. See the following **Deauthorizing** section for additional details. ### If You Have Not Yet Purchased a Helix Stadium Native License Once logged in, a Welcome screen is presented with options for purchasing a **Full License** , starting a **15-day Trial** , or use the free **Intro** version. ![Welcome-Purchase Option Screen.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9377343746c72f32366989b9ccbef162a2da5061361860d018b4e4e4a31d5647/Welcome-Purchase%20Option%20Screen.png?cb=4e435dde3116f0641af2e5b8a7d377c0) #### **To Purchase the Helix Stadium Native Full License** * Click the ![Buy Now for the Full License](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a26396b2f50f7625e78d6982c79187546dae9ec6c7d11da2076dbc3fe44c3981/Buy%20Now%20button.png?cb=4554f17aae7ae61cb51688a7c649179c) button in the Welcome screen, which will take you to the [++**Line 6 Online Store**++](https://line6.com/software-apps/) where you can make the purchase for the Helix Stadium Native **Full License**. Note that you may be entitiled to a discount if you own Helix Stadium hardware, earlier Helix Native, Metallurgy, or other Line 6 software products---see the details on the purchase page. * Once you've made the purchase, there is no additional installation necessary. Simply insert an instance of Helix Stadium Native plugin in your DAW host, log in, and Helix Stadium Native is unlocked to the Full licensed version. #### **To Use Helix Stadium Native in Trial Mode** * Click the ![Start Trial button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_3f76f749abadad1652414ed863315a91086e7f312c2c20d9d7715d48fdd995f2/Start%20Trial%20button.png?cb=a6262225af91007010dc608d39454425) button in the Welcome screen to use the Helix Stadium Native plugin without restriction on this computer for 15 days (an active Internet connection is required for the Trial Mode). You may be prompted to log in for each session when using Helix Stadium Native in Trial mode. **Note:** Once the Trial version is started, its remaining trial time is displayed on the plugin's toolbar. **Click directly on this indicator text anytime to open the Trial Upgrade Options dialog.** ![15-DayTrial_Status.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_052e2a80fc3c191409d4c6e2836b9b1ad6f7223698080650b0b91cd915bf8950/15-DayTrial_Status.png?cb=399aa556fcf50e1467fb5198ce0605d3) Trail status message * **Once the 15-Day Trial Expires:** The toolbar's Trial status indicator shows an **Upgrade Available** message to open the Upgrade Options dialog (shown below), where you can choose ![Buy Now for the Full License](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a26396b2f50f7625e78d6982c79187546dae9ec6c7d11da2076dbc3fe44c3981/Buy%20Now%20button.png?cb=4554f17aae7ae61cb51688a7c649179c) to purchase the Full License version and unlock the existing plugin, or choose ![Continue With Intro button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_eee0aed665fc25e42f87185d1f9ff85990876c4fbbf8a85657ae992c7c72a0d0/Continue%20With%20Intro%20button.png?cb=3d59ed7de8a52fb3016a9198409aa2d2) to use the Intro version.\* ![PurchaseOptions Dialog_TrialEnded.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_0e96c162331c520298508c7be9dcee33a0e27930ea14f8c7cd87bba79b490060/PurchaseOptions%20Dialog_TrialEnded.png?cb=1fbb1796d0612c82f8e43afd0e7df4fb) The Upgrade Options dialog (Trial version expired) ^**\***^**Note:** If you use the **Buy Now** option and make the purchase of a full license while an instance of the Helix Stadium Native plugin is currently inserted in your DAW host, it may be necessary to click the Activate License button in the Upgrade Options dialog after the purchase. This will "refresh" the plugin instance to detect the full license in your account and unlock the Intro or Free version to the Full plugin version. ![Activate License button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a68c3fd4fa04d0b94b400d219d6bcefa7326f4fb5772688d4bf0540d22ae820c/Activate%20License%20button.png?cb=307ab2532c24b3577d38e3528dc28074) The Activate Licesne button #### **To Use the Intro Helix Stadium Native Version** * Click the ![Continue With Intro button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_eee0aed665fc25e42f87185d1f9ff85990876c4fbbf8a85657ae992c7c72a0d0/Continue%20With%20Intro%20button.png?cb=3d59ed7de8a52fb3016a9198409aa2d2) button in the Welcome screen to use the limited Intro Helix Stadium Native plugin version, which can be used free indefinitely. At any time, you can click the **Upgrade Available** message on the toolbar to open the options dialog and choose ![Buy Now for the Full License](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a26396b2f50f7625e78d6982c79187546dae9ec6c7d11da2076dbc3fe44c3981/Buy%20Now%20button.png?cb=4554f17aae7ae61cb51688a7c649179c) to purchase the Full License version and unlock the existing plugin (as shown in the preceding image). ## Software Update Notification Upon insert and launch of the Helix Stadium Native window, when activley logged in, the plugin will check the Line 6 online server for a newer version. If a newer version is available, an alert is displayed, as shown below. ![New Version Available Alert.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_92e301134bd81cb33e07c4b8abbeeb3748a07bc99e58b6b98ca8ffed8c8a9762/New%20Version%20Available%20Alert.png?cb=70f68ac7c63b6f2076be0531b1d5d4c4) Newer version available alert * Click ![OK Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a1e3e041b7b0a4582317d48c16ff9614e5fa7300245a961341dc839f2dbd33a4/OKButton.png?cb=3f394bf207d48e521177cd823610d7c6) to go to the [**Line 6 website - Software**](https://line6.com/software/) page, where you can download and install the new version. Be sure to read the Release Notes of the new version---note that updates for the Helix Stadium application and device firmware may also be necessary to maintain preset compatibility, if you're also using these products. It is recommended to always use the latest versions for the best performance and newest features! * Optionally, you can click ![Cancel button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_50e652498a5592ed62c324459ab7af0449330d31b0e74a7b8f7a2813ce9d8182/Cancel%20button.png?cb=f8146f120cc288349a9ff4e56bf5d864) and install the new version at another time. ## Deauthorizing - Moving to Another Computer Once you have authorized your computer, if you wish to run Helix Stadium Native on a different computer, it may be necessary first to deauthorize your current computer.\* ^**\***^Line 6 generously permits you to have your purchased or trial mode Helix Stadium Native license authorized on a maximum of 4 of your own computers concurrently. Beyond these 4 authorizations, in order to move the license to a different computer, it is necessary to deauthorize on at least one of these systems to free up an authorization to be used on another computer. For further assistance, please contact [**Line 6 Support**](https://line6.com/support/). 1. To deauthorize, click on the top toolbar's My Account menu to Log In to your Line 6 account (if not already), then choose **Deauthorize Computer** from the menu. Click **Yes** when prompted to deauthorize. ![DeauthComputer.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c2410dac6eec0ba7e57fd9b64659a9ae5e81f25a5952de2d3db14b0b902871bd/DeauthComputer.png?cb=5ab56385888cc99f3341647d17d887ad) Deauthorizing the computer 2. Once deatuhorized, you can authorize the computer again at any time by performing the **Log In**to your account from the Account menu. ## Removing Helix Stadium Native Should you ever desire to remove Helix Stadium Native from your computer, first quit your host DAW application, then follow the instructions below. ### **macOS** To uninstall each plugin format, move the following files to the Trash: **Note:** Deleting the following plugin files does not remove your Helix Stadium Native User Presets, IRs, or Clones. * **AU plugin:** /Library/Audio/Plug-Ins/Components/**Helix Stadium Native.component** * **VST3 plugin:** /Library/Audio/Plug-Ins/VST/Line 6/**Helix Stadium Native.vst3** * **AAX plugin:** /Library/Application Support/Avid/Audio/Plug-Ins/Line 6/**Helix Stadium Native.aaxplugin** (or, you can optionally drag the **Helix Stadium Native.aaxplugin** file into the **/Plug-Ins (Unused)**folder) #### Windows To uninstall all plugin formats: **Note:** Performing an uninstall does not remove your Helix Stadium Native User Presets, IRs, or Clones. 1. Click the Windows Start button and choose **Settings.** 2. In the Settings window, go to **Apps** in the left column, then select **Installed apps**. 3. Scroll down the list of Installed Apps to locate the **Line 6 Helix Stadium Native Uninstaller**and click its three-dot menu. 4. Choose **Uninstall** from the menu and follow the on-screen instructions to remove Helix Stadium Native. --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # MIDI Control Helix Stadium Native responds to traditional MIDI CC messages from an external MIDI controller device (or MIDI software) to provide remote control of its parameters and snapshots. To configure MIDI Control of parameters, the simplest method is to use the plugin's MIDI Learn function. MIDI control can also be configured manually within the plugin's Edit Panel and Automation/Control Panel. These configurations are covered here. **Tip:** If you happen to own a Helix Stadium device, it makes an excellent MIDI controller for your DAW! Check out the "Command Center" section within the [***Helix Stadium Owner's Manual***](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/v1.4/midi)for details on how to configure Helix Stadium to transmit a variety of MIDI control messages. ## MIDI Input Configuration To provide MIDI Control of the Helix Stadium Native plugin, you'll need to configure your DAW host application to receive MIDI Control input from your external MIDI controller hardware or software. These settings are typically found within the DAW application's Preferences. Additionally, it is often necessary to configure your DAW host track routing so that the external MIDI Controller data is fed directly to your current Helix Stadium Native plugin instance. In some DAW app's, such as Logic Pro, it is required that a plugin be inserted on a "Software Instrument" type track to allow it to receive MIDI control input. In some other DAW apps, the plugin can be inserted on any Audio, Aux, or Bus track, and a separate MIDI track must be added to receive the MIDI input, then route it to the audio track where the Helix Stadium Native plugin is inserted. Please see your application's documentation for details. ## MIDI Control for Snapshot Selection The Helix Stadium Native plugin includes one "reserved" MIDI CC: CC69. This CC cannot be used for MIDI Learn or manual MIDI Control assignments in the plugin since it is already dedicated to controlling [**Snapshot**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/working-with-snapshots.md) selection. It is not necessary to use MIDI Learn or manually create a MIDI Control assignment for Snapshot selection; simply configure your MIDI controller device to send MIDI CC69 with the desired value, as shown below. |--------------------------|------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Reserved** **MIDI CC** | **Values** | **Functions** | | **69** | 0-7 8 9 | Snapshot 1-8 select Next snapshot select Previous snapshot select | ## MIDI Control Assignments and Hardware Compatibility Other than the "reserved" MIDI CC69 for Snapshot Control as mentioned above, Helix Stadium Native does not reserve or limit the use of any MIDI Channels or CCs for MIDI Learn or manual MIDI Control assignments. However, Helix Stadium devices are configured by default to use MIDI Channel 2 to access their user-created "Bypass/Control" MIDI assignments of preset block parameters. (Helix Stadium devices are configured by default to use MIDI Channel 1 for their dedicated "Global" parameters, such as onboard footswitches, knobs, expression pedal, etc, display parameters, etc.). Therefore, when a Helix Stadium Native preset has been imported into a Helix Stadium device, you'll need to configure your MIDI Controller device to transmit its MIDI CCs on Channel 2 (or whatever the MIDI Channel is set in the Helix Stadium device's **Global Settings \> MIDI \> Bypass/Cntrl MIDI Channel** ) to trigger the MIDI CC parameter assignments in the preset. Please see the MIDI section of the [***Helix Stadium Owner's Manual***](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/midi) for additional details. When a Helix Stadium device preset has been opened in the Helix Stadium Native plugin, if it includes user-created "Bypass/Ctrl" MIDI assignments for its block parameters, they can be triggered on any MIDI Channel from your MIDI Controller. ## **MIDI Learn** Using the MIDI Learn button ![The toolbar MIDI Learn Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_49818f808b063d89b281855deb3b5a1be3d7df0823eff970f0968c11eb1d1b48/MIDI%20Learn%20Button%20Toolbar.png?cb=ce4e1a4ec41dfe2d05b88fe4fcdc0b49) on the top toolbar is the simplest method for configuring MIDI CC parameter control, as covered in the following sections. ### Using MIDI Learn via the Toolbar Button The toolbar's MIDI Learn button toggles the plugin's Learn mode enabled/disabled, and also serves as a MIDI input indicator. It lights up green whenever MIDI messages are detected entering the plugin instance, as shown below. This indicator is very helpful for confirming whether you've routed MIDI correctly and whether the plugin is receiving MIDI messages from your external controller. ![MIDI Learn Button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_6aa152bc744b56b398572431b6ee68c2834b5c6ecf56fc27db6289695f29413c/MIDI%20Learn%20Button.png?cb=95e96fb3ac42d6c0e83e08607ec0114c) MIDI Learn button states Disabled - Enabled - MIDI Input 1. **Configure your external MIDI controller (such as a pedal, knob controller, or software) to send your preferred MIDI CC#** (other than the "reserved" CC69, as mentioned above)**on any MIDI Channel**. 2. **Within the Signal Flow, select the Amp, Cab, Effect, or Split block for which you want to create the MIDI parameter assignment.** For this example, we'll click on a Wah block in the signal flow to assign its Position parameter. 3. **Click the MIDI Learn button on the plugin Toolbar to enable MIDI Learn.** Assignable blocks and parameters become outlined and shaded to indicate they can be selected to "learn" a MIDI assignment. * Click on the Wah's Position slider or knob within the Edit Panel to "arm" it. The armed parameter becomes highlighted in red, as shown below. Note there is also a status message at the bottom left of the plugin window telling you it is awaiting an incoming MIDI CC message. * To cancel MIDI Learn without creating an assignment, click the MIDI Learn button again. ![MIDI Learn Wah Position.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_34e9ec6d87c35a843372dca303a6e00a408c0891fd9f010ccc4bf59fa90714fd/MIDI%20Learn%20Wah%20Position.png?cb=85fcba7a19c61828ba9958f2bc29d9a0) MIDI Learn enabled - the Wah's Position parameter is armed **Tips:** * You'll see that all Amp, Cab, Effect, and Split blocks in the signal flow are also shaded when MIDI Learn is enabled. Clicking a block arms its Bypass switch for MIDI Learn. * It is also possible to select and arm multiple blocks or parameters within the current Edit Panel, and all will learn the incoming CC for simultaneous control. 4. **Once a parameter is armed, send the MIDI CC message from your MIDI controller. The Position parameter within the Edit Panel responds instantly: its value turns white, the learned MIDI CC appears (CC 11) on the Edit panel control, and an "X" button appears on hover to clear the assignment, as shown below.** ![MIDI Learn Wah - learnedCC.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d8419cb54aa38f39b37b9d762059333186b511fe3708ada6a8c2d1a41d41ecdb/MIDI%20Learn%20Wah%20-%20learnedCC.png?cb=4bce1576a2b5007c3dcd1706bbd44bd7) The Wah - Position indicates MIDI CC 11 has been learned * Click the toolbar MIDI Learn button to disable MIDI Learn. * Optionally, click and drag to adjust the Position parameter's Min and Max controls to customize the controller range, as shown below. ![Wah min max range adjust.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9f41a031ef4b2b1c5092422ff9259ccfac9bce4a89e943bef672cf14ab790df8/Wah%20min%20max%20range%20adjust.png?cb=b0ccbbf5c6728cecfc27ceec2ce92a0e) * Click on the "**X**" button on the control to clear, or click the MIDI icon on the parameter to edit the MIDI CC assignment. Repeat the above steps to create additional MIDI Control assignments as desired. **Remember that MIDI Control assignments are saved per preset, so be sure to save your preset!** ## Creating MIDI Control Assignments Manually As an alternative to using MIDI Learn, MIDI assignments can be created manually in the Edit Panel or a block's Action menu as described in the following steps. **Note:** MIDI Assignments can also be configured, edited, or cleared in the Automation/Controller Assign Panel, similarly to what is described in the steps below. For details, please see the [**Automation/Controller Assign Panel**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/automation-controller-panel.md)page. 1. **To create a MIDI assignment for the block's Bypass switch:** Right-click the block and select **Assign MIDI** from the Action menu, then choose the desired **CC** number, as shown below. (Also, see the following [**MIDI Assignments for Switch-Type Parameters**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/midi-control.md#b6fd8e1e-3ba8-433b-84fb-2e236f2a00b9) section.) ![MIDI Bypass Assignment.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_4038f5eb8fbfe830db343b6a34647b1e399c85568b7b5106ed3e00d839657ab3/MIDI%20Bypass%20Assignment.png?cb=9adcd6d78222a7fe567214ac5c6260f6) Creating a MIDI Bypass assignment for a Delay block 3. **To create a MIDI assignment for a block's parameter:** Select the block in the Signal Flow to display its parameters in the Edit Panel, right-click on the desired parameter knob, slider, or switch, then choose the desired **CC** number, as shown below. ![MIDI Parameter Assignment.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d4a35e00beba68fd51a2de467b8a85635b88f005ea7760995372cf90e55e129d/MIDI%20Parameter%20Assignment.png?cb=436c58f3fb307d981d241b329a2afb9a) Creating a MIDI assignment for a Delay's Feedback parameter 4. Once assigned, **the Position parameter within the Edit Panel responds instantly: its value turns white, and** **a MIDI icon appears on the Edit Panel slider or knob.** * Click on the MIDI icon to edit the CC assignment as needed (choose "None" to clear the assignment). * Optionally, click and drag to adjust the Position parameter's Min and Max controls to customize the controller range, as shown below.. ![MIDI Min-Max Adjust.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_7952f750e22ea66726bcba3cf4ad56263dbade3517e6359c16372d1c6356e17f/MIDI%20Min-Max%20Adjust.png?cb=fd86f929035522ed409cfa56b162d955) Adjusting an assigned parameter's Max range limit 6. Configure your MIDI controller device (or software) to send the same CC as selected in the previous step. Once you send the MIDI CC from your device, the assigned parameter should now respond. Repeat the above steps to create additional assignments as desired. 7. Be sure to **Save** your preset to retain your assignments. ### MIDI Assignments for Switch and Step Type Parameters Helix Stadium Native's blocks can also include several non-continuous parameters, such as a Bypass switch, Amp Channel switch, the Ratio selector for a Compressor, Note Sync values for a Delay, etc. You can also use MIDI Learn using the preceding steps to create assignments for these parameters as well---with the following source controllers: * **For 2-state switch parameters such as the Bypass/Enable of any effect block, The Bright/Normal of an Amp, etc.:** A CC with a value of 0-63 sets the switch to its first state (off), and 64-127 sets the switch to its second state (on). * **For step parameters with more a set of 3 to 25 options, such as the Ratio of a Compressor, the Note Sync of a Delay, etc.:**CC values map sequentially (e.g., value 0 for the first item in the list, 1 for the next, and so on). ### Creating a MIDI Control Assignment in the Automation/Controller Assign Panel 1. With the desired Amp, Cab, or Effect model selected in the Model List, click on the Automation/MIDI Assign panel to view its panel. 2. Click the Parameter menu and select the parameter that you want to control via MIDI. In the image below, a Pitch Wham model's Position parameter is selected. ![Automation Panel MIDI CC assign.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_cea184b07a77baa490429b2c9549507b603349150b81db3a549390397c80a353/Automation%20Panel%20MIDI%20CC%20assign.png?cb=c42a3aa07b68eeb0360c37240a301f92) Manually assigning a Pitch Wham's Position parameter for MIDI CC control 3. Adjust the MIDI In slider to select the CC value to map to the parameter, as shown above. * Once created, the assignment appears in the Assignment List on the left side of the panel. *** ** * ** *** ![The Helix Stadium Native logo](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_459110a8afb839d1e286a86a89cfda4b00de2efb73012431e9e75ed5f852bf1a/HelixStadiumNativeLogo.png?cb=4651842d986dcfcacbd0c60b65490548) ![HelixStadiumNative_Workspace.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1fa4c34bd881baf0a2d969e941306e0d57f899e794b69e2e72d7af9f37485497/HelixStadiumNative_Workspace.png?cb=d6c16e21c663f7c794a98f70f2a307ed) --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Preset Clips and Preset Info The Preset Clip and Preset Info panels are accessed via the Preset Controls at the top of the plugin window. These features provide helpful audio clips for preset auditioning and notes entry for relevant preset information. ## Preset Clips Click the toolbar's Preset Clip button ![Preset Clip Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_99e6d8cc07fe3b3668f0644a9876a6c7bee35a417b819df036203c3cfe5a9e9d/Preset%20Clip%20Button.png?cb=9c7cec2f6afa91682c266698a8758042) to open the Preset Clip panel. Every Helix Stadium Native FACTORY preset includes a unique dry guitar or bass riff so you can hear it in context; also known as the "Ohhh, I've been chugging with 7-string EMGs through a country preset designed for a single coil Tele. *That's* why I thought this preset sucked" feature. Clips can also help you dial in presets without constantly switching between playing and tweaking. **Important!** Be sure to reduce the volume on your DAW monitoring system or headphones before entering the Preset Clip view, and gradually increase **it** as needed. 1. **Load a factory preset and click the toolbar's Preset Clip button** ![Preset Clip Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_99e6d8cc07fe3b3668f0644a9876a6c7bee35a417b819df036203c3cfe5a9e9d/Preset%20Clip%20Button.png?cb=9c7cec2f6afa91682c266698a8758042) **.**The Preset Clip panel appears, showing the clip's waveform, transport controls, and parameters, as shown below. ![Preset Clip Panel.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a546f255c41e9105a1e57931f7db180a6c50506fd52426255c90af31a50a29c4/Preset%20Clip%20Panel.png?cb=03ed38dbdf9d219fdc5eadcbfca8e1c0) **Note:** The Helix Stadium Native plugin must be enabled for the Preset Clip Player to be functional (not bypassed via your DAW host track controls). In some DAW host applications (most typically when using the AU format plugin on a macOS DAW host), it is also necessary to select an audio interface input for the track and enable the track's **Input Monitoring** so that the application's Audio Engine is active. The following alert will be displayed in the player if this is required. Please refer to your DAW host's documentation for details on enabling these functions, if necessary. ![Clip Player Alert.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_bbbde63ac33cb9f16d997cf73691d297ac68abdb929e502c444ada202b7df36a/Clip%20Player%20Alert.png?cb=3186b2a8baa3dbe0ba37db25eef52c75) An alert is shown to enable the track's Input Monitoring If you perform a **Save Preset As** of a Factory Preset, its preset clip is no longer available on the new User Preset. 2. **Click the transport buttons to control playback.** **Tip:** Click at any desired time position on the clip waveform to jump the play cursor to that location. * ![Play Pause button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_7eb30543dacedcfa89463d9a02dab0094341d42045abe8a78b77030d3b31772c/Play%20Pause%20button.png?cb=ec34686fb61858043684a2af9cb855b3) **Play/Pause:** Click to toggle the clip playback between Play and Paused. * ![Return to Zero Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1ce196e188e6bccad0573f68f3483d8209bdd85009386fb095e8e831214b89fd/Return%20to%20Zero%20Button.png?cb=73913611bc82cdfbcd59e9e2d8b07e63) **Return to Zero:**Click to return the play cursor to the start of the clip. * ![Back 5 seconds button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ebad9d7be09d89f055b439b8c934357b8c0103a81916c5432b2a03ba3c9ea180/5%20back.png?cb=ba88bfbee32e4e137a1b1db5ca9e7959) ![forward 5 seconds button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8ce5c353ade36db07a7707ec8a1d942495ccfb8834339a596f7f58ca62eb0625/5%20forward.png?cb=eaa156189409349bbe2b3ef3e2e7841e) **Back and Forward 5 Seconds:** Click to jump playback 5 seconds back or forward. 3. Configure the Preset Clip Parameter toggle switches for playback behaviors. See the next section. ### Preset Clip Parameters All three of the parameter toggle switches are **Off** by default. | **Preset Clip Parameter** | **Description** | |---------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Auto Start** | When **On** , the clip starts playing automatically upon opening the Preset Clip panel. When **Off**, the clip can only be played manually by clicking the Preset Clip Play button. | | **Auto Stop** | When **On** , the clip stops playing when you exit the Preset Clip panel. When **Off** ,the clip continues to play when you exit the Clip panel. **Tip:** If you set **Auto Stop** to **Off** and **Repeat** to **On**, you can close the Preset Clip panel, and the clip will keep looping while you tweak your preset. | | **Repeat** | When **On** , the clip repeats over and over. When **Off**, the clip plays once and stops. | ## Preset Info Click the toolbar's Info button ![the toolbar Preset Info button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_bf339f395f16fb09f73a6162179f5c144801f59eec004843e5b586ca81e95060/Preset%20Info%20button.png?cb=d4d76cb173fa7b9a80d730f41864ae4a) to display the Preset Info panel for the current preset. Here you can type in info for your own USER presets, like guitar/pickup selection, snapshot assignments, tips/tricks, fajita recipes, etc. This Preset Info is saved with the preset and is also referenced when using the Preset Browser's Search function. **Tip:** All factory presets already include helpful, descriptive notes in their Preset Info screens. Please review the factory presets' Info to get some ideas for how to enter effective details for your own custom presets. ![Preset Info Panel.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_75830810b7c02cc38f98cdd593b029406d3340d1c0ed0f7f7dcb24861300e35f/Preset%20Info%20Panel.png?cb=dd3b934562ddcc7f00801c0263041022) The Preset Info panel - info added **To add or edit info** , click in the Preset Info panel and enter your desired text. Be sure to save your preset to retain its Preset Info changes. Note that the Preset Info is not editable for Factory Presets. But you can perform a **Save Preset As**, and the new User Preset retains the Preset Info and becomes editable. --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Preset Compatibility Presets and Setlists from Helix^®^ Stadium XL and Helix^®^ Stadium devices, original Helix^®^ and HX^®^ Family devices (saved with firmware v3.50 or later), as well as the original Helix^®^ Native plugin (saved with v3.50 or later) can all be used in the Helix Stadium Native plugin. Helix Stadium Native saved presets can also be imported and used in Helix Stadium/Stadium XL devices using the free Helix Stadium application. Note that Helix Stadium device firmware version 1.3.2 (or later) and Helix Stadium application version 1.3.3 (or later) are required. The following are details for preset compatibility. **Note:** Presets created in Helix Stadium Native can ***not*** be used on original Helix/HX family devices or with the original Helix Native plugin. ## Original Helix Native and Helix/HX Family Device Presets Helix Stadium Native can open and use presets, favorites, and IRs from all original, first-generation Helix/HX family products (Helix Native plugin, Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, and HX Stomp XL). There are some caveats, however; see below for preparing your Helix/HX assets. **Important!** Before using your presets, setlists, favorites, and/or IRs from Helix Native/Helix/HX in Helix Stadium Native, there are several things to be aware of: * Helix Stadium Native, Helix Stadium devices, and the Helix Stadium application save and export all presets in a new (.hsp) preset file format, and model Favorites in a new (.hsf) file format. Therefore, any Helix/HX/Helix Native preset (.hlx) and Favorite (.fav) files are no longer "back-compatible" with the original device or software once saved or exported from Helix Stadium products. ***Please be sure to create and retain backups of your original presets to maintain compatibility with these earlier products, as covered in the Helix/HX and HX Edit Owner's Manuals, available at*** [**Line 6 Manuals**](https://line6.com/support/manuals/)***.*** * Your original Helix Native plugin or Helix/HX device must be updated to v3.50 or higher *before* exporting presets or setlists. There's no guarantee that presets exported from earlier firmware will bring all the blocks forward. Note that some presets on [**Line 6 CustomTone**](http://customtone.com/) may have been exported from earlier firmware and may not appear as intended. But if you load them into the original Helix Native/Helix/HX (v3.50 or later) and then export, they should work fine. * Original Helix presets purchased from the Line 6 Marketplace are ***not*** supported in Helix Stadium Native at this time. * The original Helix Native plugin can be set to several "Hardware Compatibility Modes" (HC Modes) or with the Compatibility mode "Off." Presets saved or exported while in these modes can all be used in the Helix Stadium Native plugin.^\*^ Helix Stadium Native also offers an HC "Off" option. You'll be prompted to automatically change the HC Mode if needed when opening presets that require it. Also, see the [**Plugin Settings - Hardware Compatibility**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/the-plugin-window.md)options. * Helix Stadium Native can open individual presets, import setlists, favorites, and IR (.wav) files from the original Helix Native/Helix/HX products. It cannot load an entire Helix/HX backup file. * For Setlist files from either Helix Stadium or original Helix/HX devices, you can use Helix Stadium Native's Preset Browser \> **Import Setlist** option. This will copy all the setlist's individual preset files into the plugin's designated User Presets folder, making them available in the Preset Browser. See [**Importing Setlists**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/presets.md#3798a0cd-a25b-4a48-8a35-ce82060848d1). * The older Hybrid cab engine from Helix/HX is not included in Helix Stadium Native. Any Helix/HX presets with Hybrid cabs will automatically load an equivalent new cab, which will sound different. * Helix/HX presets' IR blocks are not fully restored upon import into Helix Stadium Native, due to its all-new, much more powerful file system. (The Cab block is set to the Cab IR subcategory, but no IR file is automatically loaded.) You will need to manually add your IR .wav files to the plugin's IR directory, then select an IR file from the Cab \> Cab IR List in Helix Stadium Native. * 1024-sample IRs from Helix/HX are converted to 2048-sample. * Helix Stadium Native does not include the four EQ types from Helix/HX: **Simple EQ** , **Low and High Cut** , **Low/High Shelf** , and **Parametric** \[5-band\]. These have all been replaced with a new, better-sounding 7-band **Parametric EQ** model, and it will be automatically added in their place, with your settings intact. In some cases, you may notice that the filtering might sound slightly different. This is due to improved peak filter Qs and more precise low and high cut slopes. * Volume leveling of parallel paths in Helix Stadium Native is slightly different, meaning that presets with parallel paths may sound slightly louder or softer than those with serial paths. This can be easily compensated for using the Level parameter in the Merge \> Mixer or Output blocks. * The relationship between the two sides of a dual Cab/IR block is slightly different, meaning that presets with dual cabs may sound slightly louder or softer than presets with a single cab/IR. This can be easily compensated for from the Cab blocks' Level parameters. * In original Helix/HX, Snapshot Control is automatically enabled for any block parameter that includes a switch, pedal, or MIDI CC Controller Assignment. In Stadium Native, Snapshot Control is an independent, switchable option (with a "Snapshot Control" switch available for each parameter). Also, see [**Working with Snapshots**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/working-with-snapshots.md). * The Helix Stadium Native plugin does not include the Helix Stadium hardware's Command Center feature. When a Stadium hardware preset that includes Command Center assignments is loaded in the plugin, the assignments are not functional but are retained in the preset by default. * When importing a Helix Stadium Native-saved preset into a Helix Stadium device (via the Helix Stadium app), any Automation Assignments are removed from the preset, since they are not valid on the hardware. Snapshot and MIDI CC assignments are retained. ^**\***^**Note:** The Hardware Compatibility "Off" option is not available in the **Helix Stadium Native Intro** version. The Intro version will attempt to translate and open presets that were saved with the Helix Stadium Native Full version (or the original Helix Native) with Hardware Compatibility set to "Off." See [**Plugin Settings - Hardware Compatibility**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/the-plugin-window.md) and the [**Loading Presets**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/presets.md#f5cabefc-2aa3-4c33-99c4-3bf543fc2a19) section for additional details. ### Exporting Setlists, Presets, and Assets for Use in Helix Stadium Native To use Setlists, Presets, IR, and Clone files, it is typically best to **export** them from the original product directly into the folders designated in the Helix Stadium Native plugin's Settings, as described in the steps below. **Note:** By default, the asset folders designated in Helix Stadium Native are set to the corresponding folders within the Documents \> Line 6 \> Helix Stadium Native directory path on your computer. Exporting your assets from other products (or copying the asset files) directly into these respective folders will allow Helix Stadium Native to display them in its file browsers. See the [**Plugin Settings**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/the-plugin-window.md#fc6ee204-0d83-4be3-b863-6b87837bd8ac) section. * **For the original Helix Native plugin:** Open an instance of the plugin to access its Setlists, Presets, and IR files in the respective Library panel on the left side of the plugin window. Use the Export feature from the Library panel. Please also see the [**Helix Native Pilot's Guide**](https://line6.com/manuals). * **For original Helix/HX devices:** Connect the device to your computer's USB port, launch the HX Edit application, and use the app's Library panel to export setlists, presets, and IRs. Please also see the [**HX Edit Pilot's Guide**](https://line6.com/manuals). * **For original Helix Stadium Family devices:** Connect to the free Helix Stadium application via Wi-Fi and use the app's respective Librarian to export setlists, presets, and IRs. --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Presets Helix Stadium Native includes a set of factory presets to get you started. It's a great idea to load these first and examine the blocks and settings to see how they are constructed. As soon as you are ready, you can Save As any factory preset to create an editable copy and customize it however you like. Or, start building your own tones and save as many as you like to expand your USER presets folder. **Tip:** Looking for more presets to get started? Visit the [**Line 6 CustomTone**](https://line6.com/customtone/) free community site where you can download Helix Stadium presets and clones, as well as upload and share your own creations! [![CutomTone.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a898511c5f58f8b4d101daf2b8d6f194dec5756bae8fc412e9bfa3bb486dc652/CutomTone.png?cb=661f58c40a0a9f2bf7789536cb48d038)](https://line6.com/customtone/) The Line 6 CustomTone ## The Preset Browser The **Preset Browser**provides access to the included factory presets, as well as your custom-created presets. Click on the Preset name field to open the Browser list, where you'll find the following preset types. ![PresetBrowser_Annotated.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e21e5a82c0fa7367ea2c8f39ba6bf6edca822d33127ee552467797c6c08901e5/PresetBrowser_Annotated.png?cb=6b123d9843cdbe545e42fdd86181f5e8) The Preset Browser **Tip:** Note that the same File List window layout and controls are also used for [**Cab IR File**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/cab-blocks-and-cab-irs.md#cab-its) and [**PROXY Clone File**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/proxytm-clones.md) selection. 1. ![Preset Menu Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_17710e68f268a96a71f928ba73ecf95ed8b3b4364782db42aa642177988d9fd7/Preset%20Menu%20Button.png?cb=7f440bda59ca463fc4bcfcaa1845110e) **Preset Menu:** Click to expand the menu to access the preset file commands. ![Preset Menu.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a58b6a1bd796376bd80c1721210df139d83375deedc1ff671cc25c78e1240c31/Preset%20Menu.png?cb=6f10dfc44c9f82588c870a8dadda05cc) The Preset Menu * **New Preset:**Creates a new, empty preset. * **Open Preset:** Opens the File \> Open window. In most cases, you'll probably want to use the Preset Browser to open presets from the plugin's assigned preset directory. See [**Loading Presets**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/presets.md#f5cabefc-2aa3-4c33-99c4-3bf543fc2a19) below. Use this Open Preset command to browse to *any* folder on your computer to open a preset file. * **Save Preset:** Saves the current preset if it is unsaved. Note that the preset name is displayed in italics with an asterisk if the preset is in an unsaved state ![Preset Name - unsaved state](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_6ea58583d98c01c1f405496a66eb8fe354a75c0c4720cde188afe9cfa890ce9d/Preset%20Name%20-%20unsaved.png?cb=6d17a2a0d45ea6b578410dcc0f668040) . Also, see [**Saving Presets**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/presets.md#ab06f428-fab3-4f26-9356-a7945faa0361) below. * **Save Preset As:**Saves a copy of the current preset. * **Rename Preset:**Allows the current USER preset's name to be edited. (Note that FACTORY presets cannot be renamed.) **Tip:**You can also right-click directly on any USER preset within the Preset Browser list to rename the preset. 2. ![Next-Previous Preset Buttons](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_beff776f182369e88c7ea2986cad75a89f7803e69669c933e9793ddd83caa625/Next-Previous%20Preset%20Buttons.png?cb=99fe309fdef720375fd3ffbd0ea211d2) **Next/Previous Preset Selector:** Click the Up/Down arrow buttons to cycle through loading presets within the currently selected FACTORY or USER folder. (Note that these buttons are disabled if the currently-loaded preset is not a FACTORY preset or one saved within the default USER preset folder.) 3. ![Preset Name field](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5b357348299d47fd039d5fb13839108e0da54261af0dd742c497b7d862234517/Preset%20Name%20-%20saved.png?cb=c714f845780f5678618e74fdfc040826) **Preset Name Field:** Displays the currently-loaded preset. Click to open/close the Preset Browser to access FACTORY and USER presets. 4. ![Preset Search Field](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f96589b225d1bc379d8cf0fc741d4540297227253744ae4d4adb953f4bb00c42/Preset%20Search%20Field.png?cb=66aa036743b434b17c58b463a6e137e2) **Search:** Enter text to search for presets. You can enter a preset name, type of effect, brand name, or text that is included in any preset's [**Preset Info panel**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/preset-clips-and-preset-info.md) to filter the results. (Note that the Search will only search presets that exist in the FACTORY and default USER preset folders.) 5. ![Back Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b80020c9a36862738de023a3f0e52db746ea5f7c4dad6ef5d31754c33ba8f02b/Back%20Button.png?cb=6edeff9c90c9b8ce1e3fbb4e43030d72) **Back Button:** Navigates back in the Browser to the parent directory of the currently displayed folder. 6. ![Browser folder selector](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d3395099a9134d4b14c8dc567a030ebe6033b18d64e7ca6f550e55c43cfba030/Browser%20folder%20selector.png?cb=a7410efa19d2deecd7b9cae6faa20f9f) **Folder Selector:** Select a folder within the Presets directory to show its contents in the browser. 7. ![Browser View Buttons](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_4451d1a31952a49457ca055588e3b29efdcebcfaf8c2be28389511eeea4d92ad/Browser%20Window%20View%20Buttons.png?cb=a9718c178b5b9cecacfe797da5af6332) **Browser View Selector:** Click the left button to display the Browser preset in a "list" view, as shown in the image above. Click the right button to change to a "Columns" view, with folders in the left column and the selected folder's contents in the right, as shown below. ![Preset Browser Column View.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9d85e154ddd5174ef40aaa9a03d952752f69905f61f596f939fc1bd97f483d50/Preset%20Browser%20Column%20View.png?cb=30d92b894e5989eb71f1bd6f9d5c5929) Column View selected 8. ![Factory presets folder](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c0e9e64a42dd76182792c9554f2f3d00baba3e528ff56fcaf4b21267e8e40cb2/Factory%20folder.png?cb=c8ef86254934f586860232dc675edd89) **Factory Preset Folder:** A range of assorted factory presets is provided to get you started. Click to access the list of Factory presets. These presets are read-only.\* ^\*^**Note:** Factory presets cannot be renamed or overwritten using the Save command. But you can edit any of these presets as desired, then use the Preset Menu's **Save Preset As** command to save your edited copy to the USER folder. Factory presets saved to the USER folder will also retain their [**Preset Clip and Preset Info**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/preset-clips-and-preset-info.md). **The Helix Stadium Native Intro version** includes a subset of the factory presets found in the complete Helix Stadium Native version. 9. ![User Presets Folder](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_be9b49210454229845cef0c962647b36757644ce9a7d24bb940fa3bef3498df1/User%20Folder.png?cb=6ae3fa93e71e4b59f88379ab6836d755) **User Presets:** Presets you've saved or copied into the plugin's designated Presets directory appear in the USER folder (see [**Plugin Settings**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/the-plugin-window.md#fc6ee204-0d83-4be3-b863-6b87837bd8ac)). Click to access the list of User presets. These can be edited and overwritten with the Preset Menu's Save command. 10. **Show in Finder/Show in File Explorer:** Click to open the Finder app (macOS) or File Explorer (Windows^®^), showing the parent directory where the currently selected preset file is saved. **Tip:** If your currently loaded preset is not saved in the default USER folder (see [**Plugin Settings**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/the-plugin-window.md#fc6ee204-0d83-4be3-b863-6b87837bd8ac)), it is recommended to open the Preset Menu and choose Save Preset As to save a copy there. This way, your preset will appear in the Preset Browser - USER list, where it is easy to find. 11. **Import Setlist:** Click to select the USER folder, then click ![Import Setlist button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_62836bf9238e96bb22f0d39ad39c895ce0b42c474299e99a0105a691069c897d/Import%20Setlist%20button.png?cb=b3b1805779da087a87d618219e9e22dd) to browse and select a Helix Stadium Setlist (.hss) or Legacy Helix/HX/Helix Native Setlist (.hls) file to import all its presets. See the following [**Importing Setlists**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/presets.md#3798a0cd-a25b-4a48-8a35-ce82060848d1) section. ### Saving Presets To save your preset, click the Preset Menu button and choose **Save Preset** or **Save Preset As** . The standard File - Save window appears; click OK to save the file. You can save a virtually unlimited number of User presets. By default, presets are saved (with the .hsp file extension) in the **Presets** folder within your macOS or Windows^®^ Documents folder: **Documents \> Line 6 \> Helix Stadium Native \> Presets**. Optionally, you can use the Finder app (macOS) or the File Explorer app (Windows) to manually create folders within the Presets folder and move your preset files into them to organize them as desired. **Tip:** It's a good idea to create backups once you start creating your own User presets. You can do so by simply *copying* the **Presets** folder to another location on your computer system. **The following settings are stored within a preset:** * The model selection, parameter values, and On/Off states of all Signal Flow blocks * All Input, Output, Split, Merge blocks, and signal path routing * The Input and Output Level knobs' settings * Preset Tempo BPM (standalone app only, when configured for Preset tempo source) * Custom preset name entered via the Preset Browser * All Snapshot assignments * All Automation and MIDI Control parameter assignments **Note:**Some host DAW applications also offer their own preset libraries and plugin save options. Any such host application's presets are saved and managed independently---please refer to your host's documentation for details. ### Loading Presets Presets exported from Helix Stadium family devices (.hls files), original Helix/HX family devices, or original Helix Native plugin (.hlx files) can all be used in Helix Stadium Native plugin! See [**Preset Compatibility**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/preset-compatibility.md) and [**Exporting Setlists, Presets, IRs, and Clones for use in Helix Stadium Native**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/preset-compatibility.md#96c9f8be-e724-4ade-8813-da06d8dfdee3) for details. **Note:** Helix Stadium and Helix Stadium Native saved presets appear in the Preset Bowser with a "Stadium" icon: ![Stadium Preset Icon](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f30ae93e0d15a97f51dcd50afb450a88f02a487fb18563b2ac2ade52d29dd170/Stadium%20Preset%20Icon.png?cb=41dc1465881dc18392d2df3f64ad3fd8) . Presets saved with an original Helix/HX device or Helix Native appear with a "Helix" icon: ![Helix-HX Preset Icon.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e969f4488228ec2302aae90a86eeb6b8f7c84341104cff3e17e970622141981a/Helix-HX%20Preset%20Icon.png?cb=32885cdcfb80eca17cab98744aeee0bc) . **There are a few ways to load a preset:** * **Click the Next/Previous arrow buttons** ![Next-Previous Preset Buttons](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_beff776f182369e88c7ea2986cad75a89f7803e69669c933e9793ddd83caa625/Next-Previous%20Preset%20Buttons.png?cb=99fe309fdef720375fd3ffbd0ea211d2) to cycle through the current FACTORY or USER preset list sequentially without opening the Preset Browser. * **Click the Preset Name field** ![Preset Name Field](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8bf036bd947ff986a66025aeae275e7ab7382337b7c6b8437c50302ceae4774f/Preset%20Name%20Field.png?cb=c861772b4f56fe9c8e193a85724283a1) to open the Preset Browser, select either the FACTORY or USER folder to see its contents, then click the desired preset to load it. As you create and save your own presets, you'll see them appear in the USER folder. * **Click the Preset Menu and select the Open Preset command** ![Open Preset Menu Command.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_99d365b1903cf29ba92fbea40110aa84fef5d81e01efa96e50fbc6b47ceee2ca/Open%20Preset%20Menu%20Command.png?cb=caa150254386104311eba2890c6ddc11) to manually browse to any folder on your computer, then select a preset to load it.^\*^ ^**\***^**Note:** If you load a preset from a folder other than the plugin's designated Presets folder (see [**Plugin Settings**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/the-plugin-window.md#fc6ee204-0d83-4be3-b863-6b87837bd8ac)), this opens the preset in the plugin, but the preset file remains stored in its current folder, and therefore, does not appear in the plugin's Preset Browser \> USER presets list. Optionally, click the Preset Menu button, select Save Preset As, and save a copy of the preset in the default Presets folder if you want it to appear in the Preset Browser's USER folder. #### Preset Loading in the Helix Stadium Native Intro Version The free **Intro** plugin version includes a subset of the Amp, Cab, and Effect models from the Helix Stadium Native Full license version. When attempting to load a Preset from the original Helix/HX/Helix Native and Helix Stadium family devices that include models not included in the Intro version, the following pop-up alert is displayed. ![Free_PresetAlert.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_012ee14e76fdc59de5bae3f89ea92e44a0d54e8b3d0617dc80cb5dfed6745b2d/Free_PresetAlert.png?cb=f1ec3435498b2b219f525d718bd41aff) Preset alert for models not available **Click Cancel to cancel loading the preset.** **Click Load Anyway to load the preset, where the blocks containing the missing models are disabled, dispalying a "lock" icon, as shown below.**Clicking on a disabled block displays its info in the Model Browser. ![Free Version - Get More Models.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1a95423ac9d30d90f3c5e6a7891c50909ed6864c61cd7e95ae8ed40a99f30d8f/Free%20Version%20-%20Get%20More%20Models.png?cb=3bd4d7ed81186010852453865c2fd8be) The Intro version - an unsupported block is selected * Optionally, click ![Get More Models menu item](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_fcc0d0b262f15e12172fb53c58ebdf254cd5b6db8f5f6236e5f4d9cbce494bce/Get%20More%20Models%20menu%20item.png?cb=0431d8bcc6e89d465b63b2fe23385b08) in the model list or click on the ![Upgrade Now button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_feeab6e494656ad0a8c3552576d16a125510c2645f632f54004c2e7fe007f503/Upgrade%20Now%20button.png?cb=7c048c7bcc39f3106be5667b61114ce9) button in the right panel to purchase the full Helix Stadium Native version license (with which the disabled models become "unlocked"). * Or, you can replace the "missing" model with an available Intro version model in the Model Browser. Disabled blocks are retained in the presets when saving (unless you manually replace their model or clear the block) to maintain compatibility with the full plugin version and Helix Stadium devices. **Using Presets Created with Helix Stadium Hardware Compatibility "Off":** As detailed in the plugin [**Settings**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/the-plugin-window.md#9b6f2a80-f21d-4b09-a502-d21b45c91718) section, Helix Stadium Native limits the number of certain block types and the total DSP usage per preset to ensure saved presets are compatible with Helix Stadium devices. The complete plugin version allows setting Hardware Compatibility to "Off," which the Intro version does not. Therefore, when attempting to open a preset saved with Hardware Compatibility Off that exceeds the hardware limits, you'll see the following alert stating that the preset cannot be loaded in the Intro version. ![Free_HCModeAlert.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9375b3c5a46bd45700afc40dcc0cf2be9eaf49769620f5bde722716c6126bf73/Free_HCModeAlert.png?cb=48a7f9c42a494e54ff95983238bb35ed) Preset not supported in Intro version alert ### Adding Helix Stadium and Original Helix/HX Presets Helix Stadium Native does not include an "Import Preset" function (there is an "Import" option for Setlists---see the next section). But you can manually copy any Helix Stadium hardware preset file (.hsp) or original Helix/HX/Helix Native preset (.hlx) directly into the Helix Stadium Native plugin's USER Presets directory. * You'll first need to **Export** the individual presets to your computer using the free Helix Stadium (version 1.3.3 or later) or HX Edit (version 3.50 or later) app. You can either export directly into Helix Stadium Native's Presets folder, or export to any other folder on your computer and then copy or move the preset files into the designated Helix Stadium Native Presets folder (which is set by default as Documents \> Line 6 \> Helix Stadium Native \> Presets). Also, see the [**Preset Compatibility \> Exporting**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/preset-compatibility.md#96c9f8be-e724-4ade-8813-da06d8dfdee3) section. * Once added to the Helix Stadium Native Presets folder, the presets will appear in the plugin's Preset Browser. Helix Stadium-saved presets appear in the browser with the "Stadium" icon ![Stadium Preset Icon](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f82d15cfeac78638cf6318563e161bb6b020cf0f01ad5435c2c7d4dca4fe144f/Stadium%20Preset%20Icon_Small.png?cb=ad51322c8f32e34f61f8a08bc722546b) , and Helix/HX/Helix Native-saved preset appears with a "Helix" icon ![Helix-HX Preset Icon](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_4a24b28d532b0e493ff791be0c0f6e3bb24bf4e7000c38c30cd77c5ae5e99ccc/Helix-HX%20Preset%20Icon_small.png?cb=29bc05ed879eee65e733d3bb6cef3448) . **Note:** When opening a Helix/HX/Helix Native-saved preset ![Helix-HX Preset Icon](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_4a24b28d532b0e493ff791be0c0f6e3bb24bf4e7000c38c30cd77c5ae5e99ccc/Helix-HX%20Preset%20Icon_small.png?cb=29bc05ed879eee65e733d3bb6cef3448) , you can edit it the same as any other preset. To save changes to this type of preset, you'll need to select **Save Preset As** from the Preset Menu, which will convert and save it as a new Helix Stadium-type preset ![Stadium Preset Icon](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f82d15cfeac78638cf6318563e161bb6b020cf0f01ad5435c2c7d4dca4fe144f/Stadium%20Preset%20Icon_Small.png?cb=ad51322c8f32e34f61f8a08bc722546b) in the USER directory. (Your original Helix/HX/Helix-Native preset is retained, unchanged.) ### Importing Helix Stadium and Original Helix/HX Setlists Helix Stadium Native does not support creating Setlists, unlike the Helix Stadium and Helix/HX family devices. However, you can "Import" a Setlist in Helix Stadium Native, which will copy all the Setlist's presets into its own subfolder within the USER Presets directory. Once you've exported a Setlist from the Helix Stadium app (version 1.3.3 or later) or original Helix/HX/Helix Native (version 3.50 or later, as covered in [**Exporting Setlists, Presets, IRs, and Clones for use in Helix Stadium Native**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/preset-compatibility.md#96c9f8be-e724-4ade-8813-da06d8dfdee3)), use the following steps. **Important!**The following behaviors apply when importing Helix Stadium/Helix/HX hardware Setlists: * All Setlists' presets imported into the Helix Stadium Native USER directory are converted to Helix Stadium format preset files (which appear with the "Stadium" icon ![Stadium Preset Icon](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f82d15cfeac78638cf6318563e161bb6b020cf0f01ad5435c2c7d4dca4fe144f/Stadium%20Preset%20Icon_Small.png?cb=ad51322c8f32e34f61f8a08bc722546b) ). **These preset files are not back-compatible with the original Helix/HX/Helix Native products.** Be sure to keep backup copies of your original Helix/HX/Helix Native setlist (.hls) and preset (.hlx) files for compatibility. * The order of all presets in the Preset Library panel of the Helix Stadium or HX Edit apps will likely not be retained when the Setlist is imported into Helix Stadium Native plugin. If you want the preset order to be the same, you can manually rename each of your presets in the original app's Library Panel before exporting by numbering them (e.g., "01," "02," "03"... etc.). Once the setlist is exported from the original app and imported into Helix Stadium Native, its presets will then be listed numerically in the plugin's Preset Browser. * When importing a Setlist from an original Helix/HX device or original Helix Native, all "non-functional" blocks (those specific to hardware, e.g., Loopers, FX Loops, Sends, Returns) are automatically removed from the presets, regardless of the Helix Stadium Native \> Settings \> Non-Functional Blocks setting. Also, see the [**Plugin Settings**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/the-plugin-window.md#fc6ee204-0d83-4be3-b863-6b87837bd8ac) section. ![Import Setlist.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1ad55c658c8a812960906a62a8fdf21b4b0e8e7cce49a258a54adc8ccd19e6a3/Import%20Setlist.png?cb=91d68d1a2aeb9fcec589bc3ecccae6fe) Importing a Setlist **Tip:**Use the macOS Finder or Windows File Explorer apps to create your own folders within the plugin's designated Presets directory to import and manually manage your files. Folders you create will appear within the Preset Browser's USER directory. 1. Click the Helix Stadium Native's Preset Name field to open the Preset Browser. 2. Select to highlight the USER folder, then click **Import Setlist** ![Import Setlist button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_62836bf9238e96bb22f0d39ad39c895ce0b42c474299e99a0105a691069c897d/Import%20Setlist%20button.png?cb=b3b1805779da087a87d618219e9e22dd) . 3. Browse to the computer folder where your Helix Stadium Setlist (.hss file) or Helix/HX/Helix Native Setlist (.hls) file is located, select the file, and click **Open**. 4. Once the Import is complete, open the Preset Browser again; the Setlist's presets are now available in a new subfolder (named the same as the original Setlist) within your USER directory. --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # PROXY™ Clones Helix Stadium Native supports the use of all Clone files created with Helix Stadium family hardware. The Line 6^®^ **PROXY™** **Cloning** feature, introduced on Helix Stadium devices with firmware version 1.3, accurately captures a "clone" of any physical amplifier, preamp, amp + speaker cab combination, or distortion pedal. Helix Stadium presets that include Clone blocks are also supported by Helix Stadium Native. Clone files can be exported from the Helix Stadium hardware using the free Helix Stadium application. You can also obtain clones free from the [**CustomTone.com**](https://customtone.com/clones) website (see below) and from several online vendors. Clone files need to be added to the Helix Stadium Native Clones folder for use in the plugin, as described in the following sections. Once added to your presets, Clones can be edited and used much like Amp and Effect models. Please see the following video of the Helix Stadium device for an overview of PROXY Clone files. **Looking for Clones?** Visit the [**Line 6 CustomTone**](https://line6.com/customtone/) free community site where you can download Helix Stadium presets and clones, as well as upload and share your own creations! [![CutomTone.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d397276cacf5d82695b2d0afe7d20e46bb768bc912f6de29f20edfce0fdf13aa/CutomTone.png?cb=661f58c40a0a9f2bf7789536cb48d038)](https://line6.com/customtone/) The Line 6 CustomTone site ## Using PROXY Clone Files in Helix Stadium Native You'll first need to obtain Clone files and add them to the Helix Stadium Native - Clones folder. By default, this folder is at Documents \> Line 6 \> Helix Stadium Plugin \> Clones, but you can change this to a different folder via the plugin's [**Settings**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/the-plugin-window.md). Add Clone files by using the Finder (macOS) or File Explorer (Windows^®^) application and either drag or copy/paste the desired PROXY ".clone" files into this designated Clones folder.^\*^ Clone files can then be accessed in the Model Browser by following the steps below. **Note:** If you load a preset that includes a Clone block, but the referenced Clone file is not currently included in the Helix Stadium Native plugin's Clones folder, the Clone block will display "**Unresolved** " in its Clone File Selector ![Unresolved Clone.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_323206c0b24d7ade1c66f0111c7bc89ce24bec6cdd09abf48196b183307e92ff/Unresolved%20Clone.png?cb=a335f6e97dda3ec0f1060027900aca06) . You'll need to add the reference Clone file to the plugin's Clones folder, click the "Unresolved" Clone File Selector, and select the Clone to load it (or, optionally, select a different Clone for the preset). ^**\***^**Tip:** Using the Finder or File Explorer app, you can also optionally create your own custom sub-folders within the designated Clones folder, then move or copy your clone files to manage them. Note that when using the Finder or File Explorer apps, making copies of files can append "2" or "copy" to the end of the filename, after the ".clone" file extension (e.g., "MyFuzz.clone copy"). File names must not include any text after the ".clone" file extension, or they will not be listed within Helix Stadium Native's Clone File Browser window. 1. Select the desired Category (Amp, Preamp, or Distortion) in the left column of the Model Browser, then select the Clone subcategory, as shown below. ![Selecting Amp Clone category.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b8d9548c022f280200ccf116af250dfb0cf99df17071786dc6cdf282428d9496/Selecting%20Amp%20Clone%20category.png?cb=56a97d92bc0a602e50fc139c1ac95485) Selecting the Amp \> Clone subcategory (For Amp and Amp+Cab Clone types) ![Selecting Preamp Clone category.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_63a31432e7ff845b8a420b447720cb3e46930fb86b919de0b1bb691f304cc58a/Selecting%20Preamp%20Clone%20category.png?cb=52732a2f29c275813701b28761a4ee6f) Selecting the Preamp \> Clone subcategory ![Selecting Distortion Clone category.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_4606c8fb58f8761b4de759cd64fe531300e333e6ec2c180d0e98cadf7e1129b7/Selecting%20Distortion%20Clone%20category.png?cb=65fc2bc8642a50e155f135e996b3fb15) Selecting the Distortion \> Clone subcategory * The **Amp** category includes two clone types: **Amp Clone** (the direct Amp output signal, without a speaker cab) and **Amp+Cab Clone** (an amp through a speaker cabinet, captured with a mic). Select either the **Amp Clone** or **Amp+Cab Clone** type in the browser, as shown above. * For an Amp clone, you'll most likely want to manually add a Cab block following it in the Signal Flow. Note that, unlike adding an Amp model to your presets, a Cab block is ***not*** automatically added or linked to an Amp Clone block---see [**Cab Blocks and Cab IRs**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/cab-blocks-and-cab-irs.md). * The **Preamp** category includes **Preamp** clones. These clone types are captured either from a standalone preamp (such as a mic, console, or pedal) or from the preamp stage of a guitar or bass amplifier. Select the **Preamp Clone** in the browser, as shown above. * The **Distortion** category includes **Distortion** clones. These clone types are captured from overdrive, boost, distortion, or fuzz effect pedals. Select the Distortion Clone in the browser, as shown above **Tip:** Select a loaded clone file and click its Focus View button ![Focus View Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_2fdd4ccec73ce1e391dd0c9f9374b306d7b5516f0808a6b7e982cc2c462c8fa2/AmpFocusButton.png?cb=39e79608e411873a947c8e0fbdf72a29) at the top of the Edit Panel to view all metadata added by the clone file's creator, as shown below. This can provide details about the cloned device and its settings (if added by its creator). Also, see the [**Focus View**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/the-focus-view.md) page for details. ![Clone Focus View.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_7881b0f16ef66690bfbfc87d738f69844a88cb451cab0052a0182c7efc2836b9/Clone%20Focus%20View.png?cb=a307d151b9380702578f355c8c5c0337) The Focus View for a Distortion Clone file 2. Click on the clone's \ file selector box at the top of the Edit Panel, then select a clone file from its list.The list automatically filters the files within your Clones folder to show only the selected type (Amp, Amp+Cab, Preamp, or Distortion). * Optionally enter text in the Search field at the top of the Clone File list to find specific Clones. (Note that the same File List window layout and controls are also used for [**Cab IR File**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/cab-blocks-and-cab-irs.md#cab-its) selection and the [**Preset Browser**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/presets.md#preset-browser).) * To easily go to the source .clone file, select a clone in the list and click the **Show in Finder** (macOS) or **Open in File Explorer** (Windows) button at the bottom right of the window. ![Adding Amp Clone.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_fc3d70651cffd6dcbcf20804b5ddc6407a1303b787300edb0a40f1f0265fc60b/Adding%20Amp%20Clone.png?cb=c8c60075c65dcf045cc1570022f76a5c) The Clone file list is displayed (Amp Clone type selected) **Note:** Up to two Clone, Amp, or Preamp blocks in any combination can be added to a path (and up to four Clone/Amp/Preamp blocks max per preset). Optionally, you can set [**Settings \> Hardware Compatibility Mode**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/the-plugin-window.md) to "Off" to remove this limit (but note that the preset will not be compatible with Helix Stadium devices). The Hardware Compatibility Off option is not available in the **Helix Stadium Native Intro** version. 3. Select a Clone in the list, and its parameters are displayed in the Edit Panel. All clone types offer the same set of parameters. See [**Clone Parameters**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/proxytm-clones.md#2ca8bf6c-4c02-431e-bb02-bf9a5fa328cd) below for descriptions. ![Amp Clone Edit Panel.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_697d7a92c6cbec746f3cb25a4140d21f6bb955b20aeb71a02b7f397535311d1d/Amp%20Clone%20Edit%20Panel.png?cb=d010973ab387b12bf3c45ca5811aea9a) The Edit Panel for an Amp Clone block 4. Your selected clone is added as a block to your preset's signal flow. The block can be moved and managed much like other Amp and Effect blocks. Right-click on a clone block to open its Action menu for several options: ![Clone Block Action menu.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_0bf3f6d67d2af0cc45c34e9e89807d59a8b66d646303db0bf832f35a22d4de71/Clone%20Block%20Action%20menu.png?cb=a2ab11eb49519043f0a4f0a4cb507441) Clone block Action menu * **Bypass:** Toggles block bypass. * **Automation menu:** Select a source controller to automate the block's bypass. See the [**Automation/Controller Panel**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/automation-controller-panel.md) for details. * **Assign MIDI:** Select a MIDI CC to remotely control the block's bypass. * **Snapshots Set Bypass** **switch:** Enable (set it to its right position, the default) to allow the clone block's bypass state to be controlled by Snapshots. Disable the block's bypass switch so it is not affected by Snapshot changes. See [**Working with Snapshots**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/signal-path-routing-options.md). * **Copy/Paste Block:** Copy the block and its loaded clone file and settings, and paste into another path location in the current or other preset. * **Clear/Clear All Blocks:** Remove the block or all of the preset's blocks from the preset. * **User Default/Factory Default:** Select User Default for the current settings to always be loaded as the clone's default settings on future uses. Select Factory Default to reset back to the original factory default settings. See [**Creating User Default Settings**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/building-and-editing-tones.md#8a49afab-601e-4148-8663-04420530740e). * **Add to Favorites:** Create a "Favorite" of the clone block, its clone file, bypass state, and all settings. Once created, your Favorites are available in the Model Browser's **Favorites** category. See [**Favorites**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/favorites.md). 5. **To remove a Clone File from the Clone Block:** Click the **Clear** button at the right of the Clone File Selector to return to the "\" state, as shown below. Click the Clone File selector again if you wish to select a different Clone. ![Clear Clone File Button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_bd55f17f6c96fbba968a2b5144ff46cd67e0760447acec62b8678480dd0da6eb/Clear%20Clone%20File%20Button.png?cb=6acc2a9fd557c6f65117a707446d7a5e) Removing a Clone file Please also see [**Building and Editing Tones**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/building-and-editing-tones.md) for additional details. ## Clone Parameters Once a Clone file is selected for a Clone block, its parameters are displayed in the Edit Panel. All Clone types offer the same set of parameters, with all set "flat" as the initial default, as described below. | **Clone Parameter** | **Description** | |--------------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Pre Gain** | Adjusts the amount of gain fed into the clone. Reduce the level for cleaner tones, or increase to drive the amp/preamp/distortion clone for increased saturation and distortion. | | **Low Cut** | A High Pass Filter to reduce the level of all frequencies below the selected cutoff value. | | **Low** **Mid** **High** | Adjusts the bass, midrange, and treble, respectively. | | **High Cut** | A Low Pass Filter to reduce the level of all frequencies above the selected cutoff value. | | **Post Gain** | Adjusts the output level. Use this to adjust the clone's overall level without affecting its tone. | --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Signal Path Routing Options The Helix Stadium Native plugin's Signal Flow panel allows you to quickly and easily construct all types of signal routing configurations right within your presets, all by simply dragging and dropping. Here, we show you how to utilize mono and stereo, Split and Merge, and Input \& Output block settings for various routing configurations. ## Block Order and Stereo Imaging First, it is helpful to understand how mono and stereo routings work in the Helix Stadium environment. Most Stadium's Effect models have selectable **Mono** and **Stereo** subcategory versions (as well as **Legacy** subcategory versions---more about these below). When an Effect block is selected, its model type is indicated by the symbol to the right of the model name at the top of the Edit Panel: **Mono** ![Mono icon](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_83ab0c6f48a06d0c3fc33555495f99e288703d200460bb13c942f4f68f044f95/MonoIcon.png?cb=66aad6871995e529696e08ebd5b82c86) or **Stereo** ![Stereo Icon](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e86cae7370a44e18d5040f75745b0594f6c72e53f5d9817a657b585c4c9da7f3/StereoIcon.png?cb=7adad8cd648cde7755aab9cad427ca13) . Stereo imaging is highly dependent on the types of blocks you add and the order in which you add them. **Note:**Some DAW Host applications (including Cubase®, Pro Tools®, and Logic Pro) include options for mono or stereo type audio tracks. A mono audio track in these hosts also offers the option for inserting a plugin as "Mono\>Mono" or "Mono\>Stereo." When choosing Mono\>Mono, the inserted Stadium Native plugin will sum its final output to mono (regardless of whether mono or stereo blocks are used in the preset). Keep the following things in mind when building tones: * Each Path in Stadium Native's Signal Flow panel includes two audio channels (left and right) from Input to Output. * Even when using both mono and stereo blocks on a Path, both audio channels are processed, allowing you to follow a mono effect with a stereo effect and achieve a stereo output from the Path. * If you add a Split block to create parallel Paths, each parallel Path (e.g., 1A and 1B) still includes two audio channels, allowing you to use mono or stereo blocks on either. * All Amp, Preamp, Poly effects, and Clone blocks are mono-only, so any stereo signal sent into these block types will be collapsed to mono. As such, it's a good practice to add only mono blocks before these mono-only blocks on the same Path. For example, the following simple tone is created using mono effects before the amp (a mono Compressor and Distortion), which are fed into an Amp and Cab. After the cab, stereo effects (stereo Modulation, Delay, and Reverb) are used to create a stereo output at the path's Output block. ![Simple Single Path Tone.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_084842c86a464dd89cf03b88562f1b44dc4a3d4d3589d94dc96825fe46185df2/Simple%20Single%20Path%20Tone.png?cb=decf6cc63d9d281be0708d908690f566) A single path tone with mono blocks before the Amp/Cab and stereo blocks after * Adding a mono effect block will collapse any preceding stereo signal on the same Path to mono. For example, adding a mono effect to the right of the Reverb in the above example would collapse the stereo Reverb block's output to mono. **Note:** Cab blocks are unique in that their internal signal routing differs depending on whether only one or both of their Cab slots are in use. Therefore, if you happen to place a stereo Effect block immediately before a Cab block, the following behaviors apply: * When only one slot is in use with a Cab model or IR, the block sums its incoming signal to mono input and offers stereo output. * When both slots are in use with Cab models or IRs, the block offers stereo input and stereo output. * For a full stereo tone, you can use all stereo effect models, add a Split block, and add an Amp and Cab on each of the split parallel paths. Use the Split block's Pan settings to dial in your preferred stereo balance between the parallel Paths. See the following Routing Examples for more about this type of thing. * In addition to **Mono** and **Stereo** subcategory effect models, there are also **Legacy** effect models, which are indicated with the Legacy symbol ![Legacy Icon](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d7e4ca4d8b918714a9bd25518704e27085998479ce60a74001b6ebec6496d1df/LegacyIcon.png?cb=b8d10c2470dbb6ab28ce17e545345570) . The mono/stereo behavior varies among Legacy effects: * Legacy Distortion, Dynamics \& Pitch/Synth effects are mono * Legacy Modulation \& Delay effects vary: some are mono, some stereo, and some mono-in/stereo-out. Adjusting the effect's Mix parameter can narrow the stereo image that is fed into it. * Legacy Filter and Reverb effects are stereo. ## Serial vs. Parallel Routing For many tones, a simple serial (one stereo path) signal flow is more than adequate. A single path accommodates up to 12 blocks. For example, a (mono) Volume pedal, Wah pedal, Amp, Cab, and stereo Reverb can be added to a single Path. Of course, there is still room (and typically enough DSP resources) for also adding Distortion, Modulation, and Delay, and additional effects on a single, serial Path. ![Simple Tone.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c4fdb74f866ece5674d87331546f418398388de371d188d6b86c2425d1d70f8f/Simple%20Tone.png?cb=4dc294f8ea9958b7d1754614debd3cfb) A simple serial path tone ### Adding Split Paths A split, parallel (two stereo Paths) signal flow can be used to create more sophisticated tones. This lets one split the signal into two stereo Paths, process them separately, and mix them back together. For this example, we'll split our simple, serial Path tone to utilize a Reverb and Delay in parallel. 1. **Click the existing Reverb block and drag it downward until you see a Path B (the lower Path) appear, then drop the Amp block on the new Path B to move it there.**You'll see that this automatically adds a Split and Merge block, allowing Path B to split off and rejoin Path A (the upper Path). * Once Split and Merge blocks are added, they can optionally be dragged left and right on Path A to be repositioned as desired. ![Reverb block is dragged down to create a Parallel Path](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_95b4399416329ced904f4749c4830a737413082b32ee4fcb51c8678beca7d7a3/Create%20Parallel%20Path.png?cb=fde82a8ac22f1168171780d05869314b) 2. **Drag the Path A Delay block between the Split and Merge blocks.**Now you have the stereo Delay and Reverb in parallel, where each processes the incoming Amp signal separately and is blended together before being sent to the Looper and output. ![A Delay and Reverb are configured in parallel](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a7269131c64250a897af57eefd9d3e49078ce5a2373f5c993fb1f351c2acd9f3/Add%20Delay%20for%20Parallel%20Path.png?cb=1102a0cc7e6b5ecb045dbe914105983a) 3. Optionally, click the Split block and change to a different Split type, and/or adjust its Balance for routing to each Path A and B. Likewise, click the Merge block and adjust its Pan for how the Path A and B stereo signals are blended back together. **Tip:** In the above example, if you're panning the Cab block's settings and want to maintain the full Left/Right balance to be fed all the way through both Paths A and B, adjust the Split *and* Merge blocks' A and B Pan settings to full Left and full Right. 4. **Create Multiple Splits:** Simply drag another existing block down to create an additional Split/Merge Path and add the desired blocks on Paths A and B to achieve the desired parallel and serial routing. * In this example, we've created one Split to use two different Distortions and a Dynamics block in parallel, then rejoined to go into an Amp and Cab, then into another Split to use Mod + Reverb and Delay blocks in parallel, rejoined to a common output. ![Two parallel paths are created](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_2fb2e30c413d6e9a982792e36e17c592d7ae961cf775c2773f2c092931d41211/Dual%20Parallel%20Paths.png?cb=9ed9bcad5a6308ebd84f8af14c25cb88) **Tip:** You can also add Split or Merge blocks manually in a desired empty location on Path A by selecting them within the Model Browser's None category. ![Add Split Add Merge.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_bb650a6ad782c216a0c51e5f2ff2d0f3a1510e46d88e8a2939a2787215b0d1ed/Add%20Split%20Add%20Merge.png?cb=0502992e860b73ffe0ec4c2c25f57966) The Model Browser - None category #### Merging Multiple Split Parallel Paths If you've created more than one split, parallel path, you can optionally "merge" them into one parallel path by dragging and dropping the Split block of the latter onto a position within the earlier path. (Or, if you clear the Split block, it will merge with the preceding split path to its left.) When prompted, tap **YES** to confirm. ![Drag Split Left.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d68147170c14b6785e88d3d291a198901318625ebd6ffd72aa681396f6495d89/Drag%20Split%20Left.png?cb=0547bc005438f2e8a74bd09073b8a41d) Dragging a Split block left into a previous parallel path ![Delete Merge Alert.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_4e815c90511755b4ff224dc6de71f7ed64266862add032a50a12dc847f8d8664/Delete%20Merge%20Alert.png?cb=ee5403b13524d1351a2aba52fe65666e) Alert if you want to merge the paths ![Merged paths.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9f7c8f0969de249fa8e82264c7bc149eda0b34ef439f23f4cd26344eea3fe649/Merged%20paths.png?cb=f57259c4caa8939037df79a758115746) The parallel paths are merged 😎 **Once you've got the hang of creating split and parallel paths, you can employ them for all types of useful configurations, as follows.** ### Use 2 Amp Blocks in Parallel This allows you to use the Split and Merge parameters to blend just the right amount of each Amp. In this case, we've placed the Cab after the Merge block so that both amps' signals are fed to the same Cab (where you can use up to two Cab models or IRs and adjust their pan and other settings individually). ![Two Amps Parallel.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f618f60851a5c9c45ff9c682eb7df24241e0949d44254b3b6123db4ebdeb14f5/Two%20Amps%20Parallel.png?cb=c3ae14183879725b162a3d2bf3ebf97a) **Note:** Using two Amp or Clone blocks plus Effects can quickly consume the available DSP for Path 1. But remember, this is only half of your tone. You still have Paths 2A and 2B to play with! See the following Serial Path Routing section. As another option, you can set the plugin instance's **Settings \>** [**Hardware Compatibility**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/the-plugin-window.md#plugin-settings) to "**Off**" to lift the preset DSP limitation (understanding that the preset may not be compatible with Helix Stadium hardware devices). ### Create a 1-into-2 Routing Add an Amp, Cab, and desired effects on Paths A and B, click and drag the Merge block of an existing split Path downward to give Path B its own separate Output block. In the following example, your single-source input enters a compressor, then is split into two completely separate Amp, Cab, and Effect chains, each of which can pan its output block individually. ![1 into 2 routing.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_65c02296922d060a22dca2e85ba17ec280d9cd09fe711ea1f8e6662c48bf665a/1%20into%202%20routing.png?cb=c8c6264ff016a5bd1ee753d3d59b5463) ### Serial Path Routing As mentioned at the start of this page, a single path offers 12 block locations. But if the 12 blocks are not enough, you can extend to path B to create a single, large "Serial" path, doubling the capacity to 24 block locations. 1. **Add a Split and Merge block to Path 1A.** 2. **Drag the Merge block down to Path 1B.**A duplicate Output block is created. 3. **Move the Split block to the right so that it is the last processing block on Path 1A.** 4. **Select the Output block on Path 1A and turn Knob 2 (Level) all the way down.**That way, you're only hearing Output 1B. Now you can add up to 11 blocks on Path 1A (the Split block uses one block location) and up to 12 more blocks on Path 1B (Hardware Compatibility-DSP resources permitting). ![Serial Path.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_798fad58e7040690067708ccdf2740d52620deac4f692bc9de60fd28f2d79977/Serial%20Path.png?cb=b2ad4c105b5e710c7f286ba911b9d859) ### Combining Paths 1 and 2 A very useful serial configuration is to add your "pre" Effects, Amp, and Cab to Path 1, and all "post" Effects to Path 2. This setup typically balances the DSP usage across the two Paths (when Hardware Compatibility is enabled), allowing you to use many combinations of models on each before hitting the Hardware Compatibility DSP limit. In the following example, the input is fed into several Effects, and Amp and Cab on Path 1A, with the Path 1 output set to Path 2A to be further processed by additional effects, and to the Path 2A stereo output block. ![Pat1A to 2A.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_727c266f5d7a209ec60a8ae4ca30a96c8e94242b4056bfdb07eb9ae1a22c72c2/Pat1A%20to%202A.png?cb=036b188524685d59eba2cb8a87e54b70) Of course, if this still isn't enough, you could always duplicate the above Serial routing on both Paths 1 and 2 and route Path 1B's output block to Path 2A for one "super serial" tone with up to a whopping 48 block location capacity 🤩 . This could be especially useful if you have Hardware Compatibility set to "Off" and want to create a preset with "the works," bypassing and enabling blocks as needed. ![Super Serial Path.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_7dca856194791d0e60b8736fc659268ddae3600ea9251a5778b6e93747b8d60e/Super%20Serial%20Path.png?cb=682d0974da94d1f8081c917d0912a8ba) --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # The Focus View The Focus View is a dedicated, real-time "XY" controller screen that offers simplified editing options for the selected model. The Focus View offers various options based on the current model type, as covered on this page. **Tip:** Helix Stadium devices include a Focus View touchscreen to provide this functionality. Please check out the video below for an overview and tips for using the Focus View on Stadium devices. Then, consult the sections on this page for Helix Stadium Native's Focus View details. ## Amp, Preamp, and Effect Models For Amp, Preamp, and most Effect models, Focus view offers an XY control that allows you to quickly adjust multiple simultaneous parameters by click-dragging to its five descriptively titled "Zones" on the screen. Each model's pre-configured zones consist of combinations of parameters that morph as you click and drag the "Lens Icon" cursor between them. **Tip**: Using the Focus View first can be a quick and easy way to dial in the overall settings of any amp or effect, which you can then fine-tune using the individual Edit Panel parameters. ![FocusView_Reverb-Native_Annotated.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a5c19a5d24572f7d557e0d42fb420d8b2154c571af2896d14dce9c63abaf6687/FocusView_Reverb-Native_Annotated.png?cb=c886a6af523ab0db5923b90dc759e1ee) The Focus View for a Reverb effect model 1. **Level Meters:** The plugin's Input (left) and Output (right) meters continue to measure the plugin's input and output signals in real time while the Focus View is displayed. When a Dynamics - Compressor and Gate type model's Focus panel is open, a gain reduction meter appears at the left---see [**Dynamics**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/the-focus-view.md#6f2875da-c347-489a-8178-2300af28d0bb) below. 2. **Zones:** Descriptive labels appear in each of the four corners and the center of the screen, indicating each zone and its corresponding sonic character. Each zone includes a different pre-configured combination of parameter values. As you drag the lens icon, you'll hear the sound morph as the parameter values change between the zone settings. Note that the center is the "home" zone, which contains the default factory parameter settings for the selected model. 3. **Model Image:** The main view of the screen displays a detailed image of the original gear the model is based on. 4. **Lens Icon:** Click and drag the lens icon toward the desired zone to adjust the settings. 5. **Sidebar Options:** * **User Default:** Once you've configured desirable parameter settings for the current model, you can assign them to be the User Default settings for the model, so that these are the initial default settings whenever you load the model in any preset. (Existing instances of this model in other presets are not affected.) Additionally, refer to [**Creating User Default Settings**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/building-and-editing-tones.md#8a49afab-601e-4148-8663-04420530740e). * **Factory Default:** This option is selectable if you've enabled the User Default feature; selecting this will clear your custom User Default and return the model to use its original Factory Default settings when you next use the model. * **Add to Favorites:** Once you've configured desirable parameter settings, set the preferred model bypass state, and assigned bypass and control assignments, tap this option to add a **Favorite** of the model, which will then be conveniently available within the Model Browser's Favorites category. See the [**Favorites**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/favorites.md) section for more info. * **"Based On" Information:** The read-only text at the bottom of the sidebar informs you of the specific gear on which the current model is based. 6. **Focus View Button:** With the desired block selected, click the Focus button ![The Focus Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_53278216904093d6e1fc3f930b2f81c6c4f64cc5bbb9c8dbfb212001a814c45e/Focus%20Button.png?cb=bf1b66772dae47d03fa3b5b9090c2b5c) to display the Focus view. When the Focus view is displayed, the button appears white---click the button again to exit Focus View. 7. **Parameters:**The Edit Panel continues to display all parameters for the currently selected model when Focus View is enabled. You'll see the parameter sliders/knobs adjust in real-time while dragging the Lens Icon. You can also manually adjust the Edit Panel's individual parameters to further dial in your sound. ### Amp and Preamp Focus View The Focus View for an Amp or Preamp is similar to that for an Effect model.^\*^ All the same descriptions in the preceding sections also apply to editing an Amp or Preamp's settings. ![FocusView-Amp_Native.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d6ba8c9a14ea57fc6e2b621e9e03e9af3cc4c4dbb8bac8ecac6765a06891f862/FocusView-Amp_Native.png?cb=f70c2a7eb02091dd1147cef931aae38b) The Focus View for an Amp model ^**\***^**Note:** Amp and Preamp Model Lists also include **Clone** type blocks, which offer their own Focus View window. See the **Clones** section below for details. ## Cab and Cab IRs For Cab models, the Focus View offers a graphical Mic position editor that lets you visually adjust the mic's position, distance, and angle relative to the current Cab's speaker (shown below on the left). Amp\>Cab Link and Cab\>Cab Link switches are also available in the sidebar for optional Cab block behaviors. When a Cab IR is loaded, its frequency plot is displayed, and its sidebar options are available (shown below on the right). Please see the [**Cab Block \> Focus View**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/cab-blocks-and-cab-irs.md) section for details. ![FocusView_CabModel.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e1c8e33e0f6ec6c72805bf9499f76d49797a594154f2c22747b33063c23331c7/FocusView_CabModel.png?cb=90ade72e5e205ae07205d4dca54578fe) The Focus View - Cab Model ![FocusView_IR.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b5b39bf3ecfb7f7f9ab8544fe62476befb0eb4301f9b406862d04310d0bc83c2/FocusView_IR.png?cb=683a3182f5c1b8309275e9dd58692e97) The Focus View - IR File ## Clones The Focus View for any Clone block (Amp, Amp+Cab, Preamp, or Distortion type Clone) displays the currently loaded Clone file's metadata screen, where you can view the Clone file's info. Note that the metadata text in this screen is not editable; it is optionally entered by the Clone's creator during the capture process, as covered in the [**Clones**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/proxytm-clones.md) section, and is saved individually with the Clone file, providing descriptive reference information. ![Clone Focus View.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a1073f897c55a458492b9450b124a5cdc23b78cd7d34873fa4ab7776e475fa60/Clone%20Focus%20View.png?cb=a307d151b9380702578f355c8c5c0337) The Focus View - Distortion Clone The above image shows a Distortion-type clone's Focus View. Amp+Cab, Preamp, and Distortion type Clones' Focus View offer the same features and parameters. The sidebar of the Focus View offers the same **User Default** , **Factory Default** , and **Add to Favorites** commands for Clones as for other Amp and Effect blocks (see descriptions above). ## EQs For EQ models (excluding the Acoustic Sim model), Focus View provides a graphic or parametric editor for the respective EQ types, as shown below. Click and drag the EQ band controls in the Focus View panel to make your adjustments. ![FocusView_GraphicEQ.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_95e280883ec7cb0ffd7c48bc31e6a72d7f1c49cdbb168d7cb5cc43b44a9a1da2/FocusView_GraphicEQ.png?cb=d981a298bc0f9d8887926e806c9f97a3) Focus View - Graphic EQ ![FocusView_ParametricEQ.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5f09a29f05feb0cb6a96327cc2436734ef5e80a3f86b181e6dba9e67d828beee/FocusView_ParametricEQ.png?cb=7668a6f6e4e376c1c03595f3291585de) Focus View - Graphic EQ ## Dynamics For any Dynamics - Compressor or Gate-type effect, a yellow Gain Reduction meter appears in the panel, providing a real-time visual reference of the amount of input signal attenuated by the current settings. ![FocusView_Compressor.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_500913dc554e19550d762827480cfdd79fe8fad2b4e4aced4b579ad9fe822fa0/FocusView_Compressor.png?cb=5b239b74db70c86a75528e916a804517) Focus View - Compressor with Gain Reduction meter --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # The Plugin Window Once Helix Stadium Native is inserted on your DAW track and launched, it appears in the host app's plugin window. The main plugin Signal Flow view is displayed by default, as described in the following sections. This page provides an overview of the main plugin window's Toolbar controls and panels. **Note:** Each DAW host application offers a set of plugin options within the "header" of its plugin window, such as plugin bypass, compare, automation options, and more. These can differ per DAW host---please consult your host app's documentation for details. ![MainPluginWindow_Annotated.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8e221a890d8c58eb85771a0d22efee887a0fa119fb89892ffe77335764499d32/MainPluginWindow_Annotated.png?cb=d6b66f956ddf2dab9787ef9135c5b042) The main Helix Stadium Native plugin window 1. **Toolbar:** Several plugin options are available in the top-right toolbar. ![Top Toolbar.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d6363d04291a37099e62383599ad1d02bbb33862d3f353d12e9228c05acdc6d5/Top%20Toolbar.png?cb=b3c83db5c399ce5edb4ad89adb94137d) The toolbar options * ![Log In - Account Controls](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e174f4961882afa524e0093ab98bbae09f3ad288331e4a0dc661cd6eeab03d20/My%20Account%20Controls.png?cb=2c489a7f1387c8944baa6c2622505c9e) **Log In/Account Menu:** Log In or visit [**Line 6 - Account**](https://line6.com/account/) to manage your Line 6 account. You must be logged in to your Line 6 account for computer authorization and deauthorization for the plugin license. See the following [**Account Options**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/the-plugin-window.md#acct-options) section. * ![Tuner Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9db3c3c9af26515b0b86a8bd2e0cb420247375982a48621947bc5e8a5d4889f6/Tuner%20Button.png?cb=db007f8071a1bd13d016fc61797daba2) **Tuner:** Click to display the included Tuner, which provides Needle and Strobe modes for easy and accurate tuning of your instrument. See [**Tuner**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/tuner.md). * ![MIDI Learn Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_2e2c3529f0988a7756c04f71490b18f5f8897a5c46227fe8c6a8c580813b27d0/MIDI%20Learn%20Button.png?cb=680a4dc14a25822bffc0a8d8aee7c74e) **MIDI Learn:** Enable MIDI Learn to quick-assign a software or hardware MIDI controller to a plugin parameter. See the [**MIDI Control**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/midi-control.md) page for details. * ![Automation button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_281fd454a34e0bffa32b0829e4184e7547a8781a5357925e2518f04701907cbc/Automation%20button.png?cb=33d42a65724d94d7c52ae5322fb18561) **Automation/Controller Panel:** Displays of the Automation/Controller panel in place of the Edit panel on the lower portion of the plugin window. This panel provides options for creating Automation, MIDI, and Snapshot control assignments for plugin parameters, as well as a table for easy reference of all the presets' assignments. See the [**Automation/Controller Panel**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/automation-controller-panel.md) page. * ![Help - About Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_19340cf771cdfd0dd564fabfd269cf8ecf1040def07b82d30a48c4b7e28860db/Help%20Button.png?cb=1963fdc002be8a9015a2851ea3d02d2d) **Help/About:**Opens a menu containing the following commands. ![Help-Abput Menu.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b83bcf831120e628dc6288248ee85755fefe3aaaafc5bb74b822e546b6aa7676/Help-Abput%20Menu.png?cb=cb51a0051ccddc019203bc44492464c7) Help/About Menu **About:** Provides the installed plugin's version number and legal information. **Online Manual:** Opens this online *Owner's Manual* that you are now reading. **Support:** Takes you to the Line 6 online Support page. * ![Plugin Settings Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_2a6bce1a2fecfc04849f327da1c0c8e6324c13e0bfba4352e2ce1a7ae3512eea/Plugin%20Settings%20Button.png?cb=c626d007862b30c3e49eb8ed62aea028) **Plugin Settings:** Open the Settings window to configure various plugin options. See the following [**Plugin** **Settings**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/the-plugin-window.md#plugin-settings) section. 2. **Plugin Controls:**Several primary plugin controls are available on this toolbar row. ![Plugin Controls.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_93bf0ac001d50011a823728dc9137d7be5f2e9f8a4246570c110dc81bd1b3697/Plugin%20Controls.png?cb=c965a4553184e3b959defd736e124076) The Plugin Controls * ![A-B Compare Controls](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e50ebcf8ef019c21fe81d3614dca9e85afd3d687112d1df84a4d78e2aad60419/A-B%20Compare%20Control.png?cb=a093abe55efe613890dcc1efdf8941af) **A/B Compare:** Use to quickly compare your recent edits versus the current preset's previous state. See the following [**A/B Compare**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/the-plugin-window.md#ab-compare)section. * ![Undo-Redo Buttons](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_3e85d03f3a7d08b4e0033387b208664138e76ac42ffd5d2df80c5c958f85ac87/Undo%20Buttons.png?cb=f4337ff8312358afe89ff5f95c034044) **Undo/Redo:** Use the buttons to undo or redo the most recent edits to the current preset. See [**Undo/Redo**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/the-plugin-window.md#undo-redo). * ![Preset Menu Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c1a9350dae8a8bbfcf9ed7e3bbf8375d4da39c2fc8ea41172da4ae31df6cdc9a/Preset%20Menu%20Button.png?cb=7f440bda59ca463fc4bcfcaa1845110e) **Preset Menu and Browser:** Open the Preset Menu to create a New Preset, select a Preset Template, or Save, Rename, and Open presets. Click the arrow buttons ![Next-Previous Preset buttons](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_6b23fd5abe2c8e9d33304a4daacba983ae065da4448b3d14fe35fbbf453c9272/Next-Previous%20Preset.png?cb=64c4d3ce947a0b74de81d86ca6b20c55) to instantly load the next/previous preset. The name of the currently loaded preset is displayed in the field. Click the preset name to open the Preset Browser. See the [**Presets**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/presets.md) page for details. * ![Snapshot Menu Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d93f7496c81930c20de4d0daaff12c4f0b89f639e67f9c436ac6b7716f205786/Snapshot%20Menu%20Button.png?cb=1ea4dec0a51a5005da36ec1b64ff6ecf) **Snapshot Panel:** Click to open the Snapshot panel where you can select any of the current preset's snapshots 1\~8, as well as manage them. See [**Working with Snapshots**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/working-with-snapshots.md). * ![Preset Clip Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_56d7229e02e8ba285cc972ffaeee3f810753e5b674ba6baa19d87362999bd1d4/Preset%20Clip%20Button.png?cb=9c7cec2f6afa91682c266698a8758042) **Preset Clip:** For factory presets, click to open the Preset Clip player panel. Every factory preset includes a unique dry guitar or bass riff so you can hear it in context. You can also set the clip to repeat-play and adjust preset parameters to audition your changes in real-time. See [**Preset Clips**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/preset-clips-and-preset-info.md). * ![Preset Info button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_53974da5fc97920e82978708f1db72670efd7255235aac731cf9e5b479825161/Preset%20Info%20button.png?cb=d4d76cb173fa7b9a80d730f41864ae4a) **Preset Info:** Click to display the Preset Info text window. All factory presets include notes on how to use them best. Freely type in info for your own presets, such as the guitar/pickup selection, creative snapshot assignments, tips/tricks, gear diatribes, haiku lines, etc. See [**Preset Info**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/preset-clips-and-preset-info.md). * ![Tempo-Controls.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c14ca6dca348e01f7c2cf1481482537f0a5ee08661291122cec837d889c90647/Tempo-Controls.png?cb=12599702b731fee79f4952e54dfabb1f) **Tempo Controls** : The current plugin tempo is displayed here in the BPM field, to which effects' delay repeats and modulation rates can be synced. Click the control to open its menu to select the preferred Tempo option. By default, the plugin tempo is set to **Host** , where the tempo follows your DAW project's tempo. Optionally, a tempo can be set manually as **Per Preset** or **Per Snapshot** . See [**Tempo Controls**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/the-plugin-window.md#tempo-controls) below. 3. **Input \& Output Level Controls and Meters:** Use these controls and meters to adjust and monitor the plugin's input (on the left) and output (on the right) to optimize the signal. Note that the clip indicators at the top of each meter light red if the signal is too high. See the [**Input \& Output Meters**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/the-plugin-window.md#io-meters) section below. 4. **The Home - Signal Flow Panel:** This main area of the window offers two main stereo paths, each with multiple split and parallel stereo path options, for adding amp, cab, effect, and mix routing blocks to create your preset. All blocks can be dragged to change their positions in the paths, with numerous editing options available. See [**Building and Creating Tones**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/building-and-editing-tones.md). 5. **Edit Panel and Automation/Controller Panels:** This lower area provides an Edit Panel, including the Model Browser for loading models into your presets (see the [**Edit Panel**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/edit-panel.md) page), and a parameter display for editing the selected block. When the Automation/Controller control at the top of the window is enabled, the Automation/Controller is displayed in place of the Edit panel, where Automation, MIDI, and Snapshot control assignments can be created and managed (see the [**Automation/Controller Assign Panel**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/automation-controller-panel.md) page). ## Account Options Clicking the toolbar's Account button expands the menu, which offers log in/log out, computer authorization, and management options for your [**Line 6 account**](https://line6.com/account). * **Log In/Log Out:** (An Internet connection is required for sign-in and authorization.) When not currently logged in, select Log In and enter your Line 6 account username and password (or you can choose to create an account if you haven't already). Creating an account and logging in are necessary to initially authorize your computer to use Helix Stadium Native. Please see [**Installation and Authorization**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/installation-and-authorization.md) for details. * The account button displays a green check mark ![Account button - signed in.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_19bb866e527dff0091abe4a1f98318a0211733dcc5c35a30515702946791811a/Account%20button%20-%20signed%20in.png?cb=61af36c4271d41354d76b9581fcd32b2) to indicate when logged in to your Line 6 account. * When logged in, you can select Log Out to log out of your Line 6 account. * **Authorize/Deauthorize Computer:** Once logged in, your computer is automatically authorized; authorization is necessary for the Helix Stadium Native plugin to run. While logged in, the **Deauthorize Computer**option is selectable. Deauthorizing is only necessary to free up one of your four available authorizations, such as if removing the Stadium Native plugin from your computer to use on another. * **Manage Account:** (Appears in the menu when logged in only.) Takes you to the [**Line 6 account**](https://line6.com/account) web page, where you can view and manage your account, purchases, authorizations, and more. ## Plugin Settings Click the toolbar's Settings button ![Plugin Settings Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_2a6bce1a2fecfc04849f327da1c0c8e6324c13e0bfba4352e2ce1a7ae3512eea/Plugin%20Settings%20Button.png?cb=c626d007862b30c3e49eb8ed62aea028) to open the Settings dialog, where you can configure several plugin options to best suit your workflow. The Settings dialog includes two tabbed panels: **Presets/IRs/Clones** , which includes directory paths for these file assets, and **Hardware Compatibility**, which includes options for preset handling between Helix Stadium Native and Helix Stadium family devices. Settings reset options are also available. **Note:**All Settings are global and affect all instances of the plugin. ### Presets/IRs/Clones Tab These options allow you to set the designated folder for **User Presets** , **User IRs** , and **User Clones** asset files. You can optionally click the button to the left of each path and change each to a different computer directory. ![Presets-IRs-Clones Settings.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_3a14948b075b84218d64957cda6b4495d5ad46c4bd843d734daca8bb3ca25b84/Presets-IRs-Clones%20Settings.png?cb=ecec765eb01347852e8b21b70f6c398a) Settings \> Presets/IRs/Clones tab Wherever you have these paths set is where Helix Stadium Native defaults to saving Preset, IR, and Clone asset files. These files must be saved in the designated folders to appear in the Preset, IR, and Clone file browser lists. If you are exporting these types of files from Helix Stadium/Helix/HX/Helix Native for Helix Stadium Native to use, you'll want to export or copy them directly into each of these folders. * **User Presets:** Defines the path where Stadium Native uses to save and locate User Preset files. Also, see [**Presets**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/presets.md). * **User IRs:** Defines the path where the Model Browser - Cab block - IR Selector references. Also, see [**Cab IRs**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/cab-blocks-and-cab-irs.md). * **User Clones:** Defines the path where Helix Stadium Native Proxy Clone files are saved, and where the Model Browser - Amp, Preamp, or Distortion block - Clone Selector references. Also, see [**Proxy Clones**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/proxytm-clones.md). * **Check for Updates:**Checks the Line 6 website for updates to Helix Stadium Native. (This button appears in both tabs.) * **Restore Factory Settings:**Opens a dialog with options to reset various plugin settings to factory defaults, as shown below. (This button appears in both tabs.) ![Settings_ResetDefaultsDialog.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_3c2e72e59994b02042a30089f9978caa9693ea2fcc93987cdcd64c45d30f965c/Settings_ResetDefaultsDialog.png?cb=3639048437b01afb1bd5af05d6471d6e) The Restore Factory Settings dialog **Warning!** **There is no Undo for these Restore actions.** Check the desired options in the dialog and click ![The Restore Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_abb67b736bb67a0a08a21ee4ceb42388dc64705decadb618f459ffebf4948b17/The%20Restore%20Button.png?cb=18dfa04bb64640fa5587de3f2ac88e23) to apply them: * **Remove all Favorites:** Clears all current Favorites from the plugin's Favorites library. Note that you can do an export of your current [**Favorites**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/favorites.md) to create a backup ***before*** choosing to remove them. * **Remove all Model Defaults:** Clears all User Model Defaults you have created, returning all models to their factory default parameter settings. Also, see [**Creating User Model Defaults**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/building-and-editing-tones.md#8a49afab-601e-4148-8663-04420530740e). * **Restore Preferences to Factory Defaults:** Resets all settings in both the **Presets/IRs/Clones** and **Hardware Compatibility** tabs of the Settings dialog to their factory defaults. ### Hardware Compatibility Tab This tab allows you to enable or disable the Helix Stadium Native plugin's hardware limits to maintain preset compatibility with Helix Stadium family devices. Basically, keep the default settings so the presets you create in Helix Stadium Native can be imported and used on both Helix Stadium and Helix Stadium Native devices. Setting the **Compatibility Mode** to "**Off** " allows you to exceed the Stadium hardware minimum and maximum block-type limits in your Helix Stadium Native presets.^\*^ **Compatibility Mode:** Sets the Helix Stadium Native's Hardware Compatibility mode (or "HC Mode" for short). ![Plugin Settings.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_145b88f09962c8587601988afd4c268728b77dcae2f0cc71be4689ec7cbb56e6/Plugin%20Settings.png?cb=c043ee6dfa50b4b4e427ba5379aa68c9) Settings \> Hardware Compatibility tab * **Helix Stadium / Helix Stadium XL mode** (the factory default)**:** Presets saved in the plugin are fully compatible with Stadium devices. Please refer to the [**Hardware Compatibility DSP Limits**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/hardware-compatibility-dsp-limits.md) page for details of the block, path, and preset limits. * **Off mode** : All limitations on the maximum counts of Amp, Cab, Poly Pitch, and Clone-type blocks inherent to Stadium hardware are removed for presets in the plugin.^\*^ Just remember, this also makes it possible to create a preset in a single plugin instance that can place significant CPU demands on your computer system. Creating a preset that exceeds the Stadium hardware limits also means the preset cannot be translated and imported onto a Helix Stadium family device. ^\*^**Important!** The **Hardware Compatibility - Off** option is not included in the **Helix Stadium Native Intro** version. Presets created with the complete Helix Stadium Native or with the original Helix Native with Hardware Compatibility "Off" will be attempted to be translated within hardware DSP and block limits. If translation is not possible, the preset will not be opened. * **Set As Default button:** Optionally, click to set the current Compatibility Mode setting as the default for all plugin instances. (Not available on the **Intro** plugin version.) **Incompatible Blocks:** Sets the behavior when attempting to load a preset that does not match the current HC mode. For example, if you save a preset in Helix Stadium Native with HC mode **Off** that exceeds hardware limits (or attempt to load an original Helix Native preset of this type) while the plugin currently has Helix Stadium/Stadium XL HC mode enabled.^†^ * **Prompt** (the default)**:**A prompt is displayed (Full Helix Stadium Native License version only) with options to either change the HC mode to match the preset file or to attempt to translate the preset to the current HC mode, as shown below. (Note that checking the prompt's lower box labeled "Don't ask me again" allows you to configure either of the following two options as a constant behavior.) ![Hardware Compatibility Preset Prompt.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_24db678cb769512775662420e54eeac69499cd3f5c15acd95012cfeae6fdbbf9/Hardware%20Compatibility%20Preset%20Prompt.png?cb=0a04bbbe24c35255b018eb6bd39ab3bd) Prompt when trying to load a preset that does not match the current Hardware Compatibility Mode * **Change to match file:**No prompt is displayed, and HC mode automatically changes to match the preset file. * **Translate file to current mode:**No prompt is displayed, and it attempts to translate the preset to match the current HC mode. (Note that, depending on the content of the preset, it may not be able to be translated, in which case an error is displayed and the preset is not loaded.) ^**†**^**Note:** The original Helix Native plugin includes HC modes for each of the original Helix and HX devices, as well as an **Off** mode. Its presets (v3.50 and later) saved in any device mode are compatible with Helix Stadium Native. Presets saved in its HC Mode **Off** mode that exceed Stadium hardware limits behave the same as those saved in Helix Stadium Native with HC Mode **Off**. As noted above, the **Helix Stadium Native Intro** version does not support the Hardware Compatibility "Off" mode. Therefore, presets that exceed Helix Stadium hardware DSP limits cannot be loaded in the **Intro** version. **Non-Functioning Blocks:** Presets exported from Helix Stadium hardware, including those within exported Setlists, may include Send, Return, FX Loop, and/or Looper-type blocks, all of which are non-functional in Helix Stadium Native. When set to **Enabled** , these block types are removed when opening any preset that includes them. Also, when importing a Setlist exported from a Helix Stadium device, the **Enabled** setting automatically removes these blocks across all its presets on import.^‡^ (**Disabled**is the default setting, where it does not remove hardware blocks.) ^**‡**^**Note:** When importing a Setlist from an original Helix or HX device or the original Helix Native, non-functional blocks are ***always*** removed from all its presets on import, regardless of this setting. Also see [**Importing Setlists**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/presets.md#3798a0cd-a25b-4a48-8a35-ce82060848d1). **Show Hardware Assignments:** Presets that include Helix Stadium hardware-specific bypass and controller assignments (e.g., an EXP Pedal for a Wah or a Footswitch for a block bypass) are non-functional in Helix Stadium Native. Setting this option to **Show assignments** displays the assignments within the Automation/Controller Assign panel for reference. When set to **Hide assignments** , these assignments remain hidden (the default setting). Also, see [**Automation/Controller Assign Panel**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/automation-controller-panel.md). **Auto Assignment:** When set to **Enabled** , any time a "pedal-based" model (Wah, Volume, or Pitch Wham) is added to a preset's Signal Flow, a hardware, EXP pedal controller assignment (plus a toe switch bypass assignment, for a Wah) is automatically created, following the auto-assignment behavior of Helix Stadium devices, for greater hardware compatibility. If you prefer not to have these auto-assignments created, keep this as **Disabled**(the default setting). ## A/B Compare The set of A/B Compare controls allows you to temporarily store all your current plugin preset's parameter settings as a starting point for further fine-tuning and then easily compare new, edited settings with the original settings. To follow is an example of using the A/B Compare. **Note:**DAW host applications often include their own A/B Compare feature for effects plugins. However, since Helix Stadium Native is a complex plugin with numerous parameters, it is recommended that you use this A/B Compare for its settings. 1. **Start with the A button selected (the A or B button that appears "lit" is the one currently selected** ![A-B Compare button with A Selected](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_0bd90e47249a9ac33f5734ca7f25ca585b6e9d147d13618e0597b661034a8a17/A-B%20Compare_A%20Selected.png?cb=d65c558171ea44897fd570c097094c35) **.** Once you have loaded a preset or created a Helix Stadium Native tone to your liking, click the arrow icon button to **Copy To B** ---you'll see the **B** button blink. ![A-B_CopyToB.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_0a95ab262463ad396fa58d9e123759dc981b389bfd015d76632dd1a16a7a81fe/A-B_CopyToB.png?cb=129013031c72f9c80431e4754a6588be) Copy to B * This copies all the plugin's current parameter settings to the B location, providing you with a stored "starting point" for further adjustments. 2. **Select the B button and edit your tone as desired** ![A-B Compare button with B Selected](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b5d4c12745c367b14049b053d2c390393c895e55004c747def18803a19f78d89/A-B%20Compare_B%20Selected.png?cb=e55d057bff386a516f7af05d89995bc6) **.**Make any edits you like within the plugin---adjust sliders, bypass/move/add/clear blocks, add/edit/remove automation \& controller assignments, or even load a different preset. 3. **You can now switch between both settings by clicking the A or B button while playing your track and audibly comparing them.** * Optionally, while the B button is selected, you can make further adjustments and continue comparing to your original A settings. 4. **If you still prefer your original settings, simply switch back to setting A.** 5. **If you prefer your edited settings with the B button selected, copy the B settings to the A location by pressing the Copy To A button.** ![A-B_CopyToA.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ddbb8ab6972389373bd325c1bd0c2aea5fe3ee9955036bb9e99b1fe61ab988dd/A-B_CopyToA.png?cb=09ff25c8e2b7098fc85da32976ee21e3) Copy to A These settings are now stored in both **A** and **B** as your new "starting point," from which you can repeat steps 3-4 for further fine-tuning. All your current **A** and **B**settings remain stored within the plugin instance. ## Undo/Redo Undo and Redo are available for most edit actions performed within the current plugin instance, accessible via the Toolbar's Undo and Redo buttons ![Undo-Redo Buttons](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_3e85d03f3a7d08b4e0033387b208664138e76ac42ffd5d2df80c5c958f85ac87/Undo%20Buttons.png?cb=f4337ff8312358afe89ff5f95c034044) . The Undo/Redo history is tracked per loaded preset and per plugin instance; it is cleared when a new preset is loaded, when the plugin instance is removed, and when your host project is closed. **Undo/Redo is available for most edit actions, including:** * Parameter changes * Snapshot changes * Changing block models * Signal Flow view changes (adding/clearing blocks, changing path structure, etc.) * Plugin Input and Output Level knob changes * A/B Compare functions (see preceding section) **Actions** ***not*** **available for Undo/Redo include the following:** * Preset loading * Tempo mode (Host Sync, Per Preset, Per Snapshot) selection * Adding, editing, and clearing automation, MIDI, and snapshot controller assignments * Edit actions performed via automation controllers and MIDI CC messages * Pasting a copied snapshot * Changes to any settings within the Plugin Settings dialog **Note:**Host DAW applications typically offer their own Undo/Redo commands. However, due to the complex architecture of Helix Stadium Native, this type of host command typically cannot track most actions performed within the plugin. Therefore, we suggest you use only the plugin's Undo/Redo for restoring its edit actions. ## Input \& Output Meters \& Controls The Input \& Output Meters on the left and right sides of the main plugin window provide real-time measurements of the signal levels entering and exiting the plugin, and the knobs above each meter adjust the corresponding levels. ![In-Out Meters.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_989e49fecaabfa0d7020aaa72bc96f8059009add6edeceddf108ac08f225d85c/In-Out%20Meters.png?cb=a05e08397d10758f8a00b09f1f48b7d0) Input \& Output Meters * The peak level value is displayed at the top of each meter for reference; click on the value to reset it. * Use the Input Level knob to adjust the signal entering the plugin, from -120 to +18dB.^\*^ Please also see the **Getting Started \>** [**Optimizing the Input Level**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/getting-started.md)section. * Use the Output Level knob to adjust the signal exiting the plugin, from -120 to +18dB.^\*^ * Clipping, as indicated by the Clip Indicator at the top of the meter lighting up red, should always be avoided for both the plugin's input and output. ^**\***^**Note:** The Input and Output level settings are saved per preset. **Option+click** (macOS) or **Control+click** (Windows) on a Level knob to reset it to its default, "0 dB" (unity gain) setting. ## Tempo Controls Use the toolbar's Tempo controls ![Tempo-Controls.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c14ca6dca348e01f7c2cf1481482537f0a5ee08661291122cec837d889c90647/Tempo-Controls.png?cb=12599702b731fee79f4952e54dfabb1f) to configure the desired plugin Tempo options, to which Delay and Modulation effects can follow.The current plugin tempo is displayed in the BPM field. By default, the plugin tempo is set to **Host** , where the tempo follows your DAW project's tempo. Click the control to open its menu to select the preferred Tempo option. Choose **Per Preset** or **Per Snapshot,** then manually enter a specific tempo to save with your preset, as shown below. When these options are selected, the BPM field is editable, or you can use the TAP button to its right to "tap" in the desired rate. ![Tempo Menu.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_6fe966cdd4bbf176f9d4f735909141afe0454c62c6a581a46ba23b4e934b6ca6/Tempo%20Menu.png?cb=9249eeef208ee6dcdcb0a535a5f5cfea) The Tempo menu Delay (Time), Modulation (Speed, Rate), and some Reverb (Decay) effect parameters can be optionally set to sync to the plugin tempo. Choose a specific note division value for these parameter types using its Edit Panel slider or knob. See the [**Effect Blocks \> Parameters**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/effect-blocks.md) section. --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Tuner Now there's no excuse to not be in tune before capturing that otherwise perfect recording! Helix Stadium Native includes a convenient, built-in tuner with both Needle and Strobe display modes. ![Tuner Needle.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e2ec456cc99e750c1ae5a451ee07de18f57a17c2b5e63635213bc62c72bddbe9/Tuner%20Needle.png?cb=573eaf329dfb4e66f44af61f594ac935) The Tuner - Needle mode ![Tuner Strobe.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_28516b41d8216f03cf72c82e13f81a14f7eda55bb21adbeb8f4b476a2b952787/Tuner%20Strobe.png?cb=99f49496cc2f21569e926fecf7beb894) The Tuner - Strobe mode ## To Use the Tuner 1. With your guitar or bass signal routed into the DAW application's audio track where Helix Stadium Native plugin is inserted, activate the track's "input monitoring" feature to feed your live input into the plugin. See [**Live Input Monitoring**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/getting-started.md#dd14fe0f-2683-493a-adcb-d8e026856291). 2. Click the toolbar **Tuner** button ![the toolbar Tuner button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_407b03d8ec1c81c358347fb3ba26dca294a682087cc72b5265f59fec9dcd19d6/Tuner%20Button.png?cb=db007f8071a1bd13d016fc61797daba2) to display the Tuner. **Note:** All tuner parameter settings are applied globally, to all future instances of the Helix Stadium Native plugin. 3. Pluck an individual string on your instrument, and the detected target note is displayed. View the real-time tuner display for your string's proximity to the target note pitch. 4. Click the **Needle** or **Strobe** button ![Needle-Strobe buttons](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a0de0fcec579416b47394d838bb1e751868fcc00a135a06363490d451fab8f60/Needle-Strobe%20buttons.png?cb=fdbd3d9a29c1ce0b9b283eccdaa3fa8d) for the desired tuner display mode: * **Needle:** A vertical needle moves left (flat) or right (sharp) to indicate the pitch of your instrument. The needle, flat/sharp arrow indicators, and background change colors to show how far the string is from the target pitch. The display offers a range of ±50 cents. When the needle centers and the background lights green, your string is in tune, as shown above left. * **Strobe:** A checkered background moves left (flat) or right (sharp) to indicate the pitch of your source instrument. The strobe background changes colors to indicate how far the string is from the target pitch. When the strobe background stops moving, your string is in tune, as shown above right. * The **Cents** indicator at the top left of the screen provides a real-time, numerical measurement of your string's pitch relative to the target pitch. 3. Click the toolbar **Tuner** button ![the toolbar Tuner button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_407b03d8ec1c81c358347fb3ba26dca294a682087cc72b5265f59fec9dcd19d6/Tuner%20Button.png?cb=db007f8071a1bd13d016fc61797daba2) to exit the Tuner and return to the main Edit screen. ## Tuner Settings Several additional settings in the Tuner are provided, as listed below. | **Tuner Setting** | **Description** | |---------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Indicator** | Determines whether the note indicator displays flats or sharps. | | **Cents** | Numerically displays the tuning in negative or positive cents (a cent is one-hundredth of a semi-tone) from the displayed target note. | | **Reference Pitch** | Optionally, change the tuner's reference pitch to one other than the standard 440 Hz, from 425 to 455 Hz. | | **Offsets** | Tuning certain strings slightly sharp or flat relative to concert tuning can improve intonation for some instruments. String offsets calibrate the tuner so that these slightly out-of-tune pitches sound more "in tune." String 6 is low E, and String 1 is high E. To apply offsets, click the Offsets button to activate the feature, then select the desired string and dial in the offset amount in cents (+ or -). | | **Output** | Select what is heard from the plugin's output while the tuner is displayed: * **Processed:** The input signal is processed by the signal flow of the plugin's current preset. * **Muted:** The input signal is muted. | --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # U.S. Registered Trademarks List All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners, and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 is associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development. 5150 and EVH are registered trademarks EVH Brands, LLC. Acoustic is a registered trademark of GTRC Services, Inc. Aguilar is a registered trademark David Boonshoft. AKG and Digitech Whammy are registered trademarks of Harman International Industries, Inc. Arbiter is a registered trademark of Sound City Amplification LLC. Ashly is a registered trademark of Ashly Audio, Inc. Audix is a registered trademark of Audix Corporation. Binson, Dytronics, LA-2A and Teletronix are registered trademarks of Universal Audio, Inc. Beyerdynamic is a registered trademark of Beyer Dynamic GmbH \& Co. KG. Bogner and Überschall are registered trademarks of Bogner Amplification. BOSS, Space Echo, and Roland are registered trademarks of Roland Corporation U.S. Carvin is a registered trademark of Carvin Corp. Celestion is a registered trademark of KEF Celestion Corporation. Colorsound is a registered trademark of Sola Sound Limited Corporation, UK. Cry Baby, Dunlop, Echoplex, Fuzz Face, MXR and Uni-Vibe are registered trademarks of Dunlop Manufacturing, Inc. CTS is a registered trademark of Avixa, Inc. Darkglass and Microtubes are registered trademarks of Darkglass Electronics, TMI Douglas Castro. Diezel is a registered trademark of Diezel GMBH. Divided By 13 and ÷13 are registered trademarks of Two-Rock Amplifiers, LLC. DOD is a registered trademark of DOD Electronics Corporation. Dr. Z is a registered trademark of Dr. Z Amps, Inc. EarthQuaker Devices and Plumes are registered trademarks of EarthQuaker Devices, LLC. EBS is a registered trademark according of EBS Holding. EchoRec is a registered trademark of Burkett, Mary A. Electrix is a trademark or registered trademark of IVL Technologies, Ltd. in the U.S. and/or other jurisdictions. Electro-Harmonix is a registered trademark of New Sensor Corp. Electro-Voice is a registered trademark of Bosch Security Systems, Inc. EMG is a registered trademark of EMG, Inc. Eminence is a registered trademark of Eminence Speaker, LLC. Engl is a registered trademark of Beate Ausflug and Edmund Engl. Epiphani is a registered trademark of Epifani Custom Sound Systems, Inc. Eventide is a registered trademark of Eventide Inc. Fane is a trademark of Fane International Ltd. Fender, Twin Reverb, Super Reverb, Bassman, Champ, Deluxe Reverb, Princeton Reverb, and Sunn are registered trademarks of Fender Musical Instruments Corp. Fulltone is a registered trademark of Fulltone Musical Products, Inc. Gallien-Krueger is a registered trademark of Gallien Technology, Inc. Gibson, Maestro, MESA/Boogie, Lone Star, PowerHouse, and Rectifier are registered trademarks of Gibson, Inc. Heil Sound is a registered trademark of Heil Sound Ltd. Hiwatt is a registered trademark of 9574565 Canada Inc. Ibanez is a registered trademark of Hoshino, Inc. JBL is a registered trademark of Harman International Industries, Incorporated. Jensen is a registered trademark of Electronics Trademark Holding Company LLC. JHS Pedals is a registered trademark of JHS Pedals LLC. Keeley Electronics is a registered trademark of Keeley Electronics Incorporated. Klon is a registered trademark of Klon, LLC. Korg is a registered trademark of Korg, Inc. Leslie is a registered trademark of Suzuki Musical Instrument Manufacturing Co. Ltd. Marshall is a registered trademark of Marshall Group AB. Matchless is a registered trademark of Matchless, LLC. MAXON is a registered trademark of Nisshin Onpa Co., Ltd. Moog and Moogerfooger are registered trademarks of Moog Music, Inc. Musitronics is a registered trademark of Mark S. Simonsen. Mu-Tron is a registered trademark of Henry Zajac. Neumann is a registered trademark of Georg Neumann GmbH. Nobels is a registered trademark of Kurzke, Bernhard, DBA Music Center Bernhard Kurzke Individual Fed Rep Germany. Omega Ampworks is a trademark of Omega Ampworks LLC. Orange is a registered trademark of Orange Brand Services Limited. Park is a registered trademark of AMP RX LLC. Paul Reed Smith and Archon are registered trademarks of Paul Reed Smith Guitars, LP. Peavey and Invective are registered trademarks of Peavey Electronics Corporation. Pro Co is a registered trademark of Rapco International, Inc. Revv is a registered trademark of Revv Amplification Inc. RMC is a registered trademark of Richard McClish. Royer is a registered trademark of Bulldog Audio, Inc. DBA Rover Labs. Sennheiser is a registered trademark of Sennheiser Electronic GmbH \& Co. KG. Shure is a registered trademark of Shure Inc. Silvertone is a registered trademark of Samick Music Corporation. Supro is a registered trademark of DAG Audio Group LLC. TC Electronic is a registered trademark of MUSIC Group IP Ltd. Tech21 is a registered trademark of Tech21 Licensing Ltd. Timmy is a registered trademark of Paul Cochrane AKA PAULCAUDIO. Trainwreck is a registered trademark of of Scott Alan Fischer and Mona Fischer. Tube Screamer is a registered trademark of Hoshino Gakki Co. Ltd. Tycobrahe is a registered trademark of Kurt Stier. Vox is a registered trademark of VOX AMPLIFICATION LTD. Way Huge is a registered trademark of Saucy Inc. Xotic is a registered trademark of Prosound Communications, Inc. Yamaha is a registered trademark of Yamaha Corporation. Z.Vex and Box of Rock are trademarks of ZVEX Effects. --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Welcome to Helix Stadium Native Welcome to **Line 6** ^**®**^**Helix** ^**®**^**Stadium Native** software, one of the most powerful and flexible native, multi-processing audio plugins ever created, for use with all major DAW host applications on macOS and Windows^®^ systems. Helix Stadium Native includes all the same Amps, Cabs, and Effects models as the highly acclaimed Helix Stadium XL devices (sans the device's Looper models). The use of Stadium Amp, Preamp, Distortion effect Clones, and Cab IRs is also supported. But Stadium Native isn't just for guitarists; it is also ideal for producers and engineers, sound designers, film/TV/game composers, electronic musicians, and anyone else looking to craft new, exciting sounds and special effects. Helix Stadium Native offers an intuitive user interface, making it quick and easy to build, edit, and navigate presets. **Tip:** Remember that presets are compatible with both the Helix Stadium Native plugin and Helix Stadium devices, allowing you to take your tones from studio to stage.^\*^ See the [**Presets**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/presets.md) page for details. ^\*^Note that model support in the Helix Stadium Native Intro version is limited to its list of available Amps, Cabs, and Effects, as covered in the following section. **This guide covers the features \& functionality of Helix Stadium Native plugin version 1.4.**Watch the following video for what's new in Helix Stadium devices for the version 1.4 update. The Helix Stadium Native plugin v1.4 also now includes the same new amp and effect models, as well as numerous feature improvements. ## Helix Stadium Native License Versions Helix Stadium Native is available as a single download software installer. Once the installed plugin is launched, you have three different license options for using it: * **Helix Stadium Native Full License:** The full, paid plugin license version, including the same set of astounding amps, cabs, and effects as included within the latest Line 6 Helix Stadium hardware multi-effects units. A purchase of the full license and initial online authorization is required. * **Helix Stadium Native Trial License:** A full-featured 15-Day trial version license is available for your initial installation at no cost. An initial online Trial authorization is required. After 15 days, you can choose to purchase the complete Helix Stadium Native version license or allow it to revert to the Helix Stadium Native Intro license, as described below. * **Helix Stadium Native Intro License:** A no-cost version of the plugin, including a select subset of the Full licensed version's amps, cabs, and effects. When launching the plugin, you can choose the Intro version. Alternatively, if you select the Trial license version, once its 15-Day run time expires, the plugin reverts to the limited Intro version. The Intro version can be used for free indefinitely or upgraded at any time by purchasing a Full license online. Please see the following video. ### Helix Stadium Native Versions Comparison **Note:**The 15-Day Trial license version, while active, includes the same models and features as the Full license version, as shown below. For the current, complete list of Helix Stadium amp, cab, and effect models, see the [**Helix Stadium Model List**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/block-types.md#model-list). | **Model Category** | **Helix Stadium Native Full** **(and 15-Day Trial)** | **Helix Stadium Native Intro** | |---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Amps** ![Amp block Icon](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_dafae9e143dfe8d31fae72f14baaf4b64fadf2d6c62e32ecd8cc77b100931ad2/Amp%20block%20Icon.png?cb=0a14b0215b7d72557d1668f21af4210f) | 130+ (over 178 amp channels) Agoura™ and HX^®^ Amp Models | 5 (9 amp channels), all Agoura Amp Models: * US Luxe Black * Essex TB30CC * Brit 2203MV * Revv^®^ 120 Red * Ampeg^®^ SVT^®^-50th Anniversary | | **Cabs** ![Cab block Icon](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_48b1bc88c243c4ebcff243693253e7a008f88f4395399bc8ac02778ceff16d98/Cab%20block%20Icon.png?cb=41767528d8a2a61d8692b5c0f380c48c) | 46 | 5 Matching Cabs: * 1x12 US Deluxe * 2x12 Silver Bell * 4x12 1960 T75 * 4x12 Brit V30 * Ampeg 810 SVT AV | | **IR Loading** ![IR block Icon](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a5130e5366a697fb2e1eea45dad8d31b7bed24514412a760f7b1cab056b0dc94/IR%20block%20Icon.png?cb=61b6f633ecdac533766622dd37e79678) | ![check mark](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_afd9902faf264b731ad9f3e63066f27f1ac8ba0c18f2b44c042c2e5f7bc9d98f/atlassian-check_mark?cb=a10212e1c1021c5194f7535b6843f955) | ![check mark](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_afd9902faf264b731ad9f3e63066f27f1ac8ba0c18f2b44c042c2e5f7bc9d98f/atlassian-check_mark?cb=a10212e1c1021c5194f7535b6843f955) | | **Stadium Proxy™ Clone Loading** ![Proxy Clone Amp Icon](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ba92ab254de2dd852ac2869d463a761a0703f3323a32d8c81ef735e78deef962/Clone_Amp-Cab_BlockIcon.png?cb=4c58014b66de9820b3592d8d97bbe455) | ![check mark](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_afd9902faf264b731ad9f3e63066f27f1ac8ba0c18f2b44c042c2e5f7bc9d98f/atlassian-check_mark?cb=a10212e1c1021c5194f7535b6843f955) | ![check mark](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_afd9902faf264b731ad9f3e63066f27f1ac8ba0c18f2b44c042c2e5f7bc9d98f/atlassian-check_mark?cb=a10212e1c1021c5194f7535b6843f955) | | **Distortions** ![Distortion block Icon.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_150a9a9a87fa44e32884f4b7030843d278c5265d40736726b4220c921b1ebe6a/Distortion%20block%20Icon.png?cb=b0d7973eecff1a9f531588bf052ca821) | 65+ | * Scream 808 * Minotaur * Ratatouille * Dark Dove Fuzz | | **Modulations** ![Chorus block Icon](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_72fbdb5bf877713520c0751ab66f4173b0aa1a7fb56ea9aff92e7b9e1a80e33a/Chorus%20block%20Icon.png?cb=0b11b816305aba962e0764e413dcd6dc) | 57+ | * Optical Trem * Bias Trem * Script Mod Phase * 70s Chorus | | **Delays** ![Delay block Icon](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_077a74249f26fa40569b8bbb9eafb08b9182bc0aca9affa37a6bdeeaa008c042/Delay%20block%20Icon.png?cb=16bb2c8da91cb0b2937efe97fd948cda) | 45+ | * Vintage Digital * Adriatic Delay * Cosmos Echo | | **Reverbs** ![Reverb block Icon](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_0a4d3aa44b4e9bb5934fe117c7745348322981f94b184247acf6842c482cda6b/Reverb%20block%20Icon.png?cb=d4fbde88ee3db274e94394c2a9fe0920) | 25 | * Hot Springs * Dynamic Plate | | **Dynamics** ![Dynamics block Icon](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_086f91b1777bbad33722234933028e9c8e1c7f625248d1eb2d4f145530161ed6/Dynamics%20block%20Icon.png?cb=a2c4792a60d2814e95742cd2d3cda2c9) | 19 | * Deluxe Comp * Gate (included on all Input blocks) | | **EQs** ![EQ block Icon](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_993dec694217378d8fe42aa4798117862c2a44b02fe1258f4e5d88ee6d53704d/EQ%20block%20Icon.png?cb=2e88559dc41e561bea4f99c73e893b50) | 5 | * Parametric EQ | | **Hardware Compatibility Modes** ![Hardware Compatibility Settings Icon](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_880c425b09de33f7b2327640643fc4ebc6b872e5f38bb790d5d998b3d8abebbe/Settings%20Icon.png?cb=ee732da4d827cf2a0a7277812e838388) | * Helix Stadium/Helix Stadium XL hardware compatibility * Compatibility - Off | * Helix Stadium/Helix Stadium XL hardware compatibility mode only (See [**Hardware Compatibility**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/the-plugin-window.md)) | All product names used in this document are trademarks of theiet/wiki/sr respective owners, and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 is associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development. Please see [++**U.S. Registered Trademarks**++](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/u-s-registered-trademarks-list.md). ## 🤔 What Do I Do First? 1. Read the rest of this page for system requirements and the Glossary. Then proceed to the next [**Installation and Authorization**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/installation-and-authorization.md) and [**Getting Started**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/getting-started.md) pages' steps to get up and running with your DAW host application. 2. Head over to the [**Line 6 Online Shop**](https://shop-us.line6.com/software/), select **Helix Stadium Native** , and choose your purchase options.\* Note that if you own a Helix Stadium XL, Helix Stadium, original Helix Native plugin, or other Line 6 hardware or software products, you may be eligible for a substantial discount for Helix Stadium Native. Optionally, you can choose the **15-Day Trial** or the **Intro** license version and consider upgrading to the **Full** license later. ^**\***^**Note:** There is only one installer to download for the Helix Stadium Native plugin. Regardless of whether you want to run the 15-Day Trial, the free, limited Intro version, or purchase the Helix Stadium Native Full license. See the preceding [**Helix Stadium Native License Versions**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/welcome-to-helix-stadium-native.md#48fba6eb-cb8f-4a20-835f-29fd39ba3eba) section for details. 3. Browse the latest available [++**Helix Stadium videos**++](https://line6.com/helix-stadium/resources/) for demos, tips \& tricks, and be sure to keep checking back for the latest Stadium news. Remember that Helix Stadium Native includes all the tone-building features, Amps, Cabs, and Effects as Helix Stadium, so topics and concepts covered in hardware and software videos are typically applicable to both. ## System Requirements and Installation Once installed, a no-cost, 15-Day Trial license for the complete Helix Stadium Native is available, allowing you to fully try the software on your system. After 15 days, you can either opt to continue using the free, limited Helix Stadium Native Intro version or purchase and authorize the Helix Stadium Native full version on your system. Please check the requirements below to make sure your computer and DAW software meet the minimum requirements. ### Minimum System Requirements The following are the *minimum* requirements for installing and using the Helix Stadium Native software on your DAW computer system. As is recommended for DAW host applications, the greater the processing power, amount of RAM, and fast hard disk storage of the computer, the better! Note that Helix Stadium Native is a 64-bit plugin and, therefore, requires that your host DAW application supports 64-bit plugins. **macOS:** * macOS v14, Sonoma, 64-bit (Intel^®^ and Apple Silicon processor types are supported) 
 * 64-bit AAX Native, Audio Units version 2 (AUv2), VST^®^3 host DAW software * Supported sample rates: 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz, 176.4kHz, and 192kHz **Windows:** * Windows^®^ 11 64-bit * 64-bit AAX Native or VST3 host DAW software * Supported sample rates: 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz, and 192kHz **Hardware Requirements:** * Intel i5 or M1 2.50GHz processor or higher * 8GB of RAM * 1GB of free disk space * An Internet connection is required for initial license authorization and for using the 15-Day Trial version. Please always refer to the software's ***Release Notes*** , available on the [**Line 6 Downloads**](https://line6.com/software/) page and within all Line 6 software installers, for support details with the latest macOS and Windows operating systems. **Important!** For optimal preset compatibility between the Helix Stadium Native plugin and Helix Stadium Family hardware, it is recommended to update to the **latest available versions for each**. Your Helix Stadium device must have firmware version 1.3.2 (or later), and the Helix Stadium application and Helix Stadium Native plugin must be updated to version 1.3.3 (or later). ## Glossary 📖 While reading through these pages, you may encounter some unfamiliar audio or guitar-nerd terms. Therefore, we've provided the following Glossary for your reference. Click to show the Glossary... | **Term** | **Definition** | |----------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Automation** | *Automation* is typically offered within a DAW host to allow track and plugin parameters to record, edit, and playback value changes in real-time. Helix Stadium Native supports the automation of practically any of its parameters. For example, you can adjust the wet/dry Mix of a Stadium Native delay or reverb, the Gain of an amp, the Bypass of an effect, and more, all at specific times for your tracks. See [**Parameter Automation**](https://ygg-manuals.atlassian.net/wiki/spaces/line6/pages/199196677). | | **Block** | *Blocks* are objects that represent various elements of a preset, such as amps, preamps, cabs, effects, splits, merges, inputs, outputs, and more. See [**Building and Editing Tones**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/building-and-editing-tones.md). | | **Clone** | A Clone in Helix Stadium Native is one created using the Helix Stadium devices' PROXY™ Cloning engine to accurately capture the sound of an Amp, Preamp, or Drive pedal. All Helix Stadium-created clone files can be imported into the Stadium Native plugin and are fully supported for use in presets. See the [**Proxy Clones**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/proxytm-clones.md) page. | | **DAW** | *DAW* is an acronym for "Digital Audio Workstation," which refers to any digital-based hardware recording setup. This consists of a DAW host (typically, a computer running audio software, such as Steinberg Cubase^®^, Avid^®^ Pro Tools^®^, Apple Logic Pro, etc.), a monitoring system (powered reference speakers or headphones), an audio interface, and typically plugins for effects and amp \& cab processing of your tracks. Helix Stadium Native functions as a plugin for all major macOS and Windows^®^DAW host applications. | | **Favorite** | Any Amp, Cab, or Effect block in Helix Stadium Native can be configured with your preferred parameter settings, assignments, and name, and then added as a *Favorite* block. Favorite blocks are conveniently stored in the top category in the Model Browser, making it fast and easy to build presets. See the [**Favorites**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/favorites.md) page. | | **Focus View** | Select an amp, cab, or effect block and click ![The Focus View button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a736ab39e9ec7ddf7a635496e02744982b06aa19daf339592a42ff6c95b1d208/FocusButton_Delay.png?cb=2e6583113cf5652506505e5ec043d9e0) to open its *Focus View* . **Focus View** offers additional per-block settings, graphical feedback, and, for many blocks, the ability to morph between five distinct sound zones via simple "XY" control. See the [**Focus View**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/the-focus-view.md) page. | | **IR** | *IRs* (Impulse Responses) are mathematical functions representing the sonic measurements of audio systems (for Helix Stadium Native, speaker cabinet, and microphone combinations). You can import and use WAV file IRs from numerous dealers. See the [**Cab Blocks and Cab IRs**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/cab-blocks-and-cab-irs.md) page. | | **Model** | Each processing block can accommodate one *model* (or, in the case of Cab blocks, two models). The complete Helix Stadium Native features over 150 guitar and bass amps, more than 60 cabs, and over 260 effects models, as listed on the [**Helix Stadium product page**](https://line6.com/helix-stadium-models/). All models are available using the plugin's [**Model Browser**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/edit-panel.md). | | **Path** | A *path* represents the signal flow of your tone. Helix Stadium Native has two separate main paths, Path 1 and Path 2, each with its own inputs and outputs. Paths can be serial (single) or split into one or more parallel (dual) paths. Path 1 can be routed into Path 2 for more sophisticated tones. In Stadium, all paths are stereo, so you can add either mono or stereo blocks to build your tone. Also, see [**Signal Path Routing**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/signal-path-routing-options.md). | | **Preset** | A *preset* is your tone. It consists of all blocks in the main Signal Flow panel, parameter settings, snapshots, parameter automation \& MIDI assignments, preset info text, a preset audio clip, and more. A number of factory presets are already included within the FACTORY presets folder to get you started, and you can create and save your own presets to build a full library of your own USER tones. See the [**Presets**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/presets.md) page. | | **Snapshot** | A *snapshot* can be thought of as a preset within a preset. Each preset includes up to eight snapshots, each of which you can customize to seamlessly recall numerous settings---enabling or bypassing blocks, adjusting parameters, and more. Snapshots can be recalled via the toolbar Snapshots menu, automation, or MIDI Control. See the [**Snapshots**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/working-with-snapshots.md) page. | --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Working With Snapshots ## What are Snapshots? *Snapshots* are essentially presets within a preset, allowing you to store the bypass state of any effects and parameter settings, and recall them all seamlessly with one click (or via automation). Depending on how you set them up, snapshots can act as eight variations of the same tone, eight drastically different tones, or any combination thereof---all within the same preset. ### What can Snapshots Store? * **Block Bypass:** The bypass (on/off) state of any processing blocks (except a Looper), independent of any footswitch bypass assignments. This also includes bypassing Split blocks and configuring complete switchable path routing changes. **Note:** The bypass state of blocks is automatically stored and recalled per snapshot. To exclude a block's bypass state from being affected by snapshots, see the steps below. * **Parameter Control:** The values of any blocks' Snapshot Control-enabled parameters in the current preset. * **Tempo** : The current system tempo, if the Tempo Select is set to **Per Snapshot** . (By default, it's set to **Host Sync** .) See [**Tempo Controls**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/the-plugin-window.md#tempo-controls). ## The Snapshot Panel In the plugin's Toolbar, click the Snapshot icon ![The Snapshot Panel button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5527d6b9c8e080b182c36e229f7b4d3fc5e9729729bf3d53a895f5ab8d195366/SnapshotCameraButton.png?cb=417da2d606610051dd3dcc2404e498c8) to display the Snapshot panel. ![Snapshot Menu.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9e5cb7a633bfaaccbacd81a7a0691ba907b4d50e490190913d4843b6da362978/Snapshot%20Menu.png?cb=4cdf90a0b986d137aae369d8ffb15d0b) The Snapshot panel - Snapshot 3's command menu is also expanded Click the toolbar's Snapshot button ![The Snapshot Panel button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5527d6b9c8e080b182c36e229f7b4d3fc5e9729729bf3d53a895f5ab8d195366/SnapshotCameraButton.png?cb=417da2d606610051dd3dcc2404e498c8) to open and close the Snapshot panel. The toolbar icon's number indicates the currently loaded snapshot. Select Snapshot 1\~8 from the panel to load it. When you hover your mouse cursor over any snapshot in the panel, its 3-dot menu button appears. Click the button to expand the command menu for the individual Snapshot, as shown above. * **Rename:** Optionally, customize any snapshot names in the panel as something more descriptive (e.g., Intro, Verse, Shred Solo, FX Off, etc.) Select the snapshot in the panel that you want to customize, click **Rename**, and enter your new name. * **Copy** and **Paste:** Instead of recreating all the settings of additional snapshots from scratch, copy one snapshot's contents to a different snapshot and edit just the settings you want to change. Select the snapshot in the panel that you want to copy, click **Copy** , then select the snapshot you want to overwrite and click **Paste**. ### Using Snapshots 1. **In the Snapshot Panel, click one of the 8 snapshots to select a different snapshot.** If you select a snapshot that hasn't yet been configured, it appears the same as the snapshot you came from. As soon as you edit a new snapshot (say, by enabling or bypassing an amp or effect block), the snapshot becomes "active" and remembers any block's bypass state and snapshot-assigned parameter values. 2. **Adjust the preset by doing one or more of the following:** * **Turn one or more effects on or off by clicking their bypass icon**. Snapshots remember every block's on/off state. * You can disable this behavior per block: **Right-click on the block in the signal flow to open its Action Panel, then click the Snapshots Set Bypass toggle OFF** ![The Snapshots Set Bypass Off switch](/__attachments/a_228eba865a78b6295a4d40c0dcc260f4c835980cb22ca9f05e15b052cf693161/Snapshots%20Set%20Bypass%20Off.png?cb=3bd200f71a52d4f3b72e44b605ef07d9) . When off, the block's bypass state won't change when changing snapshots. * To adjust a block parameter AND have it automatically update per snapshot, select the block in the signal flow, right-click on the desired Edit panel slider or knob, and set the Snapshot Ctrl toggle to On (as shown below, left). Once enabled, the a snapshot icon appears on the Edit panel parameter and its value text changes to white (as shown below, right). Click the snapshot icon to edit the Snapshot Control setting. ![Snapshot Ctrl Switch On.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_6c4e3a7ef199c26b509af2c32575b2e3d1170ed3f1724b5beac2cc33f8ac134c/Snapshot%20Ctrl%20Switch%20On.png?cb=b2e1a12a54649e9a04c6c0206c879699) Enabling Snapshot Control for a Delay's Mix parameter ![Snapshot Assigned Mix parameter.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5efc915f5463b8faaa022bc95377c9723aeb00261f0b6df59e9194f620ba7376/Snapshot%20Assigned%20Mix%20parameter.png?cb=c78eadd0022cf1b20e6c7a1769c76cde) A snapshot icon and white text appear to indicate the parameter is enabled for Snapshot Control 3. **Select the snapshot you started with.** The current plugin preset instantly and seamlessly returns to its previous state. 4. Save the preset with the desired snapshot loaded so that it is automatically selected when the preset is loaded. **Note:** Snapshot Control can also be configured for any block's parameters in the [**Automation/Controller Assign**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/automation-controller-panel.md) tab. ### Tips for Creative Snapshot Use * Configure and name a dedicated snapshot for each section of your song: Snapshot 1 for the Intro, Snapshot 2 for Verse 1, Snapshot 3 for the Chorus, and so on. Then use your host DAW's parameter automation to load the snapshots in real-time! * Worried that further tweaking might make your tone worse, not better? Snapshots are a great way to compare minor changes between tones without losing your settings. * Set any Delay or Reverb block's **Trails** parameter to "On" for seamless spillover between snapshots. * Set different keys in Harmony Delay blocks or intervals in Pitch blocks per snapshot. * Having difficulty maintaining consistent volume levels throughout a song? Set the Output block's Level parameter per snapshot. * Recall snapshots via an external MIDI controller device or software using the dedicated MIDI CC 69---see [**MIDI Control**](https://manuals.line6.com/helix-stadium-native/v1.4/midi-control.md). **Note:** All snapshots and their settings are retained within the current tone's preset until another preset is loaded within the plugin. If you wish to retain all your snapshot assignments and settings with the preset permanently, be sure to **Save your preset**. The snapshot in use when you save your preset is the one recalled when the preset is loaded again. --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Helix Stadium Owner's Manual ![HelixStadium_Logos_Black_v2.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_2057d1dd37926ea3239df716eea5d176883dcfbb4e63f49eddfa62d804c9cb26/HelixStadium_Logos_Black_v2.png?cb=fdaf4f7887afe37e63460baeccfceed5) ![Stadium-StadiumXLPhoto.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f90397c8dcee8f0ce03a551f670642a872d77cb5539b1c6d9ef87cf3a7843364/Stadium-StadiumXLPhoto.png?cb=806176a7a6e4bf9ed60e3af4817e52e4) **A Guide to the Features and Functionality of Line 6 Helix Stadium Family Devices** Firmware Version 1.4 ![FCC_EnglishStatement_Stadium.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c9844ee543cc8ce2e3d833ca67dfdcab4a6f8cbe5c8f6b47ca0fc7ae4dd9ec94/FCC_EnglishStatement_Stadium.png?cb=406719117dd35c5e0f0738a8a976f291) *** ** * ** *** **© 2026 Yamaha Guitar Group, Inc. All rights reserved.** Yamaha Guitar Group, Line 6, the Line 6 logo, Agoura, Ampeg, DL4, Helix, HX, Nexus, SVT, Portaflex, POD, Powercab, Proxy, Showcase, and Variax are trademarks or registered trademarks of Yamaha Guitar Group, Inc. in the U.S. and/or other jurisdictions. Apple, Apple Music, Mac, macOS, iPad, iPadOS, iPhone, iTunes, Logic, Logic Pro, and QuickTime are trademarks of Apple, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries and regions. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this product or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license. ASIO is a registered trademark of Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH. Intel is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Android, Play Store, and YouTube are trademarks of Google LLC. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. Kensington is a registered trademark of ACCO Brands Corporation. microSD is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC. Spotify is a registered trademark of Spotify AB Corporation. USB-C is a registered trademark of USB Implementers Forum, Inc. **Note:** All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners, and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 is associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development. Please see [**U.S. Registered Trademarks**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/u-s-registered-trademarks.md). The Model and Serial numbers are found on the product label, located on the underside of the Helix Stadium Floor or Helix Stadium XL Floor device. Please record these numbers and retain them for your records. *** ** * ** *** Rev. E - v1.4.0 --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Amps and Preamps Helix Stadium comes loaded with a wide variety of Amp and Preamp models, including a set of Amps created with the all-new **Line 6** ^**®**^**Agoura™** modeling methodology, which sets a new benchmark for sonic detail and responsiveness---please see the introductory video below. Also included are classic, vintage, modern, special hybrid, and Line 6 Original Amps, with all the Amps and Preamps from the award-winning Helix family of multieffects. New as of Helix Stadium firmware v1.3, is the included **Proxy** engine, which provides the ability for you to quickly and accurately capture a "Clone" of any physical amplifer, preamp, amp and speaker cab combination, or distortion pedal. Once created, your clones can then be used as blocks within any of your Stadium presets. Please refer to the [**Creating Clones**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/clones.md) page for details on the capture process for creating your own **Amp** , **Preamp** , **Amp+Cab** , and **Distortion** pedal Clones. You can also use the [**Helix Stadium application Librarian**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/librarian-view.md) to import and export clones. Once you've created or imported clones, they appear within the respective Model Lists, as covered on this page. The following information covers the use of Amp, Preamp, and Clone blocks in Helix Stadium. Models often include some unique parameters, typically based on the controls found on the original gear. ## Selecting an Amp, Preamp, or Clone 1. **From the Home screen, tap an empty location on a path.** Block categories appear in the inspector: ![Inspector_Amp-PreampCategoryButtons.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_aff6dd81cf831312d9d20d69d8eeb107c01da4019c48b8e2074e1bac4c729a22/Inspector_Amp-PreampCategoryButtons.png?cb=4af9650efec7af767e5e499a5dda677a) Quick block selector (None block selected on the Home \> Edit screen) 2. **Tap the Amp or Preamp button to open the Model List.** Tap the list view button ![List-Gallery Selector](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b9d0f5c371c53d934fb1044e4b85dfdd7e3e0a230893958bc6f02c45830be537/List-GallerySelector.png?cb=ba9bd2824aa6bd964871c520c12c3940) to choose to view more items in a condensed list (below left) or fewer items as large images in a grid (below right). ![AmpModelList-List.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_3e0bea290f78a9b9d1f0eb290ec1d10d01994308e6933616e07f8cecce3a291a/AmpModelList-List.png?cb=00e304fa5a49520d7aa93af3e974f2ba) Model List \> List View ![AmpModelListGallery.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_babc8fa08c8a7e0d60f2503a9f79de95d964c1a2d37331c6fd40ac8ea2933180/AmpModelListGallery.png?cb=96d5a7a8262c94cc54b6459a4fa43f38) Model List \>Gallery View * **Swipe the list up or down (or turn the Lower Knob) to find the desired item.** * Tap GUITAR AMP, BASS AMP, LEGACY GUITAR, or LEGACY BASS in the sidebar to quickly scroll the list up or down to that subcategory, then tap the desired amp model from the middle column list. * **Tap the Add Cab Block toggle** ![the Add Cab Block Switch](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c6ace6b13115e4fbdf1354069db79ea112dc2eb8ebd11c720affd90eab877d93/AddCabSwitch.png?cb=41dc3c44da7470f3a9ff8abc746d0ba0) **on to automatically add a matching Cab block directly to the right of the Amp block.** ^\*^ When the switch is off, no Cab block is automatically added. Also see [**Cabs and Cab IRs**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/cab-blocks.md). * To select an **Amp** , **Amp+Cab** , or **Preamp Clone** , tap the **CLONE** subcategory in the Amp Model List or Preamp Model List sidebar. See the next section for instructions. ^**\***^**About Clone Blocks...** The **Add Cab Block** option is unavailable when selecting an **Amp, Amp+Cab** , or **Preamp** Clone. When selecting a **Clone \> Amp**, you'll want to manually add a Cab block after it, and choose a Cab or IR for the Cab block for your preferred tone. Just like Amp and Preamp models, Amp Clones are mono---any stereo blocks positioned before a Clone block will be summed to mono. 3. **Tap to select the item and press Home** ![Home button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_4278c3644d19bb11880edfce814f0f3ca23c96aa88737153c4426035fe5490d7/253caf2a-2f98-4a50-9432-99ca845fcfa8?cb=9664a711688df707f2c11c8ef485896d) **(or tap the Inspector header) to close the Model List. Alternatively, double-tap to select the item** ***and*** **close the Model List.** **Tip:** The Cab block's **Amp \> Cab Link** toggle (found in the Cab's Focus view sidebar) automatically selects a matching Cab model when the linked Amp model is changed, but only applies when a Cab block is added via the[**Add Cab Block toggle**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/cab-blocks.md). ### Selecting an Amp, Amp+Cab, or Preamp Clone Once you've created one or more Amp, Amp+Cab, or Preamp Clones, you can access them as follows once you tap on a new empty block in the Home - Edit View's signal path. 1. Tap the **Amp** category button in the Inspector ![Amp model button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_fc9132621a658132fab59acd35b8f822c9c8f100ea748978a89d6d188c3cd3d6/Button_Amp.png?cb=9e5158d9d6fb5ce18e7f5496dc664fc4) to open its Model List, select the **CLONE** subcategory within the sidebar. and choose either **Amp Clone** or **Amp+Cab Clone**, as preferred. ![CloneSelect_Amp.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1227c2a47b03bb9828a8bf3148149affdd0525e8e5f5ed7a01d8c88b7f164c3b/CloneSelect_Amp.png?cb=063dd03302b5585fea54d742ab23da11) Amp Clone item selected ![CloneSelect_Amp-Cab.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_29e24dcf25d3a0c46ed8d3dd8c1cb3561ca3e08bcf593a4c955066dc3cff2291/CloneSelect_Amp-Cab.png?cb=9957a782f20a7ef6c3d9200627c2e01c) Amp+Cab Clone item selected 2. For a **Preamp** Clone, tap the Inspector's Preamp button ![Preamp model button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_99f92758fa44e2e0b0ab8587dc5a5f57490623fbb9a1c7e92130df2ae2c18049/Button_Preamp.png?cb=10fd8eae7f7a5d22ab929eec10d5c46d) to open its Model List, select the **CLONE** subcategory, and choose **Preamp Clone**. ![CloneSelect_Preamp.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_be4a2abf1f67c0f44ace3afcfefd1d6ad604a44640d086632741e6bb5b81cf04/CloneSelect_Preamp.png?cb=b8465886318f57bd65cc73820b9ef5e7) Preamp Clone item selected 3. With the desired**Clone** item selected, tap on the "Empty" Clone file box ![Amp Clone Selection Box](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ede8473ce1fd3e137143af081974fbdfe99efb9060e8a5a26083e2d1764ef5ed/CloneSelectBox_Amp.png?cb=01340b062e10448b71b15ee0f7f30686) at the top of the Inspector to open the Amp/Preamp Clone file browser, where you can tap the desired Clone file from the center column to load it. 4. Once a Clone file is loaded, the file box displays the current Clone's name. Please see the [**Selecting \& Managing Clones**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/selecting-and-managing-clones.md) page for additional options. 5. Use the Inspector's parameters to adjust the tone of your selected Clone. See the following [**Amp and Preamp Clone Parameters**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/amp-blocks.md#2d67926c-eaf9-4031-8092-61607fb8ff2a) section. **Tip:** You can also create Clones from your distortion and drive effect pedals. Distortion Clone files are available within the [**Distortion Model List**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/effect-blocks.md). ## ![Amp model button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_fc9132621a658132fab59acd35b8f822c9c8f100ea748978a89d6d188c3cd3d6/Button_Amp.png?cb=9e5158d9d6fb5ce18e7f5496dc664fc4) Amp Models and Amp Clones **Amp models** consist of the full amplifier, including its preamp, tone stack, and power amp components, expertly captured to preserve the amplifier's unique sonic signature and tonal range. An Amp model provides essentially the same experience as plugging into your favorite guitar or bass amplifier, to which you'll want to connect a speaker cabinet or IR (Impulse Response) speaker simulator to complete your amp tone. **Tip!** For the complete, current lists of all Amp, Cab, and Effect Models included in Helix Stadium and the original gear on which they are based, please see [***Helix Stadium Models***](https://line6.com/helix-stadium-models/) on the Line 6 website. ^\*^See [**US Registered Trademarks**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/u-s-registered-trademarks.md). All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners, and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 is associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development. ### Agoura vs. HX Amps Helix Stadium includes an ever-growing library of world-class amp models created with Line 6's new **Agoura™** modeling methodology. However, as Helix Stadium can import presets made with Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, and HX Stomp XL, it must also include the previous generation's award-winning HX amp models. In the interest of ensuring users don't dismiss HX amps as "last gen" or anything less than stellar-sounding, we've purposely made the delineation between Agoura and HX amps vague. While in list view, a faint gray line appears between the last Agoura amp and the first HX amp in both the GUITAR AMP and BASS AMP subcategories. ![AgiuraAmpList.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_cc3bed487d1ca732814c0c25e65a8f0c9518c7d236a260bce0de946f29c5923c/AgiuraAmpList.png?cb=8ed27ef617f6d36ac2ed4f0b6a82c8dd) Models above this gray line are Agoura, models below are HX (List view only) ### Legacy Amps LEGACY GUITAR and LEGACY BASS amps (indicated with ![LegacyIcon.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_3b983c3a46ece2dab6315c886ee6b10e86b8fc93d94f269c348e5c19351c8d0b/LegacyIcon.png?cb=c5b27b57ef5d3fe20e0c8e7f5ffd170a) ) are all HX; they've simply been moved to the Legacy category because an Agoura version of that same amp exists. And as more Agoura amps appear in firmware updates, you may notice their HX equivalents getting moved from the GUITAR AMP or BASS AMP subcategories to the LEGACY GUITAR or LEGACY BASS subcategories. In addition, Legacy amps \& preamps provide compatibility with imported Helix and HX presets (saved with Helix/HX firmware or Helix Native Plug-in, version 3.50 or later). Amps in the LEGACY GUITAR and LEGACY BASS are often the newest and best-sounding HX amps, and as a bonus, they use considerably less DSP than Agoura. So *do not* sleep on these! ## ![Preamp model button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_99f92758fa44e2e0b0ab8587dc5a5f57490623fbb9a1c7e92130df2ae2c18049/Button_Preamp.png?cb=10fd8eae7f7a5d22ab929eec10d5c46d) Preamp Models and Preamp Clones ### Preamp Models As of this writing, all Preamp models in Helix Stadium are HX. They are captured from the preamp stage of the amplifier, which is typically where the majority of the tone-shaping and initial gain staging occur. A Preamp model can be a good choice when feeding your Helix Stadium output to an external power amp, and some even work great as drive circuits before full Amp blocks. **Note:**Volume levels between the different preamp models can vary significantly. This is normal and true to the preamp circuits of the actual amplifiers modeled. Adjust the Preamp's Drive and/or Volume controls to achieve your desired saturation and level output. ### Amp and Amp+Cab Clones Please refer to the [**Clones**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/clones.md) page for details on Amp, Amp+Cab, and other clone details. ## Amp and Preamp \> Focus View When an Amp or Preamp block is selected on the Home \> Edit screen, **tap the Focus icon** ![FocusButton.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_980a867efdf551ef8edffd5c2d6b0995dfa3540b762e46b51b767e23ebc37183/FocusButton.png?cb=ed5e6782d6dac50c7c0548eb023b90db) **in the Inspector to open Focus View** . Or, if Focus view is already open, **press the Amp button** ![Amp Select button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ad481c98d34069b222fc222a03f18e7e2fd1aac03e2795388c1138d2ab9f64de/139a1944-65ae-4561-90fe-7ef7e839846a?cb=245f5fdeba82dc84521e0f87e7bce325) **to instantly jump to any Amp or Preamp block(s) in the preset. Drag the lens icon around the field to quickly morph between five distinct variations of the amp; then fine-tune with the parameter knobs.** See [**Focus View**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/the-focus-view.md) for details. ![Amp_FocusView.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_42a6228873db6addcf7d0d060039384450f4b4aad223c05e6fa049f5f7b0caf1/Amp_FocusView.png?cb=d56fe11f9c389f825763a0a80f2f72a6) Amp \> Focus view ### Amp, Amp+Cab, and Preamp Clones \> Focus View The Focus View for Clone blocks displays the metadata screen for the currently loaded Clone file, where you can view and edit its information. (You can enter this metadata when creating a new clone as well, as covered in the [**Clones**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/clones.md) section.) Please see [**Focus View \> Clones**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/the-focus-view.md#clone-focus-view) section for details. ![AmpClone_FocusView.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8b099646c1dd7440515a765ac83a7e25a7b3ccfc076bd88bc4d7242f0bf4c204/AmpClone_FocusView.png?cb=5a74562f8bfbd7d9334fb880e6f8721d) The Focus View for an Amp Clone ## Common Amp and Preamp Parameters Below are parameters available on numerous Amp models. Please note that you may occasionally see additional and slightly different parameters for certain amps. We typically include the same parameters as included on the original amps we model, along with their functions and sometimes quirky interactions, which can make classic amps special! **Note:** Amp+Cab, Amp, and Preamp Clones offer their own parameter set. Please see [**Selecting and Managing Clones**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/selecting-and-managing-clones.md). | **Parameter** | **Description** | |-----------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Bypass** | **Tap** ![AmpBypass.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d510de2ac1a0c2be44ad3df1582abf8ba54f09696e01dd36daafb01d1e9a8199/AmpBypass.png?cb=652f8c650f1dcd032919097422ae2dc1) **in the inspector to turn the block on and off, independent of any footswitch assignment.** **Note:**An Amp/Preamp block's Bypass is not automatically assigned to a Stomp mode footswitch. But you can manually assign any Amp/Preamp block by selecting the block within the signal flow, touching a Stomp mode footswitch, and tapping Assign Block when prompted. | | **Channel** | Many Agoura amps have two or more channels of the amp baked in, letting you freely change them with the knob, from an assigned Stomp switch, or via snapshots. | | **Drive** or**Gain** | Adjusts the amount of gain applied to the signal, which influences the level of distortion. Use lower settings for cleaner tones and higher settings for added distortion and increased volume levels. | | **Bass** **Mid** **Treble** | Adjusts the low, medium, and high frequency EQ of the tonestack, respectively. Note that some amps instead include only a simple **Tone** parameter and/or **High** **Cut** or **Low Cut** as alternative EQ parameters. Bass amp models often include **Low Mid** and **High Mid** controls rather than a single **Mid** knob. | | **Level** | Controls the overall level of the Amp or Preamp block. Unlike the Master volume, it has no effect on the block's tone. Tweaking an Amp block's Level parameter is a helpful method of balancing apparent preset levels against one another. | | **Presence** | Boosts the upper mid and high frequencies in the power amp, resulting in additional punch and bite and an overall brighter tone. | | **Master** | Controls the Master Volume of the amplifier. This parameter is highly interactive with all other parameters---the lower the Master is set, the less effect the other controls will have. Different textures can be achieved using the Master volume in combination with the amp's Drive/Gain and Level. Higher Master settings typically result in more "power tube" type saturation, which can alter the amount of distortion and affect the amp's "feel." Amp models often have the Master turned up by default, because that's where the real amp's sweet spot is. However, tube amps are loud, so if you're playing at bedroom volumes, of course, it won't sound like a roaring full stack. Turn your playback system up! If you can't (or aren't allowed to) play at louder volumes, turn the Master down (if your model has one) to approximate your playback system's level. | | **Level** | Adjusts the amplifier's overall output volume. Unlike Drive, Gain, Volume, and Master Volume parameters, the Level adjusts the overall volume with minimum distortion or coloration. The Level can be used to balance the overall volume between presets. | | **Sag** | Controls the amount of sag, or how much the power supply compresses or "droops" in response to striking the strings hard. Higher values provide more touch dynamics, sustain, and organic feel inherent in vintage tube amps; lower values offer a "tighter" responsiveness for a more modern feel. | | **Hum** | Adjusts the level of power supply hum that interacts with the signal. Preamp tube heaters in tube amps will leak a bit of 60 cycle hum into the audio signal. When this hum mixes with the distorted audio signal, a non-musical distortion is created at low levels. To some players, this low-level, non-harmonic distortion adds a bit of realism to the amp model. | | **Ripple** | Controls how much AC ripple interacts with your tone. Power amp circuits will sometimes let a little bit of rectified 120Hz hum (that the power supply filter caps can't quite fully remove) into the audio signal when the power supply is being pushed hard. Much like Hum, Ripple provides a bit of non-musical distortion to the power amp at distorted settings. | | **Bias** | Adjusts the bias of the power amp tubes, altering tonality and distortion characteristics. | | **Bias X** | Short for "Bias Excursion." Determines how the power amp tubes' voicing reacts when pushed hard. Set low for a tighter feel. Set high for more tube compression. This parameter is highly reactive with the Drive/Gain and Master settings. | | **Z PrePost** | Determines the location of speaker impedance characteristics in the power amp, primarily due to negative feedback. Higher values mean the effects of the interaction appear at the output of the power amp (Post) and lower values mean more of the effect is fed back to the input of the power amp (Pre). | | **Hype** | The Stadium Agoura Amp models were designed as accurately as possible to sound like the original amplifiers they are based on. However, this may not always be optimal for every situation. For example, in cases where you might want to tighten the low end, smooth the high end, or achieve a more modern tone and feel. Depending on the amp and/or amp settings, increasing Hype may subtly or dramatically adjust various behind-the-scenes parameters to make the amp sound and feel smoother, fuller, punchier, tighter, and/or more forgiving, but at the expense of accuracy. **See the following video for a quick demo.** | **Tip:** Tap any Amp or Preamp parameter in the Inspector to open its [**Parameter Panel**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/building-and-editing-tones.md), where you'll find a handy description. --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Creating and Editing Tones Please check out the following video for an overview on creating and editing your own tones on Helix Stadiium. Then consult the details on this page for detailed steps and helpful tips. **Tip:** A great way to start using Helix Stadium is to try out the selection of Factory Presets and get familiar with the tonal possibilities. Soon enough, you'll certainly want to start creating your own tone masterpieces. This page covers the steps for putting together and editing tones to start building your own collection of presets. **Be sure to start with your Stadium's Phones and Output volume set to a minimum, and gradually raise the volume as you add blocks to your tone.** ## Creating a **New Preset** 1. **Tap Menu** ![The main menu button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d9d1edba21805f19408366fd24a5319078274a781d2d6cc8b3cebbcf373d7a42/Button_MainMenu.png?cb=d91f8f5c00efbbb15f13621204233690) **in the upper left corner of the touchscreen and then tap New Preset** ![The main menu's New Preset button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_7e9f80cd58496d4fc282dbc817ad8f92c12e460c037463a0408c16c82704708f/Button_MenuNewPreset.png?cb=2fc7bab9f0cd33e959d1c2159c6d37ad) **.** The Select Template window appears (below left). 2. **Tap the desired template from which you want to start your new preset.** If you're not sure, tap "Empty Preset." 3. **Tap New Preset** ![The New Preset button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_fb2be6b395f2b9f1b8af3cc264bdfc97f10db3da95e1f4f912676f80104427ca/image-20250401-205117.png?cb=f67861ebf5a775aba41aad8871234bca) **.** A new preset is created based on the template you chose (below right). ![SelectPresetTemplate.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_cae88cbd6a1e9e6db74d7cba033efd17574ecbc7a8658e370d3febc0b5b0553e/SelectPresetTemplate.png?cb=14aaad9dcdb896c4f14059540d38a6de) The New Preset \> Select Template window ![An empty New Preset](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_0bd9da321900bc1b0c7b691d87f086b3cfa7336bf42560582f4f7190bd6b847b/EmptyNewPreset.png?cb=f2e413ad007a8d6cb92c55b2833cd4b7) An empty new preset **Tip:**Alternatively, from the Preset List, double-tap on an "Empty" preset location to load an empty new preset. ## Adding Blocks ### ![Item 01](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_806b890ab3e46f41c1391bc8413a8df8158f3bf55db95a4c376c074461bd8d3b/01.png?cb=ce61b591a14429573632afbeb4c2997c) **Add an Amp and Cab** 1. **From the Home screen, tap an empty location on Path 1A.** Block categories appear in the inspector: ![Inspector_Amp-PreampCategoryButtons.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_62ef1084460f587dd0d1023910d00b198b0769ef521b3e6668cf13da6e890a53/Inspector_Amp-PreampCategoryButtons.png?cb=4af9650efec7af767e5e499a5dda677a) Quick block selector (None block selected on the Home \> Edit screen) 2. **Tap the Amp or Preamp button and double-tap on an Amp from the** [**Model List**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/the-model-browser.md)**.** By default, the selected Amp and a matching Cab block are added---see [**Cabs and Cab IRs**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/cab-blocks.md) for details. You'll see your blocks in the Home View - Edit screen. ![The Model Browser showing the Amp - Guitar Amp model list](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f505f27df5603087a58e8023ca9fe14fdb1b6bbd8a32f578570cb0d601ddfdc6/AmpModelList.png?cb=6ee4155aabc047a947810f5c3c71add3) Selecting an Amp from the Model List ![An amp and cab block are added to the New Preset](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_36c50c8d9bb711a1164b803fa1bdc4c01f677584ddfd8d446a975cd622688aa7/Amp-CabBlocksAdded.png?cb=ed13707dca6181f1313b35326e7beeff) An Amp \& matching Cab are added to the preset ### ![Item 2](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_41ef96a1ca4db14f9224f91745e66ddfafdb7028b3531707a3f044610c33c66e/02.png?cb=53ead26f31014fd489e07cfbde017dc7) **Add Some Effects** 1. **Following the procedure from step** ![Item 01](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_806b890ab3e46f41c1391bc8413a8df8158f3bf55db95a4c376c074461bd8d3b/01.png?cb=ce61b591a14429573632afbeb4c2997c) **, use the Model List to add some effects blocks.**There are a few general guidelines for effects placement, but also feel free to totally ignore them and experiment. * Add Pitch/Synth, Wah/Filter, Dynamics, and Distortion blocks before the Amp and Cab (in what we call "Pre" position). It's best to use mono models in the Pre position since Amp blocks are mono and will sum any incoming stereo signal. * Add Modulation, Delay, and Reverb blocks after the Amp and Cab ("Post" position), especially when using distorted amp settings, for a smoother overall sound. (Quite a few Modulation models sound different, but equally great, in the "Pre" position too.) * A Looper is usually preferred as the last block before the Output block, so your loop recordings can capture your full amp + effects signal. Use a stereo Looper type if you want your loop recordings to capture stereo effects. * An EQ can be useful in many different positions in the tone; multiple EQ blocks can even be used to shape the sound and level feeding into an amp, before or after specific effects, etc. **Tip: Quickly change an existing block between mono and stereo versions.**Say you have a mono Cosmos Echo with your settings all tweaked, but now want to change it to a stereo Cosmos Echo without losing your parameter settings... 1. Tap to select the Delay block. 2. Tap the mono symbol to the right of the Cosmos Delay model name in the Inspector. 3. Tap **Yes, Switch** to convert to stereo. ![Swap mono to stereo.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_590231fd254aca4962d9b9a8a3d296214551893e395d841bfe9c14ee2c6b8a5a/Swap%20mono%20to%20stereo.png?cb=7748eb66d853b44e478c2f9b64c7892d) Quickly changing a mono effect to stereo The stereo version of the model is now loaded with all your applicable parameter values retained! You can do the same to change a stereo effect block to mono. **Note:** Existing Controller and Snapshot assignments are not retained when changing the mono/stereo version of the model. This function is not available for Legacy, Clone, Favorite, or other effects that are offered only in mono or only in stereo format. Congratulations! You have now built a robust tone that you can start tweaking as desired... or just dive in and start playing. ![An example of a full, single path tone](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a17b12fbf200cef5152b2d9129aba478b76380bed34e7ebb235204343397a679/MyGuitarTone.png?cb=8c1ae322cf194900d6ec90da82a75f9e) A full, single path tone ## Selecting Blocks and Adjusting Parameters ### ![Item 01](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_806b890ab3e46f41c1391bc8413a8df8158f3bf55db95a4c376c074461bd8d3b/01.png?cb=ce61b591a14429573632afbeb4c2997c) **Select a Block** From the Home \> Edit screen, **tap a block to select it.** **Alternatively, touch any assigned Stomp switch to instantly jump to its assigned item, or touch repeatedly to cycle through multiple items assigned to the switch.** Selected blocks have a thicker white outline, and their parameters appear in the inspector below. ![A reverb block is selected showing its parameters in the Inspector](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a45db75842abe752d9c64e5d2ea33e189bc811982a9bfcea3f266c36b7eab244/ReverbSelected.png?cb=29751add616f8dc0a84082dc70255466) A Reverb block is selected, and its parameters are shown in the Inspector **Note:** The Inspector shows up to eight parameters at a time for the selected block. Many blocks include more than eight parameters, which are available on additional "pages" in the Inspector, as indicated by the line shown just above the parameters in the Inspector. Swipe the Inspector left/right to access additional parameter pages. ### ![Item 2](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_41ef96a1ca4db14f9224f91745e66ddfafdb7028b3531707a3f044610c33c66e/02.png?cb=53ead26f31014fd489e07cfbde017dc7) **Adjust a Block's Parameters** There are a few ways to adjust parameters: #### Use the Focus View For any Amp, Preamp, or Effect model, tap the Focus View button ![FocusViewButton_Reverb.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_01a337e5f510cdebfca9d3fd51950e5265dd750079d004083d948314b33d1542/FocusViewButton_Reverb.png?cb=389e745cc29d94012f2bb3d3646ed476) at the top left of the Inspector to open the Focus View screen---see [**The Focus View**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/the-focus-view.md) section for details. ![A reverb block is selected showing its parameters in the Inspector](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5bbfbc8e71ff4461e30845d6a481967de59d115ac809b1a1d086fb165b814f80/FocusView_NonLnearReverb.png?cb=a1bffb35634e9108995b59b4883b65eb) Editing a Reverb model using the Focus View #### Use the Inspector Parameters Turn the Knob 1\~8 below the Main Display that corresponds to the Inspector parameter shown directly above it to adjust its value. ![Knobs 1 through appear below the Inspector's eight visible parameters](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_74b3d9592f02f7d87671eee71703a47b4bb266612dab8b51366a6349f3d199ff/EditKnobs.png?cb=853bf4e4b8fdc13e805277836f372a3e) Knobs 1\~8 can be used to adjust each of the 8 parameters displayed within the Inspector #### Use the Parameter Panel Tap once directly on a parameter in the Inspector to open the **Parameter Panel** . Here, you can read details about the parameter, and adjust its value by tapping and dragging the slider. Optionally, for numerical values, tap on the value in the panel, enter a precise value, and tap **Done**. ![The Parameter Panel](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9e235e164cb9d8a5df343bd6143db3f905960f459594f78648df60545c191709/ParameterPanel.png?cb=4b30f6f366087413176654a8cfc745d9) The pop-up Parameter Panel (Reverb - Mix parameter selected) ![Editing a numerical parameter value](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_7c830280579dd5a127631cb74664e487b3325fdf5813a8ee668f9fab63820c7f/NumericParameterValue.png?cb=2ea007d5e6d444ee8e32c4487c1f8057) Editing a numerical value **Use the Parameter Panel sidebar options for additional functions:** * **Reset Value:** When this option is not dimmed, it means the parameter has been adjusted from its default value. Tap to reset it. (Or, reset a parameter by pressing its respective Knob 1\~8 below the Inspector.) * **Learn Controller:** Tap "Learn" to create an assignment to an onboard or externally connected controller device, such as a footswitch, expression pedal, trigger, or MIDI. See the [**Learn Controller**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/bypass-and-controller-assign.md#quick-controller-assign) section for details. * When the parameter includes a Controller assignment, adjustable **Minimum** and **Maximum** indicators appear on the slider (such as the "Heel" and "Toe" values when assigned to an expression pedal). Tap and drag these to adjust the Min and Max values. ![Min-MaxSliderIndicators.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a361d6838615413904a2d4dda31eebd94bb57cdf3eef4b4642b7f7f8e374c925/Min-MaxSliderIndicators.png?cb=948f02fe1d55cc4034cb2e327f68c71e) Min and Max controller adjustment * **Clear Controllers:** Tap to clear all existing Controller assignments from the parameter. * **Snapshot Control:** When the switch is disabled (left position, the default setting), the parameter is excluded from Snapshot Control---meaning, its value is not stored and recalled with Snapshot changes. Toggle the switch as enabled (right position) if you want to be able to store up to eight different values to be recalled with Snapshots 1\~8. You'll see the parameter's value appear in white and in brackets when the Snapshot Control is enabled for the parameter ![SnapshotEnabledValue.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_66e7896b37f53ac96b0a0eda161d63127a5886789d420ad2196c155f3613d0f7/SnapshotEnabledValue.png?cb=0b375440e83e136ee4a22389ca9e9bb2) . Note that you can alternatively **press while turning** the parameter's respective Knob 1\~8 to enable it for Snapshot Control. Also, see the [**Snapshots**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/snapshots.md) page. ### ![Item 3](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a26b094e79eaee4239e6d2a97fcf3979fe21ad4d0df395b3f244d94f38d06f33/03.png?cb=632cde3c35c9abd3a51e6bbd6f0126be) **Access a Block's Action Panel** Tap once on the currently selected block or double-tap an unselected block to open its **Action panel**. The panel offers several commands and functions for the block, such as Copy, Paste, Clear, configuring User Default settings, and more, as covered in the following sections. ![Action_Panel_Reverb.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_77263046c5934c57a81bbe020f882900906ddd5d4ffe5194cc49022a1fb9ff88/Action_Panel_Reverb.png?cb=e55c4957d61889bd7dc4a3490b674f00) An effectn effectn effect block's pop-up Action panel is displayed ## Bypassing a Block There are a few methods for bypassing a block: * Within the Home View - Edit screen, select a block and tap its **Bypass** button ![The Bypass button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_7ae575a66a7871b46760a2ee1a6dc4e15f3ea56d99fae36d8dd3a4c7de17a50c/BypassButton.png?cb=be6570d99bc5be4e710ce53d81d24041) at the right of the Inspector. * When Stadium is set for [**Stomp Footswitch Mode**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/top-panel-and-footswitches.md#0e1bbb7d-6368-4056-89a7-94f3630b5291), you can ***press*** the footswitch assigned to any effect block within your preset to toggle its bypass state. When bypassed, the block (and its Inspector parameters, when the bypassed block is selected) appears dimmed, as shown below. Additionally, when Stadium is in Stomp Footswitch Mode, the assigned footswitch's LED and label appear dimmed when the block is bypassed. ![BlockBypassed.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_7ccebfc74077d31839782ad0211b3f8f8fa70733a426150824543c4b75331b0d/BlockBypassed.png?cb=a0708056e5a45ffa2dc3b677e91baf3d) A bypassed block and its parameters appear dimmed **Tip:** A handy trick is to "Merge" switch assignments and toggle multiple blocks' bypass states with one Stomp footswitch simultaneously---see the following [**Assigning the Block to a Switch**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/building-and-editing-tones.md#assign-switch) section. ## Moving Blocks Experiment further with re-ordering blocks in the path or changing the path routing. * **To move a block to a new position on its current path**: Simply tap and drag any Amp, Cab, Effect, or Mix block left or right on the current path. Other blocks automatically move to create a new empty space for your block, allowing you to drop the block into the desired spot. ![The Modulation block is shown being dragged to a new position on Path 1A](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e0b82d1ecdd06071361890c6f9db2e804e587444753f104105596f3896fb7b82/MovingBlockInPath.png?cb=bf3a20852220642804e215636511e2e9) Dragging a Modulation block from post to pre position * **To move a block to a different path**: Tap and drag a block up or down to either a parallel or another main target path destination. * **Parallel Path:** Drag downward from Path 1A or 2A, and a parallel path is automatically created with its own Split and Merge blocks. Drop the block onto the parallel path to move it there. See the following [**Signal Path Routing**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/signal-path-routing.md) for the many possibilities for using parallel paths. * **Path 1A - Path 2A:** Tap and drag a block up or down to the opposite main Path. For example, if you drag the modulation block down from Path 1A, you'll see an empty block location appear as you hover over Path 2A, where you can drop it. If a parallel Path 2B already exists, you can drag and drop the block there. ## Copying and Pasting a Block Blocks from one path can be copied and then pasted into the same path, the other path, or a path in an entirely different preset. 1. **Access a block's Action Panel:** Double-tap on the block (or, if the block is already selected, tap it once). ![Action_Delay.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_bf285bbbedb44ba636bdc9f7a14d3be07d24fc6805b31800eafa45f44860d292/Action_Delay.png?cb=ebb1136c599e68fcea550866cac2028a) The Action panel for a Delay block is displayed 2. **Tap the Copy Block command.** 3. **Select a destination** : Double-tap on the desired empty block location to open the Action panel (as shown below left). The destination can be on any path within the current or a different preset. Then **tap the Paste Block command.** A copy of the block appears at the new location (shown below right). * The original block's parameter settings, controller, and snapshot assignments are retained for the new copied block. Any existing bypass switch assignment is *not* retained on the pasted block. ![The Action panel for an empty block location is displayed](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_50332c24d22da0d59600ac2a72b6f9ce406215c7e8ec244c95f6398606332b87/Action_EmptyBlock.png?cb=d6284e5821f71ae37a532ab2353fbb25) The Action panel for an empty block location is displayed ![A new instance of the Delay block is copied to Path 2A](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_40a4157d07bc45dc3f7fb5a815e2c43c2e2757f236fbb5d90ac3daeab2b70f2d/PastedDelay.png?cb=6accbc005bd95f22e4d05a58ad4bf563) A new instance of the Delay block is copied to Path 2A **Tip:** Input, Output, Split, Merge, and Looper type blocks can also be copied and pasted. If the destination path's DSP cannot accommodate the copied block, the header will briefly display a DSP full alert---please see [**Dynamic DSP**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/dynamic-dsp.md). ## Clearing Blocks There are several ways to remove an existing block. * **Drag an individual block off screen:** Tap and drag any block quickly toward the top or bottom edge of the Main Display. Once you see the red "Clear" indicator ![ClearBlockIndicator.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_3fa363d051c9d7d88faaf3d420b6a836aa30381231a2126fff9b47af9973aba1/ClearBlockIndicator.png?cb=dc74c6f54857e9b609ac8b744c183950) appear, release the block to clear it. * **Use the Action panel to clear an individual block** : Double-tap on a block to open the Action panel and select the **Clear Block** command. * **Use the Action panel to clear all blocks** : Double-tap on any block to open the Action panel and select the **Clear All Blocks** command. A pop-up alert will ask you if you're sure you want to clear all blocks. ![The alert to clear all blocks](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d3122b7ab7df591baad164f3080c7dafa2a6fb1f1ebe728414d3913a551958c9/ClearBlocksAlert.png?cb=de8867a41d535b1302b3f49106a6af07) The alert to verify that you want to clear all blocks When you tap **Yes**, all blocks on all paths are cleared, with the exception of existing Input and Output blocks, which remain with their current settings. **Important!** Tapping the **Undo** button ![UndoButton.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5e48c5aa3455654b5e05395052330e773fa2ce2ec053d63065560a1c580d2a0d/UndoButton.png?cb=802a346d45511b1942f78091b8939eec) at the top of the screen will restore a cleared block. However, once a block is cleared, its Bypass/Stomp/Controller Assignments are not restored via Undo. ## Creating User Default Settings Whenever you add a block to your tone and select a model, all the model's parameters are loaded with a specific set of "Factory Default" values. If you find yourself constantly re-tweaking your commonly used models the same way, you can customize a model's "User Default" settings to define its new defaults (excluding Input, Output, Split, or Merge Mixer blocks' settings) so the model loads that way every time. 1. **Select any block and tweak it exactly how you like:** Configure any of the model's parameters and bypass state. (Existing MIDI, bypass, snapshot, and controller assignments are ***not*** saved with the User Default settings.) 2. **Tap the selected block again to open its Action panel:** Select the **User Default** command. Your current parameter settings are now saved as the default for all future uses of the model. (Existing presets that already include the model are not affected.) * **To return a model to its original Factory Default settings:** Tap the selected block again to open its Action panel and select the **Factory Default** command to reset it for future uses of the model. **Tip:** Alternatively, you can create a **Favorite** . This allows you to customize a model's parameters, bypass state, snapshot, bypass, and controller assignments, and custom-name the model and add it to the Favorites menu to make it easily accessible via the Model List. Please see the [**Favorite Blocks**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/favorites.md) page for details. ## Assigning a Block to a Switch You can use the block's Action panel to quickly **create** , **merge** , or **replace** an existing block's switch assignment(s). For complete details on creating assignments, please see the [**Bypass/Control Assignment**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/bypass-and-controller-assign.md)section. To follow are steps for merging multiple assignments to one switch. ### Merging Blocks' Switch Assignments Instead of each block having its own Stomp switch assignment, you can "merge" their assignments to simultaneously toggle two or more blocks on/off. 1. Double-tap on one of your blocks to open its Action panel and select the **Assign to Switch** command ![Assign To Switch command](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5461d9ee67d0f0bf360ac3ec70a4b0c02a517ac530c0a1bab30d663ea474cc65/Action_AssignToSwitch.png?cb=92385f0fcdf395bd371cafd647da7cfb) . The Assign to Switch dialog offers the options to do a quick Bypass assign to a Stomp switch, MIDI Note, or CC: ![Action_AssignToSwitchDialog.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_bb010dd58a7257d94191316c1b556035c133f7044ae7adf5feb268765b8bda9d/Action_AssignToSwitchDialog.png?cb=90bde7be46bfb2652257327574d167c9) The Assign to Switch dialog - Merge and Latching options selected 2. Select the **Merge** and **Latching** options, and then press the Stomp footswitch that is already assigned to another block to merge both blocks to the switch. You'll see that the footswitch label has been changed to '**MULTIPLE (2)'** to indicate that two blocks are assigned. **Tip:** If you want to simultaneously toggle one block on and the other off, such as to switch between two different Distortion blocks, tap on one blocks Bypass button within the Inspector and set its bypass state is set opposite to the state of the other block. ### Using Snapshot Bypass By default, the Action Panel's **Snapshot Bypass** switch is enabled (in the right position ![Snapshot Bypass Switch - enabled](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d9ab9ca4739f0e48b4b1e5cd21e31dfcd1bbc66c60ca3e850b7342edee0865c9/SnapshotBypassSw_On.png?cb=9c33c0241e999a43a3829ad6c1277c68) ) for all effect blocks, allowing the Bypass state to be automatically recalled via snapshots. Toggle this switch to the left to disable snapshot control of the selected block's bypass state. **Note:** The Helix Stadium Snapshots feature is a big enough topic to warrant its own section. Please see the [**Snapshots**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/snapshots.md) page. --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Bypass and Controller Assignment Please check out the video below for an overview of creating assignments, then read on for additional details on this page. ## About Bypass and Controller Assignments Helix Stadium provides a wide variety of tools for controlling your tone during a performance. The most obvious two are stomp switches (to turn effects on and off) and expression pedals (to dynamically control wah or volume). But stomp switches, expression pedals, incoming MIDI CCs or notes, the [**XY Controller**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/bypass-and-controller-assign.md#377e08e1-7fcb-493f-86d4-0b9867d8d8cf), and even drum triggers and contact microphones can be used to control the bypass states and parameters of your various blocks. You can even have parameters instantly change when selecting different snapshots within a preset. By default, adding an effect, Looper, or FX Loop block automatically assigns it to the first available Stomp A switch (or if Stomp A is full, the first available Stomp B switch). If you'd prefer to assign Stomps manually, set [**Global Settings \> Switches/Pedals**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#globals-switchespedals)**\> Assign FX to Stomps** to **Manual** (see below). ![AutoAssign.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_aafe880923e86ffb6f897fda497ba73bc77af832cf10e6eb5586038995eae572/AutoAssign.png?cb=f81469da913291dd0c5a597893caf988) Global Settings \> Switches/Pedals \> Assign FX to Stomps In addition, adding a Wah, Pitch Wham, or Poly Wham block automatically assigns its Position parameter to be controlled by EXP 1. Adding a Volume Pedal or Pan block automatically assigns its Position to be controlled by EXP 2; the hidden EXP Toe switch toggles between Wah/Pitch Wham and Volume/Pan. ## Assigning Bypass/Control There are several ways of quickly assigning block bypass and parameter control. ### Quick Bypass Assign 1. From the Home \> Edit screen, **select the block you want to assign to a stomp switch**. * Input, Output, and Merge blocks cannot be assigned to footswitches. * Any Split block type *can* be assigned to a footswitch; when bypassed, the signal is split and routed equally to both Path A (upper) and Path B (lower). 2. **Select Stomp A or Stomp B footswitch mode (if not already there).** 3. **Touch and hold (but don't press) the desired footswitch.** The Stomp Assign dialog appears (see below). * If you want to replace any other assignments that may already be on the switch, tap **Replace** . Otherwise, leave it set to **Merge**, which allows for multiple items to be assigned to the same switch. * If you want to make the switch momentary ---that is, it changes state only while being held ---tap **Momentary** . Otherwise, leave it set to **Latching**, which toggles the switch's state every time it's pressed. Note that footswitch type (Momentary or Latching) is determined per footswitch, not per assignment. * If you'd like to relabel or color the stomp switch, tap **Label/Color** . The keyboard appears. **Enter the name and tap Done** ![Done](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_0a0233bc69ce3499ca22ecc765208c91a5b9af605d92ed51f4526b6c520e193f/7bdd5770-a480-477b-9c0d-ec1d1ea40461?cb=e3bad4dbb75013bd723164a06ca2b31e) **.** ![The Stomp Assign dialog](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_509ad38f0da7c4b535d533ae9ac1eb8d65c304dd3444e7ea6c736bf95b1dbedf/StompAssignDialog.png?cb=3c23bdfcf83d07bc2b132959a54cf442) Quick Stomp Assign 4. **Tap Assign Block.** **Tip:** You can also "merge" 2 or more blocks' assignments to a single stomp switch---see [**Merging Blocks' Switch Assignments**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/building-and-editing-tones.md#merge-assignments). ### Learn Bypass 1. From the Home \> Edit screen, **select the block you want to assign to a switch**. * Input, Output, and Merge blocks cannot be assigned to switches. * Any Split block type *can* be assigned to a switch; when bypassed, the signal is split and routed equally to both Path A (upper) and Path B (lower). 2. **Tap the selected block again.** The Action Panel appears (below left.) 3. **Tap Assign to Switch...** The Assign to Switch dialog appears (below right). * If you want to replace any other assignments that may already be on the switch, tap **Replace** . Otherwise, leave it set to **Merge**, which allows for multiple items to be assigned to the same switch. * If you want to make the switch momentary---that is, it changes state only while being held---tap **Momentary** . Otherwise, leave it set to **Latching**, which toggles the switch's state every time it's pressed. Note that footswitch type (Momentary or Latching) is determined per footswitch, not per assignment. ![ActionPanel.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_2ae1cb2ca0fbfb2bce2151a282bb1180bee78c50a02fb1670ceac4a5e13ec80e/ActionPanel.png?cb=a29a2a94e7d98d53eb5ba918403222c3) Action Panel ![BypassAssign-LearnDialog.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5009ea83b4acc2e4ea37c84a3d346d58cb069baa6dd3c2ba04b1d52e6cd17310/BypassAssign-LearnDialog.png?cb=821edc3cd67d974bc16944c3afc3c4d3) Assign switch dialog 4. **Press the desired Stomp A or Stomp B switch, move an expression pedal, or send a CC or note from your MIDI controller.** Alternatively, the block is assigned. ### Learn Controller Use the following steps to quickly "Learn" a Controller assignment to a specific parameter using an expression pedal, switch, trigger, or MIDI type controller. 1. From the Home \> Edit screen, **press and hold the knob for an** ***unassigned*** **parameter you wish to control. Alternatively, tap the parameter to open the Parameter Panel and tap Learn Controller in the sidebar.** The Learn/Assign Control dialog appears (see below). * **Note:** If the parameter has *already* been assigned, pressing and holding the knob jumps to the Bypass/Control screen with that parameter in focus. ![Learn-Assign Dialog.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_16b3e0cd7e204b8e02f75b7c8ffc4a2f842f2c0449fa8730a0c861f3aaf5cb38/Learn-Assign%20Dialog.png?cb=138cf4c8800b3f7c4b5d845ad0286626) Learn/Assign Control dialog 2. **Engage the controller from which you wish to control the parameter:** * Press a Stomp A or Stomp B switch (or a momentary footswitch connected to **CONTROL A/B** or ![Helix Stadium XL only](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_68e32cab328155fd3510bc35780c129c2a0ea028ff1ed40b7a74a365627f3916/Icon_XL.png?cb=eb82c58bec6c3f8aaf1811bc572e962e) **C/D**). * Strike a drum trigger or contact microphone connected to **CONTROL A/B** or ![Helix Stadium XL only](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_68e32cab328155fd3510bc35780c129c2a0ea028ff1ed40b7a74a365627f3916/Icon_XL.png?cb=eb82c58bec6c3f8aaf1811bc572e962e) **C/D**. * Move the built-in expression pedal ( ![Helix Stadium XL only](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_68e32cab328155fd3510bc35780c129c2a0ea028ff1ed40b7a74a365627f3916/Icon_XL.png?cb=eb82c58bec6c3f8aaf1811bc572e962e) only) or an expression pedal connected to **CONTROL A/B** or ![Helix Stadium XL only](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_68e32cab328155fd3510bc35780c129c2a0ea028ff1ed40b7a74a365627f3916/Icon_XL.png?cb=eb82c58bec6c3f8aaf1811bc572e962e) **C/D**. * Send a MIDI CC or note from your MIDI controller. * Tap the X or Y controller axis icon in the dialog box. Once a controller is learned, the parameter's value appears white and small white nodes appear above and below the parameter slider, indicating the min/max range of control (see below): ![PositionParameter_MinMax.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_6536e78b51e9bea8b5a5ae6300094bcf5e55022682307e2b8417eb058c1a1b4a/PositionParameter_MinMax.png?cb=53795fb1fe4eb3ad94d02be9a1842537) Controller-assigned parameter 3. **To change the control range, tap the parameter.** The Parameter Panel appears (see below). **Tap and move the Min and Max nodes left or right to set the control range.** To reverse controller behavior, **move the Min note to the right of the Max node**. * To quickly clear any assigned controllers from the parameter, tap **Clear Controllers** in the Parameter Panel's sidebar. ![The Parameter Panel showing a Wah Posiiton parameter's Minimum and Maximum flags](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_18fd51377a88002eda7dcb33ab048e9b333607e9459fe4a62ff7d4cbc70463d8/ParameterPanel_MinMax.png?cb=860392121474b3712fd29af2f4446ac2) Parameter Panel ### Quick-Swapping Stomp Switches If you want to change the location of Stomp mode switches (especially those with multiple items assigned or custom labels and LED ring colors), instead of manually reassigning everything, you can quickly swap their locations. 1. **Touch (but don't press) any two Stomp mode footswitches.**The following dialog appears: ![Dialog_SwapStomps.jpg](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_aa973679521c9bb826cdd296fa9c81e6a40e3c6f2cca0b73f28aec5351ece69c/Dialog_SwapStomps.jpg?cb=6e53959bf1ed9aadf2864b0d98a1ae1f) Swap Stomp Switches dialog 2. **Tap Yes, Swap.** ### Customizing a Stomp's Label and Color 1. **Tap-hold an assigned Stomp A or Stomp B switch.** The Quick Stomp Assign dialog appears: ![The Stomp Assign dialog](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_509ad38f0da7c4b535d533ae9ac1eb8d65c304dd3444e7ea6c736bf95b1dbedf/StompAssignDialog.png?cb=3c23bdfcf83d07bc2b132959a54cf442) Quick Stomp Assign 2. **Tap Label/Color** ![The Stomp switch Label-Color icon](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_6019a5029430c8843b020317375a9e4bf481264901cd442c81c381fefe4b5289/Label-ColorButton.png?cb=597be5b8ecd4cbe9d3550910107f88d9) **in the sidebar.** A keyboard appears (see below). **Enter the new label.** ![CustomizeLabel-color.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_7e7a707d9a3ba9d8611d69323e18315bddf52a4e17b997bb0c41deec3370f22d/CustomizeLabel-color.png?cb=8ae4c419f67a768e7b83aeb36b782a6c) Customizing stomp label and color 3. **Tap the desired color swatch.** **Auto** matches the default color for the footswitch LED (Delays are green, Mods are blue, EQs are yellow, etc.) and **Off** disables the LED, regardless of the switch's bypass state. 4. **When finished, tap** ![Done](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_bb81a9255ce369e7ceffc0760b91668d26733fc528610d6f9fbd0fac700407c8/DoneButton.png?cb=a02578c4f078198e29844645574b50d6) **.** *** ** * ** *** ## The Bypass/Control Screen Most bypass and controller assignments can (and should!) be accomplished by Quick Bypass Assign, Learn Bypass, and Learn Controller (as illustrated above). But you can also manually assign bypass to blocks---and controllers to parameters---from the Bypass/Control screen. 1. **Tap the Menu icon** ![Header_MenuButton.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_27de501b2b26b217184e5263be63f1291c4bff02b592631be7c125ed6cc41de5/Header_MenuButton.png?cb=eb95cbe785f6246cdd1a789f6fbfd3eb) **and then Bypass/Control** ![Button_MenuBypassControl.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_79d0e48b173f342fe76614cad4a159e874ff5664375058151a0fdb8497a624db/Button_MenuBypassControl.png?cb=f56d8c2ddf3c2d5cdfce0794e23674d2) **.** Alternatively, **tap-hold any Home \> Edit parameter in the inspector.** The Bypass/Control screen appears. 2. **Turn Knob 1 (Parameter) to choose what you want to control.** Different parameters appear on Knobs 2-8 depending on whether Knob 1 is set to **Bypass** (below left) or anything other than Bypass (below right). ![Stadium_BypassControlBypass.jpg](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_29e2909e7bada386d9127ae6d6b914c531199f93924595669cee5a6c82ddb5ff/Stadium_BypassControlBypass.jpg?cb=5686f4b3353dbd6e479cf9f645e8fd92) Bypass/Control \> Bypass selected ![Stadium_BypassControlControl.jpg](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5f8970a8b3e4f7be1e319b9ecccad70740746c0b83ecfdbb99e570427a804fa3/Stadium_BypassControlControl.jpg?cb=ade61620f3644ba33694b117c02309e2) Bypass/Control \> Parameter selected 4. **Tap Learn in the inspector header.** If Knob 1 (Parameter) is set to **Bypass**, the Assign Switch dialog appears (below left). If Knob 1 (Parameter) is set to anything else, the Learn/Assign Control dialog appears (below right). ![BypassAssign-LearnDialog.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5009ea83b4acc2e4ea37c84a3d346d58cb069baa6dd3c2ba04b1d52e6cd17310/BypassAssign-LearnDialog.png?cb=821edc3cd67d974bc16944c3afc3c4d3) Assign Switch dialog ![Learn-Assign Dialog.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_16b3e0cd7e204b8e02f75b7c8ffc4a2f842f2c0449fa8730a0c861f3aaf5cb38/Learn-Assign%20Dialog.png?cb=138cf4c8800b3f7c4b5d845ad0286626) Learn/Assign Control dialog 5. **Engage the controller (press a Stomp switch, move an expression pedal, strike a trigger, send a MIDI CC/note, etc.) to assign it to the parameter.** Click to show Bypass/Control parameters... ### **When Knob 1 (Parameter) is set to Bypass:** | **Parameter** | **Description** | |---------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Switch** | Selects the controller type for the Bypass assignment. | | **Type** | Appears when Knob 2 (Switch) is set to any Stomp switch or external momentary footswitch. Determines the behavior for the switch: * **Latching:** The block is bypassed (or enabled, if already bypassed) whenever you press the switch. * **Momentary:** The block is bypassed (or enabled, if already bypassed) for as long as you hold the switch. **Note:** Footswitch type (latching or momentary) is determined *per footswitch*, not per assignment. | | **Position** | Appears when Knob 2 (Switch) is set to an expression pedal. Determines the point within the expression pedal's travel where the block is enabled or bypassed. 0% is heel down; 99% is toe down. | | **Wait** | Appears when Knob 2 (Switch) is set to an expression pedal. Determines how long Helix waits before bypassing the block; for example, you wouldn't want the wah to turn off every time you touched the heel down position in your big funk wah solo. | | **Behavior** | Appears when Knob 2 (Switch) is set to an expression pedal. Determines how bypassing is handled. * When set to **Toggle** , bringing the pedal past the **Position** value toggles the block's bypass state, regardless of its current state (i.e., enabling it if currently bypassed and vice versa). * **Toe Down** and **Heel Down** *always* bypass the block at the designated Toe or Heel pedal position, regardless of the block's starting state. With **Heel Down** selected, the block always turns on when you cross the Position value and bypasses when you return below it. (Since these options always bypass the block, they can prevent snapshot settings from unexpectedly toggling your EXP-assigned block on.) | | **MIDI In** | Determines the type of MIDI command assigned to bypass: * **None:** The block's bypass ignores incoming MIDI messages. * **Note:** The block can be bypassed by pressing MIDI notes (or drum pads) on a keyboard or other MIDI controller. * **CC0\~CC127:** The block can be bypassed by an incoming MIDI CC message. CC values 0-63 turn the block off; values 64-127 turn the block on. | | **MIDI Note** | Appears when Knob 6 (MIDI In) is set to **Note**. Selects which MIDI note bypasses the block. Middle C is C3 on Yamaha^®^ keyboards, but other companies may consider it C4. | | **Note Type** | Appears when Knob 6 (MIDI In) is set to **Note**. Determines the behavior of the MIDI note: * **Latching:** The block is bypassed (or enabled, if already bypassed) every time you press the key. * **Momentary:** The block is bypassed (or enabled, if already bypassed) for as long as you hold the key. | #### **When Knob 1 (Parameter) is set to anything** ***other than*** **Bypass:** | **Parameter** | **Description** | |----------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Controller** | Selects the controller type for the assignment. **Note:** On Helix Stadium XL devices, EXP 1, EXP 2, and EXP Toe are accommodated via the onboard pedal's toe switch. Please refer to the [**External Pedal and Switch Controller Configuration**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/external-pedal-and-switch-controller-configuration.md) page for details. | | **Type** | Appears when Knob 2 (Controller) is set to any Stomp switch or external momentary footswitch. * **Latching:** Toggles between Min and Max values every time you press the switch. * **Momentary:** The value changes for as long as you hold the switch and returns to its original value when you release it. **Note:** Footswitch type (latching or momentary) is determined *per footswitch*, not per assignment. | | **MIDI In** | Determines the type of MIDI command assigned for control: * **None:** The parameter ignores incoming MIDI messages. * **Note:** The parameter's min and max values can be toggled by pressing MIDI notes (or drum pads) on a keyboard or other MIDI controller. * **CC0\~CC127:** The parameter can be controlled from an incoming MIDI CC message. | | **MIDI Note** | Appears when Knob 6 (MIDI In) is set to **Note**. Selects which MIDI note toggles between min and max values. Middle C is C3 on Yamaha^®^ keyboards, but other companies may consider it C4. | | **Note Type** | Appears when Knob 6 (MIDI In) is set to **Note**. Determines the behavior of the MIDI note: * **Latching:** The parameter toggles between min and max every time you press the key. * **Momentary:** The parameter changes for as long as you hold the key and returns to its original value when you release it. | | **Min Value** | Sets the value range to be controlled. For example, if your controller is an expression pedal, Min Value sets the value sent from the pedal when it is moved to its heel position, and Max Value sets the value when it is moved to its toe position. | | **Max Value** | Sets the value range to be controlled. For example, if your controller is an expression pedal, Min Value sets the value sent from the pedal when it is moved to its heel position, and Max Value sets the value when it is moved to its toe position. | ### Bypass/Control Action Panel 1. **While on the Bypass/Control screen, tap the selected block.** The Bypass/Control Action Panel appears: ![Clearing all a block's, or all blocks' assignments](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_0785bb938ada6dc359b7d1a6d0bda89a0cc545b96ff972cb88a8b07b85fa064b/ClearBlockAssignment.png?cb=2f5ea663fc918c18c81fa3b360824778) Bypass/Control \> Action Panel * Tap **Clear Assignments** to clear all bypass and controller assignments from the selected block. * Tap **Clear All Assignments** to clear all assignments from *all blocks* within the current preset. A dialog appears: "Clear Bypass and Controller Assignments from all blocks?" Tap **OK**. **Note:** To quickly clear an individual parameter's controller assignments, from the Home \> Edit screen, **tap the parameter to open the Parameter Panel and tap Clear Controllers in the sidebar.** ![The Parameter Panel showing a Wah Posiiton parameter's Minimum and Maximum flags](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_18fd51377a88002eda7dcb33ab048e9b333607e9459fe4a62ff7d4cbc70463d8/ParameterPanel_MinMax.png?cb=860392121474b3712fd29af2f4446ac2) Parameter Panel *** ** * ** *** ## XY Controller Helix Stadium's screen can be used as a large performance-based touch controller where one or more parameters are assigned to the X or Y axis. Each axis on the XY Controller can also be used to transmit MIDI CCs via the [**Command Center**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/command-center.md). Even though they look similar, Focus view and the XY Controller screen are very different. While Focus view (at least for most amps and effects) is used for quickly dialing in five distinct sounds of that particular block (with Focus zones in the four corners and center), the XY Controller is different in that *any parameter from any block(s)* can be assigned to an XY axis (with axis extremes along each edge). Just remember: Focus view is meant for *editing* a single block, XY Controller if meant for *real time control* of multiple blocks during a performance. ### Assigning Parameters to the XY Controller 1. Press-hold the knob for an *unassigned* parameter. The Learn/Assign Control dialog appears: ![Learn-Assign Dialog.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_16b3e0cd7e204b8e02f75b7c8ffc4a2f842f2c0449fa8730a0c861f3aaf5cb38/Learn-Assign%20Dialog.png?cb=138cf4c8800b3f7c4b5d845ad0286626) Learn/Assign Control dialog 2. **Tap the X or Y axis icon. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for any other parameters you want to assign.** See [**Learn Controller**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/bypass-and-controller-assign.md#quick-controller-assign). 3. **Press the XY Controller button** ![The top panel XY Controller button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_fb06977dd6ca7b1af6acde5ef93eb533bf3c1e4f108d60a004f47385bfe1e590/Button_XY.png?cb=8bb9c1376df2b84e354a4f2bef4db721) (to the right of the Save button). The XY Controller screen appears: ![XYExample4.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_7cb073a08829d743a1292fe6af88bd396c273d890e5d82806dfa7a152921c1ea/XYExample4.png?cb=7426abcc540ac1b26f40a4b8d9646a67) Adjusting the XY Controller screen 4. **Tap the circular XY node and move it around the screen to adjust all assigned parameters.** * By default, lifting your finger causes the XY node to snap back to its original position. If you prefer the XY node stays where you left, tap the Rubber Band toggle **Off**. * The time it takes the Rubber Band to return is determined by Knob 8 (Rubber Band Time). * Read-only text appears in the sidebar, showing the current X and Y positions (0-100) as well as transmitted MIDI CC values (0-127) in case you've assigned the X and/or Y axis to MIDI CC from the [**Command Center**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/command-center.md). --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Cabs and Cab IRs By default, adding an Amp block automatically adds a matching cab block to ensure you attain the complete sound of a physical amp and speaker cabinet. However, Helix Stadium also works great with real power amps and wooden cabinets, in which case you should avoid adding a redundant Cab block to your signal flow. Read [**this blog**](https://blog.line6.com/2023/09/15/eric-klein-at-least-half-of-your-modelers-sound-is-determined-by-your-playback-system/) for more info. Unlike in the world of physical amplifiers, Helix Stadium makes it easy to audition a multitude of classic and modern speaker cabs, with swappable mics and numerous parameters to tweak them further. You can also load Cab IRs (Impulse Responses) with or in place of Stadium's Cabs. A Cab block consists of any two of the following: * Guitar Cab * Bass Cab * IR (Impulse Response) **Tip!** For the complete, current lists of all Amp, Cab, and Effect Models included in Helix Stadium family products and the original gear they are based on, please see the [***Helix Stadium Models***](https://line6.com/helix-stadium-models/) on the Line 6 website. ## Selecting a Cab or Cab IR By default, when you add an Amp block to a preset, a Cab block is automatically added to its right, and the "matched" Cab appears in the left tab of the Cab block. To disable this behavior, from the Model List \> Amp's sidebar, **tap the Add Cab Block** ![the Add Cab Block Switch](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ae65ee859ccbccd48487eaefe265922646a26ac4e403ba3662dce7d8379d0d58/AddCabSwitch.png?cb=41dc3c44da7470f3a9ff8abc746d0ba0) **toggle off.** See the [**Amp \& Preamp Models**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/amp-blocks.md) page. **Note:** Amp Clone blocks do not offer the Add Cab Block option. If your Clone is captured from an amplifier signal without a speaker cab simulation or IR, you'll want to manually add a Cab block (see below) following the Amp Clone block for a complete amp and cab tone. You can also add a Cab block manually: 1. **From the Home screen, tap an empty location on a path.** Block categories appear in the inspector. ![CabModelCategoryButton.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_0250dbe9c65588ec9d0b3300185696a563587b4d048855a534ddae48df8fa9c4/CabModelCategoryButton.png?cb=1ab4fad535cda96d1180bbaf042bbb01) Quick block selector (None block selected on the Home \> Edit screen) 2. **Tap the Cab button to open the Model List.** Tap the list view button ![List-Gallery Selector](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_589dd01761214b16c1c137d9cc41fb6eb1146ed88cbcb5e1b30b640aa432163e/0741c0b3-2e8b-4b66-9b63-573c952cf7a9?cb=213a38634b4ab1500dcce58784b4d1a0) to choose to view more items in a condensed list (below left) or fewer items as large images in a grid (below right). ![The Model browser,Cab category selected, List View](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_df028af17af5170405fc0133bb1f2743f10f817179b0338b1cef24f9f8cc8abf/ModelList_Cabs.png?cb=745a4312213cbfdf1e49599d9939e362) Model List \> List view ![The Model browser,Cab category selected, Gallery View](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5eed52d57ffefa10597b731bc14b80af7fd7bd49fbae2c19164a956344e50ac4/ModelBrowser_Cab_Gallery.png?cb=402ec9be2531fe6fa852bbcea01c41fe) Model List \> Grid view 3. **Swipe the list up or down (or turn the Lower Knob) to find the desired item.** * Tap GUITAR CAB, BASS CAB, or CAB IR in the sidebar to quickly scroll the list up or down to that subcategory.\* ^**\***^**Note:** It is only possible to select **NO CAB** for the 2nd Cab slot. 4. **Tap to select the item and press Home** ![Home button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_db793063a8456224a9362047a19ca2c4222dcc211e77d3bf48cff144ef325604/26164df5-a62f-45b2-9a81-9c206add3cc6?cb=9664a711688df707f2c11c8ef485896d) **(or tap the Inspector header) to close the Model List. Alternatively, double-tap to select the item** ***and*** **close the Model List.** 5. To add a second Cab or Cab IR to the block, **tap the 2nd cab slot (in the right half of the Inspector Header) and repeat steps 3 and 4 above.** **Note:** The Cab block's **Amp \> Cab Link** toggle (found in the Cab's Focus view sidebar) automatically selects a matching Cab model when the linked Amp model is changed, but only applies when a Cab block is added via the[++**Add Cab Block toggle**++](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/cab-blocks.md). ## ![Cab Category Button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d8997cc347137c68e750c382a12f386bb759506cf00b613330db1ad319612faa/Cab%20Category%20Button.png?cb=d80eca7b4982f170f267548c035df9bd) Cabs Each Cab in Helix Stadium is comprised of thousands of IRs. Cab blocks are unique in that they can contain one or two Cabs or Cab IRs (or one of each). * When one Cab or Cab IR is loaded, the Cab block sums its incoming signal to mono. * When two Cabs or two Cab IRs (or one of each) are selected in a single Cab block, the Cab block is stereo in and stereo out. * Also see the [**Signal Path Routing**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/signal-path-routing.md) page for tips on mono/stereo routing. ### Hybrid Cabs from Helix/HX Helix Stadium does not include the older Hybrid Cab models from Helix/HX (pre-3.50 firmware). When importing a Helix/HX preset into Helix Stadium, any Hybrid Cab blocks are automatically converted to a new Cab. They may sound better right from the get go, but note that they will likely sound different. ### Cab \> Focus View When a Cab block is selected on the Home \> Edit screen, **tap the Focus icon** ![The Cab Focus button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c2718ce35bbc41a3701fe57dd3d1e1f3c9c30f535c4edcec7d8135f2008d6cc3/Cab_FocusButton.png?cb=fc8d33ef50f02b773cbdd77e9f2ea323) **in the Inspector to open Focus view. Tap and drag the Mic to set its Position and Distance relative to the Cab speaker, just as you would in the studio. Tap the 0°/45° toggle to set the Angle.** These parameters, along with all other Cab parameters, can also be adjusted within the Inspector at the bottom of the screen. When a Cab IR is selected, Focus view shows a static frequency plot of the IR file for reference, along with **User Default** , **Factory Default** , and **Add to Favorites** sidebar options, as described below. Please see the [**Cab IRs**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/cab-blocks.md#cab-irs) section below for more about using IRs. ![The Cab block Focus View, Cab Model selected](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ab098b13fbfc5c28a15a1e62c5f18d02f9f3bafa14b48254e7931641fe4cd50b/MicEditor_Annotations.png?cb=c1fc86d57dd79bd51642f3d4b2425a76) The Cab model's Focus view ![FocusView_IR.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_84b760d811a3b1a4eae4e1bf25799ffdfbe796fca1cf1e97c5b37f0100a0eec1/FocusView_IR.png?cb=03a9021007585814c58bec7c816db910) The Cab IR's Focus View ![Item 01](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_2898b27a29af93eec5ecf59a42dcf26682a7c3e1dc2a52cac3bb1a77fe1a5df7/01.png?cb=ce61b591a14429573632afbeb4c2997c) **Focus:** While Focus view is shown, the icon appears white ![FocusButtonWhite.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_2be66a0f4e9856eff9948b8b8299f76faafb3618cbd32e99d458da78e8eb873a/FocusButtonWhite.png?cb=af7677378a9a8f9745b5e4557c640e79) . Tap to exit Focus view. ![Item 2](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_0d08750cb7d927938dbf894f5f8751af321f60d49022290ac05d8a5b15258006/02.png?cb=53ead26f31014fd489e07cfbde017dc7) **Cab or Cab IR:** Since a Cab block offers two tabbed slots, tap the desired slot to view its parameters. Loading a Cab IR is slightly different than loading a Cab---please see the following section on [**Cab IRs**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/cab-blocks.md#cab-irs). ![Item 3](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_eba6d4136dad054b52efeaa829578d0d0c77fd2cec78ceccc0b2dbc15261f0b7/03.png?cb=632cde3c35c9abd3a51e6bbd6f0126be) **Mic:** Tap and drag the mic to adjust the Position and Distance parameters. ![Item 4](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5d4f56360907a83c1da7ddccc7c7b1c6ae96bc05ba97adb9ef2d80a6a1db6268/04.png?cb=075549902ea87b3442a14dd60557ca0c) **Angle:** Tap to set the preferred mic angle---0° or 45° ![Item 5](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_80c393ea83aef6784829540d4c071addd6fb46dc4846305b1555cb5e821bb0fd/05.png?cb=3c60906905f19136c9550e92d3fb7999) **Sidebar:** Several additional options are available here for the selected Cab model/Cab IR. * **User Default:** If you find yourself constantly re-tweaking your commonly-used Cabs the same way, **Tap User Default** ![User Default command](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_25c650b6e19d2e37c4da0548c40ccaf29a80254b5eaf614a4c7f47f578cb4c09/UserDefault.png?cb=a4d95a351a498a940c65f1c10b23ceed) **to save the Cab's settings as its new defaults, so it always shows up the way you want.** See [**Creating User Defaults**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/building-and-editing-tones.md#user-default). * **Factory Default:** If you've stored User Default settings for the selected Cab model or Cab IR, **tap Factory Default** ![Factory Default command](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_0cd15bb1f621f7690807d308602d574074a6600b74cb6a7dd46fd6091ee52587/FactoryDefault.png?cb=0e60457719a1e02ee5e86c83d19289fd) **to return it to its original default settings for all future uses**. * **Add to Favorites:** Once a Cab block is configured to your liking, add it as a Favorite to easily recall it for future presets. See [**Adding a Favorite**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/favorites.md). * **Amp\>Cab Link:** ![Amp-CabLinkSwitch.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_de9d5fea0a61bde75607f630568567f201f5b3c93b96e5729208ad38cea55e87/Amp-CabLinkSwitch.png?cb=c05e8ac8cfb065860f5eec71695ff366) By default, changing an Amp model will automatically recall a "matched" cab for the left tab of its linked Cab block. When an Amp and Cab block are linked, selecting one of them will display a gold link icon (see below). When off, changing Amp models does not affect the Cab block. (Note that Amp \> Clone type blocks cannt be linked to Cabs.) ![LinkedAmpCab.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_df8d7200a61e342d2ffa498a3819424d7929d3e159cb00c3af05a924b9b40464/LinkedAmpCab.png?cb=f6d16f7080d718cfae4416c87268fd1c) "Linked" Amp and Cab blocks * **Amp\>Cab Link** is only active when you add the Amp \& Cab with the Amp Model List's [**Add Cab Block**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/amp-blocks.md) toggle. Note that Amp\>Cab Link is also not active when an Amp or Amp+Cab Clone is selected in the Amp block. * The Cab block's right tab Cab model remains unchanged when **Amp\>Cab Link** is enabled unless you also have **Cab\>Cab Link** enabled (see the next item). * **Cab\>Cab Link: Tap** ![Cab-CabLinkSwitch.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_0d9e1941bd9eab924f0131d99c4df89eac39f585142b16852c9e09c9899f4b51/Cab-CabLinkSwitch.png?cb=763950c2a8ae1cec490a91567ea20575) **on to link both sides of a Cab block.** When on, changing the left cab automatically loads the same cab on the right. This can be helpful when you want the same cab but different mics, or the same cab and mic but different mic positions or distances.\* * Changing the right Cab does not affect the left Cab. ## Cab Parameters ![CabParameters.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_2f2c174f0359d10ea2a1224ede0efb925d36b9536546b874b0aef033a3ba9e25/CabParameters.png?cb=cfbe41449a65674457f0ca0ca77fc0fb) Cab parameters in the inspector (left cab selected) **Tip:** Cab blocks offer a lot of choices and possible speaker and mic combinations. Once you've edited and configured a Cab block exactly how you like, it is a good idea to add it as a Favorite so you can easily use it for future presets. See [**Adding a Favorite**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/favorites.md). **Tip:** Tap any Cab parameter in the Inspector to open its [**Parameter Panel**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/building-and-editing-tones.md#a40a6151-8ad3-457a-a0bc-e65f4bc8aa32), where you'll find a handy description. **Note:** The following is the list of parameters offered when a Cab Model is selected. Cab IRs offer their own set of parameters---see the [**Cab IR Parameters**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/cab-blocks.md#24a57b1c-bae4-41db-ac32-a5d9ff67210d) section. | **Cab Parameter** | **Description** | |-------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Bypass** | **Tap** ![CabBypassButton.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_0c2c69fa54792a3b087f1a1751254464d2edb2b6159d590721ee4041c1b532d9/CabBypassButton.png?cb=77314012e5bb199248d105db52a8fd4f) **in the inspector to turn the block on and off, independent of any footswitch assignment.** **Note:**A Cab block's Bypass is not automatically assigned to a Stomp mode footswitch. But you can manually assign any Cab block by selecting the block within the signal flow, touching a Stomp mode footswitch, and tapping Assign Block when prompted. | | **Mic** | Selects the mic pointed at the cabinet. (Guitar and Bass cabs have different sets of mics available; see [**Cab Mics**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/cab-blocks.md#cab-mic-models).) Mic selection can have as big an impact on your tone as tweaking the Amp's tonestack or even applying an EQ block, so experimentation is key here. | | **Position** | Sets the lateral location of the mic in relation to the speaker cone, from the center of the speaker to the edge. The "Cab Edge" value may appear in a different location depending on the selected cab. | | **Distance** | Sets the distance of the mic from the speaker. Choose from 1.00" to 12.00" in 1/4" increments. | | **Angle** | Sets the angle of the mic relative to the front of the speaker cabinet. 0 degrees is pointing directly at the speaker; 45 degrees is pointing off-axis. | | **Low Cut** | Applies a low cut (high pass) filter, letting you remove all audio below a certain frequency. May be useful in removing undesirable low end rumble. | | **High Cut** | Applies a high cut (low pass) filter, letting you remove all audio above a certain frequency. May be useful in removing high end harshness. | | **Level** | Sets the overall level of the Cab. Use to adjust level against the other side of the Cab block. | | **Pan** | Controls the panning of the Cab between the left and right channels. For stereo setups, the Cab block can sound much wider if the two sides are panned opposite of one another ("Left 100" and "Right 100"). **Note:** It is best to keep this set to Center when using a single Cab or when mono output is desired. | | **Delay** | Delays the signal slightly to purposely impart a bit of phase incoherence or at higher values, increase the Cab block's apparent stereo width (or at extreme values, a bit of doubling effect). A little goes a long way here. When set to "Auto" (all the way left, before 0.0 ms), it approximates the delay through the air when changing the mic Distance parameter. For most use cases, however, we recommend leaving Delay set to "0.0 ms." | ## Cab IRs Instead of Cabs, you can load one or two Cab IRs to a Cab block. **Impulse Responses** , or "**IRs**" are mathematical functions representing the sonic measurements of audio systems (in this case, speaker cabinet and mic combinations)---resulting in very short audio files that can then be loaded into an IR loader to provide a virtual recreation of the entire system---cabinet, speaker, mic, and perhaps even some post-processing like EQ. This process of "capturing" speaker cabs as IRs has made it possible to have an endless number of combinations of speakers, cabinets, microphones, mic placement, etc., for use with Helix Stadium and other amps and devices. Helix Stadium can load thousands of Cab IRs in nested folders, organized however you like. ### Importing IRs Importing IR files is easily accomplished using the free **Helix Stadium application** for macOS and Windows^®^ computers. Please see the **Helix Stadium Application -** [**Importing IR Files**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/librarian-view.md#importing-irs) section. **Note:** A maximum of 2,048 IRs can be stored on a Helix Stadium device. If you import several hundred IR files or more in one session, the next time you power on Helix Stadium, it may take a few extra minutes to complete initial indexing for the IR Library. Subsequent startups will not require this additional indexing time. Remember that you can use the Helix Stadium app to Export IR files to your computer to store them there, and delete them from Stadium if you're accumulating too many on the device. **Helix Stadium supports IRs in WAV (.wav)** **format**. Regardless of the source WAV file's length, sample rate, bit depth, and mono/stereo format, Cab IRs are processed internally as 2048-sample, 48kHz, 32-bit float, mono files. **Tip:** WAV IR files supported by Helix^®^, HX^®^, POD^®^ Go devices, as well as Helix Native and Metallurgy^®^ software, are also compatible with Helix Stadium. ### Loading an IR within a Cab Block Once you've imported IRs into Helix Stadium, you can select, audition, and load an IR within the Model List. 1. **With a Cab block selected, tap the left or right side of the Inspector header to open the Model List (also see the next section).** 2. Tap **Cab IR** ![Cab IR Sidebar](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_68e607cc1af3d1d3b6aac1ba75706c5e21b334e83c546c0a3c51793f30be4474/CabIR_Sidebar.png?cb=6f90c9d0d7755d08ce62a18f020bfc82) in the sidebar to scroll to the bottom of the list, then tap on **2048 IR** ![IRSelect.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_71d8ee20df3b456ba223184c3b134c9a4ae2d486dd282b97a540ce61d9f61cd7/IRSelect.png?cb=bc36c2389aa71b405c4d50f72274b01a) **(below left).** 3. **Tap on the pink \ box to open the USER CAB IRs file browser. Navigate the browser to find the IR you want and tap to audition it (below right). Return to the Home \> Edit screen once you've selected the desired IR file.** * To clear the IR file from the Cab, tap the small X icon in the pink box ![CabIRLoadedTab.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c309ea487bcfcee7d6511279d997f211f25cfc2a90816343c63ae7a072b9c079/CabIRLoadedTab.png?cb=ea93fa53f42886ec61453826790a60b2) . ![The Model Browser showing the Cab IR category](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_33a96d25f12e767dc884dce533e1bfeccd9708cfb91382374209e3e53297f096/IR_CategorySelect_Gallery.png?cb=e06e7bbf4c82da4270f9d0d6cfd08a42) Model List \> Cab \> IR ![CabIRList.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5f4b82c3e3fdbb04ad2c2d4bec7efb489af3324ec5afc1676ee0c8a7417d0d22/CabIRList.png?cb=58858742adafb7de2856ee7619225966) Selecting an IR file from the User Cab IR list ### The USER CAB IR List ![IRBrowser_Annotated.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_65c7d27a9c1684cdada5f0125c6a73c8edbee040fe17636abc88ef97ddd76066/IRBrowser_Annotated.png?cb=3fdb25543b17558f9aa2e6487b12b550) The Cab IR File List offers the following options ![Item 01](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_2898b27a29af93eec5ecf59a42dcf26682a7c3e1dc2a52cac3bb1a77fe1a5df7/01.png?cb=ce61b591a14429573632afbeb4c2997c) **Search Field:** Tap to type a search term in this field to filter the list of IRs. ![Item 2](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_0d08750cb7d927938dbf894f5f8751af321f60d49022290ac05d8a5b15258006/02.png?cb=53ead26f31014fd489e07cfbde017dc7) **User Cab IRs Folder:** Tap on this folder in the left column to display the list of all your imported User Cab IR files within the middle column. ![Item 3](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_eba6d4136dad054b52efeaa829578d0d0c77fd2cec78ceccc0b2dbc15261f0b7/03.png?cb=632cde3c35c9abd3a51e6bbd6f0126be) **Cab IR list:** Once IR files have been imported into Helix Stadium, the middle column shows your library of User Cab IRs. ![Item 4](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5d4f56360907a83c1da7ddccc7c7b1c6ae96bc05ba97adb9ef2d80a6a1db6268/04.png?cb=075549902ea87b3442a14dd60557ca0c) **Sidebar:** Allows you to manage your IR files. **Manage Files:** Tap ![ManageFildesCommand.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_636e0fdd11b07f2a29bcbbde45d84e9afdadf24ed5e379c1c8919412ff8be560/ManageFildesCommand.png?cb=91caa22cfc97717d28f308ab514c2fc9) to show a list of options in the sidebar to manage the IR files. Check the box to select one or more IRs to apply the sidebar commands, as shown below. ![ManageIRs.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_2d5ff38b9da0d735a5d0f08b041255ae2ed86ebe43badcfab01a08d8ff2e44f5/ManageIRs.png?cb=f0ccb16c55ea7a5d330fc85dbaf6e17a) The Manage IRs option is selected, allowing IRs or subfolders to be checked * **Select All**: "Checks" all IRs in the list. * **Deselect All**: "Unchecks" all checked IRs in the list. * **Copy Files** : Copies all checked IR files to the clipboard, letting you copy one or more User IRs and then **paste** them into a different folder or subfolder. * **Paste Files**: Pastes the clipboard contents into the currently selected folder or subfolder. * **Move to Folder** : Allows you to select one or more IRs and *move* them from their current list location into a selected subfolder. * **Delete Files** : Permanently clears the selected User IR(s) from Helix Stadium.^\*^ ^**\***^**Important!**Deleting an IR file from the IR Library that is used within any saved preset will result in the preset's Cab block changing to "UNRESOLVED," with no IR loaded in the respective tab. Tap the UNRESOLVED tab and choose a new IR or Cab model, then save the preset to retain your change. Make sure to keep backup copies of all your purchased IR files before deleting them from Helix Stadium! **Rename File/Rename Folder** : Tap ![RenameFileCommand.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_87b1e0850ab53cc06d8f39aa1c7c9fb67d0606bb2eb72abc69f3fca49d24f6a5/RenameFileCommand.png?cb=29e3d184f023e4a377cc58f556f9d5ff) to rename the current IR file or subfolder with your own custom name. **New Folder** : Tap ![NewFolderCommand.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b492817f4e52df7a17f7f36a122a515fe3d676b8264bdc32116ed113832f467e/NewFolderCommand.png?cb=84afca02ab34080dbaf723eef8a522f8) to create and name a new empty subfolder. Use the **Manage Files** functions to copy or move IRs into the subfolders you create. **Snapshot Control:** By default, this switch is **Off** . Toggle the switch to its right position to **On** ![Snapshot Control switch - on](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f407caa073b1e6ee7a80c476a3af0e36c2ac60890678ac7217e054a93dc8d332/SnapshotCtrlSwitch.png?cb=5ef715deb512ebb9085924c8d3800afe) . When enabled, loading a different IR file in the current tab will be stored and recalled per snapshot for the preset. ![Item 5](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_80c393ea83aef6784829540d4c071addd6fb46dc4846305b1555cb5e821bb0fd/05.png?cb=3c60906905f19136c9550e92d3fb7999) **Inspector**: Displays two Cab tabs and parameters for the selected tab. * **Cab/IR Tabs:** A Cab block always lets you load two Cabs or two Cab IRs (or one of each). In the image above, the left tab has the Cab IR "LRS GOLD 1PC4" loaded, and the right tab is empty (No Cab). * **Focus Icon:** **Tap to open Focus view. Tap and drag the Mic to set its Position and Distance relative to the Cab speaker, just as you would in the studio. Tap the 0°/45° toggle to set the Angle.** See [**Focus View**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/the-focus-view.md). ### Cab IR Parameters | **Cab IR Parameter** | **Description** | |----------------------|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Low Cut** | Applies a low cut (high pass) filter, letting you remove all audio below a certain frequency. May be useful in removing undesirable low end rumble. | | **High Cut** | Applies a high cut (low pass) filter, letting you remove all audio above a certain frequency. May be useful in removing high end harshness. | | **Polarity** | Inverts the polarity of the signal. Using two Cab IRs from different 3rd party vendors or trying to blend a Cab with a Cab IR can sometimes result in a thin or anemic sound. Try setting Polarity to "Inverted" to see if it helps. | | **Delay** | Delays the signal slightly to time-align with the other side of the Cab block (helping to avoid phase issues). It can also be used to purposely impart a bit of phase incoherence or at higher values, increase the Cab block's apparent stereo width. A little goes a long way here. | | **Mix** | Controls the blend between the incoming "dry" signal and the Cab IR-processed "wet" signal. A 0%, no IR is heard; at 100%, no dry signal is heard. Normally, this should be left at 100%. | | **Level** | Sets the overall level of the Cab IR. This can be handy for balancing the level with the other Cab or Cab IR in the Cab block. | | **Pan** | Controls the panning of the IR between the left and right channels. For stereo setups, the Cab block can sound much wider if the two sides are panned opposite of one another ("Left 100" and "Right 100"). | --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Clones As of Helix Stadium firmware v1.3, the Line 6 **Proxy™** **Cloning** feature is included, allowing you to quickly and accurately capture a "clone" of any physical amplifier, preamp, amp + speaker cab combination, or distortion pedal with its current settings. Once created, your clones can then be selected and used much like other Stadium Amp, Preamp, and Distortion blocks in your Stadium presets. **Looking for Clones?** Visit the [**Line 6 CustomTone**](https://line6.com/customtone/) free community site where you can download Helix Stadium presets and clones, as well as upload and share your own creations! Use the free [**Helix Stadium application**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/helix-stadium-edit-application.md) to import, export, and manage your preset and clone files. [![CutomTone.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_51c11735a9665974c63b0da8dec1efb71e3d0b3d90d76e7e61c35f69279c338e/CutomTone.png?cb=661f58c40a0a9f2bf7789536cb48d038)](https://line6.com/customtone/) The Line 6 CustomTone site ## About Clones * Stadium's Proxy engine allows you to create clones of: * An amplifier, including a speaker cabinet and a microphone. * An amplifier with no speaker cabinet (requires the use of a load box). * A preamp, which can be either a standalone preamp or the preamp portion of an amplifier (requires that the preamp or amp include a PREAMP OUT or FX SEND). * A distortion, drive, boost, or fuzz type pedal. * Your created and imported clones are saved in and selectable from Stadium's respective Amp, Preamp, or Distortion Model Lists, allowing you to add them as Clone blocks to your presets. * Clones offer similar functionality as Stadium Amp \& Effect models: * A set of Gain and EQ parameters. * Bypass and other parameters can be assigned for Snapshot, Stomp, and external Switch/Pedal/Trigger/MIDI control. * Parameters can be saved with your own User Defaults, and Clone blocks with your customized settings \& assignments can be added as Favorites. * Due to the complexity of Proxy Clones, a Clone block can require approximately the same DSP usage as an Agoura Amp model. Up to four Clone blocks can be added per preset (two clones per main path). * All Clone blocks are mono---any stereo block positioned before a clone will be summed to mono. * Helix Stadium can store a library of up to 2,048 Clones, which can either be created or imported. ## ![CloneIcon_small.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_2f4c7f5ec11b243f8138beb1250abd81a37b56ecd26200c970b636c477173aea/CloneIcon_small.png?cb=9d637ab9e1c4476b5c02f34862496276) Creating Clones Using Stadium's Proxy Cloning feature is designed to be a streamlined process---choose the desired clone type to create, then follow the on-screen steps to connect your target device to Stadium, set your levels, and start the capture. The Proxy Cloner sends test signals to collect your device's "DNA," then uploads the data to Line 6 online servers to create the clone. You can compare the clone to the original gear and save it to your Stadium Clone Library. The steps for connecting and setting levels vary by device type, as covered below. ### Before Creating a New Clone... **Please check the following connections and settings for the best results:** * Save your current preset to retain its edited settings. * Disconnect any MIDI and USB-C cables from Helix Stadium to eliminate potential noise and interference. * Connect Stadium's main 1/4″ or XLR OUTPUTS to a monitoring system, or the PHONES jack to headphones, to allow you to accurately monitor your signal. Use Stadium's large Volume knob to adjust the 1/4″, XLR, or PHONES Output level for monitoring. * Ensure your audio connections are as noise-free as possible for optimal cloning. If necessary, toggle the Ground Lift on your external devices, or use a line isolator or hum eliminator to reduce ground noise. * Before creating an Amp+Cab type clone using a microphone on a speaker cab, first configure [**Global Settings \> Ins/Outs**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#6c56362d-db33-4eb0-ac46-2d690ec2d73e)**\> Mic In Phantom Power** On or Off, depending on whether your microphone requires phantom power. Please refer to your mic manufacturer's specifications for its requirements. ### ![Step 1](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1c2cbfe40b7c269b85c1c006a087d170a95d79ce9be4d9212ad4f76016df75b1/01.png?cb=ce61b591a14429573632afbeb4c2997c) Connect to Wi-Fi and Sign In If not already, connect Stadium to Wi-Fi (or Ethernet) and sign in to your Line6.com account. The cloning process occurs on Line 6 online servers and requires Internet access and that you are signed in. ### ![Step 2](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_98f7d57316a44c77ed7e62b74710ac13f32bd12902aa08ac51a5d3ab561fb2bc/02.png?cb=53ead26f31014fd489e07cfbde017dc7) Select New Clone **To start, tap Stadium's Main Menu button and tap the New Clone button.** ![MainMenu_NewClone.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b47c8b4248776498a4169c4ed88aa340c4c6765f502596bb3a3d9008bcb49363/MainMenu_NewClone.png?cb=9424c469984a6690937cad60645a2317) Select New Clone from the Main Menu ### ![Step 3](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_6786b7e86cb231b224c0959284bca8dcccfd62c344833596b0e3035b53b3ee47/03.png?cb=632cde3c35c9abd3a51e6bbd6f0126be) Select the Device To Clone The initial New Clone screen appears, where you select the device type you want to clone, as described below. Once you're ready to give it a try, tap the desired device on the initial New Clone screen, read its description, then tap ![the Next button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_131a642a7cf83767053bb9724c1faa84b48d1b0f3a8beb74cc17135a6e830752/Clone%20Screen%20Next%20button.png?cb=7f669fad242a2875496f88aa061e1f5c) and follow the on-screen instructions. We've provided additional helpful tips and details on this page for all steps. ![New Clone Screen.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_dceeae74e3c8066e6ae95951a8f48d9a4ca55a998cc6b1feb710559c88f2671f/New%20Clone%20Screen.png?cb=a3f4fefcdc0c6cc7a38e5aa03a1b319c) The initial New Clone screen **Note:** During the New Clone process, you can tap ![the Exit button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_113c2bc02da839a8091ad5fe0e4c6eb960734a3eef3d475e0a3a0de446ec9194/Exit%20button.png?cb=a97acc7574622337aa9ebde6a131a7f1) when available if you want to cancel and return to other Stadium functions. If the [**Helix Stadium application**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/helix-stadium-edit-application.md) is currently running and connected to Stadium, an alert in the app will tell you that it becomes "locked" until your New Clone process is complete. The application is not used for clone creation, but does offer features to import, export, browse, and manage your library of clones. ![Clone Amp-Cab.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_0e3a655941126773bb13516a3f15b4884f81133ac2ce3f45b86b8f67ef23b0a7/Clone%20Amp-Cab.png?cb=35f8924d2e3701044974c5ce30e8cdb5) **Amp+Cab:** Captures your amplifier and physical speaker via a microphone. Note that all elements of this setup are cloned: the amp's preamp, power amp, settings, cab, speaker, and microphone used (including the mic's distance and position relative to the speaker). ![Clone Amp.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a22f2ccb58c54ef09b98c8dbd6d3d816ad3683d30c9f2693de459a11a7cc3607/Clone%20Amp.png?cb=fde3b4443e8884ff02cb55d84a7862dc) **Amp:** Captures the output from your amplifier without a speaker, requiring the use of a load box and direct output. ![Clone Preamp.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a1b5e8a294e75cea92423a98f6b455401f931b9cdeb5bbeb37d4a03418d57d80/Clone%20Preamp.png?cb=cec320f7b70a658b9f05d48d81bfed5a) **Preamp:** Captures the output of a standalone preamp. Optionally, capture the preamp stage's output from your guitar or bass amp if it offers a "Preamp Out," or "FX Send." ![Drive Pedal Clone button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_4db6d301ab6a0bccd7e7e049b906cab2299f79524047b9d3d1625b0ab110e8a9/Clone%20Drive%20Pedal.png?cb=36eaae67b046fe4d6a41129fea54db72) **Distortion:** Captures the output of a distortion, overdrive, or boost-type effect pedal. **Tip:**Regardless of which type of device you are cloning, you should avoid adding compression, modulation, and time-based effects in the signal path with the device, and turn off an amp's reverb, tremolo, or other on-board effects. The goal is to capture the purest possible tone from your target device, dialed in for your desired tone. Tap ![the Next button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_131a642a7cf83767053bb9724c1faa84b48d1b0f3a8beb74cc17135a6e830752/Clone%20Screen%20Next%20button.png?cb=7f669fad242a2875496f88aa061e1f5c) when ready to proceed. ### ![04.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_33c94dacf54fa4e2b44ea674bd8a882dccf3a49a4033314af0fde82421109199/04.png?cb=075549902ea87b3442a14dd60557ca0c) Connecting Your Device Note that the screen and its setup instructions vary depending on the clone type you selected in step ![Step 3](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_6786b7e86cb231b224c0959284bca8dcccfd62c344833596b0e3035b53b3ee47/03.png?cb=632cde3c35c9abd3a51e6bbd6f0126be) . Please refer to the setup details below for the clone type you selected. **Important!** Always reduce the volume to minimum on all your devices before making your audio connections. #### ![Clone Amp-Cab.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_0e3a655941126773bb13516a3f15b4884f81133ac2ce3f45b86b8f67ef23b0a7/Clone%20Amp-Cab.png?cb=35f8924d2e3701044974c5ce30e8cdb5) Amp+Cab Connection and Setup Tap the Amp+Cab clone type on the initial screen, read its description, then tap ![the Next button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_131a642a7cf83767053bb9724c1faa84b48d1b0f3a8beb74cc17135a6e830752/Clone%20Screen%20Next%20button.png?cb=7f669fad242a2875496f88aa061e1f5c) to proceed. ![Amp-CabClone_Screen1.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e8ca1633b55879d0f140af224d94fe6ab63d2485391493d1c3a53fafe96b7696/Amp-CabClone_Screen1.png?cb=b2c6f7d9f791fde1ac49524136ec70ee) The Amp+Cab clone type is selected **WARNING! As the screen alerts you, once the test signals are fed through your amp, it can become VERY loud through your cab.** If possible, isolate your speaker cab or mic it up in another room; otherwise, wear proper hearing protection. ![Warning Loud Test.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1b73066973828af7bfc3ad66b16895787ea44f5054d9d630b2b494f18e35fcb8/Warning%20Loud%20Test.png?cb=41f6248e6d835280f657b544cf6b3a52) Tap ![the Continue button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_4b146106992b722debe512b2b42cd3f598fe2509173abac6e1591a805b4622d4/Continue%20button.png?cb=09654757d4e2c108f476d5812d3db373) to dismiss the warning and proceed. Click to view the Amp+Cab clone connection and setup details... The Amp+Cab \> Connect your amp, cabinet, and mic instruction screen is displayed. Note that the SEND and RETURN instructions differ for Helix Stadium XL and Helix Stadium devices. ![Amp-CabClone_Screen2_XL.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b20dad26de43b0c41e726f4ba990bae8aa80f045036494326e1b458fdfc9987a/Amp-CabClone_Screen2_XL.png?cb=a4db35a363bdc33bb290b99456eee244) The Amp+Cab Connect screen - Helix Stadium XL ![Amp-CabClone_Screen2_Stadium.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_2dcc7109b600ba2d4ad05c4d39ce738b211beea58eaea127277fe2aa16ef384b/Amp-CabClone_Screen2_Stadium.png?cb=2b76f971e1617fad6c06eeeab6bce314) The Amp+Cab Connection screen - Helix Stadium 1. With your amp connected to the speaker cabinet, connect your guitar or bass to Stadium's INSTRUMENT 1 (Helix Stadium XL ![Icon_XL.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_138e8f0084fdb635b1c974ad8088b1278d4544dd95e3a5824e06862757cf4dc4/Icon_XL.png?cb=eb82c58bec6c3f8aaf1811bc572e962e) ) or INSTRUMENT (Helix Stadium). 2. Connect a microphone directly to Stadium's XLR MIC IN and place it in front of the speaker cabinet, adjusting its position to capture the desired tone, much like you would for recording. * For best results, keep the mic within a few inches of the speaker to minimize capturing room reflections. 3. Connect from Stadium's SEND 4 (Helix Stadium XL ![Icon_XL.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_138e8f0084fdb635b1c974ad8088b1278d4544dd95e3a5824e06862757cf4dc4/Icon_XL.png?cb=eb82c58bec6c3f8aaf1811bc572e962e) ) or SEND 2 (Helix Stadium) to your amp's INPUT jack. 4. Once your connections are complete, tap ![the Next button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_131a642a7cf83767053bb9724c1faa84b48d1b0f3a8beb74cc17135a6e830752/Clone%20Screen%20Next%20button.png?cb=7f669fad242a2875496f88aa061e1f5c) to go to the **setup** screen. ![Amp-CabCloneSetup_initial.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f3a390520210228c1a3f43f9737e12934f5f92aa61bbc7813f32e2243cf34f0c/Amp-CabCloneSetup_initial.png?cb=04abb539961fca5e0c48e9294c3f38ac) The Amp+Cab clone \> Setup screen 5. Play your instrument and set your amp with the desired settings. ![Amp-CabCloneSetup_Metered.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_09b82e2bce817013bcb15cdfe36b40b43327eeacba6894fb42ee127a91d5711d/Amp-CabCloneSetup_Metered.png?cb=72cd185d37bcfd4d80639a434ea7c5e1) The Amp+Cab clone \> Setup screen receiving your mic signal 6. Play your instrument with heavy strumming. You'll see the Instrument In and FX Loop blocks on the screen light green to indicate an incoming signal. Raise the screen's Mic Gain fader from minimum so that the Mic block lights green and the Mic Gain meter peaks within the -18 to -9 range (indicated by the green shaded area of the fader), as shown above. * Note that you can tap and drag the on-screen Mic Gain fader, or turn Stadium's upper right knob to adjust its value. Press the upper right knob to reset Mic Gain to its default (minimum) value. 7. Once your Mic Gain level is set appropriately, tap ![the Next button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_131a642a7cf83767053bb9724c1faa84b48d1b0f3a8beb74cc17135a6e830752/Clone%20Screen%20Next%20button.png?cb=7f669fad242a2875496f88aa061e1f5c) to proceed. **Please go to** ![Step 5](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_abbf55c9f2043f3bf5d7b4fbdbb5feaab7b3ac8f5731f336dd78e69f4fce65fa/05.png?cb=3c60906905f19136c9550e92d3fb7999) [**Enter New Clone Name and Info**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/clones.md#enter-clone-name) #### ![Clone Amp.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a22f2ccb58c54ef09b98c8dbd6d3d816ad3683d30c9f2693de459a11a7cc3607/Clone%20Amp.png?cb=fde3b4443e8884ff02cb55d84a7862dc) Amp Clone Connection and Setup Tap the Amp clone type on the initial screen, read its description, then tap ![the Next button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_131a642a7cf83767053bb9724c1faa84b48d1b0f3a8beb74cc17135a6e830752/Clone%20Screen%20Next%20button.png?cb=7f669fad242a2875496f88aa061e1f5c) to proceed. ![AmpClone_Screen1.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b543510e9fb01462e0347fef0c04d2046990fa0eec2a637c3db5c179b1a4fcc0/AmpClone_Screen1.png?cb=ffed29159ce19c71fbe2d525de691961) The Amp clone type is selected Click to view the Amp clone connection and setup details... **Important!** As alerted on the Stadium screen, a load box is required to connect to the amp's Speaker Out. Please also refer to your amp and load box manufacturers' documentation for details. ![Caution Load Box.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e972bd32bd3810c8c2949bd2388d2cc966554caa40e96193465b4ff232c90639/Caution%20Load%20Box.png?cb=d806434a200ebc9a09b234682fca9934) The Load Box Required alert Once you've read the caution text and are sure you understand the requirements for your setup, tap ![The I Understand button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d25ff79d4b4d146d3c00460198f8c685041eb5857177c757059d50530e0b94bb/I%20Understand%20button.png?cb=f7b2fc56e7001151997bef4807ea93b5) to proceed. The Amp \> Connect your amp and load box instruction screen is displayed. Note that the SEND and RETURN instructions differ for Helix Stadium XL and Helix Stadium devices. ![AmpClone_Screen2_XL.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a85838bdd77db21248906267cb3b6dc99dc47eb578c4bdf50d5303b666a2ad3f/AmpClone_Screen2_XL.png?cb=992183c3563bb8e871f948f391301911) The Amp \& Load Box Connect screen - Helix Stadium XL ![AmpClone_Screen2_Stadium.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_3e6d164f6835b8c27aa190de1f7e2c9c712323df5484d148efa185fd56bb3304/AmpClone_Screen2_Stadium.png?cb=2c409b9ab70f15d4e4487a7017fbe573) The Amp \& Load Box Connect screen - Helix Stadium 1. Connect your guitar or bass to Stadium's INSTRUMENT 1 jack (Helix Stadium XL ![Icon_XL.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_138e8f0084fdb635b1c974ad8088b1278d4544dd95e3a5824e06862757cf4dc4/Icon_XL.png?cb=eb82c58bec6c3f8aaf1811bc572e962e) ) or INSTRUMENT jack (Helix Stadium). 2. Connect from Stadium's SEND 4 (Helix Stadium XL ![Icon_XL.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_138e8f0084fdb635b1c974ad8088b1278d4544dd95e3a5824e06862757cf4dc4/Icon_XL.png?cb=eb82c58bec6c3f8aaf1811bc572e962e) ) or SEND 2 (Helix Stadium) to your amp's INPUT jack. 3. Connect the amp's SPEAKER OUT to a load box's SPEAKER INPUT (or, sometimes labeled as FROM AMPLIFIER) jack. 4. Connect the load box's OUTPUT jack to RETURN 4 (Helix Stadium XL ![Icon_XL.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_138e8f0084fdb635b1c974ad8088b1278d4544dd95e3a5824e06862757cf4dc4/Icon_XL.png?cb=eb82c58bec6c3f8aaf1811bc572e962e) ) or RETURN 2 (Helix Stadium) jack. If your load box offers only an XLR audio output, you'll need an XLR-to-1/4" adapter to connect to Stadium's 1/4" RETURN jack. **Note:** Some load boxes offer the option to apply a speaker emulation or IR to their output signal. The Proxy Cloning process is not optimal for capturing the combined signal of a direct amp and IR/speaker emulation. For best results, we recommend using only your amplifier's output signal from your load box for Amp clones. 5. Once your connections are complete, tap ![the Next button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_131a642a7cf83767053bb9724c1faa84b48d1b0f3a8beb74cc17135a6e830752/Clone%20Screen%20Next%20button.png?cb=7f669fad242a2875496f88aa061e1f5c) to go to the **Check Your setup** screen. ![AmpCloneSetup_initial.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8a9b99bac5c9f939bec4a66ae47d3ad3af724dc6bdaf6cff3cee20e50d980852/AmpCloneSetup_initial.png?cb=0c5e7695e438ed4f4289042e30b377d0) The Amp clone \> Setup screen 6. A Cab block within the signal chain is enabled, with a default cab loaded. Optionally, tap the Cab block to select a different Cab model or IR from the Cab Model screen and adjust its parameters to audition your amp with speaker simulation added, as shown below, or tap the Bypass button to disable the Cab. (The cab block is for monitoring purposes only and is not captured as part of your clone.) 7. Play your instrument and set your amp with the desired settings. ![AmpCloneSetup_Metered.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ea8dc3be51997e9867fc16eb2010ffcaf728fb7b49a99e116162ce402742b31f/AmpCloneSetup_Metered.png?cb=7f8dc582e367e980061a9d4843e9c253) The Amp clone \> Setup screen (Cab block selected) 8. Play your instrument with heavy strumming and adjust the screen's Level fader so that its meter peaks within the -12 to -3 range (as indicated by the green shaded area of the Level fader), as shown above. 9. Note that you can tap and drag the on-screen Level fader, or turn Stadium's upper right knob to adjust its value. Press the upper right knob to reset it to its default value. 10. Once you have your amp's settings and Level configured, tap ![the Next button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_131a642a7cf83767053bb9724c1faa84b48d1b0f3a8beb74cc17135a6e830752/Clone%20Screen%20Next%20button.png?cb=7f669fad242a2875496f88aa061e1f5c) to proceed. **Please go to** ![Step 5](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_abbf55c9f2043f3bf5d7b4fbdbb5feaab7b3ac8f5731f336dd78e69f4fce65fa/05.png?cb=3c60906905f19136c9550e92d3fb7999) [**Enter New Clone Name and Info**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/clones.md#enter-clone-name) #### ![Clone Preamp.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a1b5e8a294e75cea92423a98f6b455401f931b9cdeb5bbeb37d4a03418d57d80/Clone%20Preamp.png?cb=cec320f7b70a658b9f05d48d81bfed5a) Preamp Clone Setup Tap the Preamp clone type on the initial screen, read its description, then tap ![the Next button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_131a642a7cf83767053bb9724c1faa84b48d1b0f3a8beb74cc17135a6e830752/Clone%20Screen%20Next%20button.png?cb=7f669fad242a2875496f88aa061e1f5c) to proceed. ![PreampClone_Screen1.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ed2804f5692b9071fa066b1b524e6895e21ac4447aa967be11e5b61c9d42a3ea/PreampClone_Screen1.png?cb=047d2d7094ad5288708ee283366a3a93) The Preamp clone type is selected Click to view the Preamp clone connection and setup details... The Preamp \> Connect your amp and load box instruction screen is displayed. Note that the SEND and RETURN instructions differ for Helix Stadium XL and Helix Stadium devices. ![PrempClone_Screen2_XL.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e828162a2612cd3f46c8024d7de4a347a17eb0467ab73de6e48d5b37fa3aceff/PrempClone_Screen2_XL.png?cb=ce4d08bfcccc85033b936f73acecf5d5) The Preamp Connect screen - Helix Stadium XL ![PrempClone_Screen2_Stadium.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ed57857fae9343ae30f260db9d6236813bb9c5ac4a31fc1ebfd6f72208f348d8/PrempClone_Screen2_Stadium.png?cb=d37b9d1b79a58cf932e60750b4cf32aa) The Preamp Connect screen - Helix Stadium 1. Connect your guitar or bass to Stadium's INSTRUMENT 1 jack (Helix Stadium XL ![Icon_XL.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_138e8f0084fdb635b1c974ad8088b1278d4544dd95e3a5824e06862757cf4dc4/Icon_XL.png?cb=eb82c58bec6c3f8aaf1811bc572e962e) ) or INSTRUMENT jack (Helix Stadium). 2. Connect from Stadium's SEND 4 ( ![Icon_XL.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_138e8f0084fdb635b1c974ad8088b1278d4544dd95e3a5824e06862757cf4dc4/Icon_XL.png?cb=eb82c58bec6c3f8aaf1811bc572e962e) ) or SEND 2 (Helix Stadium) to your preamp's INPUT jack.^\*^ ^**\***^**Note:** If cloning the Preamp stage of your guitar or bass amplifier, connect Stadium's SEND 4 ( ![Icon_XL.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_138e8f0084fdb635b1c974ad8088b1278d4544dd95e3a5824e06862757cf4dc4/Icon_XL.png?cb=eb82c58bec6c3f8aaf1811bc572e962e) ) or SEND 2 to the amplifier's INPUT jack for step 2, and connect from the amp's PREAMP OUT or FX SEND jack to Stadium's RETURN 4 ( ![Icon_XL.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_138e8f0084fdb635b1c974ad8088b1278d4544dd95e3a5824e06862757cf4dc4/Icon_XL.png?cb=eb82c58bec6c3f8aaf1811bc572e962e) ) or RETURN 2 (Helix Stadium) for step 3. Remember to always keep a speaker or load box connected to your amplifier's SPEAKER OUT to provide the appropriate resistance load. 3. Connect the preamp's DI OUT jack to Stadium's RETURN 4 ( ![Icon_XL.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_138e8f0084fdb635b1c974ad8088b1278d4544dd95e3a5824e06862757cf4dc4/Icon_XL.png?cb=eb82c58bec6c3f8aaf1811bc572e962e) ) or RETURN 2 (Helix Stadium) jack. 4. Once your connections are made, tap ![the Next button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_131a642a7cf83767053bb9724c1faa84b48d1b0f3a8beb74cc17135a6e830752/Clone%20Screen%20Next%20button.png?cb=7f669fad242a2875496f88aa061e1f5c) to go to the **Check your setup** screen. ![PreampCloneSetup_initial.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_26b7fae9e93673a5e916524f36c1db640540d9a50b4cb902c40bd84a739303b0/PreampCloneSetup_initial.png?cb=a7a418efa6bbd90ed43e5e71941427c5) The Preamp clone \> Setup screen 5. A Cab block within the signal chain is enabled, with a default cab loaded. Optionally, tap the Cab block to select a different Cab model or IR and adjust its parameters to audition your preamp with speaker simulation added, as shown below, or tap the Bypass button to disable the Cab. (The cab block is for monitoring purposes only and is not captured as part of your clone.) 6. Play your instrument and set your preamp with the desired settings. ![PreampCloneSetup_Metered.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_83a91aff091a0f8eb381feec7ec5eadd9623518e41534d7ebb86f2fede1cdb89/PreampCloneSetup_Metered.png?cb=0fcc60bb37adea1b811f89819c6125ab) The Preamp clone \> Setup screen (Cab block selected) 7. Play your instrument with heavy strumming and adjust the screen's Level fader so that its meter peaks within the -18 to -9 range (as indicated by the green shaded area of the Level fader), as shown above. * Note that you can tap and drag the on-screen Level fader, or turn Stadium's upper right knob to adjust its value. Press the upper right knob to reset it to its default value. 8. Once you have your preamp's settings and Level configured, tap ![the Next button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_131a642a7cf83767053bb9724c1faa84b48d1b0f3a8beb74cc17135a6e830752/Clone%20Screen%20Next%20button.png?cb=7f669fad242a2875496f88aa061e1f5c) to proceed. **Please go to** ![Step 5](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_abbf55c9f2043f3bf5d7b4fbdbb5feaab7b3ac8f5731f336dd78e69f4fce65fa/05.png?cb=3c60906905f19136c9550e92d3fb7999) [**Enter New Clone Name and Info**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/clones.md#enter-clone-name) #### ![Drive Pedal Clone button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_4db6d301ab6a0bccd7e7e049b906cab2299f79524047b9d3d1625b0ab110e8a9/Clone%20Drive%20Pedal.png?cb=36eaae67b046fe4d6a41129fea54db72) Distortion Pedal Clone Setup Tap the Distortion clone type on the initial screen, read its description, then tap ![the Next button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_131a642a7cf83767053bb9724c1faa84b48d1b0f3a8beb74cc17135a6e830752/Clone%20Screen%20Next%20button.png?cb=7f669fad242a2875496f88aa061e1f5c) to proceed. ![DistortionClone_Screen1.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e0c3d4ac68cba0b43beb54dc1423b16749b26826feee02296bad7ae5d6a00a04/DistortionClone_Screen1.png?cb=98ffb3204b3ed882ebe5fed96400d0c4) The Distortion clone type is selected Click to view the Distortion pedal clone connection and setup details... The Distortion \> Connect your distortion pedal instruction screen is displayed. Note that the SEND and RETURN instructions differ for Helix Stadium XL and Helix Stadium devices. ![DistortionClone_Screen2_XL.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c0cb9c28fa174e382a870b75091576319e0da50ac33634896a15ba0bdd3a05dc/DistortionClone_Screen2_XL.png?cb=ffbade1f61b608b09ebbf095f4c829ec) The Distortion Connect screen - Helix Stadium XL ![DistortionClone_Screen2_Stadium.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1cb3a73db7d23a3f9201238899c744c296558fe6bab005e52c57a096176f85c1/DistortionClone_Screen2_Stadium.png?cb=5b4e59d0ac95972fc6ce29b7bea59654) The Distortion Connect screen - Helix Stadium 1. Connect your guitar or bass to Stadium's INSTRUMENT 1 jack (Helix Stadium XL ![Icon_XL.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_138e8f0084fdb635b1c974ad8088b1278d4544dd95e3a5824e06862757cf4dc4/Icon_XL.png?cb=eb82c58bec6c3f8aaf1811bc572e962e) ) or INSTRUMENT jack (Helix Stadium). 2. Connect from Stadium's SEND 4 ( ![Icon_XL.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_138e8f0084fdb635b1c974ad8088b1278d4544dd95e3a5824e06862757cf4dc4/Icon_XL.png?cb=eb82c58bec6c3f8aaf1811bc572e962e) ) or SEND 2 (Helix Stadium) to your pedal's INPUT jack. 3. Connect the pedal's OUTPUT jack to Stadium's RETURN 4 ( ![Icon_XL.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_138e8f0084fdb635b1c974ad8088b1278d4544dd95e3a5824e06862757cf4dc4/Icon_XL.png?cb=eb82c58bec6c3f8aaf1811bc572e962e) ) or RETURN 2 (Helix Stadium) jack. 4. Once your connections are made, tap ![the Next button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_131a642a7cf83767053bb9724c1faa84b48d1b0f3a8beb74cc17135a6e830752/Clone%20Screen%20Next%20button.png?cb=7f669fad242a2875496f88aa061e1f5c) to go to the **Check your setup** screen. ![DistCloneSetup_initial.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_99e8dcf10f15b16516f710c67033303989d2b85646c857c2931b3bcb904796fb/DistCloneSetup_initial.png?cb=aabc143e20435a9c77b378f16c490119) Distortion clone \> Setup screen (Amp and Cab blocks bypassed) 5. Optionally, tap the Amp and Cab block and enable them, select a specific Amp and a Cab or IR model, and adjust the parameters to audition your pedal, as shown below. (This amp and cab processing is for monitoring purposes only and is not captured as part of your clone.) 6. Play your instrument and set your pedal with the desired settings. ![DistCloneSetup_Metered.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8239e39794d53786d040b45b18d10fe19c5f9964ba4c23aaaeb4e42ded55d99e/DistCloneSetup_Metered.png?cb=a59de46d4967fec8e01d64733387eb53) Setting the level (Amp and Cab blocks enabled) 7. Play your instrument with heavy strumming and adjust the screen's Level fader so that its meter peaks within the -18 to -9 range (as indicated by the green shaded area of the Level fader), as shown above. * Note that you can tap and drag the on-screen Level fader, or turn Stadium's upper right knob to adjust its value. Press the upper right knob to reset it to its default value. 8. Once you have your pedal's settings and Level configured, tap ![the Next button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_131a642a7cf83767053bb9724c1faa84b48d1b0f3a8beb74cc17135a6e830752/Clone%20Screen%20Next%20button.png?cb=7f669fad242a2875496f88aa061e1f5c) to proceed. **Please go to step** ![Step 5](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_abbf55c9f2043f3bf5d7b4fbdbb5feaab7b3ac8f5731f336dd78e69f4fce65fa/05.png?cb=3c60906905f19136c9550e92d3fb7999) **below.** ### ![Step 5](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_abbf55c9f2043f3bf5d7b4fbdbb5feaab7b3ac8f5731f336dd78e69f4fce65fa/05.png?cb=3c60906905f19136c9550e92d3fb7999) Enter New Clone Name and Info ![NamingClone.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8a88d928d7ee71593671b7c55be2379ec1ebdd384d9cc91233f05bbb35aa4b99/NamingClone.png?cb=782bf5b0a49e559340314e9a7835b7cd) Naming the clone file ![Clone Info.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b4f6f983eac7638be4746b18f2b393b79e13b0f2a6862386f88656bf026222fc/Clone%20Info.png?cb=51a405f39d03dcb5621d5386e8399507) Clone info added (Distortion pedal clone) * Enter a Clone Name in the field at the top of the screen (shown above left). The name you enter is how the clone file will appear in your Clone Library and menus. I**t is highly recommended to enter a brief, informative name here so you can easily find and tell your clones apart as you build a library!** * Optionally, tap in the **Brand** , **Product** , and **Notes** metadata text panels to add descriptive info, such as your amp's Channel, Gain, EQ settings, intended use, and any other details for reference (shown above right). This info is also utilized by Stadium's Search. **Tip:** You'll be able to reference your clone file's metadata later within its Focus View screen. See the [**Focus View \> Clone Blocks**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/the-focus-view.md#clone-focus-view) section. * Tap ![the Clone Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a6fefcbad1003b7bab8a6ecaa9d0744aad8e7653df587b8c838142456ce67fc7/Clone%20Button.png?cb=11f5445e3e0a71c44c307462eb74095f) when your clone Name and Notes are complete to start the Proxy Cloning process. **WARNING! As we mentioned earlier, if you are doing a miked Amp+Cab type clone, the next steps can be very LOUD! Hearing protection is recommended.** **Note:** Once your current clone is completed, if you start a new clone of the same type and enter a new clone name, you'll see that the Clone Info you entered from the last completed clone is retained, so you can just edit it as needed rather than enter the Brand, Product, and Notes in again for the same device. Optionally, use the sidebar's **Reset** and **Clear Notes** options to easily clear out existing text. ### ![Step 6](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_89ad5027af4e3786c47105056cdafb4c898588591c9662de69d22cf86d3e9b27/06.png?cb=e45c3711194c930a28cb1ba380014ade) The Proxy Cloning Process Several steps are performed automatically during the Proxy Cloning process. Simply leave all device controls undisturbed, sit back, and wait for the process to complete, as indicated on the progress screens. Each stage of the process is described below. Note that, in any of the following screens, you can tap ![The Cancel button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_cf9fbd479c7d65847d6f3a47c4c3ade4fa1b54cf2b46a92ef49f711a97c4a152/Cancel%20button.png?cb=f8146f120cc288349a9ff4e56bf5d864) to cancel the cloning process and return to the **Check Your setup** screen. (Depending on the current creation stage, cancelling may take a few moments, as indicated by a Cancel progress screen.) #### Collecting Device DNA A progress screen is displayed while test signals are fed into your amp to perform the learning process (below left). Once progress reaches 100%, the next screen and process will be displayed automatically. ![Collecting DNA Screen.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_4fe308e7b3c8ce2155dbb59bcc1f058ed46a67b5df69c00e54c2684d88865e3a/Collecting%20DNA%20Screen.png?cb=6451f13ccdd01971c02052997f088cc8) Collecting Device DNA - progress screen #### Upload, Process, and Download The next stages proceed automatically, with a meter indicating its progress, as shown below. ![The Uploading screen](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8dc0f2c1b10a029d541dfa2fbe6de4103f3e3077ed8e70de601243d559060901/Uploading%20screen.png?cb=4e1a000cf45fb9121852aa65d4641878) **Uploading:**The collected DNA information from your device is uploaded to the Line 6 servers. ![Queued screen.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_dd5573b00f2dc2d1693f5603fbdee8f41636faf3ee4692e2ad9d49630d8d9e25/Queued%20screen.png?cb=af3844ad54276676a49a5a446fd4b58f) **Queued:**Your clone task wait position is displayed for the next available processing time on the Line 6 servers.\* ![The Processing screen](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_20d0a3595f6ecdf623325848f8dccf309cf464dfa7217afc314f3eb034115dd1/Processing%20screen.png?cb=fb8d125152bacaa5fbc8062e0f825eac) **Processing:** The clone is being created. ![The Downloading screen](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e95fcf15fb66ab0fcf09466e994f1565a352e992bbde862d754972c49ca02a3b/Downloading%20screen.png?cb=c32b7cd944c896daaf0ce68667bae544) **Download:** Clone creation is complete, and the clone file downloads quickly to your Stadium internal library. ^**\***^**Note:** The queued time can vary substantially depending on the following factors: * The number of other customers' tasks that are currently in the queue and being processed. * The number of clones that you've initiated in the recent past. (In attempts to provide fair access, the queue may be longer for customers who have recently uploaded several clones to provide slightly shorter wait times for new and less frequent customers' server access.) ### ![Step 7](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_cb599311cbace8fce115f4f41bae3e87088bdfc17abe637fb48efd61f7d3cb78/07.png?cb=4985f689673b884595ec1665290f3fb2) Compare Play your instrument and tap the on-screen buttons to compare **CLONE** (the clone you just captured) versus **ORIGINAL** (the connected target device's actual signal), as shown below. Optionally, you can use **Footswitch 11** to toggle between ORIGINAL and CLONE preview. ![Fuzz Clone Compare Screen.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_57e5f5e43f58ad2ec28b08652235146378299f33278beebb637665d74b16fd6b/Fuzz%20Clone%20Compare%20Screen.png?cb=79d625f857356092f5dec1064b2c0068) Compare screen (Distortion type clone) - ORIGINAL ![Fuzz Clone Compare Screen-CloneParameters.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_2ee2fb908526795bb7bd44cc95d9baf91fc3213792fd9f69d590fc5fed36ad43/Fuzz%20Clone%20Compare%20Screen-CloneParameters.png?cb=8dff198219a369b849a593328b0c7424) Compare Screen - CLONE The clone block's parameters are displayed * For all clone types, when the CLONE preview is selected, its parameters in the Inspector are displayed (shown above right), which you can adjust to audition with the clone.\* These parameters are also available for your saved clone files when selected in the Clone File Browser and when the clone is added to your presets. Also, see [**Clone Parameters**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/selecting-and-managing-clones.md#8e33b2e4-84e6-4e29-9f46-19ebefbfa72c) on the following page. * Depending on the type of clone you created, this screen will include a Cab block (for Amp or Preamp clone types), or an Amp and Cab block (for a Distortion clone type, as shown below) in the monitor signal path, similar to your options in the Setup screen back in step ![04.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_33c94dacf54fa4e2b44ea674bd8a882dccf3a49a4033314af0fde82421109199/04.png?cb=075549902ea87b3442a14dd60557ca0c) . Use **Footswitch 10** to enable/disable these blocks, optionally hearing your original device or clone through them. Tap the Amp or Cab block, select different models, and adjust parameters as desired. ^**\***^**Note:**The Clone, Amp, and Cab block parameters and their settings are for previewing within the Compare screen only. These settings are not saved with your clone file. ![Fuzz Clone Compare Screen-Clone.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9dc08002d2f9adba16a8c8cdf54c0eff755b928b27f0748c286195554a040479/Fuzz%20Clone%20Compare%20Screen-Clone.png?cb=f15f13fa11efce2b4b26512323e2660a) Compare screen (Distortion type clone) - CLONE Amp block selected for editing If the clone is to your liking, tap ![The Save Clone button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_48e0f2d0cbf0f0075e36581fd076d38ae5fa3abf964be06eb0e4cfc0992aae73/Save%20Clone%20button.png?cb=2520983457d0b0109e8e47819c160439) . Or, tap ![Discard Clone button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e91cd302efb83a8b89051f52830a10485eabfd8cedb4470fd26b8687b1d5b52c/Discard%20Clone%20button.png?cb=b944378680c4f93e47ab8354260b7d28) to delete the clone completely and exit the Proxy Cloning process. When you select Save, you'll see a reminder pop-up showing where to find the clone you just created. ![Save prompt.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_7e5dab98a95382babb05b9d00e3f58dfb45c15ade0636e53ee4856c0df4507c9/Save%20prompt.png?cb=0d5dd89a811b5149aca7ece11842b020) A Save pop-up informs you of the library location of your new clone **Repeat the steps above to create additional clones!** **Tip:** Please see the next [**Selecting and Managing clones**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/selecting-and-managing-clones.md) page for instructions on organizing and adding your clones to presets. --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Command Center Helix Stadium also just so happens to be a world-class master remote control for your entire touring or studio rig. Any of its Stomp A and B footswitches (onboard or externally-connected), expression pedals (onboard or externally-connected), external triggers or contact microphones, or even its XY controller can be used to send a variety of messages to external gear---or even Helix Stadium itself! The source determines the type of available messages and includes: * MIDI CCs to change the presets in external effects pedals, guitar amps, synths, drum machines, or even other multieffects * MIDI Notes to trigger the sounds in synths, keyboards, samplers, or drum modules * External Amp switching to change the channel or turn reverb on and off on a guitar or bass amplifier * QWERTY keystrokes over USB to control practically any software in your computer (example: sending a spacebar message to start and stop your DAW, Spotify, YouTube, etc.) * Custom preset or snapshot footswitch layouts on Stomp A and B modes, even alongside your blocks * Custom looper layouts on Stomp A and B modes, even alongside your blocks * Custom song transport layouts on Stomp A and B modes, even alongside your blocks * A handful of utility functions (such as Quicksave, Mute All, and Stopwatch Start/Stop/Reset) on Stomp A and B modes, even alongside your blocks In addition, each preset has up to 16 **Instant** ![Command Center Instant source controller](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_141c72d56c10a2b32e7c5f51f72906fe47a60627915f407238ac1ed74359501e/InstantSource.png?cb=2dcafaea82eefb14d824707822ddcc18) type command sources, used to transmit messages automatically when a Helix Stadium preset is recalled. You can even choose which command values are transmitted when a Snapshot is recalled. Note that you'll see some different command parameters available for Instant command sources as compared to switch and expression pedal source, as listed in the [**Commands**](https://ygg-manuals.atlassian.net/wiki/spaces/line6/pages/9339052/Command+Center#command_center_command_types) section on this page. **Note:** Due to the slight differences in available Expression and Control features between Helix Stadium XL ![Helix Stadium XL devices only](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e86061edc83961c15d69deccb05914be14c252d481538bfc67c071cad075cc0b/Icon_XL.png?cb=eb82c58bec6c3f8aaf1811bc572e962e) and Helix Stadium, the Command Center options differ accordingly. ## Assigning a Command 1. **Tap the main Menu icon** ![The Menu button.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5715548f22f8efd804000b539f687e5e9c20dcff6dc6312ef2c9a76f77a2020e/MenuButtton.png?cb=c4c1b7ff15add2da6a4ecd548c290b58) **and then Command Center** ![The Command Center menu button.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_36adc67f6d28e6560c9f40a65bb32fe4d4cc834ec2f977a8b312afd572ccee4d/Button_MenuCommandCenter.png?cb=946ab06c91bf185f31dae9ddd16961b8) **.** The Command Center appears: ![StadiumXL_MainCmdCtrScreen.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_4044bc3fe2bdebca2a230b4659446aec77f7e3bd744aae786e17fea27df0c10b/StadiumXL_MainCmdCtrScreen.png?cb=66d8597d0aef63b4a9d2bb8cca0ac7a0) Helix Stadium XL's Command Center ![Stadium_CmdCtr_Main.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_dc8ed03797626617a262d9c4983c51fbfc9b63aa002ecf700262263f1f687ea0/Stadium_CmdCtr_Main.png?cb=b837938d1721a0c1d0ca76e93bac3e08) Helix Stadium's Command Center 2. **Tap the footswitch, pedal, or X or Y Controller axis** ![X-Axis and Y-Axis Controllers](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_3fbce6630641ee6964469291942e2087774a119c951085929551527151cd2f49/XY_AxisControllers.png?cb=488d6803d9c68e925813818b7d9dc3f0) **you wish to use to send the command.** To view Instant commands, **tap the** ![Command Center Instant source controller](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_141c72d56c10a2b32e7c5f51f72906fe47a60627915f407238ac1ed74359501e/InstantSource.png?cb=2dcafaea82eefb14d824707822ddcc18) **icon** ; the 16 instant commands appear (below left)**.** To view External Controllers on Helix Stadium XL ![Helix Stadium XL devices only](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e86061edc83961c15d69deccb05914be14c252d481538bfc67c071cad075cc0b/Icon_XL.png?cb=eb82c58bec6c3f8aaf1811bc572e962e) , **tap the** ![The External - Expression Pedal Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c091cb162b585b9aa2da733042fa6557a209753835009b7451e1d1fdca2f8656/ExpPedalButton.png?cb=29dfe9012abaf17873d8549f7ab74f52) **icon**; External Controllers A, B, C, and D appear (below right). ![The Instant Command view](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_72dd1e46deaa88a333e79f179f4e4da554c82011f4e27c01ab64d6982beeac96/InstantCommandPanel.png?cb=3fda31288f7b3f6041c43cad7a2038a9) Command Center \> Instant commands ![XL_ExternalControllers.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_47a1c60488746895085b4964edae46c705e8cf56425b7a3f419abc09f9bca262/XL_ExternalControllers.png?cb=192b382f7992a78ebe2395db5fe3f03d) Helix Stadium XL's Command Center \> External controllers ^**\***^**Note:** External triggers, switches, and expression pedals are only available if selected from [**Global Settings \> Switches/Pedals \>**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#1b3d3cab-4eeb-4180-9df0-5bbc9f71a3fe)**Control A (Tip)** , **Control B (Ring)** , **Control C (Tip)** , and/or **Control D (Ring)** . By default, **Control A (Tip)** is set to EXP Pedal A, and **Control B (Ring)** is set to EXP Pedal B. 3. **Tap a colored box in the inspector to choose the command type for the selected source** (see below). The command's parameters appear in the inspector. * Not all command sources can send the same types of commands * A turquoise triangle ![CC_Assignment.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_30f54d1682d004c7f8c11f38722cc93bf333ebc4fd40d91c2c512049db3535cc/CC_Assignment.png?cb=1a6e66586764de0a235e545010e39b4d) appears above any source with one or more commands assigned to it. ![The Command Center inspector - command categories](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_aeb6f2f8f39229ae1060793856718783a1b5b3eeb90020d22ab0fd8d9925a883/CommandCtr_InspectorCategories.png?cb=814f2a36eafb125a715dc2a45d83e7dc) Command Center \> command types 4. **Turn Knobs 1\~8 to adjust the command's settings.** * Stomp A and B switches, the EXP toe switch, external switches, and triggers display two tabs in the inspector (below). To create a second command, **tap the right tab and repeat steps 3 and 4 above.** * Each of the two commands allows an **Action** (**Action 1** and **Action 2** , respectively) to be assigned for the switch: **Press** , **Release** , **Hold** , or **Toggle** (or for triggers, **Strike** or **Toggle**). * If the first command's action is set to **Toggle** , the second is locked to **Toggle** and grayed out. This lets you configure something like a MIDI CC on/off assignment to a switch, where the same CC number is used for each message with two different CC values, such as 0 and 127. ![CmdCenter_InspectorTabs.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_2bbc3e1fb72b9ba20280340aec385d0d9c66449206f3f8a52b0d2bfb2bccb068/CmdCenter_InspectorTabs.png?cb=407111dbd8bd4008c778b47bfb51ce2f) Command Center \> two command tabs ### Using the Parameter Panel Once you've selected a command category, optionally tap directly on a controller parameter within the Inspector to open it within the Parameter panel for easy editing. * **Snapshot Ctrl:** Enable the switch to have the parameter's value stored with the preset's snapshots and sent when recalling snapshots---see the next section. ### Snapshot Control of Commands Just as block parameters on the home screen, command parameters can also be enabled for snapshot control. When enabling snapshot control for a command parameter, the value can change per snapshot. (Action and MIDI \> Command parameters cannot be assigned). By default, snapshot control of command parameters is disabled. To enable it: 1. **To enable snapshot control of a command parameter, press** ***and turn*** **the parameter's knob.** Its value turns white (below left). Alternatively, **tap the parameter to open the parameter panel, and in the sidebar, tap the Snapshot Ctrl toggle** ![SnapshotCtrl_On.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_48c869e58bac99101adb463fd5f17d2655007df714c7cdb92d91af63b05f8d88/SnapshotCtrl_On.png?cb=577362f4bdad8dfbf19f3b40b5eb82d8) **on**(below right). ![Stadium_SnapshotCommand.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d99e3dd5494c60f6ff564739c36518c1101d47ebb252c7c30cc98d65b758e412/Stadium_SnapshotCommand.png?cb=10c953af611d7ace204e173bc05ef362) Snapshot-enabled command parameter (white value text) ![CmdCtr_ParameterPanel.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_83d10e5ab0f26d62d89798a9489f4d2ea0da89882cd3cfe62a90ee0635e41d26/CmdCtr_ParameterPanel.png?cb=270f2180b6e01fac214fcee2e8c040a5) Command Center \> Parameter Panel **Note:** An Instant ![Command Center Instant source controller](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_141c72d56c10a2b32e7c5f51f72906fe47a60627915f407238ac1ed74359501e/InstantSource.png?cb=2dcafaea82eefb14d824707822ddcc18) command is automatically sent on preset recall. An Instant command's values can also change upon snapshot recall by enabling the Snapshot Control, as described above. ### Source Controller Types The type of available messages is determined by the source. Also see the [**Commands**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/command-center.md#command_center_command_types) section below. | **Controller** | **Supported Commands** | **Notes** | |-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | ![Command Center Stomp footswitch](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8d4e2c6619e2ef503f72e9c7f25896663c2c57dce397ad54657009dbfe4f4348/StompFootswitch.png?cb=064926ba8c46385546a6c2a76c57e620) **Stomp A and Stomp B switches** | Support assignment of all command types. Up to two commands can be assigned per Stomp switch. **Note:** Command Center assignments cannot be made to FS6 (Mode) or F12 (TAP). | These are the physical footswitches on your Stadium device. Assignments can be made on both the Stomp A and Stomp B mode switches. | | ![The Command Center Expression Pedal source.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_52bef10bcdda686a948c613e763c3c9125af1c0d58f115e397390854d74309bc/EXPPedal.png?cb=39927b814a594af0b1c92e8292242884) **Expression Pedals** | Support assignment of **MIDI CC** commands only. One command can be assigned per pedal. | **Helix Stadium XL** ![Helix Stadium XL only](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e86061edc83961c15d69deccb05914be14c252d481538bfc67c071cad075cc0b/Icon_XL.png?cb=eb82c58bec6c3f8aaf1811bc572e962e) includes an onboard expression pedal and up to four external expression pedals. **Helix Stadium** supports up to two external expression pedal controllers. Note that you'll need to set the respective [**Global Settings \> Switches/Pedals** **\>**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#1b3d3cab-4eeb-4180-9df0-5bbc9f71a3fe)**Control A\~D** jack to "EXP In" for each connected pedal. | | ![ToeSwitch.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_2f3f93c5b375ec1dbf35159a05ff979b0fd6974b2e0e4a0a4683394e6c7b33a3/ToeSwitch.png?cb=e7384a54a2cc1fe68dd41652126259b5) **Toe Switch -** ![Helix Stadium XL only](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e86061edc83961c15d69deccb05914be14c252d481538bfc67c071cad075cc0b/Icon_XL.png?cb=eb82c58bec6c3f8aaf1811bc572e962e) | Supports assignment of all command types. Up to two commands can be assigned. | This is the switch that is toggled via the Helix Stadium XL ![Helix Stadium XL only](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e86061edc83961c15d69deccb05914be14c252d481538bfc67c071cad075cc0b/Icon_XL.png?cb=eb82c58bec6c3f8aaf1811bc572e962e) onboard Expression Pedal. | | ![X-YAxisSources.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_3b3b6e796483cf20d27915e9ea2b83b17ea21bd05cc760ad9ce74d9d45fd7627/X-YAxisSources.png?cb=879e4d1da87250e74648efff4d39328e) **X-Axis and Y-Axis** | Support assignment of **MIDI CC**commands only. One command can be assigned for each of the X-Axis and Y-Axis controllers. | These allow you to use the Stadium ![Button_XY.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_7316c3639d1e83d7b220ec323016242b5878ce210fe03f253e79912172cce365/Button_XY.png?cb=8bb9c1376df2b84e354a4f2bef4db721) [**XY Controller**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/bypass-and-controller-assign.md#377e08e1-7fcb-493f-86d4-0b9867d8d8cf) screen as a touch-pad expression controller, where sliding your finger left and right (X axis) or up and down (Y axis) sends CC messages. | | ![Command Center Instant source controller](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_141c72d56c10a2b32e7c5f51f72906fe47a60627915f407238ac1ed74359501e/InstantSource.png?cb=2dcafaea82eefb14d824707822ddcc18) **Instant 1\~16** | Support assignment of all command types except **Preset/Snap** and **Utility**. | Instant Commands are transmitted automatically when a preset is recalled and, optionally, when a snapshot is recalled (assuming the parameter's Snapshot Control is enabled in the Parameter Panel). | | ![ABCD_Source.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_95507f6a3f203d02b26f5377e95d1c4b927a64848317f3a0c16fa8e82a029a5d/ABCD_Source.png?cb=0e5c301a87c5e0a362e65988a9266520) **External Stomp Switches A/B** **External C/D Switches -** ![Helix Stadium XL only](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e86061edc83961c15d69deccb05914be14c252d481538bfc67c071cad075cc0b/Icon_XL.png?cb=eb82c58bec6c3f8aaf1811bc572e962e) | Support assignment of all command types. Up to two commands can be assigned per switch. | Much like Stomp A and B Footswitches, external switches can be assigned to any Command Center commands. | | ![Trigger controller](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_530d36e2498bc429b1f890c4fee1de57548166d9d870f7718cf40d6ce3d55f57/Trigger.png?cb=6dc28efab102d70c8de85ed10bd82b53) **Triggers A/B** **Triggers C/D -** ![Helix Stadium XL only](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e86061edc83961c15d69deccb05914be14c252d481538bfc67c071cad075cc0b/Icon_XL.png?cb=eb82c58bec6c3f8aaf1811bc572e962e) | Support assignment of all command types. Up to two commands can be assigned per switch. | Typically used to send MIDI commands to trigger drum hits or sample playback, but can be assigned to two of any command types. | ## Commands ### ![Command Center Preset-Snapshot category button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_31918248fc108bdb6a573793b11fac6b90fd6e2dba21acbc993f332b8aec135e/CC_Preset-SnapButton.png?cb=a13782a5c003224a1b4064d8c027742e) Preset/Snap Commands Preset/Snap commands are supported by all sources *other than* instant commands, expression pedals, and X/Y controllers, and are often used to map presets or snapshots to Stomp A and B switches. ![Preset-Snapshot Settings](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_fb8728af1cd194105353c866aad5e74a8415a84897d0c4bd8b2c4402c6ee318e/Preset-SnapSettings.png?cb=42079e7c31aed49f0edc3088f153b9f4) Command Center \> Preset/Snapshot command * When **Preset** or **Snapshot** type Commands are selected, additional options are available to choose the target Preset/Snapshot. * When the **Preset** command type is selected, you can choose the **Setlist** (via Knob 3) and the **Preset** within that Setlist (via Knob 4). * When the **Snapshot** command type is selected, you can choose the desired Snapshot via Knob 3. * When assigned to a Stomp A or B footswitch, the Stomp Mode footswitch label displays the preset's or snapshot's number and name. Click here to show Preset/Snapshot command settings... | **Parameter** | **Description** | |------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Action** | Selects the action for which the switch's assigned command is executed: On Press, on Release, when Holding the switch down, on the Strike of a trigger (Trigger sources only), or as a Toggle between two values. | | **Command** | Chooses the type of command to be assigned to the selected switch. Different settings become available depending on the command you select here. | | **Setlist (Command set to "Preset")** | Selects the setlist folder where the preset you wish to load is located. | | **Preset (Command set to "Preset")** | Selects which preset from the selected setlist is loaded. | | **Snapshot (Command set to "Snapshot")** | Selects which snapshot is loaded. | ### ![The Command Center Song command category button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a718b5dbc63b926a6f27fda8a8e9e7a48900acee510215c534ad70af717aaec1/CC_SongButton.png?cb=219f782383f45345d8e36ea891c4d5f1) Song Commands The Song command category is supported by all source controller types *other than* expression pedals or X-Axis/Y-Axis controllers. This category includes Song View commands to control song transport functions, navigate between existing songs, or select markers within the current song. This can be a convenient way to load and play songs directly from your preset, without having to change to the dedicated Song View screen. #### Song Settings Selecting the Song command category displays the **Action** and **Command** settings to choose the type of Song command(s) you wish to assign to the selected switch. ![CmdCtr_SongParameters.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_3bbf1dd5315eb6091fb8038c9964ccb1306eb2f7f0ccbb1557ba0497a77bcdf2/CmdCtr_SongParameters.png?cb=69b4b86e3d5f50caeed2a43f7b49e344) Command Center \> Song command When assigned to a Stomp A or B footswitch, the Song Command type is displayed for the Stomp Mode footswitch label. Click to view Song Command settings... | **Parameter** | **Description** | |---------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Action** | Selects the action for which the switch's assigned command is executed: On Press, on Release, when Holding the switch down, on the Strike of a trigger (Trigger sources only), or as a Toggle between two values. | | **Command** | Selects the type of Song command to be assigned to the selected switch. | | **Wait** | Appears for Instant commands only. Determines how long Helix Stadium waits after a preset recall (or if snapshot control is enabled, after a snapshot recall) before the command is sent. Normally, you can keep at the default 0 ms setting. If your Song command is not consistently triggering, try increasing this Wait value slightly to see if that resolves the issue. | ### ![The Command Center Looper command category button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8c5e9ebd80c524484e911280998eb6705a36d0dd47de1d03a369c91ad872fbcb/CC_LooperButton.png?cb=9c2a38faa4e865899bfe4a7d7603152a) Looper Commands Looper commands are supported by all sources *other than* expression pedals and X/Y controllers and are often used to map Looper functions to Stomp A and B switches. Although from Instant commands, they can also be used to automatically engage a looper function when recalling a preset or snapshot. ![CommandCenter_LooperCmds.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b9f59abd7b9d03d5ed7124a146502b16c5b4fc8b94e526543f2743cd119d9c21/CommandCenter_LooperCmds.png?cb=32b046bff11d62eb539181ef89983e54) Command Center \> Looper command Click to show/hide Looper Command settings... | **Parameter** | **Description** | |---------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Action** | Selects the action for which the switch's assigned command is executed: On Press, on Release, when Holding the switch down, on the Strike of a trigger (Trigger sources only), or as a Toggle between two values. | | **Command** | Selects the type of Looper command. | | **Wait** | Appears for Instant commands only. Determines how long Helix Stadium waits after a preset recall (or if snapshot control is enabled, after a snapshot recall) before the command is sent. | ### ![The Command Center Utility command category button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1fbfa9bff7942b49e25df5727fb9c85d1b5ea03b75671b61f2a17246c8b31a7d/CC_UtilityButton.png?cb=eb2ac1f6d1143d99774b81825a6145a5) Utility Commands Utility commands are supported by all sources *other than* Instant commands, expression pedals, and X/Y controllers, and are often used to map select More mode functions to Stomp A and B switches. ![CommandCenter_UtilityCmds.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_850d2bbf6fe59bc1198bc623d448e04b29eebe20ca213750fba0a9792e095cc8/CommandCenter_UtilityCmds.png?cb=114cd3e3eafeb623ad750f54866e2be6) Command Center \> Utility command Click to show/hide Utility Command settings... | **Parameter** | **Description** | |---------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Action** | Selects the action for which the switch's assigned command is executed: On Press, on Release, when Holding the switch down, on the Strike of a trigger, or as a Toggle between two values. | | **Command** | Selects the type of Utility command to be assigned to the selected switch. * **Save:** Engages preset quicksave, instantly overwriting the current preset's settings. * **Mute All:** Mutes all Helix Stadium audio outputs. * **Stopwatch:** Repeated presses start and stop the stopwatch. Pressing and holding resets the stopwatch. | ### ![The Command Center External Amp command category button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f00c328de7840162e02ba372001dc04c8d98bf4c999f3248b272cae9a41f67ce/CC_ExtAmpButton.png?cb=4bed646ef052c226ae6c37692fb2a285) Ext Amp Commands Ext Amp commands are supported by all sources *other than* expression pedals and X/Y controllers and are used to change the channel or turn the reverb on and off in your external amp. **Note:** Configuring an **Ext Amp** assignment also requires that the respective [**Global Settings \> Switches/Pedals**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#1b3d3cab-4eeb-4180-9df0-5bbc9f71a3fe) **\> Control A\~D** jack setting is set to "Ext Amp" to allow the jack to route the command signal out. ![CommandCenter_ExtAmpInspector.jpg](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_4d0726860a3d932c7265875d1ed9584d96cb63079d4422333d5f1874152c357f/CommandCenter_ExtAmpInspector.jpg?cb=dbfe8f718a08428464e1c70c5ac1f48d) Command Center \> Ext Amp command **Important!** Send Ext Amp commands only to amplifiers that utilize "short-to-sleeve" footswitch inputs. Connecting to any other sort of input could cause permanent damage to both your amp and Helix Stadium! If you're unsure whether your amp has short-to-sleeve inputs, please contact the manufacturer. Helix Stadium's ability to control external amp channel, reverb, and/or tremolo switching has been tested with many popular amps and heads. Unfortunately, this does not guarantee compatibility with all products. Depending on the channel switching jack's circuitry in the guitar amp used, the Ext Amp function may not operate as expected. Click to show/hide External Amp Command settings.... | **Parameter** | **Description** | |---------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Action** | Selects the action for which the switch's assigned command is executed: On Press, on Release, when Holding the switch down, on the Strike of a trigger, or as a Toggle between two values. | | **Select** | Selects the Stadium control output jack and conductor connection on which the Ext Amp toggle command is sent. Choose "Tip" or "Ring" to send the Ext Amp switch signal out only to this respective conductor of the TRS output jack. Choose the "A and B" (or "C and D" ![Helix Stadium XL only](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e86061edc83961c15d69deccb05914be14c252d481538bfc67c071cad075cc0b/Icon_XL.png?cb=eb82c58bec6c3f8aaf1811bc572e962e) ) to send the signal to both the Tip and Ring conductors of the jack. | | **State** | Appears for Instant commands only. Determines whether recalling the preset (or, if snapshot control is enabled, recalling the snapshot) changes the state of the signal sent to the amp---open or close. | | **Wait** | Appears for Instant commands only. Determines how long Helix Stadium waits after a preset recall (or if snapshot control is enabled, after a snapshot recall) before the command is sent. | ### ![The Command Center MIDI command category button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_206ca00f34976c49a4259cf06e773bffbe57389adbb7f8a27590e0b1b6e8c8ba/CC_MIDIButton.png?cb=f6c71b7d6a8dbdcd758ccc3ab3a640a6) MIDI Commands MIDI commands can be assigned to a source depending on the MIDI Command type selected (see Notes in the table below). **Note:** By default, MIDI type Command Center messages are transmitted via the 5-pin MIDI OUT and USB MIDI OUT simultaneously. You can customize MIDI behaviors using the [**Global Settings \> MIDI**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#globals-midi) options. ![MIDI Settings](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8e3fe6030871675dc117cae51c8159f83349679895475f90376207b2b680351e/MIDISettings.png?cb=7c94996f75098662517925bf3cd71d76) Command Center \> MIDI command Click to show/hide MIDI Command settings... | **Parameter** | **Description** | |---------------------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Action** | Selects the action for which the switch's assigned command is executed: On Press, on Release, when Holding the switch down, on the Strike of a trigger, or as a Toggle^\*^ between two values. ^**\***^**Note:** When selecting Toggle in the left tab, the right tab's Action parameter is automatically also set to Toggle and becomes non-selectable. This allows you to set the second value for your MIDI Toggle command within the right tab. | | **Command** | Selects the type of MIDI message to be sent. Note that not all sources can send the same messages. Parameters differ slightly depending on the Command type you select here, as indicated int he following descriptions. | | **MIDI Channel** | Selects the MIDI Channel on which the message is transmitted. | | **Bank MSB (CC00)**(when Command is set to "Bank/Prog") | Sets the Bank MSB (CC#00) value. Select "Off" if the receiving device shouldn't respond to Bank MSB. | | **Bank LSB (CC32)**(when Command is set to "Bank/Prog") | Sets the Bank LSB (CC#32) value. Select "Off" if the receiving device shouldn't respond to Bank LSB. | | **Program Change**(when Command is set to "Bank/Prog") | Sets the Program Change value to be sent with the Bank/Program message---to load a specific preset within the selected Bank. Select "Off" if the receiving device shouldn't respond to PC. | | **CC#**(when Command is set to "CC") | Sets the CC number to be sent. | | **Value**(when Command is set to "CC") | Sets the CC Value to be sent along with the selected CC number. Note that you can configure two MIDI CC assignments on a single switch, each with the same CC number, but two different values to "toggle" between them, such as for On/Off parameters, or to set a knob parameter to two different values. | | **Min Value** (when Command is set to CC: EXP pedals and X/Y) | Sets the minimum CC value, such as the "heel" value of an expression pedal. | | **Max Value**(when Command is set to CC: EXP pedals and X/Y) | Sets the maximum CC value, such as the "toe" value of an expression pedal. | | **Note**(when Command is set to Note On) | Sets the MIDI note value (C-1 \~ G9). Middle C is C3. The Note On Command sends a Note On followed by a Note Off message. **Note:**Line 6 follows Yamaha's MIDI note spec, where middle C is "C3" (unlike some other gear manufacturers that prefer to say middle C is "C4"). | | **Velocity**(when Command is set to Note On) | Sets the MIDI note's velocity. | | **Note Off**(when Command is set to Note On) | Determines whether the MIDI note sustains until pressing the switch again and then sends the Note Off message (Latching) or sustains only while the switch is held, and sends the Note Off message on switch release (Momentary). **Note:** Footswitch behavior (latching or momentary) is determined per footswitch, not per assignment. Therefore, it is not possible to combine multiple assignments or commands with opposing behavior types on a single footswitch controller. This parameter is not available for the Instant Command - MIDI - Note On command. For an Instant command, a Note Off message is immediately sent after the Note On message. | | **MMC** | Determines the MIDI Machine Control (MMC) message sent. These commands can be used to control transport functions on external devices or apps that support MMC. | | **Wait Time** | Appears for Instant commands only. Determines how long Helix Stadium waits after a preset recall (or if snapshot control is enabled, after a snapshot recall) before the command is sent. | ### ![The Command Center Hotkey command Inspector button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5965daef2610fa338c791c8e5bd29d0aa15b129558f9cb0ca1792e0497d5bbb3/CC_HotKeyButton.png?cb=b514ba7bfcb06ecff8e3e73127de19f0) Hotkey Commands Hotkey commands are supported by all sources *other than* expression pedals and X/Y controllers. QWERTY hotkeys (computer keyboard shortcuts with or without modifiers, such as Shift, Control, Option/Alt, and Command) can be sent to your Mac, PC, or iOS device via USB, letting you control virtually any DAW, YouTube^™^, Spotify^®^, looping software, DJ software, lighting software, and more. Hotkeys can be assigned to any Stomp A or B footswitch---or Instant command, where they're automatically sent upon preset recall (or if assigned to snapshot control, snapshot recall). Although you can edit commands from Helix Stadium's UI, it's much easier to type in the hotkey keystrokes from the *Helix Stadium* app. ![HotKey Settings](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_eee9b332e61d8444b6109e7ac1dff3ae90c0061aae09effb27e5f851699d5917/HotKeySettings.png?cb=5efca9b905bff5ef0cca2eee4f1c8d40) Command Center \> Hotkey command Click to show/hide Hotkey Command settings... | **Parameter** | **Description** | |----------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Action** | Selects the action for which the switch's assigned command is executed: On Press, on Release, when Holding the switch down, on the Strike of a trigger, or as a Toggle between two values. | | **Modifier 1** | Sets up to three key modifiers to be sent with the keystroke. The "Mac/PC" option corresponds to the "Command" key on macOS systems and the "Windows" key on Windows systems. Choose "None" if no modifier is required. | | **Modifier 2** | Sets up to three key modifiers to be sent with the keystroke. The "Mac/PC" option corresponds to the "Command" key on macOS systems and the "Windows" key on Windows systems. Choose "None" if no modifier is required. | | **Modifier 3** | Sets up to three key modifiers to be sent with the keystroke. The "Mac/PC" option corresponds to the "Command" key on macOS systems and the "Windows" key on Windows systems. Choose "None" if no modifier is required. | | **Keystroke** | Sets the alpha, numeric, or other computer keyboard key value to be sent. | | **Wait Time** | Appears for Instant commands only. Determines how long Helix Stadium waits after a preset recall (or if snapshot control is enabled, after a snapshot recall) before the command is sent. | ### Command Center \> Action Panel 1. **On the Command Center screen, tap the selected source.** Its Action Panel appears: ![Command Center Action Panel.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a0a0dc2a1e40c1b4c215d6ff15094c054633a50c473b834e82b5cca2f8d9563a/Command%20Center%20Action%20Panel.png?cb=e332b7e3f90d14f30be8699ffdbfe757) * **Copy Command:** Copies the command (or for dual commands, both) to the clipboard for pasting onto a different source, even in a different preset. * **Copy All Commands:** Copies all commands in the preset to the clipboard. This is useful for opening a different preset and then using **Paste All Commands** to apply the full set of copied commands to it. * **Paste Command/Paste All Commands:** After you've used the **Copy Command** to copy an individual controller's commands, select the desired target controller (within the same or different preset) and tap **Paste Command** . Note that only commands supported by the target controller can be pasted. After you've used the **Copy All Commands** to copy an entire preset's set of Command Center assignments, load the desired target preset, select any controller within the Command Center window to display the Action panel again, and select **Paste All Commands**. All commands are pasted into the new preset. Using **Paste Command** or **Paste All Commands** will overwrite existing assignments for the selected target controller(s). * **Clear Command:** Select any controller that includes one or two command assignments. If the controller contains two command assignments, tap the command's Inspector tab for the assignment you wish to clear first. Tap the controller to display the Action panel, and tap **Clear Command** to remove the selected command assignment only. Repeat, if desired, to remove the remaining command. * **Clear/Reset All:** Clears all Command Center assignments from all sources in the current preset. * **Label/Color:** (Selectable for any Stomp A or B Footswitch controller.) Lets you relabel any Stomp A or B [**Stomp Footswitch Mode**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/top-panel-and-footswitches.md#0e1bbb7d-6368-4056-89a7-94f3630b5291) label and LED color. See the next section. ### Customizing a Command's Label and Color Double-tap an assigned Stomp A or Stomp B controller within the Command Center screen to display the pop-up Action menu (see preceding section).^\*^ Here you can customize a Stomp Mode footswitch's assignment label and/or LED ring color. 1. Tap the selected Stomp A or Stomp B source. The Action panel opens. 2. Tap **Label/Color** . A keyboard appears. **Enter the new label.** 3. **Tap the desired color swatch.** **Auto** matches the default color for the footswitch LED, and **Off** disables the LED. 4. **When finished, tap** ![Done](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a83d9c0156f7c909b9320128e053c8c6367a9a80ab42a8225bab99108d221e39/e5c17e93-37c2-49c3-82af-5acda5953fb6?cb=e698eedd8e5390b35bc4ae3ffee2205e) **.** ^**\***^**Note:** **Preset/Snap, Looper, and Utility** commands do not allow custom labels or colors. --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Device Firmware Updates Using the Helix Stadium Application We recommend that you perform firmware updates for Helix Stadium directly, using its built-in Wi-Fi/Ethernet connectivity (see the [**Quick Start**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/quick-start.md#concierge) instructions). But, if those steps are not available to you, you can alternatively update using the Helix Stadium application (App version 1.4.0 and later) and a USB-C^®^ connection to your Helix Stadium hardware, provided your macOS or Windows computer is connected to the Internet. **Please note the following computer setup tips for smooth updating:** * Turn **off** your computer's screensaver and **disable** any of its power-saving features that may cause it to go to sleep while the firmware installation is in progress. * If using a desktop/tower computer, connect to its rear-panel USB port, near the power cable connection, to reduce the chance of intermittent USB interruptions. * If using a laptop, connect it to AC power before starting an update to avoid running out of battery power. 1. First, if you currently have the Helix Stadium application connected to your Helix Stadium device for editing via Wi-Fi or USB, disconnect the app in the **Connect to Device** window (also see the [**App to Device Connection**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/helix-stadium-edit-application.md#c5a19b79-30ff-486d-8516-bc9777d08a11) steps). ![Connect Dialog_Disconnecting.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d039273e311dc949b622b9963d31132653ff0fdc1913d6796d997291df16b912/Connect%20Dialog_Disconnecting.png?cb=1b7a75ff785e774464fed4c61a755096) Disconnecting from the device (Wi-Fi) 2. Connect from Stadium's USB-C port directly to your macOS or Windows computer's USB port, and launch the Helix Stadium application. 3. Click on the app toolbar's **My Account** button ![App_MyAcctButton.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_3a6a438fb4aa0c2b414065376a8c2d991f39625b0b8142cb6b1484c51db66e7f/App_MyAcctButton.png?cb=a030a51cfc7c5379d5d80a48f2c50542) and log in to your Line 6 account. If you have not yet created your free account, please go to[**line6.com/account/**](https://line6.com/account/) to create one.**You must be logged in to access available firmware updates.** 4. Click the app's **Connection Indicator** ![Connection Indicator button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a0a52a432beb764ff4d801ae64cefe44d9e5c3c63ee3d09d78ca4b037ddf4349/Connection%20Indicator%20button.png?cb=ed00cbf0187d70341ea9f74a76fc74e6) to open the **Connect To Device**window. 5. Within the **Connect to Device** dialog, click the **Connect** button for the "Available" **USB-Update** entry ![The USB-Update Connect Option](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5776cee9632d2bc2fc591a9c8aaa5045a6b0fe47ee941586a5ad31268c08c2fa/USB-Update%20Connect%20Option.png?cb=47d4429325946a5d298ee7bf066c59a8) (below, left). A pop-up window will prompt you when connecting via **USB-Update** (see below, right). ![Connect Dialog_USBUpdate.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_0ad4233ecdfcba2f0ab1a2215df2ce996778ea6e49be4d4470be4c6bfd2b55c3/Connect%20Dialog_USBUpdate.png?cb=297f76ca3ddbb04bba8210c432243592) Connecting for USB firmware updating ![Connected in USB Update Mode.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b6b172bea8e4bacdb4db51443ab5e33c988d80bcd8d62353b8e9a74282280d5e/Connected%20in%20USB%20Update%20Mode.png?cb=84a966c81bb897452f4e842668db8d9c) Connected in USB Update Mode prompt * Click **Update Firmware** to proceed with the update. * Optionally, click **Connect** to return to the Connect to Device dialog, or click **Close** if you want exit the Update process. **Note:** The standard USB connection option ![The USB Connect Option](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f9f9abf219463b82d518748e8d69d34ec9da7dfab1bf4dbcde5f5a4cb398de70/USB%20Connect%20Option.png?cb=79bddecd7e30d977c826aff4f9341bd7) will only appear if the Helix Stadium device has been updated to version 1.4.0 firmware (or later). This option is an alternative to the WiFi connection for using the Helix Stadium app's editing features (this connection does not support firmware updating). See [**Managing the App-to-Device Connection**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/helix-stadium-edit-application.md#acf2f97b-d8f8-401d-8fd8-9aa7781edab1). 6. Click the **Device** tab within the app's Update window to display the available firmware update details. ![FirmwareUpdate Dialog.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b3574e538c4f856768994dba7794c0e8bc7804b29204142019b7dcebeab1a2dc/FirmwareUpdate%20Dialog.png?cb=c4d3bb74ee74d0182269278a3bb08c99) The Device Firmware Update dialog 7. Read the *Release Notes* or any special instructions for the available update, then click ![The Download Update Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_56caee6dd71e45cbeea2beb322188b8e398314f2bcddc2056837f8e0f5e76c69/App_DownloadUpdateButton.png?cb=7ff9a28d4790c8893ab020819b07c2c0) to proceed. The download progress will appear on the app screen. Allow the download to complete. ![App_DownloadProgress.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_af3efcde5890ab322bbc60b57fcbd2ade71f00a43ebcc17395584ba9614fcdaa/App_DownloadProgress.png?cb=e20bffb46aa908d3619265aa7279543c) Once **Download Complete** appears, click on ![ContinueButton.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_3f3fafe99af63a471d33d34f21201e48f52ffb1c1c2b4171bccf1ab441096ac9/ContinueButton.png?cb=2e40d767577dc00e70e4326a8d190ba3) to start the "transfer" of the firmware installer to your Stadium device. ![DownloadCompleteAlert.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f40dea8ce5f7e285202a691e6f1c0cfa4462555148520c15be3dcb89cb99c530/DownloadCompleteAlert.png?cb=0478323d0ea893d3bacc3504beeed9e8) 8. The "Transferring OTA Update" process will begin, showing its progress in the app window. ***Do not disconnect the USB cable, power off, or disturb the device or your computer until the process completes!*** ![TransferringProgress.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a57c51e58fbf3ea453bce4668931741ea6712f2229039817856f5f59d3903925/TransferringProgress.png?cb=10423efee7cb48ea3a3ecc339828c314) Once the transfer is complete, click ![The Done button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_6d27116e803eb17e2a0aab0ec64523058ef1b88d1cc0906cdfa58819b0b868d3/DoneButton.png?cb=d0e8b23c824f72bd978a36ddf53210c2) to start the update installation. The application will automatically exit. ![TransferCompleteAlert.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_340ec70edf8f144d8b41252e34673ffdd49ca98b8974dfe884571d5c40ed1b2d/TransferCompleteAlert.png?cb=cc825086b20a61358d3e2e983f6c8e63) 9. You'll see the progress on your Helix Stadium device's main display, and the update will run completely with no interaction needed. Please note that it is normal for Stadium to restart automatically during the process. 10. Once the update completes and your Stadium device displays its **Welcome to Helix Stadium** screen, you can launch the Helix Stadium app, connect it to your Stadium for editing as covered in the [**Connect to Your Device**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/helix-stadium-edit-application.md#acf2f97b-d8f8-401d-8fd8-9aa7781edab1) section, and begin using your updated device. --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Display The 8-inch color **touchscreen** is your primary portal to creating presets and songs in Helix Stadium. The **Home View** is the main screen for building and editing your presets, and the **Song View** is for working with your Showcase™ songs. Additional screens, including the Main Menu, Matrix Mixer, and Tuner are covered in the following subpages. ## The Home View If you ever get lost, press the ![Home button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ca5ef4d96a7991beb965f69f7757b0d3e88f5fbb58ce9a1f85f97b71f5d315b2/Button_Home.png?cb=74c9251dfad53d447c5a2427523f41ee) **Home** button to return to the main Home \> Edit screen. ^**\***^**Important!** One fundamental difference between Helix Stadium XL and Helix Stadium is how footswitch labels are displayed on the device. On Stadium XL ![Helix Stadium XL only feature.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_56b5908e021c07ced11e22120fe5b01cc92a37c6bb90abbde4af0347ef6080b9/ce3779e0-043c-4fd8-aa6c-f95ec19b7b19?cb=bd1a1ac1d414c7c9e7166a6bbc396ce9) , footswitch labels are displayed on the device's **Scribble Strips** . On Helix Stadium, footswitch labels are displayed on the **Home \> Play** screen for each footswitch mode. Both the Stadium XL and Stadium device types offer the same **Home \> Edit** screen. On Helix Stadium, press the ![Home button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ca5ef4d96a7991beb965f69f7757b0d3e88f5fbb58ce9a1f85f97b71f5d315b2/Button_Home.png?cb=74c9251dfad53d447c5a2427523f41ee) **Home** button to toggle between **Home \> Edit** and **Home \> Play** views. Please refer to the following [**Home \> Play**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/display.md#performance-screen) section for details. ### Home \> Edit The Home \> Edit screen features the main signal flow display, where you can add and arrange blocks, edit block parameters, and configure routing. Be sure to check out the [**Creating and Editing Tones**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/building-and-editing-tones.md) and other linked pages below for additional details. ![HomeView_Annotated.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_828a6ecba256d7eacd50270e971cf644ef227f5a055f209d041ac8b4c49169f0/HomeView_Annotated.png?cb=b9158e66b7ac7d6c927aa61efc29453e) Home \> Edit view **Tip:** You can adjust the main display's brightness from [**Global Settings \> Displays**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md)**\> Main LCD Brightness**. 😎 ![Item 01](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c3c962e9d3e568af130f9535e9b990cb3182745e881610f048b9e557190e7e67/01.png?cb=ce61b591a14429573632afbeb4c2997c) **Main Menu:** Tap ![The Main Menu button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_fa3d9b707433d41bf4151923b1835af5d824fa735e0d4a1fe8d411856c35b136/MainMenuButton.png?cb=2720e1381664f0fa9434ebc5c375625f) to open the Main Menu. Here you can choose from several common commands or screens, such as creating a new preset, opening the Bypass/Control, Global Settings, Command Center screens, and more. Please refer to the [**Main Menu**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/main-menu.md) page. ![Item 2](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b35da66ea5723d93f73b14287e7d12c17b4a3a72dfc5a6c168ac99ac91446650/02.png?cb=53ead26f31014fd489e07cfbde017dc7) **Clock/Stopwatch:** Tap to open the Clock/Stopwatch panel to adjust the clock settings and start/stop/reset the stopwatch. ![Item 3](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_19c83fb5c8e4d2d846a8e2f49976dec058014698863ae2c128c680c19c77502f/03.png?cb=632cde3c35c9abd3a51e6bbd6f0126be) **Undo/Redo:** Tap the left arrow to undo the most recent edit. Tap the right arrow to redo the most recent edit. ![Item 4](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9beabaa2e24630e7f540d700f9eb758a852e4e19d5005c7e4b070c495cfcec64/04.png?cb=075549902ea87b3442a14dd60557ca0c) **Preset Number/Name:** The current preset's bank/preset number, along with its name its is displayed here. Tap to open the [**Preset List**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/presets.md). ![Item 5](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_71fde9ef6d3846f1b89fc4fcca5889fccee3915cf96b1cb89d3b774f56d6ff0a/05.png?cb=3c60906905f19136c9550e92d3fb7999) **Snapshot Panel:** Tap the Snapshot button ![The Snapshot Menu button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c5b4c536054b2b685276b627b4f7da95bf25e2ba00657eff573b9efa498966c1/SnapshotIcon.png?cb=84dcbede8a282e09aca0375f549493be) to open the Snapshot panel where you can select any of the current preset's snapshots 1\~8, as well as manage them. See [**Snapshots**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/snapshots.md) for details. ![Item 6](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d785308fcda7f5a16416b2d1b96efeb41d838c9ebdabaff2ecd70013b6219d3d/06.png?cb=e45c3711194c930a28cb1ba380014ade) **Preset Info:** Tap ![PresetInfoButton.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8e5866f8bcc57c558e1b63405ca99e9c084ae6b2f8595c3b7672df76960c9d17/PresetInfoButton.png?cb=52d5a4d4b68a71479a036543ea02a132) to open the Preset Info panel. All factory presets include tips on how to use them best. Freely type in info for your own presets, like guitar/pickup/playback system used, creative controller assignments, tips/tricks, self-affirming platitudes, taco recipes, etc. See [**Preset Info**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/the-preset-info-panel.md) for details. ![Item 7](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_215b48b6cfffac774653c26f01ec47d36e863cd8a77b77a6664ca31cde37cbf4/07.png?cb=4985f689673b884595ec1665290f3fb2) **Preset Clip:** For factory presets, tap ![The Clip View Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_01d964b477198a77afc60e6055abc05e5e52a47691421fd89989bb32a471a7af/ClipViewButton.png?cb=ace5a9c1437a2590c72f56baeb6fc20e) to open the Preset Clip panel. Every factory preset includes a unique dry guitar or bass riff so you can hear it in context; also known as the "Ohhh, I've been chugging with 7-string active EMG^®^ pickups through a country preset designed for a single coil Tele^®^. That's why I thought this preset sucked" feature. See [**Preset Clips**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/the-preset-info-panel.md#6b07a4d1-065f-449f-9d63-f646f15858b7)for details. ![Item 8](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_43b340d5e25e31319286f044041149ed9194c7d7c2ffa738f21678982739e288/08.png?cb=f9f3b6850564a1dba571fe782b957df5) **Input Block:** Each signal flow path includes an Input block at the left, which you can tap to select its source input (Instrument, Mic, Return, etc.). The input block turns green when an input signal is received and red when the input is too high, causing clipping. ![Item 9](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_27d82ed3cb03f383dbe8e5ab006bd30dfb570918e07c54f404b1a4d0362f3c7f/09.png?cb=b204e54eb95e4f32dee046a782f6c5cd) **Split and Merge Blocks:** A Split block can be added within Path 1A or Path 2A to create a parallel "B" split signal path. A Merge block can be added to the right of a Split block to return the parallel B path back to the A path, as shown above. Also see[**Input, Output, and Mix blocks**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/input-output-and-mix-blocks.md). **Tip:** Split and Merge blocks open up a huge range of possibilities for various signal flow configurations. Please see [**Signal Path Routing**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/signal-path-routing.md). ![Item 10](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_2c3c597d429df8f26a4911cb5be9d6b3bbe1e1ec33751b41f63ca729837489a0/10.png?cb=d700093662e1b8496789e095d710ab9e) **Selected Block:** Tap any Amp, Cab, Effect, Input, Output, Split, or Merge block to select it; its border appears with a thick white outline, and its parameters appear in the Inspector along the bottom of the screen. In the above image, the Amp block is the currently selected block. When you tap the currently selected block, its Action panel appears, offering options such as Copy, Paste, Assign to Switch, and more. Also, see [**The Blocks**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/the-blocks.md) pages. ![Item 11](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8c3a3fa61046e5628b45ea2c9888321eed5269b7f49adef11463733b2ac5aea8/11.png?cb=66bdb69bb0f2388d29f46f747e5ccc0e) **Link Indicator:** The gold "link" icon ![Amp-CabLinkIcon.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9cc602d0d6f354f54bed91cfc1c18f96922b3146a42b0af185b65b9515cbac4f/Amp-CabLinkIcon.png?cb=ed401a670b561cc4b9ec74ce6fefb105) is displayed below an Amp and Cab block (when selected) to indicate that the Cab's **Amp\>Cab Link** option is enabled, where the Cab block automatically loads a matching speaker cab whenever the Amp block's model changes. Amp\>Cab Link is enabled by default but can be turned off from the Cab's [**Focus View**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/the-focus-view.md). ![Item 12](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1ec5fc66d450fccec4b6678660479ee11bc0c1df45cab6ae6fc88da9a26d6637/12.png?cb=0385f8d84ee4047d5cfe1bb5bcfb0bbc) **Effect Block:** An [**Effect Block**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/effect-blocks.md) can be added to any path, and its model can be selected from any effect model category. ![Item 13.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_42087d4892c9f73facde0dde06478872566b7ca2d0dcd6fec00c6e81ae59fe8a/13.png?cb=7413e82ceac2779829fbc6bee750cec9) **Output Block:** Each signal flow path includes an [**Output Block**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/input-output-and-mix-blocks.md) at the right end. The Output block turns green when the path's signal is received and red when the level is too high, causing clipping. ![Item 14.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c77891b72f9d59bd475e2dcc180d74ccf482292a7c36b46130dc2b003b759968/14.png?cb=312535d28a2e1c6c41122ad8a6b12f0f) **FX Loop Block:** [**FX Loop Blocks**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/input-output-and-mix-blocks.md) let you dynamically insert your favorite external stompboxes (or rack effects) into any location in your tone. ![Item 15.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_702c1bc9970e4fda7424cab1e5e4c969c82444eeb2d0829adec8297d95e18cad/15.png?cb=c01945c4503b29ad1aba639f94f0ae75) **Focus View:** Tap ![The Focus button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_259c21d41556765d0722029d94bf80a32dfb0299fc593b3257ff15043fe551f1/FocusButton.png?cb=b367223d9f9da9efa27e1b8c6a7b5077) to open the block's [**Focus View**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/the-focus-view.md). Focus view varies depending on the selected item. For example, when an amp or effect block is selected, its Focus view lets you slide your finger around the screen to morph between five distinct variations of that amp or effect. When a Cab block is selected, its Focus view lets you drag the mic's position relative to the speaker. When an EQ \> Parametric, Tilt, 10 Band Graphic, or Cali Q Graphic block is selected, its Focus view lets you slide EQ bands around the screen. ![Item 16.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5e3ceed5b50a173699eaba1b58b7ca9f13d6282505252910e5d9329999c49a19/16.png?cb=1d339f1a90f873f9866debd12c428887) **Inspector:** The **Inspector** displays parameters for the currently selected block that correspond with the knobs below the display. Blocks with more than eight parameters will have multiple pages of parameters. Swipe the Inspector left or right, or press Page Left ![Left arrow page button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a268048f4e287fa4f67418ac12a9e3f701877eb62296d17db1666ec2ac10c66f/Button_PageL.png?cb=d6adfb7cd26a057468c69889f5646acc) or Page Right ![Right arrow page button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_84745a7d784e345fb8568c49719c25684b8182909674e31368d63b3ace146acc/Button_PageR.png?cb=7d615d04b1444a5ad58cc9eca5789cd9) for more parameters. The thin line above the parameters indicates the current page. ![Item 17](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f477efc29afde3e72dafb044cd888e6c547aa937f42ff82bf52d427cf0825ba4/17.png?cb=164f113819e6c995aee8cc932da10e11) **Model Name:** Tap the model name ![Inspector Model Name](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e6dba80a4a56224329e57b040cfbc0ad311be79076a6f20de012ede43bbef8fc/InspectorModelName.png?cb=c5c25a71a75e15fe08bec049bb86e3aa) to open the [**Model List**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/the-model-browser.md), where you can browse, audition, and select a model for the block. Alternatively, turn the **lower knob** to scroll through available items for the selected block. ![Item 18.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9e56b9e7342f81783c10fbf4b4fbbf783b5d490a22899fb29f5b19ff510534b1/18.png?cb=a413a52785d2bed70fd5245d2d4d6ddd) **Block Bypass:** Tap ![BypassButton.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b24cd375769fe856e09cdb667e49a26a22c84e84fccad82fb7621beed75615cf/BypassButton.png?cb=a83da6df2b4e44098ffda5fb75417389) to bypass and enable the selected block, independent of its assigned stomp footswitch. ![Item 19.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a4439083547a0939891e0bfb49e448f96cf66c3730b45992242da85347cf961f/19.png?cb=c130ae91f773b3818a4fe577522c740f) **Parameter:** If the parameter is assigned to a controller or snapshot, small white nodes indicate the controller's minimum and maximum range values. Tap any parameter in the Inspector to open its Parameter panel. This enables touch control of the parameter value, numerical entry, min/max controller adjustment, shortcuts, and even tells you what the parameter does. Also, see [**Creating and Editing Tones**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/building-and-editing-tones.md). **Shortcut:** Tap and hold anywhere within the Inspector to toggle between the main **Home \> Edit** screen and the [**Bypass/Control screen**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/bypass-and-controller-assign.md). ### Home \> Play View (Helix Stadium Only) Because Helix Stadium doesn't have Helix Stadium XL's scribble strip OLEDs above each footswitch, it includes **Home \> Play view** to display footswitch labels on the main display, as shown below. Press the ![Home button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ca5ef4d96a7991beb965f69f7757b0d3e88f5fbb58ce9a1f85f97b71f5d315b2/Button_Home.png?cb=74c9251dfad53d447c5a2427523f41ee) **Home** button to toggle between **Home \> Edit** and **Home \> Play** views. Please refer to the [**Footswitch Modes**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/top-panel-and-footswitches.md) section for details. ![Stadium Stomp A FS Mode.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_0b308899e6f64153f407075a5da831ab6a8fbbdefcad29da85dcda204135e929/Stadium%20Stomp%20A%20FS%20Mode.png?cb=5ad07969ec46399d1c62a2a77d737ced) Stomp A Footswitch mode ![Stadium Preset FS Mode.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d2232711527e62ad6024caf09dea797fdf13f1bdeea6d8bc5bb8232b0d8b3c86/Stadium%20Preset%20FS%20Mode.png?cb=9dc64d9edfa9b0ea00f262bbca4af77d) Preset Footswitch mode ![Stadium More FS Mode 1_1.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_df390f8af1d43b611ae3d22c783eb78b377fe0d6f44148fc05187685d4cf83e1/Stadium%20More%20FS%20Mode%201_1.png?cb=541e95a95a94dd8f60942805e5c49b7c) More Footswitch mode ![Stadium Snapshot FS Mode.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_bafcd2b7425ce75437d5861505add3b59f4361ae21ca2c5bea9c8b738829dbb2/Stadium%20Snapshot%20FS%20Mode.png?cb=e7ede9ed4b549d6358df815320ee2ce9) Snapshot Footswitch mode ![Stadium_PlayTransport.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9819fdfb072c71f07c43dc5086d9953ccb17549d11a16ef967069711b6a4ebf9/Stadium_PlayTransport.png?cb=2372b3b68310beb40ed34637453e7aa7) Transport Footswitch mode ![P37_ComboPresetSnaps.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f7e4bf618d5a8d862a4aec07e1828a15d97a72447b16ba6c2f7da603326dc741/P37_ComboPresetSnaps.png?cb=32ee321c57db33d2df11090d2f881766) Combo Footswitch mode (Presets on top row, Snapshots on bottom) ![HelixStadium_LooperMode.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a4061155dc5962d84f03528d5b600329ec413ff2772d54559f919b4f9e0f6530/HelixStadium_LooperMode.png?cb=52a2a530a2adda7ca702675d3f67a2f9) Deluxe Looper mode ## The Song View Song View accesses Helix Stadium's powerful Showcase™ engine for performing and jamming. Using the Song View screens, you can create playlists of one or more multitrack/multi-stem songs containing "flags," which engage various functions during song playback. Collectively, songs and flags represent your band's entire live show, but they can also be used for simply jamming along with your favorite songs. ![SongView.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1db7b8eae0eec954a6201f3421d8b1766aba8f6a9faccddd0daa8d8c475b8414/SongView.png?cb=bbef981853bb2ff89dbd93b5993a08d9) The main Song screen Helix Stadium's [**Song View**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/song-view.md) is covered in detail in its own section. --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Dynamic DSP Like nearly all modern audio processors, the Helix Stadium engine is based on DSP (Digital Signal Processing). Some models require many times more DSP horsepower than others, so it makes logical sense that fewer of those models could exist in a preset. To work around this, some processors restrict you to one amp, one reverb, one delay, etc. With Helix Stadium, we feel it's important to let you keep adding whatever you want to your tone, even if you may eventually run out of DSP for the current preset. Helix Stadium's four paths (Path 1A, 1B, 2A, and 2B) each offer 12 block locations, for a total 48 block capacity. That said, there are some rules governing the number of certain types of blocks you can add to a preset: | **Block Type** | **Maximum Allowable Instances** | |---------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Amp or Preamp** | Any combination, up to four per preset (two per path maximum). | | **Cab** | Up to four Cab blocks per preset (two per path maximum). Note that each Cab block can include up to two Cab models, two Cab IRs, or one of each. | | **Clone** **Amp, Amp+Cab, Preamp, or Distortion** | Any combination, up to four per preset (two per path maximum). | | **Polyphonic ("Poly") and high DSP type Effects** | Up to two Poly Effect blocks per preset (one per path maximum). These effect models include the Feedbacker (Dynamics), Poly Sustain (Delay), Poly Detune (Modulation), Poly Pitch, Wham, Capo, and 12 String (Pitch/Synth). | | **Looper** | One Looper of any type per preset maximum. | **To see which models can be added to the current Path, open the** [**Model List**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/the-model-browser.md)**.**Grayed out items cannot be accommodated and are skipped over. ## Tips to Optimize DSP * Each of Stadium's two primary Paths (Path 1 and Path 2) utilizes its own independent DSP. If all of your blocks are on Path 1 (or on its split/parallel Paths 1A and 1B), you're only using half of your device's horsepower! To use two or more amps and more than a handful of effects, expect to use both Paths 1 and 2. An easy way to accomplish this is to set the Path 1 Output block to "Path 2A" to route Path 1 into Path 2 as a contiguous, serial Path. In fact, we've created two template presets---**Parallel Switch** and **Parallel Blend** ---with two Agoura amps in parallel spanning Paths 1 and 2 to optimize DSP, with plenty of room for pre (Path 1) and post (Path 2) effects. See the following [**Signal Path Routing**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/signal-path-routing.md) page for details. * Some block types use much more DSP than others, with Amp, Clone, Reverb, and Poly effect blocks being the most DSP hungry. Cab, EQ, Dynamics, Volume/Pan, and Send/Return blocks use relatively little. * Some models may use more DSP than others in the same category. This is especially true with Agoura Amp models. * Instead of a parallel Path with two sets of separate Amp and Cab blocks, try adding a single Amp block followed by a Cab block that uses two different Cab models/Cab IRs to provide some substantial tone variations. * The stereo version of an Effect model will use approximately twice as much DSP as a mono version of the same model. Typically, you should use mono versions of effects that are placed before an Amp block, since the stereo signal is collapsed to mono when entering an Amp block. And, of course, if you're only using a mono output from Stadium, there is no need to use stereo models at all in your tones. * Some model categories have "Simple" blocks, which use less DSP than others. * Instead of toggling between two of the same Amp or Effect blocks (with different settings), use controllers or snapshots to instantly adjust parameters within a single block. --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Effects Helix Stadium effect blocks offer hundreds of effects of all types, most available in both **Mono** and **Stereo** versions. Also included are selected effects from the classic Line 6 DL4™, DM4™, MM4™, and FM4™ stompboxes, as well as M13^®^, M9^®^, and M5^®^ processors---these are offered within the Amp and Effect models' **Legacy** subcategory. **Tip!** For the complete, current lists of all Amps, Cabs, and Effects included in Helix Stadium, along with the original gear they are based on, please see the [***Helix Stadium Model List***](https://line6.com/helix-stadium-models/) on the Line 6 website. ## ![Button_Distortion.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a7c1a1b336b75db006943a6aec118ac8c9baaddfc464b6c3725b1d3224e07560/Button_Distortion.png?cb=2b15a26a65abd2d4017704d7b4ecec33) Distortion Boosts, Overdrives, Distortions, Fuzzes, and other forms of dirt. Using the Stadium **Proxy** feature (firmware v1.3 and later), you can create Clones of your own distortion pedals. Once one or more Distortion Clones are created, they are available within the Distortion category of the Model List, as shown below. Please see the following [**Clones**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/clones.md) page for additional details. ### Selecting a Distortion Clone Once you've created one or more Distortion Clones, tap the **Distortion** category button in the Inspector ![Button_Distortion.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a7c1a1b336b75db006943a6aec118ac8c9baaddfc464b6c3725b1d3224e07560/Button_Distortion.png?cb=2b15a26a65abd2d4017704d7b4ecec33) to open its Model List, and select the **CLONE** subcategory within the sidebar to the block to your preset (shown below). Then tap on the "Empty" Clone file box at the top of the Inspector to open the Distortion - Clone file browser, where you can audition and load a Clone file. Please see the [**Selecting \& Managing Clones**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/selecting-and-managing-clones.md) page for additional details. ![CloneSelectBox_Distortion.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_60bf393607d882aafedffb1b5090fc19b7a1d63ab6ba7e686098dda9adaa5b0f/CloneSelectBox_Distortion.png?cb=a459ea30d6419f01d7ad2d5b9c68467c) The Model List \> Distortion \> Clone subcategory is selected ## ![Delay model Inspector button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e2cb1965a20d1d2ebcca7fcfcbf1cc8637630a6cdbe6bfcf10d537f414c977ca/Button_Delay.png?cb=c49c09e28f6f3143aaf4884a9b9ed2e4) Delay Echo and Delay units of all flavors: Slapback, Doubler, Tape Machine, Platter, Analog, Digital, Reverse, and more. ## ![Reverb model Inspector button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_abd2c00e33348b072e9688ec334c332e29a490dfd2566ce0a59f24f774a5d7d1/Button_Reverb.png?cb=2186e118bd6ad64959aed190a6a432ea) Reverb Ambiences of all types are offered: Room, Plate, Hall, Chamber, Spring, Shimmer, Nonlinear, and more. ## ![Modulation model Inspector button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_94f8bb14d81386177001d0fb92d781ed34f47d43f8bb6c0d2754b487e2818adf/Button_Modulation.png?cb=a9b68e8acf9f0a8e14b7bbc0a70de813) Modulation Add some swirl and dimension with this large assortment of Modulation effects: Tremolo, Vibrato, Phase Shift, Flanger, Chorus, Rotary, and more. ## ![Dynamics model Inspector button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d83287a622b6f34f1f2407e3d861e5d2c003f72d07bf7611f87b7093090de0e0/Button_Dynamics.png?cb=1678c61853b0a8153bb875609f54d027) Dynamics Level up with Dynamics tools for all stages of your signal flow: Compressors, Gates, AutoSwell, Feedbacker, and more. ## ![EQ model Inspector button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_dad78cf4ab3a939b750fc1b533f389e7057b0b33eda691685e6ca6d27275f8d4/Button_EQ.png?cb=7346694f3aea543809a855b74d9c0f6d) EQ Expertly sculpt and shape your tone with this assortment of Equalization tools. ## ![Pitch and Synth model Inspector button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e984f3f4d85f78488d498c43684efa996df02e127b154300fd8251a3379ece73/Button_PitchSynth.png?cb=df1cc77b7ed1cbcda82408527e082762) Pitch and Synth The Pitch-based and Synthesis models in this category provide a multitude of extreme effects, including pedal-controlled and polyphonic pitch shifting, intelligent harmonization, 12-string emulation, ring modulation, oscillating synth filters, and more. ## ![Wah and Filter model Inspector button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f2650f212c5e0289e78a6ef00b1e04a0efd4aaf1be1cdb33be5cf8109f76d7b7/Button_WahFilter.png?cb=f3c651446d5a21cd75300cd495d25bb7) Wah and Filter A collection of classic wahs and a stash of familiar to bizarre filter-based effects are found here. ## ![Volume and Pan model Inspector button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c7e637de0607bb984123f772b46e2f32956a182a3a1b9930bb609f827e11d2b3/Button_VolumePan.png?cb=ced9b262a28753875ca3bde23fd312dd) Volume and Pan This category's tools are excellent for building tones with even greater functionality: Volume for a volume pedal, Gain for a clean boost, and Stereo Width, Imaging, and Pan for modifying your stereo image. ## ![Looper model Inspector button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_784186291d48eeb64dde57ddcfe503fccedc8de3be4f5ce53c25fedff32988c1/Button_Looper.png?cb=c37f1838c4d9d64ba1891356a069bd12) Looper Choose from a variety of Loopers to put Helix Stadium to work as a creative sketchpad or serious performance rig. Note that only one Looper block can be added per preset. Please see the full [**Looper Block**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/looper-block.md) page for details on using the different Looper types. ## Common Effect Parameters Due to the sheer number of effect models available, it would take numerous pages to document all their individual parameters! However, many parameters are common among effects, so we've included a table here for your reference. For details on editing Helix Stadium models, please refer to the [**Creating and Editing Tones**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/building-and-editing-tones.md) section. **Tap any Home \> Edit parameter to read a description of that parameter.** **Tip:** We've meticulously recreated effects from the classic and vintage pedals on which they are based, typically including their quirks and all. Therefore, you might also find it helpful to visit manufacturer and enthusiast websites about the original pedals and read the specifics of their knobs and switches. | **Parameter** | **Description** | |------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Drive / Gain** | Adjusts the amount of overdrive, distortion, or fuzz. | | **Bass** | Adjusts the low frequency level of the effect. | | **Mid** | Adjusts the midrange frequency level of the effect. | | **Treble** | Adjusts the high frequency level of the effect. | | **Speed / Rate** | Common in Modulation and some Delay and Reverb effects, adjusts the rate of the amplitude or pitch modulation, with higher settings providing faster rates. **Press the knob to toggle between Hz and note values.** Not all Rate parameters can be synced to note values, as they may be non-linear and highly interactive. (Note that stepping on TAP once resets the modulation any LFO-based effects, such as tremolos and rotary speakers.) | | **Time** | Found in Delays, adjusts the delay/repeat time, with higher settings providing longer delays. **Press the knob to toggle between ms and note values.** Choosing a **ms** value provides a specific time in milliseconds; choosing a **note division** value provides a time based on the current tempo. | | **Depth** | Adjusts the intensity of the modulation. Higher settings result in more extreme pitch bending, wobble, or throb, depending on the effect. | | **Feedback** | Adjusts the amount of delayed signal fed back into the effect. Higher settings can provide more dramatic textures. | | **Decay** | Sets the length of time the reverb effect sustains. | | **Predelay** | Determines the time before the reverb effect is heard. Can sometimes result in more definition between the dry and effected signals. | | **Scale** | On stereo delays, the Scale offers control over the left \& right channel repeats proportionately. The left channel repeats follow the Time value, and the right channel repeats at some percentage of the left time. For example, if a delay's Time is set for 1 second and its Scale set to 75%, the left channel will repeat at 1 second and the right at 750 milliseconds (ms). | | **Spread** | Spread differs slightly among stereo delay effects. For most delays, it adjusts how widely the repeats bounce left and right. For example, with the Ping Pong Delay, 0 is centered (mono), and 10 is full left to right panning for the repeats. For modulated stereo delays, Spread affects the LFOs' (low frequency oscillators) stereo modulation behavior. At 0, the LFOs are in sync. At 10, the two LFOs are 180 degrees out of sync, so that when one side is modulating up, the other side is modulating down. | | **Headroom** | Some mod and delay pedals' internal signal paths exhibit a bit of grit, especially when placed after a high-gain amp block. Negative values increase the perceived amount of grit; positive values clean things up a bit. At 0dB, the model behaves like the original pedal. | | **Low Cut** | Filters a portion of the block's bass and/or treble frequencies, which can help remove rumble and/or high-end harshness. For delays, these typically affect the repeats only. | | **High Cut** | Filters a portion of the block's bass and/or treble frequencies, which can help remove rumble and/or high-end harshness. For delays, these typically affect the repeats only. | | **Mix** | Blends the effected "wet" signal vs. the "dry" signal passed through the block. When set to 0%, the path bypasses the effect completely. When set to 100%, the entire path is fed through the effect, and no dry signal is heard. | | **Level** | Adjusts the overall output level of the effects block. Be careful not to boost this parameter on multiple blocks, as digital clipping may occur. You should typically leave this at 0.0dB for most blocks. Where the original pedal's level or volume knob behavior doesn't really apply to dB values, 0.0-10 may be used. | | **Trails** | *Trails Off:* Any delay repeats or reverb decays are instantly muted when the block is bypassed. *Trails On:* Any delay repeats or reverb decays continue to fade out naturally when the block is bypassed, or a different snapshot is selected. | | **Sidechain** | Offered for all Dynamics models (except Feedbacker), the *Sidechain* setting lets you configure the compressor/limiter/gate's Threshold to be triggered by the signal received at the block's input (Off, the default), or by one of several other input signal levels, such as an Instrument, Mic, Return, USB, or S/PDIF. This provides some different options for dynamic control, like ducking, where one sound---for example, a gate or compressor placed after a distortion or amp block might have difficulty reacting to the incoming signal, but setting Sidechain to that path's input can improve the effect's response. | **Note:** Distortion clones offer their own set of parameters---please see the following [**Selecting and Managing Clones**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/selecting-and-managing-clones.md) page. --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Configuring External Controllers The Helix Stadium **Control A/B** (and additional **Control C/D** , available on Stadium XL ![Helix Stadium XL only](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1d5bd2335ab0b06df3a0c450eb656b6d90dbbd790637296ff4b0d559ee56d74a/Icon_XL.png?cb=a00c7dd3c9cc40c40e4320fa9670aa23) ) jacks allow for connecting external expression pedals, switches, drum trigger, and external amp switching controllers, for your [**Bypass and Controller**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/bypass-and-controller-assign.md) assigned parameters. The following instructions outline the process for connecting and configuring controller devices and control jacks. ## Helix Stadium XL / Helix Stadium Control Features Please note the following differences in these Control features between Helix Stadium XL and Helix Stadium devices as you read through the following setup configurations. * **Helix Stadium X** L ![Helix Stadium XL only](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1d5bd2335ab0b06df3a0c450eb656b6d90dbbd790637296ff4b0d559ee56d74a/Icon_XL.png?cb=a00c7dd3c9cc40c40e4320fa9670aa23) includes an onboard Expression Pedal, which controls EXP 1 and EXP 2 within the Bypass/Control settings. In addition, Stadium XL offers the Control A/B and added Control C/D jacks, which allow up to four external controllers (pedals, switches, and triggers, in any combination) to be connected to control parameters assigned to A, B, C, and D. * **Helix Stadium** does not include an onboard Expression Pedal and offers a Control A/B jack, which allows for up to two controllers (pedals, switches, and triggers, in any combination). Note that when external pedals are connected to the Control A/B jack, they are assigned via EXP 1 and EXP 2. * With the default settings, you can connect a single expression pedal to Control A and a switch to Control B, and the behavior emulates the Stadium XL onboard pedal and toe switch for toggling the single pedal between EXP 2 and EXP 2 control. See the examples below on this page. * The Control A/B and ![Helix Stadium XL only](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1d5bd2335ab0b06df3a0c450eb656b6d90dbbd790637296ff4b0d559ee56d74a/Icon_XL.png?cb=a00c7dd3c9cc40c40e4320fa9670aa23) C/D jacks are 1/4" Tip-Ring-Sleeve (TRS) connectors, allowing you to connect either a single pedal/switch/trigger controller or a combination of two controllers to each jack. * A single controller device can be connected using a Tip-Sleeve (TS) cable, resulting in the device utilizing "Control A" for the Control A/B jack or "Control C" for the ![Helix Stadium XL only](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1d5bd2335ab0b06df3a0c450eb656b6d90dbbd790637296ff4b0d559ee56d74a/Icon_XL.png?cb=a00c7dd3c9cc40c40e4320fa9670aa23) Control C/D jack. * A TRS splitter cable or adapter can be used to connect two TS controller devices to the Control jack, where Control A (or Control C) is the Tip conductor and Control B (or Control D) is the Ring conductor. * If your controller device is a dual controller with a TRS cable connection, such as the **Line 6 EX2** Expression Pedal with Toe Switch or a dual switch type controller, you can connect directly to the Stadium Control A/B (or ![Helix Stadium XL only](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1d5bd2335ab0b06df3a0c450eb656b6d90dbbd790637296ff4b0d559ee56d74a/Icon_XL.png?cb=a00c7dd3c9cc40c40e4320fa9670aa23) Control C/D) jack using a TRS-to-TRS cable and access both its control conductors. Please refer to the following [**EX2 Setup**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/external-pedal-and-switch-controller-configuration.md#ex2-setup) steps. ### Automatic Expression Assignment The following specific Effect models are automatically assigned for Expression Pedal control. * **Wahs and Pitch Wham:**All Wahs and the Pitch Wham models' Position parameters are assigned automatically as follows: * On Helix Stadium XL ![Helix Stadium XL only](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1d5bd2335ab0b06df3a0c450eb656b6d90dbbd790637296ff4b0d559ee56d74a/Icon_XL.png?cb=a00c7dd3c9cc40c40e4320fa9670aa23) devices, Position is assigned to EXP 1, and Bypass is automatically assigned to the onboard Toe Switch. * On Helix Stadium devices, Position is automatically assigned to EXP 1, and Bypass is automatically to assigned to EXP Toggle. (Connect an external pedal and switch to the Control A/B jack and configure the Global Settings \> Switches/Pedals settings as needed---see the next section.) * **Volume and Pan:**The Volume model's Position and the Pan model's Pan parameters are assigned automatically as follows: * On Helix Stadium XL ![Helix Stadium XL only](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1d5bd2335ab0b06df3a0c450eb656b6d90dbbd790637296ff4b0d559ee56d74a/Icon_XL.png?cb=a00c7dd3c9cc40c40e4320fa9670aa23) devices, the Position and Pan parameters are assigned to EXP 2, and Bypass is automatically assigned to the onboard Toe Switch. * On Helix Stadium devices, the Position and Pan parameters are automatically assigned to EXP 2, and the Bypass is automatically assigned to EXP Toggle (Connect an external pedal and switch to the Control A/B jack and configure the Global Settings \> Switches/Pedals settings as needed---see the next section.) **Note:** You may need to rock the pedal back and forth a few times initially for a new assignment to begin controlling its parameter. ### Global Settings for External Control The [**Global Settings \> Switches/Pedals**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#1b3d3cab-4eeb-4180-9df0-5bbc9f71a3fe) category offers the following options. * To determine the type of controller device you are connecting to the Control A/B (and ![Helix Stadium XL only](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1d5bd2335ab0b06df3a0c450eb656b6d90dbbd790637296ff4b0d559ee56d74a/Icon_XL.png?cb=a00c7dd3c9cc40c40e4320fa9670aa23) Control C/D) jacks. As referenced in the following setup examples, you may need to configure these settings for proper functionality. ![GlobalSettings_ControlOptions.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_2af3eb47116fc704b25eb7565f97cc51e091919539bd32c97a06f08c56d0247d/GlobalSettings_ControlOptions.png?cb=d210a743ef2d709695c94fda1ba9d5bc) The Global Settings - Control jack option Helix Stadium XL ![GlobalSettings_ControlOptions_Stadium.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c004e0ea15534f848dafe6438c06a465948cfc37fd7767b817e9210d080e52c0/GlobalSettings_ControlOptions_Stadium.png?cb=257edfbb1de1234fa21549f16c7ac802) The Global Settings - Control jack option Helix Stadium * Each Expression Pedal offers its own independent **EXP Position** option, which determines whether its position is recalled **Per Preset** (the default for each)or applied as **Global** . If you want a Wah or Volume Pedal to maintain its current position when switching presets, set this to **Global**. **Note:** When set to **Global**, the current position persists on preset recall, even if Snapshot Control is currently active for the preset's pedal position parameter. ![Globals_ExpPedalPosition_XL.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e5396f195fd769745305820f11b85a04311ca435922424124b79f1dd8be982b7/Globals_ExpPedalPosition_XL.png?cb=e5ac1ce03e72bb6b7dcb72258014fbbb) The Global Settings - EXP Position options Helix Stadium XL ![Globals_ExpPedalPosition.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8e1b3c72b2d511cf76a4e1b15524d9645a50f8f6559f470bbaa21a8eb0dbba33/Globals_ExpPedalPosition.png?cb=6fac34e359df27cdb20cb2720d15ea69) The Global Settings - EXP Position options Helix Stadium ## External Controller Setup Examples ### About TS and TRS Cables \& Connectors In case you are not already familiar, you'll want to be able to identify the difference between these two types of 1/4" cable connections for your expression pedal, switch, and trigger controllers for our examples in this section: * A **Tip-Sleeve** (**TS**) type cable consists of two conductors, the Tip (positive) and Sleeve (ground). * A **Tip-Ring-Sleeve** (**TRS**) type cable consists of three conductors: the Tip (positive 1), Ring (positive 2), and Sleeve (common ground). ![TS_TRS_Plugs_WhiteOnBlack.jpg](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_2e2db4f18d55ffc7f8ee3f62908e322fec74a0daf2e4f9e9feac3c97cea6f184/TS_TRS_Plugs_WhiteOnBlack.jpg?cb=961e37aefa3a2988dfcf3ee840031787) TS and TRS connectors Helix Stadium's Control jack is a TRS-type jack, into which you can connect a single expression pedal, switch, or drum trigger controller using a TS cable, or a dual controller using a TRS cable. You can also connect two individual controllers, each with a TS cable, simultaneously, provided you connect them into a dual TRS-to-dual TS splitter (or "Y" adapter). Please see the following examples. ### Line 6 EX2 Pedal Setup [**EX2**](https://shop-us.line6.com/hardware/pedals/) is a combination expression pedal and toe switch controller designed for use with Helix Stadium and other Line 6 products, letting you assign a pedal to control an effect parameter and toggle its bypass, such as for a classic Wah or Pitch Wham. Note that the Control A/B jack options differ for Helix Stadium XL and Helix Stadium, as described below. **Note:** You can set the [**Global Settings \> Switches/Pedals**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#1b3d3cab-4eeb-4180-9df0-5bbc9f71a3fe) \> **EXP Pedal Position** to independently set each expression pedal's behavior as either **Per Preset** (last position and snapshot-assigned positions are saved individually with each preset), versus **Global**(the current position persists on preset load, even if Snapshot Control is currently active for the preset's pedal position). #### ![Icon_XL.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1d5bd2335ab0b06df3a0c450eb656b6d90dbbd790637296ff4b0d559ee56d74a/Icon_XL.png?cb=a00c7dd3c9cc40c40e4320fa9670aa23) Helix Stadium XL EX2 Pedal Setup EX2 can be connected directly to the Stadium **Control A/B** or **Control** **C/D** jack using a single TRS-to-TRS cable, eliminating the need for a TRS-to-dual-TS splitter adapter, as shown below on the left. Optionally, EX2 can be connected using an individual TS cable for the use of either its pedal *or* toe switch, as shown below on the right. ![EX2_TRS_Connect_WhiteOnBlack.jpg](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_68f87810eee2e3145ae3d3ef08fc7346a0ed033abba32a0acc29a887e319a2ae/EX2_TRS_Connect_WhiteOnBlack.jpg?cb=9bfe346be96db51d6eac236e23915e2b) Connecting the Line 6 EX2 for pedal and toe switch control - Helix Stadium XL Connect a TRS-TRS type cable from EX2's Pedal-Toe Switch jack to Stadium XL's **Control A/B** jack. Set the [**Global Settings \> Switches/Pedals**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#1b3d3cab-4eeb-4180-9df0-5bbc9f71a3fe) \> **Control A (Tip)** to**EXP In** and **Control B (Ring)** to **Footswitch In**. Alternatively, connect EX2 to the **Control C/D** jack. Set the [**Global Settings \> Switches/Pedals**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#1b3d3cab-4eeb-4180-9df0-5bbc9f71a3fe) **Control C (Tip)** to **EXP In** and **Control D (Ring)** to **Footswitch In**. ![EX2_TS_Connect_WhiteOnBlack.jpg](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_3faf6a9a96cf298650d1ab74b9f1f68e1321c14bab7608ea8b0d7332e09e98f0/EX2_TS_Connect_WhiteOnBlack.jpg?cb=846de8100dcdb7c979e1a29d62ff89f8) Connecting the Line 6 EX2 for pedal ***or*** switch control - Helix Stadium XL Connect a TS-TS type cable from either the right **Pedal/Toe Sw** (for pedal control) *or* the left **Toe Switch** (for switch control) EX2 jack to Stadium XL's **Control A/B** jack. Set the [**Global Settings \> Switches/Pedals**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#1b3d3cab-4eeb-4180-9df0-5bbc9f71a3fe) **Control A (Tip)** to**EXP In** or **Footswitch In**, matching the EX2 jack connection. Or, you can also use the **Control C/D** jack. Set the [**Global Settings \> Switches/Pedals**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#1b3d3cab-4eeb-4180-9df0-5bbc9f71a3fe) **Control C (Tip)** to **EXP In** , or **Footswitch In**, matching the EX2 jack connection. #### Helix Stadium EX2 Pedal Setup The Helix Stadium's Control A/B jack options are designed to allow you to connect an EX2 pedal (or any third-party expression pedal and switch) where the pedal is assigned to control two different effect parameters via EXP 1 and EXP 2 (such as a Wah and a Volume), with its toe switch toggling between the two. (This essentially mimics the behavior of the Helix Stadium XL's onboard pedal and toe switch.) Connect and configure EX2 with Helix Stadium as shown on the left below for this behavior. Optionally, EX2 can be connected using an individual TS cable for the use of either its pedal *or* switch, as shown below on the right. ![EX2_TRS_Connect_Stadium_WhiteOnBlack.jpg](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_062cb9f6588956b6ed220212fd3b51513c6a4f5e91aef8c3d89a96e5086b5dda/EX2_TRS_Connect_Stadium_WhiteOnBlack.jpg?cb=b46eccb591b598540c74d3feacdfc76f) Connecting the Line 6 EX2 for pedal ***and*** toe switch control - Helix Stadium XL Connect a TRS-TRS type cable from EX2's Pedal-Toe Switch jack to Stadium's **Control A/B** jack. Set the [**Global Settings \> Switches/Pedals**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#1b3d3cab-4eeb-4180-9df0-5bbc9f71a3fe)**Control A (Tip)** to**EXP 1** and **Control B (Ring)** to **EXP Toggle** (the default Control A and B settings). In this configuration, Wah and Pitch Wham effects will automatically be controlled by the EXP 1, and a Volume effect will automatically be controlled by EXP 2, where you can click the EX2 Toe Switch to toggle between them. You can also manually create Controller assignments for any models' parameters to EXP 1 and EXP 2 to control them via EX2. ![EX2_TS_Connect_Stadium_WhiteOnBlack.jpg](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_7b7ee7a5076b266100056dcedd5bb671e5ea752a5ab10bc780a8be77a74d10ad/EX2_TS_Connect_Stadium_WhiteOnBlack.jpg?cb=57a475b7af5ab528970c68761adcac09) Connecting the Line 6 EX2 for pedal ***or*** switch control - Helix Stadium Connect a TS-TS type cable from either the right **Pedal/Toe Sw** (for pedal control) *or* the left **Toe Switch** (for switch control) EX2 jack to Stadium's **Control A/B** jack. Set the [**Global Settings \> Switches/Pedals**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#1b3d3cab-4eeb-4180-9df0-5bbc9f71a3fe) **Control A (Tip)** to**EXP In** or **Footswitch In**, matching the EX2 jack connection. ### Single Controller Setup If you wish to use only a single controller, connect it using a TS type cable to the **Control A/B** jack. For this type of connection, set the [**Global Settings \> Switches/Pedals**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#1b3d3cab-4eeb-4180-9df0-5bbc9f71a3fe) **Control A (Tip)** to match the controller you are connecting. Note that the options differ slightly for Helix Stadium XL and Helix Stadium devices. ![Icon_XL.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1d5bd2335ab0b06df3a0c450eb656b6d90dbbd790637296ff4b0d559ee56d74a/Icon_XL.png?cb=a00c7dd3c9cc40c40e4320fa9670aa23) **For Helix Stadium XL** , you can alternatively or additionally use the **Control C/D** jack. When using a TS type cable, only the "Tip" conductor of the Control jack is accessed. Therefore, set the [**Global Settings \> Switches/Pedals**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#1b3d3cab-4eeb-4180-9df0-5bbc9f71a3fe) **Control A (Tip)** or **Control C (Tip)** option to match the type of controller you are connecting: **EXP In** ,**Footswitch In** , or **Trigger In**. ![Pedal_or_Switch_TS_Connect_WhiteOnBlack.jpg](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_faf8e7698f788fe13d5cbb87cdf9f1ef0ff3571b315258ed39c426e264c38adc/Pedal_or_Switch_TS_Connect_WhiteOnBlack.jpg?cb=d9a3684438c47248100ff6c540c1823a) Connecting a single controller - Helix Stadium XL **For Helix Stadium** , connect a single controller to its **Control A/B** jack. When using a TS-type cable, only the "Tip" conductor of the Control A/B jack is accessed. Therefore, set the [**Global Settings \> Switches/Pedals**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#1b3d3cab-4eeb-4180-9df0-5bbc9f71a3fe) **Control A (Tip)** option to match the type of controller you are connecting ot the jack: **EXP 1** ^**\***^,**Footswitch In** , or **Trigger In**. ^**\***^**Note:** When connecting a single external expression pedal, you'll need to assign the desired model parameters to "EXP 1" to be controlled by the pedal. ![Pedal_or_Switch_TS_Connect_Stadium_WhiteOnBlack.jpg](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_4a3995857fde76510bbe114a582600129f9148a1756521da6bc5ca6969e19cee/Pedal_or_Switch_TS_Connect_Stadium_WhiteOnBlack.jpg?cb=35c97506aebfbeb7132d93166b40eb76) Connecting a single controller - Helix Stadium ### Dual Controller Setup If you wish to connect two external controllers, which can be any pedal, switch, or trigger combination of controllers, connect two controller devices using a TRS type cable to a splitter adapter to the **Control A/B** jack. For this type of connection, set the [**Global Settings \> Switches/Pedals**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#1b3d3cab-4eeb-4180-9df0-5bbc9f71a3fe) **\> Control A (Tip)** and **Control B (Ring)** options to match the controllers connected to each respective Tip and Ring conductor. Note that the options differ slightly for Helix Stadium and Helix Stadium XL devices. ![Icon_XL.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1d5bd2335ab0b06df3a0c450eb656b6d90dbbd790637296ff4b0d559ee56d74a/Icon_XL.png?cb=a00c7dd3c9cc40c40e4320fa9670aa23) **For Helix Stadium XL,** you can alternatively or additionally use the **Control C/D** jack. Connect any two pedal, switch, or trigger controllers in any combination to the Control jack using a TRS cable or splitter adapter. Set the respective jack's [**Global Settings \> Switches/Pedals**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#1b3d3cab-4eeb-4180-9df0-5bbc9f71a3fe) **\>** **Control (Tip)** and **Control (Ring)** for **EXP In** ,**Footswitch In** , or **Trigger In**, matching the controllers to their respective Tip and Ring conductors. Note that you can use either two individual controllers (pictured below, left) or a dual controller type device (pictured below, right). Dual controller devices typically require a TRS cable connection (pictured below, right); therefore, a TRS-TRS cable can be used to connect to the desired **Control** jack. ![Pedal_and_Switch_TS-TRS_Connect_WhiteOnBlack.jpg](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_89c7a6600ee40b11fbd6865682dd0c8de1ae1fc6a524049d58be2be9e3b2a3bc/Pedal_and_Switch_TS-TRS_Connect_WhiteOnBlack.jpg?cb=ab45b46b6324ea3aad1193011050e0bb) Connecting two individual controllers via a dual TS-TRS adapter - Helix Stadium XL ![DualSwitchTRS_WhiteOnBlack.jpg](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5410739b8f18bf4c971dd6eb3bae1eededb8a2d91693d70d30daee13cb715328/DualSwitchTRS_WhiteOnBlack.jpg?cb=3981e0fab92d0536598ec0dff59fae2e) Connecting a dual controller via a single TRS-TRS cable - Helix Stadium XL **For Helix Stadium** , connect any two pedal, switch, or trigger controllers in any combination to the **Control A/B** jack using a TRS cable or splitter adapter. Set the [**Global Settings \> Switches/Pedals**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#1b3d3cab-4eeb-4180-9df0-5bbc9f71a3fe) **\>** **Control A (Tip)** for **EXP 1** ^**\***^,**Footswitch In** , or **Trigger In** , and **Control B (Ring)** for **EXP 2** ^**\***^**, Footswitch In** , **Trigger In** , or **EXP Toggle,** ^**\***^ matching the controllers to their respective Tip and Ring conductors. ^**\***^**Note:** You can connect a single expression pedal to the Tip conductor and set **Control A** to "EXP 1," and connect a switch to the Ring conductor and set **Control B** to "EXP Toggle" (these are the defaults for the Control A/B Global setting). This configuration allows the single connected pedal to be used for EXP 1 and EXP 2 controller assignments, with the connected footswitch acting as a toggle switch between the two. (Also see the preceding [**Line 6 EX2 Pedal Setup**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/external-pedal-and-switch-controller-configuration.md#ex2-setup) steps.) Alternatively, connect two expression pedals for individual pedal control of EXP 1 and XP 2. For this setup, you'll want to set **Control A** to "EXP 1" and **Control B** to "EXP 2" and assign the desired models' parameters to "EXP 1" or "EXP 2," respectively. You can use either two individual controllers (pictured below, left) or a dual controller type device (pictured below, right). Dual controller devices typically require a TRS cable connection (pictured below, right); therefore, a TRS-TRS cable can be used to connect to the **Control A/B** jack. ![Pedal_and_Switch_TS-TRS_Connect_Stadium_WhiteOnBlack.jpg](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f5e27b7a6b92e056fbece616bf4116f20ec420650442d7b87b312c2a5772fb22/Pedal_and_Switch_TS-TRS_Connect_Stadium_WhiteOnBlack.jpg?cb=605a5760deab5a289f784b0d2c2d7a54) Connecting two individual controllers via a dual TS-TRS adapter - Helix Stadium ![DualControllerTRS_Stadium_WhiteOnBlack.jpg](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_0615657d4e370c7eab442543dfbe1b21412206b2265ef6b9aec1cdd1b27e87b3/DualControllerTRS_Stadium_WhiteOnBlack.jpg?cb=449ad73f144692dd0493329c1386e1ef) Connecting a dual controller via a single TRS-TRS cable - Helix Stadium ### External Amp Control The **Control A/B** (and the ![Icon_XL.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1d5bd2335ab0b06df3a0c450eb656b6d90dbbd790637296ff4b0d559ee56d74a/Icon_XL.png?cb=a00c7dd3c9cc40c40e4320fa9670aa23) Helix Stadium XL **Control C/D** ) jacks can alternatively be configured for "Ext Amp" via their [**Global Settings \> Switches/Pedals**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#1b3d3cab-4eeb-4180-9df0-5bbc9f71a3fe) **\>** **Control (Tip)** and **Control (Ring)** options. This allows you to configure Command Center switch assignments to remotely toggle your external amplifier's channel, reverb, or tremolo switching from your presets. Please refer to the [**Command Center \> Ext Amp Commands**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/command-center.md#command-center-ext-amp) section for details. --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Favorite Blocks Please check out the video below for an overview of Favorite blocks. Then, consult the sections on this page for additional details. ## About Favorites Scrolling through a seemingly never-ending list of Amps, Cabs, Clones, and Effects can be a slog, but it doesn't have to be. *Option anxiety* is a very real thing for people, which is why Helix Stadium lets you curate up to 128 of your favorite models from any category and organize them however you want. What's more, favorites can remember all your meticulously dialed-in settings, as well as the block's bypass state, stomp assignments, controller assignments (say, you always control Reverb Mix from an expression pedal), and the state of the Snapshot Control switches for its parameters. Favorites appear at the very top of the Model List, so adding your favorite Distortion, Amp, Cab, Clone, Modulation, Delay, Reverb, and more can be accomplished by simply spinning the Lower Knob. **Tip:** Favorites saved and exported from the original Helix and HX family devices, Helix Native Plug-in, and HX Edit software can be imported into Helix Stadium. See the [**Importing Presets**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/presets.md#451aaa01-5512-4407-92ac-47968b6bb986) section for compatibility details. **Tip:** In addition to adding blocks as favorites, you can also set any model's parameters to your preferred values and save them as the user default values for each time you load the model. See [**User Defaults**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/building-and-editing-tones.md#user-default). **Note:** By default, an Amp favorite includes its linked Cab block and parameters. This behavior depends on whether the **Add Cab Block** and **Amp\>Cab Link** switches are enabled (both are enabled by default). See [**Amp and Preamp Models**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/amp-blocks.md). **Note:** Input, Output, Split, and Merge type blocks cannot be added as favorites. ### Adding a Favorite 1. **Dial in any Amp, Cab, Clone, Effect, or FX Loop block exactly how you like it.** * If you want the block to automatically load bypassed, **bypass the block before adding it as a favorite.** * Also, feel free to assign it to a stomp switch, controllers, and/or snapshots. Favorites can store and recall all of these. See [**Bypass and Controller Assignments**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/bypass-and-controller-assign.md). 2. **Tap the block again to open the Action Panel (below left) and tap Add to Favorites... Alternatively, from Focus view's sidebar, tap Add to Favorites.** The Add to Favorites window appears (below right). ![A block's Action Panel](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c9333ff4944ed16d37f305e332ad6acdbb4495416266fc20aaeee82df044bed5/ActionPanel.png?cb=7147a7003f1c19af903a85f40be895d6) A block's Action Panel ![The Add to Favorites dialog](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b08abd02f92fe68c554908b935395a17b124e769a7b7908565021fee8d585abc/AddFavorite.png?cb=81f01ae0f7cdc028b073794736620f83) Add to Favorites window 3. **Optional:** If you want to add the favorite into a new folder, **tap New Folder** ![The New Folder button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b78bf0debb991f8291da8e5b5c8dc044083bddb54a29ebb5a6b3fe15da4c11f4/AddFolder.png?cb=0f94dfbfabb7f1d95e1ffb205cfeb4a0) **to create and name the folder.** 4. **Tap the sidebar toggles to choose which assignments you want stored with the favorite (if any):** * **Bypass Assign** ![The Bypass Assign switch](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_4a8937c48356a80c2f43f711758d0f2f86fa31a95502c1c00ca5cc026fb5a532/BypassAssign.png?cb=b9e821887a1b23b10403abfa5fa08cbf) **:** When on, recalling the favorite also recalls any Stomp assignment it may have. * **Controller Assigns** ![The Controller Assigns switch](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_2d120ad983a75a45cabfc4d3b02c5d52c38dd1cc9b82ea6c5666c2a0fd5d0140/ControllerAssigns.png?cb=b38ade596128c64b748dfb202467058a) **:** When on, recalling the favorite also recalls any controller assignments it might have. For example, say you always control Reverb Mix from an expression pedal or you always control Delay Time and Feedback with the same CC messages sent from your external MIDI controller. * **Snapshot Assigns** ![The Snapshot Assigns switch](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_6a4464ee382a2968d32f8306b054d8ebd8bdca099f5a271fa7c0dfde1608e199/SnapshotAssigns.png?cb=0505ec2c8045dbf6a19e7c96beaaed77) **:** When on, recalling the favorite remembers which parameters are assigned to Snapshot control. * **Linked Cab (Amp blocks only):** When on, recalling the favorite automatically adds the currently linked Cab block. **Note** : Favorites don't remember the actual parameter *values* for all 8 snapshots, only that the parameters are snapshot-enabled 5. **Save your favorite by tapping one of the following boxes:** * **Overwrite:** Overwrites the currently-selected favorite. * **Add New:** Creates a new favorite in the list. * **Cancel:** Exit the dialog without creating a favorite. 6. When adding a new favorite or overwriting an existing one, the keyboard appears. **Enter the name and tap Done.** ### Quick-Selecting a Favorite 1. **From the Home screen, tap an empty location on a path and turn the Lower Knob.** All favorites instantly appear (even those inside folders) without having to open the Model List at all! * Favorites appear with a small white star icon in the Inspector header ![Favorite_StarIcon.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_7525e9a490d713b5044849f1663c00a399911ad5b80989a8b79b19dbe77b48ba/Favorite_StarIcon.png?cb=8b85379b3e7587eb975ea9b3ec8d1e51) . ### Selecting a Favorite from the Model List 1. **Alternatively, tap an empty location on a path.** Block categories appear in the inspector (see below). ![Stadium_InspectorNone.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_734feb6647fd27c4d8253a71fa57bb9bd3825d5ebe5c716aa1a845f2228bddbb/Stadium_InspectorNone.png?cb=636275f1f572399a5d9ffce9eea85d18) 2. **Tap the Favorites button** ![The Favorites category button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_eaa98fd3dcb3e00592337c498eed775da010e4aac0559fc1e743f0e719f298de/2025-01-13_14-40-21.png?cb=da51a3bb3aa5f697517031f6814aa2df) **to open the Model List.** **Tap the list view button** ![List-Gallery Selector](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_04ae16d4f2141413058998cfbeacd31f59e239d4877096a722062d8f090c826c/97415539-0eb1-4d95-9fa2-e81ec3c987ea?cb=213a38634b4ab1500dcce58784b4d1a0) **to choose to view more items in a condensed list or fewer items as large images in a grid.** 3. **Swipe the list up or down (or turn the Lower Knob) to find the desired favorite.** ![The Favorites category within the Preset Browser](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_7551a4d7a55d9c28ec1550d3d716ce76f9faa9fdc42a71ee575bc492a700e3d2/FavoritesCategory.png?cb=ae6ddf86a603c1b969eb35107037dcfa) Model List \> Favorites 5. **Tap to select the item and press Home** ![Home button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d0ca123f998fabc5cb30d3d0189ab1319c83565438c1970367ae8af9534c84d0/df8877b7-4e88-477d-af15-d24cbdef80c9?cb=9664a711688df707f2c11c8ef485896d) **(or tap the Inspector header) to close the Model List. Alternatively, double-tap to select the item** ***and*** **close the Model List.** * Favorites appear with a small white star icon in the Inspector header ![Favorite_StarIcon.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_7525e9a490d713b5044849f1663c00a399911ad5b80989a8b79b19dbe77b48ba/Favorite_StarIcon.png?cb=8b85379b3e7587eb975ea9b3ec8d1e51) . ### Managing/Renaming Favorites Up to 128 favorites can be added to the Model List. You'll occasionally want to manage these favorites (and folders of favorites---or folders within folders within folders of favorites) so you can find and access them quickly. 1. **From the Home screen, tap the Inspector header to open the Model List. If not already there, tap the Favorites category (see screenshot above).** 2. **To rename a favorite, select the favorite and tap Rename Favorite in the sidebar.** The keyboard appears. **Enter the name and tap Done.** * To rename a favorite folder, select the folder and tap Rename Folder in the sidebar. 3. **To manage favorites, tap Manage Favorites** ![The Manage Favorites Command](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_bc94b7eda14ef1f00eebdb9211aeaca0e1d512efb291bae03bad9f24e842969d/ManageFavoritesCommand.png?cb=87a44538d24e1717bda5dda714044311) **in the sidebar.** Checkboxes and drag icons ![FavoriteDragIcon.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d18cf5319981963dfed4f1cc795204adf71882b1082970a50b957bc7e9a56fdf/FavoriteDragIcon.png?cb=173a8ea6539a31ea91594203d601562b) appear. 4. **To reorder an item in the list, tap its drag icon** ![FavoriteDragIcon.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d18cf5319981963dfed4f1cc795204adf71882b1082970a50b957bc7e9a56fdf/FavoriteDragIcon.png?cb=173a8ea6539a31ea91594203d601562b) **and move it up or down. To reorder multiple items, tap their checkboxes to select them, then move them up and down as a group.** A blue line appears where the item(s) will be placed. **Tip:**It's helpful to place your most commonly used favorites toward the top of the list, so selecting an empty block and then turning the Lower Knob recalls them first. 5. Sidebar items are replaced with the following items (see screenshot below): * **Select All** ![SelectAll.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9a537c089da3d5fb0a1b42d04337ee010d7e528949bbb847f60607139eaca22b/SelectAll.png?cb=89b90ccb6740cfff9d1a9a4b36c1ebfa) **:**Selects (checks) all items in the Favorites list. * **Deselect All** ![DeselectAll.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a842901080de12c06ddead592f82aa10fd9dbdde3171b7936e66223f2a5f5179/DeselectAll.png?cb=f9b9c050280093335cd58b69aa1ec1f8) **:** Deselects (unchecks) all checked items in the Favorites list. * **Move to Folder** ![Move To Folder button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_73c9a660f012f4fce010a069364023951f85e67e6d0730ddfb795598b45b624a/MoveToFolder.png?cb=0fc7a69a78dc723c9e0fc1311f0c3d2e) **:** Lets you move all selected items into a different folder (or out of a folder into the Favorites root directory) * **Delete** ![DeleteFav.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e5cf42c2c4fc65a0decdfcd5d25f8ed74eb994c318d684ca74e9a3bd1ad5ecbe/DeleteFav.png?cb=8453871655477e5aed2c47ba4ebdc3c0) **:** ***Permanently deletes the selected favorites and/or folders of favorites.*** ![Managing Favorites](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_984df5df5a37e0708d5e39221d9ae2730e6d1345b8c156c8a10c7a988ee36ea1/ManagingFavs.png?cb=c9726dff4d10912e28a0782ed70aab85) Model List \> Managing Favorites 6. **When finished, tap Done** ![FavDoneButton.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f078cb89081cc776e96d4155e3cac30ee34899d296b52fbd0709f51ff6a93e84/FavDoneButton.png?cb=c06ae9f55dcffd016af20c6e1f0e33c3) **.** **Tip:** Favorites can also be added, renamed, managed, exported, and imported using the [**Helix Stadium Application**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/helix-stadium-edit-application.md). --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Flag List ## The Flag List Window The Flag List window shows all the current song's flags in a list along with select settings. Tap the **Flag List button** ![The Flag List Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ce647b464b83992f9a82ca0f632ed3fdc582387e1940dff845d7908a64234376/FlagListButton.png?cb=79864f998308580efc0ced080bbbfb1a) at the top of the Song View, or press the Lower Knob to open the Flag List. ![FlagList_Annotated.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_7297ea7944f6d3ea208cbcbac8760266c3a11f9cfda6f8e312767988ab9f2984/FlagList_Annotated.png?cb=501b49256491d3049d3f5051b922010c) Song \> Flag List Swipe up/down within the list area to scroll and view all flags. Tap on a flag or turn the Lower Knob to select (highlight) a flag in the list. ![Item 01](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_51bc70026e4115b5dd049a48a6797a353eed74b46ff98685db52065fd2bc564d/01.png?cb=ce61b591a14429573632afbeb4c2997c) **Start Flag:** All songs already include a Start flag for the song's start position. The Start flag's text in the list displays the song tempo and time signature. Note that all songs also already include an End flag, which sets the song's end time. ![Item 2](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a430c096045a226956759744a42d8ae72d176f3dea922b711ebdc5806b986be7/02.png?cb=53ead26f31014fd489e07cfbde017dc7) **Flag Time Position:** Each flag's time position is displayed at its left ![Bar, Beat. Ticks time display](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b2aee9b4c4ef4c9c9ab26965c2f2f7cb8180ac4632e785f7d334acca7c45e093/Bar-Beat_Ticks.png?cb=7382f8301e7e15cf35da9711fee641b3) (Bar-Beat.Tick). ![Item 3](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8b010eab484f04ac2cbdb9aa3f06779413f49f7d2df165a23c201e18bc21002d/03.png?cb=632cde3c35c9abd3a51e6bbd6f0126be) **Selected Flag:** Tap on a flag in the list, or turn the Lower Knob, to select (highlight) a flag and choose a command from the right sidebar. When you exit to the main Song screen, the highlighted flag in the Flag List is also selected in the Song screen. ![Item 4](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b4d40149b161e7994d3c8a2adc127e415c8dac077e1956e0fb8ea88825142765/04.png?cb=075549902ea87b3442a14dd60557ca0c) **Playhead Indicator:** The blue line indicates the playhead's current position in the song to provide a reference for the most recently triggered flag. ![Item 5](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_7f3d3577d63fea0a13552cab36aa5b73f300c0204e2027ebf6fbd002416b88e8/05.png?cb=3c60906905f19136c9550e92d3fb7999) **Sidebar Commands:** * **Manage Flags** : Enters the Manage view where you can copy, paste, clear, reorder, and move the time position of selected flags. See the following **Managing Flags** section. * **Test Flag:** Available for Preset/Snap, Looper, Utility, Ext Amp, MIDI, and Hotkey flag types. Tap **Test Flag** to immediately trigger the flag and test its configured functions. * **Rename Flag:** For Marker, Looper, Utility, Ext Amp, MIDI, Hotkey, and Time flag types, tap to enter a descriptive name for the flag. Its name will appear in this list window as well as on the main Song screen when the flag is selected. **Tip:** If you rename a Marker type flag (tap on the pencil icon ![Marker Rename Button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5076040bad0246a9bb0d62711ee7dcc3915be36db01b3f1abe1d7539f4d0d6d1/Marker%20Rename%20Button.png?cb=a6db2d9f1411736b8a749acb59147336) at right of the selected Marker's name in the Inspector), the custom name also appears on the Song screen's ruler ![Marker Name - Ruler.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_17c64b9a7ae6040020b8d2bc9c26685fc28a91ad4ceaf0bb7b79226a3fe518d8/Marker%20Name%20-%20Ruler.png?cb=868180f854d0d48e008a041c93968fcb) . This can help you more easily indicate your song parts (Verse, Chorus, Feedback Solo, etc.). **To exit the Flag List, press the Song button** ![Home button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a6d778c36caa075f9d3b065340aa2856e11d63df7cc3377e8747f4c07abe3135/Button_Home.png?cb=74c9251dfad53d447c5a2427523f41ee) **or press the Lower Knob.** ### Managing Flags 1. From the Flag List window, tap ![Managing Flags](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8a8855d995ee500392a6bde0371ad4c47f6e37007e16da5d8bf9646e8499422c/Managing%20Flags%20button.png?cb=332a808d8bbf9ea21a817d259d1ea814) in the sidebar. Checkboxes appear to the left of the flag names (below): ![ManageFlagsScreen.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_55ecbde0a40c9345f9a460f1f95b22873881a0f89e832692f6f70525a2473208/ManageFlagsScreen.png?cb=b1b81c75e45147dcd6349fc28fa8aa98) The Manage Flags screen 2. Check box(es) to select one or more flags for editing. Optionally, tap **Select All** to check all flags, or **Deselect All** to clear all checked flags. (**Start** and **End** flags cannot be checked.) **Tip:** Remember that you can use the **Undo** or **Redo** button ![UndoRedoButtons.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5741cd89b5135b48ffd6f7bbce11b6a981f29ea6f23987303569413f0ad978e1/UndoRedoButtons.png?cb=bdcadeb32501eccc740721e75a60b493) to reverse your most recent edit action. * **Copy Flags:** Copies the checked flags to the clipboard for pasting. * **Paste Flags:** Tap on the flag in the list at the time position where you want to paste; your pasted flag(s) are added below the selected flag at that same time position. * **Clear Flags:** Tap to clear checked flags from the song. * **Move Flags:** Tap to open the Move dialog (below). Turn the **Bar** (Knob 6), **Beat** (Knob 7), and **Tick** (Knob 8) for the desired + or - time position change for the checked flags. Tap ![MoveFlagsButton.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5c97e052bb3a40d1acd40a6a08c583da1ded1954a43a0e41256d5c81ed408f56/MoveFlagsButton.png?cb=bbb9fcd49a7c42388aeb50e8cd5b0758) . ![Manage_MoveFlags.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a74672dcb76ed7ccf9010ee784b470d46b10f6504c8c30094f4ac453c0aa364d/Manage_MoveFlags.png?cb=f60acf586c0ad4eea4395fd09ec70e17) The Move Flags dialog 3. Tap ![DoneButton.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d726c126274793be3a9a9115f91a85721d337e21f0837cd25a20c806fbb03df8/DoneButton.png?cb=f73a64dbac69b2dfe5eed2c3d5f9f412) to return to the Flag List. --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Flags *Flags* are events that take place at a certain time during song playback---very similar to commands in the Command Center menu, except they take place automatically. A song could have just two flags (Start and End) for casual jamming with your favorite commercial tracks---or hundreds of flags, collectively automating your band or solo acts's entire live show. Examples include: * Selecting a specific preset at the beginning of a song (Start flag) * Switching to a different snapshot when the chorus kicks in (Preset/Snapshot or any Marker flag) * Reordering sections of a song on the fly and/or choosing which section comes next (Marker flags) * Engaging looper functions---record the guitar during the first verse and then play it back for the second verse, where you can harmonize with it (Looper flags) * Displaying the Tuner at the end of a song to start the next one and then exiting the Tuner once the next song begins (Utility \> Tuner On, Tuner Off flags) * Changing the preset in an external MIDI-equipped pedal, keyboard, synth, or standalone softsynth/guitar processing software (MIDI \> Bank/Prog flags) * Synchronizing Powerpoint or Keynote slides to the music (Hotkey flags) * Controlling a MIDI-equipped lighting console or MIDI-to-DMX converter (MIDI \> CC flags) * Controlling video playback or lighting software (Hotkey flags) ## Song Flag Automation Starting with Stadium Firmware version 1.3, several flag command types now behave as true automation. Showcase keeps track of your position in the song and automatically recalls the Preset, Snapshot, Ext Amp channel, MIDI PC/CC, Hotkey command, tempo, or screen, based on preceding flag(s), even if the playhead does not pass the flag's location. This means you can jump to any part of the song and the correct sounds and settings will appear at the right time, no matter where the flags are placed. | **Flag Type** | **Description** | |-----------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Start** | Every song has one Start flag at the very beginning that determines the song's initial time signature and tempo. The Start flag also has the ability to recall a specific preset and snapshot. | | **End** | Every song has one End flag at the very end that determines the song's end location, fade out length (if any), and playback behavior for when the song ends. Moving its location trims the end time of the song. | | **Marker** | Used to jump to various locations in a song and for rearranging your song on the fly during performance. The flag top on the Song screen displays a small yellow pause icon when its Pause at Marker is set to "On". As with Start flags, Marker flags can recall a specific preset and snapshot. Marker flags, when renamed, will display their name on the Song screen's ruler for reference. | | **Cycle** | Cycles a section of the song for repeated jamming. Cycle Start and End points can also be entered in real time by pressing Transport mode's Cycle footswitch. | | **Preset/Snap** | Used to automatically switch presets and/or snapshots during a song. Note that Start flags and Markers can also recall presets and/or snapshots, so these may be unnecessary. | | **Looper** | Used to automate looper functions within Helix Stadium itself. For example, you could place a Looper \> Record flag at the beginning of the first chorus, a Looper \> Stop flag at the end of the chorus, and a Looper \> Play flag at the beginning of the second chorus. Playing the song will automate these functions so you could harmonize with what you played in the first chorus durning the second chorus, without pressing a single footswitch. | | **Utility** | A catch-all for additional functions that allow Helix Stadium to control itself, including turning the click on and off, entering and exiting the tuner or XY Controller screens, and starting and stopping the stopwatch. | | **Ext Amp** | Used to automatically switch external amps' channels and/or reverb. Same as Ext Amp commands except they happen automatically. | | **MIDI** | Transmits a MIDI message from both MIDI DIN and USB. Currently supports Bank/Program, CC, and MMC messages. Can be used to recall presets and control parameters in your external stompboxes, synths, keyboards, or with a MIDI-to-DMX converter, even lighting. | | **Hotkey** | Transmits a QWERTY HID command (with or without modifiers, such as Shift, Alt, and Command) via USB. Basically the same thing as a Hotkey message on the Command Center page, except it's automatically sent during song playback. Can be used to start/stop a Quicktime video, advance Powerpoint slides, or if you're really ambitious and bored, type an angry email to your boss. | | **Time** | Each song's Start flag determines the song's initial tempo and time signature, but additional Time flags can be added anytime the song's tempo and/or time signature changes. | ## Flag Controls ![SongView-Flags_Annotated.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_326fef2482cea36b5ebc8a61b5bcfed6e4391efa4d61e3574a711c602ef6dad6/SongView-Flags_Annotated.png?cb=0c4bd9ddef06f39813b1fefcdfe50c8f) Song View with flags added ![Item 01](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_66947d303c913e4712b222fbcc6371656150d410109faf7d4a9e0866e9e31553/01.png?cb=ce61b591a14429573632afbeb4c2997c) **Cue Panel:** Below the current Song name is the Next Song indicator (below left), which shows the next song to be played. If a song or marker flag has been cued, the Cue panel appears, flashing (below right), indicating what plays when pressing Play. To dismiss the Cue panel, tap Cancel or press FS6 (Cancel). See [**Performing Songs**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/performing-songs.md). ![NextSongIndicator.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e0e852b745e386bcdcafb3893962945f081ced73d009825362304de1216bf2b7/NextSongIndicator.png?cb=101e9f84346317b0b0ed1a5324350103) The Next Song indicator ![CuePanel_Marker.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1efb48a67904f6732f757c1adf6e157aa764f25f09a2dd68dc0839a733adee8d/CuePanel_Marker.png?cb=72a9f347f30acb58c8e4530ca551c63b) The Cue Panel \> a marker is cued ![Item 2](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_00170e95c6566dcc4c47acc56f615bfee156f69129ae6eb4bcf78d0b6328fad4/02.png?cb=53ead26f31014fd489e07cfbde017dc7) **Flag List Button:** Tap to open the Flag List, where you can view all the song's current flags in one list, manage, test, rename them, and more. Please see the [**Flag List**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/flag-list.md)section. ![Item 3](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_05951ca580b262c5c369e7a369583697cbe3c11684b8c0b8cf2ccfaea87ed5eb/03.png?cb=632cde3c35c9abd3a51e6bbd6f0126be) **Start Flag:** All songs include a Start flag, which you can set the song's initial tempo and time signature, as well as recall a specific Stadium preset and snapshot on song start. See [**Start Flag**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/flags.md#start-flag). ![Item 4](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8488f3467162a9b44109b0c73ab70e11222f596c38d197cef64674bde0f6763c/04.png?cb=075549902ea87b3442a14dd60557ca0c) **Flag Pole:** Flags are represented by thin colored vertical lines within the flag field. In the illustration above, a green Marker flag is selected. Turn the Lower Knob to scroll through all available flags. To scroll through all available flags of the same type (say, you want to jump to all MIDI flags), push and turn the Lower Knob. ![Item 5](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d9ad8db3d036af7ca9150182fd4990793d413feddf6dd80db21d5340fc76661e/05.png?cb=3c60906905f19136c9550e92d3fb7999) **Selected Flag:** Turn the lower knob or tap on a flag within the ruler at the top of the Track Field area to choose a flag. The selected flag appears in the ruler area. (In the image above, Marker \> Verse 2 is selected.) Tap-hold the selected flag's top and drag it left or right, or use the Knobs 1 (Bar), 2 (Beat), and 3 (Tick) to move it to a new location. Tap the selected flag's icon in the ruler to open its [**Action panel**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/flags.md#f87a71e8-eb76-48e8-bd2b-f986446e6642). ![Item 6](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_42d739322d308874b3d1cde1ac1c79fb1cd1e1b60aa746289570700cd6b2b345/06.png?cb=e45c3711194c930a28cb1ba380014ade) **Playhead:** As playback commences, the playhead (right edge of the blue-highlighted area) moves to the right, indicating the current song location. The playhead's time position is displayed above the Inspector area ( ![Item 9](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ac49ba16d625df4bc01b79a22381db9bbe67548b091417ff03c46af0a47a62f1/09.png?cb=b204e54eb95e4f32dee046a782f6c5cd) ). ![Item 7](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_4d35c102057b1225fcb1f06d855665d653b35c508b1feaf08ee3b5abcad30279/07.png?cb=4985f689673b884595ec1665290f3fb2) **Track Field:** This main field is where the song's audio track waveforms and all flags are displayed. The ruler across the top displays bars and beats. * Tap a specific location within the flag field to jump the playhead to that time. Swipe left or right to scroll the flag field. Pinch the flag field horizontally to zoom the timeline in and out. * Audio track waveforms appear with track names to their left. The height of your added tracks automatically resizes to fill the field's vertical space. ![Item 8](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_15e650bdbb20f659fbb3300a7e820115977ba478c111299fb407e92f36440e81/08.png?cb=f9f3b6850564a1dba571fe782b957df5) **Add Flag Button:** Tap the **Add Flag** button ![The Add Flag button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a385cc55f7574c6ff46f071966a72cbbe4c39e0a81454e8dc8d261c9e3b9f0c6/AddFlagButton.png?cb=bf4d18f3260a6e981a9036f257fc26d9) to add a flag---See [**Adding a Flag**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/flags.md#adding-flag) below. ![Item 9](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ac49ba16d625df4bc01b79a22381db9bbe67548b091417ff03c46af0a47a62f1/09.png?cb=b204e54eb95e4f32dee046a782f6c5cd) **Playhead Location:** Displays the playhead's ( ![Item 6](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_42d739322d308874b3d1cde1ac1c79fb1cd1e1b60aa746289570700cd6b2b345/06.png?cb=e45c3711194c930a28cb1ba380014ade) ) time position in Bars, Beats, and Ticks. * Tap anywhere in the Playhead Location area to display the **Transport Panel**. ![10.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_96e2984c59a6b0e7807543a6ff9f4f16cedb96b65a93e47067bf263af0b6be7e/10.png?cb=d700093662e1b8496789e095d710ab9e) **Flag Name:** The currently selected flag's icon and name appear here. If the current flag type can be renamed, a "pencil" icon ![FlagNameEditIcon.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_063eed6c56a55f067e0e1ebc78cfe1d507810fec3343d5b2cf49d7bc76460a21/FlagNameEditIcon.png?cb=c78c49df943ebef7a984159688154495) appears to its right; tap to edit the flag's name. **Tip:** For Marker type flags, when renamed, the Marker's custom name is also displayed on the Song screen's ruler for reference, as shown in image above for all Markers. ![11.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_267bd34dbb8ccd9ce67285e443e622278f75cdab90ad24feeb3c02c8e0927d2c/11.png?cb=66bdb69bb0f2388d29f46f747e5ccc0e) **Flag Parameters:** The current flag's parameters appear in the inspector. Knobs 1 \~ 3 adjust the selected flag's time position. ## Adding a Flag 1. Tap the **Add Flag** button ![The Add Flag button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a385cc55f7574c6ff46f071966a72cbbe4c39e0a81454e8dc8d261c9e3b9f0c6/AddFlagButton.png?cb=bf4d18f3260a6e981a9036f257fc26d9) ; flag buttons appear along the bottom of the screen (below). Press ![Left arrow page button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1db33900128b49dd495da048cd15d0c6ab208fc648e8af62e712cbafd903cd8a/Button_PageL.png?cb=d6adfb7cd26a057468c69889f5646acc) **Page Left** / ![Right arrow page button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5f2063fddb6d003f6eb51d415ca4367a58b7eb5425f6244fdb8cadd561e48ab9/Button_PageR.png?cb=7d615d04b1444a5ad58cc9eca5789cd9) **Page right** to view more flag buttons. ![Inspector_FlagCategoryButtons.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ec054c3c8c21b6ce51176862172d750c86b2929928292e2b6fd27ca11de6aa50/Inspector_FlagCategoryButtons.png?cb=efab6ecc5ccf58a49be72d44b2a1ee42) Song \> Add Flag 2. Tap and drag the desired flag button up to the flag field at the location you want it to occur; its parameters appear in the inspector (below). Alternatively, tap the flag button to insert it at the current location. ![Inspector Marker Selected.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8111fe5991ba7bef0024a48d2193e751c2ae51bf35ff56123e30c18253104a13/Inspector%20Marker%20Selected.png?cb=b80e9bbc058a2083b3b7f46605ace559) Song \> Marker flag * Adding a Cycle flag actually creates two flags---Cycle Start and Cycle End---with a blue bar connecting them. * Tap ![Jump to flag button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d8fc26b357c172d35c9e85905cbcc9838116b9a3b179c86335756ab10ee4adf1/Jump%20to%20flag%20button.png?cb=c827c4fd7ca52e48e73c8a30953bedb2) to immediately move the Playhead's position to the selected flag. * Tap on the Playhead location area (above the flag name) to display the Transport Panel---see [**Performing Songs**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/performing-songs.md) for transport functions. ## Selecting Flags 1. From Song View, turn the Lower Knob to scroll through all available flags. Alternatively, tap the top of any flagpole in the ruler area. 2. To scroll through all flags *of the same type*, press and turn the Lower Knob. For example, if a marker flag is currently selected, pressing and turning the Lower Knob scrolls through all Marker flags, skipping over any other flags. ### Flag Action Panel Tap on a selected flag's icon in the ruler area to open its Action Panel. Depending on the selected flag type, not all Action commands will be available. **Note:** Start and End flags do not have an Action Panel; these flag types cannot be renamed, duplicated, or cleared. ![Flag Action Panel.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f911bb73bf5c6d9bbfc8d35d9b6272fbe3a00b125e9f9ef96c9f93daab1837be/Flag%20Action%20Panel.png?cb=516feff46bd8ea98275a6bd745ed73d4) The Flag Action Panel | **Flag Action** | **Description** | |---------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Test Flag** | Engages the selected flag so that you can check if your parameter settings are performing the desired function. | | **Rename Flag** | Lets you name the flag. For example, "Verse 2" is much more meaningful than "Marker 3" and "Strymon Cloud" is more meaningful than "MIDI 7." | | **Duplicate Flag** | Creates a copy of the selected flag, including all its parameter settings, in the same time location. | | **Clear Flag** | Clears the selected flag from the song. | | **Clear All Flags** | Clears all flags from the current song. (Start and End flags cannot be cleared.) | ### Moving a Flag 1. Select a flag and turn knobs 1-3 to move its location. Alternatively, tap the flag icon in the time ruler and drag it left or right. | **Parameter** | **Description** | |---------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Bar** | Sets the flag's bar location. | | **Beat** | Sets the flag's beat location. | | **Tick** | Sets the flag's tick location with a resolution of 240 ticks per beat. Press the knob to cycle quarter divisions of a beat---001, 061, 121, and 181 ticks. | ## Flag Types Initially, a new "empty" song already includes a **Start** and **End** type flag. The Start and End flag types are not available from the Add Flag button's list of flag types. To follow are descriptions of the flag types available and their parameters. ### ![StartFlag.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_fd76630e1882dcc24d17764063e61ad5a21b7ce43cb859fedbef6ab7ebba111b/StartFlag.png?cb=14692934c497fdb52cf876976758d7fe) Start Flag Every song has one Start flag at the very beginning that determines the song's initial time signature and tempo. The Start flag also has the ability to recall a specific preset and snapshot. **Tip:**Time flags can be added elsewhere in your song for any tempo or time signature changes. Click to show Start Flag settings... | **Parameter** | **Description** | |-------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **BPM \[Whole\]** | Sets the song's initial tempo with .01 BPM resolution. | | **BPM \[Hundredths\]** | Sets the song's initial tempo with .01 BPM resolution. | | **Time Signature \[Top\]** | Sets the song's initial time signature. | | **Time Signature \[Bottom\]** | Sets the song's initial time signature. | | ***Count In*** | *This parameter is not currently functional. To be added in a future firmware update.* | | **Song Recalls Preset** | Determines whether selecting a song automatically recalls the preset and/or snapshot as selected with the following parameters. **Note:** A preset or snapshot is only recalled when playing the song if it's not already the current preset or snapshot. | | **Setlist** | Selects the preset and snapshot to be loaded when the **Song Recalls Preset** switch is **on** . When set to**\[Current\]**, no preset or snapshot is loaded. | | **Preset** | Selects the preset and snapshot to be loaded when the **Song Recalls Preset** switch is **on** . When set to**\[Current\]**, no preset or snapshot is loaded. | | **Snapshot** | Selects the preset and snapshot to be loaded when the **Song Recalls Preset** switch is **on** . When set to**\[Current\]**, no preset or snapshot is loaded. | ### ![EndFlag.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_fab69faea001143b250c7d06ee2418347ba4339cbb0c453b47a4d8bf8a147a66/EndFlag.png?cb=943398d07acd3f6df69a9d19299ede1d) End Flag Every song has one End flag at the very end that determines the song's end location, fade out length (if any), and playback behavior for when the song ends. Moving its location trims the end time of the song. Click to show End Flag settings... | **Parameter** | **Description** | |--------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Fade Out** | Determines whether a volume fade out is applied to all audio tracks. | | **Fade Length** | (Grayed out if **Fade Out** is set to **off**.) Sets the fade out duration. The fade out area appears as a triangular shading on the track field. | | **End of Song** | Determines the behavior when the playhead reaches the End flag. An indicator icon appears on the End flag for the selected action: * ![PuaseAtEnd.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_6c11a0a9c2973014f35069a49d5dc944c7a995204599185289d4a8a06b2e8b0d/PuaseAtEnd.png?cb=65779898c166d77ec1960574cf4a830d) **Pause (default):** The song pauses at the end and does nothing, maintaining the current preset or snapshot. Pressing Play then loads the next song's assigned preset/snapshot or any other flags at the very beginning of the timeline (if any) and immediately starts song playback. * ![PlayNext.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_88d0f33483517309a76df6c3cad0ed8de0ea02cb1d01fc87d5a973cb8f7e9c4c/PlayNext.png?cb=21f7ab6355ee627e4eabc83db70fe2e4) **Play Next:** The next song (with any assigned preset/snapshot) starts automatically; if the last song is set to "Play Next," the playlist repeats, and Song 1 plays. * ![CueNext_Pause.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_bf2fdb9f03842d53216a265c8df7c1ccd6afa42b9699f47bdbbf09cced3f85cd/CueNext_Pause.png?cb=324745b94a6c5df5c1a60dba1a20aba3) **Cue Next:** Similar to Pause at End, except it preloads the next song's preset/snapshot or any other flags at the very beginning of the timeline (if any) and waits for a play command to start playback. If the last song is set to "Cue Next," the playlist repeats, and Song 1 is cued, awaiting a Play command. * ![RepeatSong.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5e7e887a9b2ed0660fdca575acb1d302dd68a156f63bc0d12cf2b37ecb540c5b/RepeatSong.png?cb=af51993c88b10a0aa5e4e2f7c1e175d1) **Repeat:** The current song automatically restarts from the beginning. * ![CueSame_Pause.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_25ef10991ab84345f0c99aee53d2adaf65fa76a2076e1a8d9417952137b2e622/CueSame_Pause.png?cb=b579337213f778b9117d0a7b66eeb3c6) **Cue Same:** Returns to the beginning of the current song and preloads its initial preset/snapshot or any other flags at the beginning of the timeline (if any), but waits for a Play command to start playback. **Note:** The End flag's play and preset/snapshot recall behaviors are superseded by the current **Global Settings \> Songs \> Select Song** and **Song Play** settings. Please review these [**Global Settings**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#globals-songs) descriptions and select the desired behaviors. | | **Gap Before Next Song** | (Grayed out if **End of Song** is set to **Pause** .) When **on** , places a variable, silent gap (determined by **Gap Length**) between the end of the current song and the beginning of the next song. | | **Gap Length** | (Grayed out if **Gap** is set to **off**.) Sets the duration of the gap. | ### ![Marker Flag Type.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_02f16db8dad4e80d30689438a95389de0024e211eb5a7d12f450b96a51f71a31/Marker%20Flag%20Type.png?cb=5f25961a55234ea2d89ec27f424141b1) Marker Flag Markers are used to jump to various locations in a song and for rearranging your song on the fly during performance. The flag top on the Song screen displays a small yellow pause icon when its Pause at Marker is set to "On." As with Start flags, Marker flags can also recall a specific preset and snapshot. **Tip:** If you rename a Marker flag (tap on the pencil icon ![Marker Rename Button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f025be7f9d26465d2a6d152b8826ee7e5bdbe6dc7f997b7b4dba3af7f185da13/Marker%20Rename%20Button.png?cb=a6db2d9f1411736b8a749acb59147336) at right of the selected Marker's name in the Inspector), the custom name also appears on the Song screen's ruler ![Marker Name - Ruler.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5eaa9445bba8e739dd0c5055b8202ce83fadc5f5ed0509744abc6c621c13fb95/Marker%20Name%20-%20Ruler.png?cb=868180f854d0d48e008a041c93968fcb) . This can help you more easily indicate your song parts (Verse, Chorus, Feedback Solo, etc.). Click to show Marker Flag settings... | **Parameter** | **Description** | |------------------------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Count In** | This feature is not currently functional. It will be implemented in an upcoming firmware update. | | **Pause at Marker** | When set to **On** , playback pauses at the marker's location. When **On** , a pause icon indicator appears on the marker ![Pause Icon Marker.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_bef92ea8c9ec0a66ba9cbf3832c1042f284e6466f129743a8dc06e40a5d3b290/Pause%20Icon%20Marker.png?cb=cc962aa0c50b8295a6e2f78089435002) . | | **Cycle Marker** | Determines whether the playback cycles between the selected marker and the next marker. (Note that there must be an additional marker flag at a later time position within the song for a cycle region to be created.) Tap the transport Cycle button ![Cycle label indicating In and Out points are set](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9d4dc025e66a6748d4eba038eca7fa2ff9df9bf1b20fd41f902258fff82b5574/Cycle_InAndOutSet.png?cb=16cef33f4058ec5751c3454726b45d86) or Transport Mode FS4 while playback is within the cycle region to engage/disengage cycled playback. **Tip:** You can alternatively add a dedicated **Cycle flag** to create a cycled region---see the following flag type. | | **Skip Marker** | When set to **On** , playback skips to either the song's next Marker flag (assuming its Skip Marker parameter is set as **Off**) or to the End flag if no later Marker flag exists. You'll see the audio content to the right of the Marker slightly dimmed, indicating it will be skipped during playback. | | **Recalls Preset At Marker** | Determines whether reaching a marker automatically recalls a preset and/or snapshot. Set to **On**, then use the next 3 parameters to choose the preset/snapshot to be loaded. | | **Setlist** | Sets the desired Stadium Setlist, Preset, and Snapshot to be recalled. Turning **Recall Preset at Marker** automatically fills Knobs 6-8 with **\[Current\]** for the selected setlist, preset, and snapshot. If every marker's Recall Preset at Marker is enabled and set to the same preset, the preset is never reloaded. If only **Snapshot** is changed, only the snapshot of the current preset is recalled. | | **Preset** | Sets the desired Stadium Setlist, Preset, and Snapshot to be recalled. Turning **Recall Preset at Marker** automatically fills Knobs 6-8 with **\[Current\]** for the selected setlist, preset, and snapshot. If every marker's Recall Preset at Marker is enabled and set to the same preset, the preset is never reloaded. If only **Snapshot** is changed, only the snapshot of the current preset is recalled. | | **Snapshot** | Sets the desired Stadium Setlist, Preset, and Snapshot to be recalled. Turning **Recall Preset at Marker** automatically fills Knobs 6-8 with **\[Current\]** for the selected setlist, preset, and snapshot. If every marker's Recall Preset at Marker is enabled and set to the same preset, the preset is never reloaded. If only **Snapshot** is changed, only the snapshot of the current preset is recalled. | ### ![Cycle Flag Type.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_29bc99aa7b1c099c2ae12651c1b0f26e530cf7e7d5ef16cbad87ca017c813506/Cycle%20Flag%20Type.png?cb=6ec3e3ce58afd2a9078f6e25b68a0165) Cycle Flag Cycle flags repeat a section of the song for repeated jamming. Cycle Start and End points can also be entered in real time by pressing Transport mode's Cycle footswitch (FS4). By default, the Cycle End flag is added 8 bars later than the Cycle Start flag. You can tap on the Cycle In or Out flag in the ruler area to select it and use Knobs 1, 2, and 3, or drag the flag, to adjust its time position. **Note** : To **Clear** a Cycle flag completely from the song, tap and hold the on-screen Transport Panel's **Cycle** button for 2 seconds, until it flashes. Or, click at the top of either the Cycle In or Out flag in the ruler area and select **Clear Flag** from the action menu. Click to show Cycle Flag settings... | **Parameter** | **Description** | |---------------------|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Cycle Count** | When set to **Infinite**, the Cycle loops forever, until disabled by pressing the Cycle button or Transport \> Cycle footswitch. When set to a number, the Cycle loops for that number of times, after which playback continues as normal. | | **Retrigger Flags** | When set to **On** , any flags between the Cycle In and Cycle Out flags are retriggered during every cycle. When **Off**, any flags between the Cycle Start \& End markers are triggered only during the first play cycle and ignored every subsequent cycle. | ### ![Snap-Preset Flag Type.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_676939585010b43cae5533121bafb166319955c1f65d693e743f4419fc7fd2c5/Snap-Preset%20Flag%20Type.png?cb=7ce2177ab9375e9c59ea1c81c63dcc8b) Preset/Snap Flag Preset/Snap flags are used to automatically switch presets and/or snapshots during a song. Note that Start flags and Markers can also recall presets and/or snapshots, so these may be unnecessary. Click to show Preset/Snap Flag settings... | **Parameter** | **Description** | |---------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Setlist** | Sets the desired Stadium Setlist, Preset, and Snapshot to be recalled. The default **\[Current\]** option performs no action (the current preset or snapshot is not reloaded). If only **Snapshot** is changed from the default, the snapshot of the current preset is recalled. | | **Preset** | Sets the desired Stadium Setlist, Preset, and Snapshot to be recalled. The default **\[Current\]** option performs no action (the current preset or snapshot is not reloaded). If only **Snapshot** is changed from the default, the snapshot of the current preset is recalled. | | **Snapshot** | Sets the desired Stadium Setlist, Preset, and Snapshot to be recalled. The default **\[Current\]** option performs no action (the current preset or snapshot is not reloaded). If only **Snapshot** is changed from the default, the snapshot of the current preset is recalled. | ### ![Looper Flag Type.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5d55224d6e762c46a8fe300b60150183e0c5cb719db88db39f5390bf735e3101/Looper%20Flag%20Type.png?cb=fb4886550925cb52cc65624ae4340d55) Looper Flag Looper flags are used to automate looper functions within Helix Stadium itself. For example, you could place a Looper \> Record flag at the beginning of the first chorus, a Looper \> Stop flag at the end of the chorus, and a Looper \> Play flag at the beginning of the second chorus. Playing the song will automate these functions, so you could harmonize with what you played in the first chorus during the second chorus, without pressing a single footswitch. Click to show Looper Flag settings... | **Parameter** | **Description** | |---------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Function** | Selects the function to be triggered for the Looper block within the current preset. Adding a Deluxe Looper type block within the current preset is recommended. | ### ![Utility Flag Type.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e6675b53a3942b96ee46c160be79862749cd47b4c231fe5aa4bf549186457d58/Utility%20Flag%20Type.png?cb=15bfd1a210cf485e5cd8893bf9e0edd5) Utility Flag Utility flags represent a catch-all for additional functions that allow Helix Stadium to control itself, including turning the click on and off, engaging and exiting the tuner or XY Controller screens, or starting and stopping the stopwatch. **Tip:** Typically, you'll want to add Utility flags in pairs. For example, if you add a Utility flag for **Tuner On** , add another Utility flag for **Tuner Off** at the desired later time location in your song, so that it exits from the Tuner back to the Song screen. Click to show Utility Flag settings... | **Parameter** | **Description** | |---------------|--------------------------------------------| | **Function** | Sets the utility function to be triggered. | ### ![ExtAmp Flag Type.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f5e9fe0cbd895e5b63fd560655943772e5c1db7b285bace9859bd8a07a325596/ExtAmp%20Flag%20Type.png?cb=c1cb4d2eec3d781df755003cf3cf18a1) Ext Amp Flag Ext Amp flags are used to automatically switch external amps' channels and/or reverb. Same as Ext Amp commands, except they happen automatically. **Note:** Global Settings \> Switches/Pedals \> Control A (Tip), Control B (Ring), Control C (Tip) ![Helix Stadium XL only](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_36b301551900d6b8110fc5ef01e93dc428a6851e07949f447b6b3e8c7105192a/a707f221-b060-48c7-9e7b-dac0e2dac117?cb=99e9156543b5c21c77897f196c95b0e8) , and/or Control D (Ring) ![Helix Stadium XL only](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_36b301551900d6b8110fc5ef01e93dc428a6851e07949f447b6b3e8c7105192a/a707f221-b060-48c7-9e7b-dac0e2dac117?cb=99e9156543b5c21c77897f196c95b0e8) must be set to Ext Amp for Ext Amp flags to work. **Important!** Send Ext Amp commands utilize "short-to-sleeve" footswitch inputs to control channel, reverb, and/or tremolo, and have been tested with many common amplifiers. Unfortunately, this does not guarantee compatibility with all products. Depending on the channel switching jack's circuitry, the Ext Amp function may not operate as expected. Connecting to any other input could cause permanent damage to both your amp and Helix Stadium device. If you're unsure whether your amp has short-to-sleeve inputs, please contact the manufacturer. Click to show Ext Amp Flag settings... | **Parameter** | **Description** | |---------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Select** | Selects the Stadium **Control** jack to which the Ext Amp switch command is routed. | | **State** | Selects the Open or Closed switch state message to send. | ### ![MIDI Flag Type.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e4cb4ef04feffddc4d2bf61779d3d0cf50c9269cc4eb475edc42d5a51222cba5/MIDI%20Flag%20Type.png?cb=d2dcdf272f814a5f35b1c94f67be06d5) MIDI Flag Transmits a MIDI message from both MIDI DIN and USB. Currently supports Bank/Program, CC, and MMC messages. Can be used to recall presets and control parameters in your external stompboxes, synths, keyboards, or with a MIDI-to-DMX converter, even lighting. **Note:** [**Global Settings \> MIDI \>**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md) **MIDI Over USB C** must be set to "On" (the default), and the **Send MIDI PC** set to the desired port (MIDI Out, USB, or both) for Stadium to send MIDI PC messages. Click to show the MIDI Flag Settings... | **Type** | **Parameter** | **Description** | |---------------|---------------------|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Bank/Prog** | **MIDI Channel** | Sets the MIDI Channel on which the Bank/Prog message is sent. | | **Bank/Prog** | **Bank MSB (CC00)** | Sets the Bank "Most Significant Bit" value. If the device you want to control doesn't respond to MSB, leave this off. | | **Bank/Prog** | **Bank LSB (CC32)** | Sets the Bank "Least Significant Bit" value. If the device you want to control doesn't respond to LSB, leave this off. | | **Bank/Prog** | **Program Change** | Sets the Program Change number. | | **CC** | **MIDI Channel** | Sets the MIDI Channel on which the CC message is sent. | | **CC** | **CC#** | Sets the Control Change (also commonly called "Continuous Controller") number. | | **CC** | **Value** | Sets the Control Change value. | | **Note** | **MIDI Channel** | Sets the MIDI Channel on which the Note message is sent. **A Note On message is sent, using your configured Note (C -1 to G 9), followed by a Note Off. The duration of time between the Note On and Note Off messages is determined by your Length values.** | | | **Note** | Sets the Note value (from C -1 to G 9). | | | **Velocity** | Sets the velocity of the Note. | | | **Length (Bars)** | Determine the time interval between the Note On message and the subsequent Note Off message (default is 10 Ticks). | | | **Length (Beats)** | Determine the time interval between the Note On message and the subsequent Note Off message (default is 10 Ticks). | | | **Length (Ticks)** | Determine the time interval between the Note On message and the subsequent Note Off message (default is 10 Ticks). | | **MMC** | **Message** | Sets MIDI Machine Control message type. | ### ![Hotkey Flag Type.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_059191133f3bc9af707ed7d3d6849dbe6ee4b12122a30949d9739580ecd0c853/Hotkey%20Flag%20Type.png?cb=5ec14263b2a0cf3db99951ba81ec8aac) Hotkey Flag Hotkey flags transmit a QWERTY HID command (with or without modifiers, such as Shift, Alt, and Command) via USB. Basically the same thing as a Hotkey message on the Command Center page, except it's automatically sent during song playback. Can be used to start/stop a Quicktime video, advance Powerpoint slides, or if you have more time than common sense, type a scathing critique of Line 6 in the YouTube comment section. Click to show the Hotkey Flag Settings... | **Parameter** | **Description** | |----------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Modifier 1** | Determines the modifiers (if any) sent with the hotkey HID message. If your hotkey doesn't have modifiers, set all three to "None." **Mac** = Command, **PC** = Alt; Modifiers are transmitted in order (1-3), followed by the Keystroke | | **Modifier 2** | Determines the modifiers (if any) sent with the hotkey HID message. If your hotkey doesn't have modifiers, set all three to "None." **Mac** = Command, **PC** = Alt; Modifiers are transmitted in order (1-3), followed by the Keystroke | | **Modifier 3** | Determines the modifiers (if any) sent with the hotkey HID message. If your hotkey doesn't have modifiers, set all three to "None." **Mac** = Command, **PC** = Alt; Modifiers are transmitted in order (1-3), followed by the Keystroke | | **Keystroke** | Sets the alpha, numeric, or other computer keyboard key value to be sent. | ### ![Time Flag Type.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_bea78c2c88643a2447d26dbe2a09533f687764fff1a4c1a103ecbc0aae679f92/Time%20Flag%20Type.png?cb=5772942366529723a6970922b56a51cc) Time Flag Each song's [**Start flag**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/flags.md#start-flag) determines the song's initial tempo and time signature, but additional Time flags can be added anytime the song's tempo and/or time signature changes. Click to show the Time Flag Settings... | **Parameter** | **Description** | |-------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **BPM \[Whole\]** | Sets the tempo change at the Time flag's location with .01 BPM resolution. | | **BPM \[Hundredths\]** | Sets the tempo change at the Time flag's location with .01 BPM resolution. | | **Time Signature \[Top\]** | Sets the time signature at the Time flag's location. | | **Time Signature \[Bottom\]** | Sets the time signature at the Time flag's location. | --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Global EQ Please check out the video below for an overview of Helix Stadium's Global EQ. Then consult the sections on this page for additional details. ## Using the Global EQ Ever get to the gig and the venue's backline or acoustics suddenly make all your tones sound too tubby or harsh, or there's this weird ringing frequency that wasn't in your practice space or studio? Or ever plug into a different speaker or amp and realize everything is too dark or bright? Global EQ can help compensate for the wide sonic disparity experienced when switching acoustic environments and/or playback systems, playing along with various groups of instruments, or just when you need to cut through the mix. There are actually *three* Global EQs in Helix Stadium, one each for the 1/4", XLR, and Phones outputs (even if you've linked two---or all three---outputs. See [**Matrix Mixer**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/matrix-mixer.md)). This way, you can EQ the signals sent to your onstage playback system, the Front Of House mixer, and feed to your IEMs (In Ear Monitors) separately. 1. **Tap the Menu icon** ![Header_MenuButton.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_cfaed35b84d4b2b99f910c68368849950c6834fa772194587d16630218483d5e/Header_MenuButton.png?cb=eb95cbe785f6246cdd1a789f6fbfd3eb) **and then Global EQ** ![The Menu - Global EQ button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5bd0f9e01b3fb2913f8636643481a77b0f511c5e745ff0c0a4d5afb938c6973e/GlobalEQ_MenuButton.png?cb=67d9d29cca5bb44ef46734cb93a54aa1) **.** Alternatively, from the [**Matrix Mixer**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/matrix-mixer.md), **tap the Global EQ icon** ![Matrix Mixer's Global EQ button.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8534ed251ae01027cf6dbfd864ab89a5a1418bc137e31a69ba19811434a5472e/MatrixGlobalEQButton.png?cb=a18592508b95b4792bbd5e945ab6e1c0) **in the upper right corner**. The Global EQ screen appears: ![Stadium_GlobalEQ.jpg](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_06c6062edfa241f34ab49aa4c43e8853578c7c123bcd0ba9af5b8d656f61f6f6/Stadium_GlobalEQ.jpg?cb=5fcc572232f8ab8551b18de36c257502) Global EQ 2. **Press the desired output button (1/4"** ![Quarter Inch Out button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_49940c5baac891e6b390d0792329479b28342c37023384ad123212b0a8f7a2db/Button_QtrInchOut.png?cb=9feda74ee7ac3672471d451409cb1ce8) **, XLR** ![XLR Out button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_703553162f53ec4058d48d4976d1d666d698935be65d7834788f597ffdae5879/Button_XLROut.png?cb=9d3dbfcfdea4a86c87ccc141b3706631) **, or Phones** ![Headphones Out button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e7d84be3984a9a0886162a0d3b7b13408ac9ba4bcd7a48e6983054ddd31927ad/Button_Phones.png?cb=6acd729f16d66341809575cab1af7485) **) to choose the output to which you want to apply Global EQ.** Alternatively, **press the** ![Page Left button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9d83594a83760886958daef24d18105ac95f1d6dab8e559b7dd7a00f3461291f/Button_PageL.png?cb=d6adfb7cd26a057468c69889f5646acc) **or** ![Page right button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_6bcb3859ed5016d4fb279447d581ee91b2c76e1e934e965391fb52b2baca9c99/Button_PageR.png?cb=7d615d04b1444a5ad58cc9eca5789cd9) **button to change outputs.** 3. **Tap the bypass icon** ![GlobalEQ_Bypass.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_db7045697ba111a7afa16f357c20c01ffc813a9c25a689db0c778ac53e89e9ad/GlobalEQ_Bypass.png?cb=9de87b62a9afe58b6ddf3c2cb6a94779) **to enable Global EQ for the selected output.** 4. **Tap a circular EQ band node, then drag it up or down to change gain and left or right to change its frequency.** Alternatively, **turn Knob 1 (Band) to select the desired EQ band**; its parameters appear to the right. * To copy one output's Global EQ to another, from the source output, **tap Copy EQ. Select the destination output and tap Paste EQ.** * To reset the output's Global EQ, **tap Reset EQ.** Note that Low Cut and High Cut bands are still active, so if you want no Global EQ at all, **tap the bypass icon** ![GlobalEQ_Bypass.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_db7045697ba111a7afa16f357c20c01ffc813a9c25a689db0c778ac53e89e9ad/GlobalEQ_Bypass.png?cb=9de87b62a9afe58b6ddf3c2cb6a94779) **to disable it.** Click to show Global EQ parameters... ### Low Cut and High Cut | **Parameter** | **Description** | |---------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Enable** | Turns the filter on and off. | | **Frequency** | Adjusts the frequency of the filter. Increasing the Low Cut filter frequency may be useful in removing undesirable low end rumble. Decreasing the High Cut filter frequency may be helpful in eliminating top end harshness. | | **Slope** | Adjusts the slope of the filter. Lower values provide a gentler, less dramatic reduction of frequencies below the cutoff (for the Low Cut) or above the cutoff (for the High Cut), and higher values provide a steeper, more aggressive reduction. | #### Low and High Shelf | **Parameter** | **Description** | |---------------|------------------------------------------------------| | **Enable** | Turns the individual EQ shelf on and off. | | **Frequency** | Adjusts the frequency of the Low or High Shelf band. | | **Gain** | Adjusts the amount of level boost or cut. | #### Low, Mid, and High Band | **Parameter** | **Description** | |---------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Enable** | Turns the individual EQ band on and off. | | **Frequency** | Adjusts the center frequency of the EQ band. | | **Gain** | Adjusts the amount of level cut or boost. | | **Q** | Adjusts the width of the frequency range around the selected center frequency that is affected by the Gain. Use low Q values to more surgically cut or boost specific narrow frequencies. Use high Q values to cut or boost a broader range of frequencies. | **Tips for Using Global EQ** * As a general rule, try reducing Gain for unwanted frequencies rather than heavily boosting the desired frequencies. * Use the "sweep and cut" method: * Boost a band significantly while listening to your instrument tone or playback * Sweep the band horizontally across frequencies until you hear the offending frequency accentuated. * As you identify the undesirable frequencies, reduce the Gain on the band(s). * Use a narrower Q (lower Q values) for Gain reductions and a wider Q (higher Q values) for Gain boosts. * Small Gain adjustments (1--3 dB) are often enough. Extreme EQ settings can cause unnatural sound, hiss, and phase issues. * Use the Level parameter (Knob 8) once you've made your individual band Gain adjustments to optimize the final output level. 🎧 **Know Your Frequencies:** * **Sub-bass (20--60Hz):** Adds depth, but too much can cause muddiness and rumble. * **Bass (60--250Hz):** Defines warmth and punch; avoid excessive boosts. * **Low mids (250Hz--500Hz):** Can cause muddiness; cut if necessary. * **Mids (500Hz--2kHz):** Affects the presence and body of instruments/voices. * **Upper mids (2kHz--4kHz):** Impacts clarity and attack (especially on guitar tones); be cautious of harshness. * **Highs (4kHz--10kHz):** Brings brightness and detail but can add sibilance. * **Air (10kHz+):** Adds shimmer and openness but can introduce hiss. --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Global Settings The Global Settings menu contains additional parameters that apply to all presets and songs, such as input and output levels, footswitch behavior, display brightness, etc. 1. **Tap the Menu icon** ![Header_MenuButton.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_258fc07c3a3b049a4f41f230502019cc45ec51e981641c73470e4f78502ad85b/Header_MenuButton.png?cb=eb95cbe785f6246cdd1a789f6fbfd3eb) **and then Global Settings** ![The main menu - Global Settings selector](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b025535ba2aa637692a405154002e0ac07f3ab74dd9dcd9c481bef1e0606cbbc/Menu_GlobalSettings.png?cb=782dcba2ab4160501e4bb34d15bf0de3) **.** The Global Settings screen appears (below). 2. **Tap the desired submenu icon**; its parameters appear in the inspector. ![Globals_InsOuts.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e73f045a09fce56ab71e631ee5143027c2c345141d30c0ddc151dda3ac985626/Globals_InsOuts.png?cb=c73231565a7a646919a138d43293f407) Global Settings 3. To view additional pages, **press** ![Left arrow page button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a2456d02e5b6298294b84a258c9a8f4a00d5271131f38eff1b2ac746bc48b421/Button_PageL.png?cb=d6adfb7cd26a057468c69889f5646acc) **or** ![Right arrow page button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b7ef06d143848f4456f73866a1cfdd0d65042c17c6ad6272acff46827628cdfb/Button_PageR.png?cb=7d615d04b1444a5ad58cc9eca5789cd9) **or swipe the parameters left or right.** 4. Not sure what a global setting does? **Tap the setting to open the Parameter Panel**, which provides a description: ![Global Settings Edit Screen.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_0fcc30ad8f9335b9c614c77e9a0e054dce3c26fcbd288b1ce46184ad397cf4bb/Global%20Settings%20Edit%20Screen.png?cb=012e2069469883a8e957fd182f844456) Global Settings \> Parameter Panel ## ![Global Ins-Outs Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f8ce85fcc19803c0c2d39e59d2fcea9ac305707b1e5356ba83d2b3d4eb8f3b30/Global%20Ins-Outs%20Button.png?cb=ed51249e964f2e7c3a2f5cfbc8f81527) Global Settings \> Ins/Outs Click to show/hide Global Settings \> Ins/Outs settings... | **Parameter** | **Description** | |--------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Inst \[X\] Pad** | Sets the Instrument input level. * **No Offset:** Choose this if you want to set the Pad on/off setting per preset, from the Input \> Instrument \> Pad parameter. * **Off/Inst:** The input is set to Instrument level. * **On/Line:** The input is set to Line level. If your guitar or bass has active or high-output pickups, you may want to choose **On/Line** to avoid input clipping. Otherwise, just use what sounds best. | | **Mic In Phantom** | When set to On, 48V phantom power is provided via the XLR Mic In jack for studio condenser microphones. ***IMPORTANT!*** *Never plug or unplug a mic or XLR cable while phantom power is On.* Leave this setting **Off** unless you're sure your connected mic requires phantom power. Please refer to your microphone manufacturer's documentation. | | **Mic In Gain** | Controls the preamp gain for the XLR Mic input. Note that the Mic's input signal can be further adjusted up or down from the Input \> Mic block's Trim parameter. | | **1/4" Out Level** | Choose **Instrument** when connecting the 1/4" outputs to stompboxes or the front of guitar or bass amps. Choose **Line** when connecting to studio monitors or the line inputs on mixers. | | **XLR Out Level** | Choose **Mic** when connecting the XLR outputs to the XLR mic inputs on mixers. Choose **Line** when connecting to mixers, studio monitors, or audio interfaces. | | **XLR Ground Lift** | When **On** , lifts the ground pin on the XLR outputs. This *may* help in reducing ground loops in certain situations. | | **FX Loop \[X\] Level** | Choose **Instrument** when using a Send/Return pair as an FX loop for external stomp boxes. Choose **Line** when connecting external rack processors, keyboards, drum machines, mixers, or other line level gear. Note that FX Loop levels can be further adjusted via an FX Loop block's Send and Return parameters. (Send and Return 3 and 4 are available on Stadium XL ![The Stadium XL Only icon](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_39f6df9e6b6060067219ef4597308afa81f5a26e6c0d15fc8c8c923a1d2b9672/Icon_XL.png?cb=a00c7dd3c9cc40c40e4320fa9670aa23) only.) | | **Return \[X/X\] Type** | Determines the behavior of the Return 1 and 2 (Return 3 and 4 on Stadium XL ![The Stadium XL Only icon](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_39f6df9e6b6060067219ef4597308afa81f5a26e6c0d15fc8c8c923a1d2b9672/Icon_XL.png?cb=a00c7dd3c9cc40c40e4320fa9670aa23) ) jacks: * **Return 1/2 (Return 3/4 on Stadium XL** ![The Stadium XL Only icon](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_39f6df9e6b6060067219ef4597308afa81f5a26e6c0d15fc8c8c923a1d2b9672/Icon_XL.png?cb=a00c7dd3c9cc40c40e4320fa9670aa23) **):** The jacks are used for Return and FX Loop blocks. In this case, the Aux In channel on the [**Matrix Mixer**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/matrix-mixer.md) is grayed out and unavailable. * **Aux In:** The Return 1/2 (Return 3/4 on Stadium XL ![The Stadium XL Only icon](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_39f6df9e6b6060067219ef4597308afa81f5a26e6c0d15fc8c8c923a1d2b9672/Icon_XL.png?cb=a00c7dd3c9cc40c40e4320fa9670aa23) ) jacks act as an always-on stereo Aux input (no processing) for monitoring the FOH or jamming along with mixers, media players, etc. In this case, the Aux In channel on the Matrix Mixer is active, but the equivalent FX Loop and Return blocks will be unavailable. | | **Re-amp Src Out USB 7** | Determines which two physical inputs are sent dry (unprocessed) to your DAW software. USB Out 7 and 8 are dedicated to recording a DI signal, which can then be used with plug-ins or for Re-amping back through Helix Stadium. | | **Re-amp Src Out USB 8** | Determines which two physical inputs are sent dry (unprocessed) to your DAW software. USB Out 7 and 8 are dedicated to recording a DI signal, which can then be used with plug-ins or for Re-amping back through Helix Stadium. | | **USB Out 1/2** | Determines where the USB Out 1/2 signal is sourced from: * **Direct Out:** USB Out 1/2 appears as a routable output destination from the Home \> Edit screen and appears in the Output list. * **Matrix 1/4":** USB Out 1/2 echoes the Matrix 1/4" layer. USB 1/2 is grayed out and unavailable in the Output list. * **Matrix XLR:** USB Out 1/2 echoes the Matrix XLR layer. USB 1/2 is grayed out and unavailable in the Output list. * **Matrix Phones:** USB Out 1/2 echoes the Matrix Phones layer. USB 1/2 is grayed out and unavailable in the Output list. | | **S/PDIF Out** | Determines where the S/PDIF Out signal is sourced from: * **Direct Out:** S/PDIF appears as a routable output destination from the Home \> Edit screen and appears in the Output list. * **Matrix 1/4":** S/PDIF Out echoes the Matrix 1/4" layer. * **Matrix XLR:** S/PDIF Out echoes the Matrix XLR layer. * **Matrix Phones:** S/PDIF Out echoes the Matrix Phones layer. | | **S/PDIF Out Level** | Sets the S/PDIF output level. For most cases, you can leave this set to 0.0dB. | | **S/PDIF Sample Rate** | Selects the sample rate for the S/PDIF output. When connecting to another S/PDIF device, ensure both units are set to the same sample rate. Note that this setting does not affect USB audio. | ## ![Global Switches-Pedals Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_bcfde0436f858591b8fc79e3039a81459a3e5465bd12d0a8b4cd996ccc9fe2d7/Global%20Switches-Pedals%20Button.png?cb=8b65ac4efed1883868fb432b1934006d) Global Settings \> Switches/Pedals Click to show/hide Global Settings \> Switches/Pedals settings... | **Parameter** | **Description** | |-------------------------------|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Capacitive Touch** | When off, disables *all*touch or touch-hold functions from the footswitches. | | **Stomp Item Selection** | Determines whether touching, pressing, or both touching and pressing a Stomp mode footswitch selects the assigned focused block or jumps to the Bypass/Control Assign or Command Center page. | | **Assign FX to Stomps** | Determines whether or not Helix Stadium automatically assigns a new effect block to the earliest empty Stomp Mode footswitch location. Amp, Preamp, Power Amp, Cab, IR, Split, and Merge blocks are never auto-assigned. | | **FS6 (Mode) 1** | Determines which of the two footswitch modes FS6 toggles between, both of which appear on FS6 (MODE). ***Shortcut:*** While in More Mode, press and hold the desired mode select switch to swap out the current FS6 Mode 1 or Mode 2. | | **FS6 (Mode) 2** | Determines which of the two footswitch modes FS6 toggles between, both of which appear on FS6 (MODE). ***Shortcut:*** While in More Mode, press and hold the desired mode select switch to swap out the current FS6 Mode 1 or Mode 2. | | **Preset Mode Return** | If FS6 (MODE) is set to toggle between Preset and another mode (Stomp A, Stomp B, Snapshot, Combo, or Transport), this parameter determines whether selecting a preset footswitch automatically toggles back to the other mode. This setting is locked to "Manual" if neither **FS6 Mode 1** nor **FS6 Mode 2** is set to "Preset." | | **Snapshot Mode Return** | Determines whether selecting a snapshot switch stays in Snapshot mode ("Manual") or automatically returns to the previous mode ("Automatic"). | | **Snapshot Reselect** | Determines whether pressing the active snapshot footswitch reloads the stored state of the snapshot (**Reload** ) or toggles between it and the previously selected snapshot (**Toggle Prev**). | | **Combo Top Row** | Determines which functions appear on the top row (FS2\~FS5) and bottom row (FS8\~FS11) in Combo Footswitch mode. (Transport switches cannot be assigned to Combo mode.) | | **Combo Bottom Row** | Determines which functions appear on the top row (FS2\~FS5) and bottom row (FS8\~FS11) in Combo Footswitch mode. (Transport switches cannot be assigned to Combo mode.) | | **Up/Down Switches** | Determines whether FS1 and FS7 are Bank, Preset, Snapshot, Song, or Marker Up/Down. Up/Down switches appear in Preset, Snapshot, and Combo Footswitch modes only, and can be manually assigned to Stomp A and Stomp B switches via Command Center \> Preset/Snapshot and Song commands. ***Shortcut:*** Press and hold FS1 and FS7 together to cycle through available Up/Down assignments. | | **Swap Up/Down** | When On, swaps FS1 and FS7 for the Preset, Snapshot, and Combo Footswitch modes, so that Down is on the top and Up is on the bottom. | | **Flip EXP 1/2 Polarity** | Stadium XL ![The Stadium XL Only icon](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_39f6df9e6b6060067219ef4597308afa81f5a26e6c0d15fc8c8c923a1d2b9672/Icon_XL.png?cb=a00c7dd3c9cc40c40e4320fa9670aa23) only. When On, the polarity of the onboard Expression Pedal behavior is reversed (for both EXP 1 and EXP 2 modes of the pedal), so heel and toe values are reversed. | | **EXP \[X\] Pedal Position** | Each EXP Pedal offers its own independent Position option, which determines whether its position is recalled **Per Preset** (the default for each)or applied as **Global** . If you want a Wah or Volume Pedal to maintain its current position when switching presets, set this to **Global**. **Note:** When set to **Global**, the current position persists on preset recall, even if Snapshot Control is currently active for the preset's pedal position parameter. | | **Control A (Tip)** | Determines whether each Control jack (A\~D^\*^) is an expression pedal input, external footswitch input, external drum trigger input, or an external amp remote switch output. (Also see [**Configuring External Controllers**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/external-pedal-and-switch-controller-configuration.md).) | | **Control B (Ring)** | Determines whether each Control jack (A\~D^\*^) is an expression pedal input, external footswitch input, external drum trigger input, or an external amp remote switch output. (Also see [**Configuring External Controllers**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/external-pedal-and-switch-controller-configuration.md).) | | **Control C (Tip)** | Determines whether each Control jack (A\~D^\*^) is an expression pedal input, external footswitch input, external drum trigger input, or an external amp remote switch output. (Also see [**Configuring External Controllers**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/external-pedal-and-switch-controller-configuration.md).) | | **Control D (Ring)** | Determines whether each Control jack (A\~D^\*^) is an expression pedal input, external footswitch input, external drum trigger input, or an external amp remote switch output. (Also see [**Configuring External Controllers**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/external-pedal-and-switch-controller-configuration.md).) | | **Flip A (Tip) Polarity** | When on, reverses the polarity of an expression pedal or footswitch received at the respective jack's tip or ring conductor.^\*^ Reversing the polarity may be necessary for compatibility with certain third-party switch or expression pedals---please see the device manufacturer's documentation. | | **Flip B (Ring) Polarity** | When on, reverses the polarity of an expression pedal or footswitch received at the respective jack's tip or ring conductor.^\*^ Reversing the polarity may be necessary for compatibility with certain third-party switch or expression pedals---please see the device manufacturer's documentation. | | **Flip C (Tip) Polarity** | When on, reverses the polarity of an expression pedal or footswitch received at the respective jack's tip or ring conductor.^\*^ Reversing the polarity may be necessary for compatibility with certain third-party switch or expression pedals---please see the device manufacturer's documentation. | | **Flip D (Ring) Polarity** | When on, reverses the polarity of an expression pedal or footswitch received at the respective jack's tip or ring conductor.^\*^ Reversing the polarity may be necessary for compatibility with certain third-party switch or expression pedals---please see the device manufacturer's documentation. | | **Trigger \[X\] Sensitivity** | Controls the sensitivity of a drum trigger (A\~D^\*^) connected to the respective jack's tip or ring conductor. Grayed out and unavailable unless Control A, B, C, or D is set to **Trigger In**. | | **Trigger \[X\] Threshold** | Determines the minimum force required for a drum trigger connected to the respective jack's tip or ring conductor. Grayed out and unavailable unless Control A, B, C, or D^\*^ is set to **Trigger In**. | ^\*^Control C and D jacks are available on Stadium XL ![The Stadium XL Only icon](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_39f6df9e6b6060067219ef4597308afa81f5a26e6c0d15fc8c8c923a1d2b9672/Icon_XL.png?cb=a00c7dd3c9cc40c40e4320fa9670aa23) only. ## ![Global Displays Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_7a26119f569d06e7e9003ab42f7fb8f562837c68810c60fd9339c3c6770cdd43/Global%20Displays%20Button.png?cb=a2f0cdfed75bce8be114ef988584ecaa) Global Settings \> Displays Click to show/hide Global Settings \> Displays settings... | **Parameter** | **Description** | |-------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Main LCD Brightness** | Controls the brightness of the main display. | | **Scribble Strip Brightness** | Stadium XL ![The Stadium XL Only icon](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_39f6df9e6b6060067219ef4597308afa81f5a26e6c0d15fc8c8c923a1d2b9672/Icon_XL.png?cb=a00c7dd3c9cc40c40e4320fa9670aa23) only. Controls the brightness of the scribble strip displays above the footswitches. Note that 0% is the lowest brightness available; there is no way to turn off the scribble strips completely. | | **Screen Dim Timeout** | If no signal is present at the Instrument or Mic input, and a button press, footswitch press, expression pedal move, or screen tap has not been registered for a certain amount of time, both the main display (and scribble strips ![The Stadium XL Only icon](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_39f6df9e6b6060067219ef4597308afa81f5a26e6c0d15fc8c8c923a1d2b9672/Icon_XL.png?cb=a00c7dd3c9cc40c40e4320fa9670aa23) ) dim to maximize component life. | | **Dim LED Brightness** | Sets the dim state brightness of all footswitch LEDs from 0% (completely unlit) to 50% (half the brightness of the bright lit state. If you prefer blocks to appear dim with dark switches instead of dim switches, set this to 0%. | | **Tap LED** | If the TAP switch's constant tempo indication flashing annoys you, set this to "Off." | | **BPM Display** | Sets the current BPM TAP tempo value to be displayed for the FS12 label (on the FS12 scribble strip for ![The Stadium XL Only icon](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_39f6df9e6b6060067219ef4597308afa81f5a26e6c0d15fc8c8c923a1d2b9672/Icon_XL.png?cb=a00c7dd3c9cc40c40e4320fa9670aa23) Helix Stadium XL, and on the main Display's Footswitch Mode FS12 label for Helix Stadium): When set to **Temporary** (the default), the current BPM value is displayed temporarily whenever the TAP Tempo is edited. When set to **Persistent** , the current BPM value is always displayed for FS12 rather than **TAP** - **Tuner** label. | ## ![Global Preferences Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_37e0a776eecf23be11ab82fc456cbd6c20bb663d8f92882e9cc323f3e97e3db2/Global%20Preferences%20Button.png?cb=d71f2a4eb84333dad06ce76571f59ab5) Global Settings \> Preferences Click to show/hide Global Settings \> Preferences settings... | **Parameter** | **Description** | |-----------------------|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Preset Numbering** | Determines whether preset numbers appear as banks of four (A, B, C, D) or are numbered 0-127 (0-511 within the USER PRESETS folder) or 1-128 (1-512 within the USER PRESETS folder), which may be convenient when recalling presets via incoming MIDI program change messages. | | **Tap Tempo Pitch** | Determines how delay repeats behave when repeatedly pressing the TAP footswitch. "Authentic" respects the natural pitch fluctuations inherent when changing a real delay device's time knob; "Transparent" minimizes these artifacts. | | **Allow Geolocation** | When On, Helix Stadium automatically detects your time zone for Global Settings \> Date/Time to set the correct time. (An active internet connection is required.) This information is not stored or shared with any third party. It is advised to use the correct local time and time zone when using your Line 6 account. | | **Remote Access** | Determines whether Helix Stadium software application clients can connect ("Allow" or "Deny") for remote control/file transfers, or if a security PIN is required to connect to this Helix Stadium device ("Require PIN"). You must set a 4-digit PIN to enable the Require PIN security feature---see the next setting. | | **Set PIN** | Only available if Remote Access is set to "Require PIN." Tap the **Set PIN** button, enter your desired 4-digit PIN in the dialog, and tap ![the Done button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e7520ba58ab79c7c704f01c286ba8a03ee43334fa8a7a14dfaa34f1d1e0b43bb/Done%20button.png?cb=fbd577f4cf8331593b5939c56a69ed2d) . Repeat these steps if you wish to change the PIN. When Remote Access is set to "Require PIN" and you've created your 4-digit PIN, you will be prompted to enter this PIN in the Helix Stadium application when connecting to this device for greater security. See **Helix Stadium Application \>** [**Connect to Helix Stadium**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/helix-stadium-edit-application.md#acf2f97b-d8f8-401d-8fd8-9aa7781edab1). | ## ![Global Songs Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e727dd1a42414b200795f9b47feb3df91894db4d927dad62d2cd5af40d901cdc/Global%20Songs%20Button.png?cb=3ad7bab107765b10694a298f65228759) Global Settings \> Songs Click to show/hide Global Settings \> Songs settings... The Songs category includes Global Settings that apply to Helix Stadium's Song View - Song selection and Marker options. See [**Performing Songs**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/performing-songs.md) for more information. | **Parameter** | **Description** | |----------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Select Song** | Determines what happens when selecting songs by pressing the next or previous song transport buttons. * **Skip:** Instantly skips the current song and loads the next or previous song; if playback is currently active, the next/previous song automatically plays. * **Cue:** (The default setting.) Selects a song *but does not load it* ; when the current song ends, the cued song loads and plays. Alternatively, press PLAY to load and play the cued song instantly. (Also see **Song Play** below for other options when pressing PLAY for the cued song.) | | **Select Marker** | Determines what happens when selecting markers by pressing the next or previous marker transport buttons. * **Skip:** Skips to the selected marker immediately; if playback is currently active, it starts from the next/previous marker. * **Cue:** (The default setting.) Sets the selected previous/next marker as cued *but does not play it*; press PLAY to jump to the cued marker instantly. * **Next Marker:** Causes playback to jump to the selected marker once the current playback reaches the next marker (or song end). This lets you rearrange sections of your song on the fly. | | **Song Play** | Determines the Song and Cue behaviors when engaging Play on a cued song (if **Select Song** is set to "Cue" - see above) or selecting a song (if **Select Song** is set to "Skip"), by: * Pressing the Play button * Stepping on the Transport \> Play switch * Pressing the FS12 (Play) switch * Tapping the Transport Panel play icon * On receiving [**MIDI CC Transport commands**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/midi.md#global-ccs) **Play:** Song playback starts instantly and recalls any preset/snapshot if enabled on the song's Start flag. **Load:** The song is loaded, but ***does not*** start playback or load any preset/snapshot recalled if enabled on the song's Start flag. **Load+Preset:** The song is loaded without playback starting ***and*** recalls any preset/snapshot if enabled on the song's Start flag. | | **Looper Stops with Song** | **Off:** The song transport controls do not affect the Looper state or any Looper flags. **On:** Stopping/Pausing the song or playing a different song (but not cueing a different song!) stops the Looper. **Note:** This parameter only applies to Looper flags added to songs; manual looper control (e.g., pressing looper switches) is not affected by this setting. | ## ![Global Tempo-Click Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e6e064723b57b1a256a47df4f896d74cb1c922001d190f75b823410de5ab5bf9/Global%20Tempo-Click%20Button.png?cb=6264deae47a6ceeb28181d6032d23726) Global Settings \> Tempo/Click **Tip:** Quickly access Tempo/Click settings by briefly touching the TAP/Tuner switch. Click to show/hide Global Settings \> Tempo/Click settings... | **Parameter** | **Description** | |------------------------|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Click** | Turns the Click (metronome) on and off. | | **Play Click** | Determines when the Click (metronome) is heard. * **Song Playbk:** The click (when on) is only heard during song playback. * **Always:** The click (when on) is always heard. | | **Click Sound** | Selects the type of Click sound. | | **Count In Sound\*** | Selects the type of sound used for the Count In, which is heard before the start of a song and/or marker, when enabled for the song. | | **Follow Song Tempo** | Determines if and when time-based blocks (like Delays and Mods) follow the current song's tempo. * **Never:** Time-based blocks completely ignore song tempo. * **Song Playbk:** Time-based blocks only follow the current song tempo while the song is playing. * **Always:** Time-based blocks always follow the current song tempo, even when the song is not playing. | | **Tempo Select** | Determines whether the system tempo is stored and recalled with each snapshot, recalled with each preset, or applied globally across all presets and snapshots. | | **BPM \[Whole\]** | Sets the system tempo. Turning Knob 7 (BPM \[Whole\]) resets Knob 8 (BPM \[Hundredths\]) to .00. | | **BPM \[Hundredths\]** | Sets the system tempo. Turning Knob 7 (BPM \[Whole\]) resets Knob 8 (BPM \[Hundredths\]) to .00. | | **Receive MIDI Clock** | Determines whether Stadium responds to the incoming MIDI Clock received at its MIDI IN port, via USB, or whichever it senses first ("Auto"). If you want Stadium to completely ignore MIDI clock, set this to "Off." The TAP switch LED flashes blue when synced to incoming MIDI Clock. | | **Send MIDI Clock** | Determines from which outputs (if any) Helix Stadium transmits MIDI Clock. | ^**\***^**Note: The Song View \> Count In feature is still in development and will be available in a future firmware update for Helix Stadium. For the latest details, please visit the Line 6 website's** [**Helix Stadium product page**](https://line6.com/helix-stadium/)**.** ## ![Global MIDI Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_fd77861007fe727a45efcfd54a2527a0fb7f8783f33462c6603c266038099380/Global%20MIDI%20Button.png?cb=02a276360f9e5b50463f4025671124b8) Global Settings \> MIDI See [**MIDI**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/midi.md) for additional information. Click to show/hide Global Settings \> MIDI settings... | **Parameter** | **Description** | |-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **MIDI Over USB C** | Determines whether Helix Stadium receives and transmits MIDI commands over its USB-C port. | | **MIDI THRU** | When on, data received at the MIDI In port (or USB-C, if MIDI Over USB C is on) is echoed out the MIDI OUT/THRU port. | | **Global MIDI Channel** | Sets the MIDI channel for which Helix Stadium transmits and responds for its global functions, like preset recall, snapshot recall, and Global CCs. See [**Global CCs**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/midi.md#global-ccs) for the list of pre-configured CCs. | | **Bypass/Ctrl MIDI Channel** | Sets the MIDI Channel for the assignment of block bypass and parameter control. This setting must always be a different channel than the one used for Global MIDI remote functions. | | **Matrix 1/4" MIDI Channel** **Matrix XLR MIDI Channel** **Matrix Phones MIDI Channel** | Set the MIDI channel on which Helix Stadium transmits and responds to its pre-configured MIDI CCs for each respective Matrix Mixer layer (1/4", XLR, and Phones). See [**Matrix Mixer CCs**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/midi.md#8c86168d-1ab2-4ff5-9fac-25ac2fd61d4e) for the list of pre-configured CCs. | | **Receive MIDI PC** | Determines whether Helix Stadium receives and responds to MIDI program change (PC) messages to recall presets. **Note:**The USB A port does not currently support MIDI In or Out. Please use the USB-C port for USB MIDI. | | **Send MIDI PC** | Determines if Helix Stadium sends MIDI Bank/Program Change (PC) messages for its preset changes and to which MIDI outputs. The PC value for each preset appears at the bottom of the Preset List's sidebar. **Note:** This setting *only* affects the MIDI Bank/Program Change messages sent as a result of Stadium preset changes. It does not affect Command Center or Song View - MIDI Flag Bank/Program Change messages, which are always sent on both MIDI Out and USB MIDI. | | **Duplicate Send PC** | Determines whether Helix Stadium automatically sends duplicate MIDI program change (PC) messages. For example, if set to Off and a PC message of 47 is sent, any subsequent PC 47 message is *not* sent to avoid duplicate messages. | | **Send Snapshot CC** | Determines whether Helix Stadium automatically sends matching MIDI Snapshot CC messages (CC69, values 0\~9) when selecting snapshots. | ## ![Global Date-Time Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d86a23211100cc1ed5a8f654d33e4973dfdee7bab1c1b0656606a162ba05a09a/Global%20Date-Time%20Button.png?cb=8b22505330ab2a897de4e3bb7f6f7fbc) Global Settings \> Date/Time **Tip:** You can also quickly access the Date/Time settings by tapping Set Date/Time from the clock panel's sidebar. Click to show/hide Global Settings \> Date/Time settings... | **Parameter** | **Description** | |-------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Date/Time Via Wi-Fi** | When on, Helix Stadium utilizes the Network Time Protocol (NTP) to synchronize the date and time with the selected time zone. | | **Time Zone** | Select the city in your time zone. Geography is your friend, and maps are cool. | | **Year** | Lets you manually set the date and time. Grayed out when **Date/Time Via Wi-Fi** is on. | | **Month** | Lets you manually set the date and time. Grayed out when **Date/Time Via Wi-Fi** is on. | | **Day** | Lets you manually set the date and time. Grayed out when **Date/Time Via Wi-Fi** is on. | | **Hour** | Lets you manually set the date and time. Grayed out when **Date/Time Via Wi-Fi** is on. | | **Minute** | Lets you manually set the date and time. Grayed out when **Date/Time Via Wi-Fi** is on. | | **AM/PM** | Grayed out when **24-hour Clock** is set to "On." | | **24-hour Clock** | Determines whether the clock uses the AM/PM (Off) or 24-hour clock format. | | **Hide Clock** | When set to "On," the Clock and Stopwatch displays are hidden. | --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # The Helix Stadium Application **Important! This section covers the Helix Stadium application version 1.4.0 (and later).** * The Helix Stadium application, available for macOS and Windows^®^ computers, can connect with the Helix Stadium device either via Wi-Fi or USB for remote editing. * A "**USB-Update** " application connection is also available specifically for updating Helix Stadium device firmware (see [**Device Firmware Updates**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/device-firmware-updates-using-the-helix-stadium-ap.md)). * The Helix Stadium application is supported on Helix Stadium family devices with firmware version 1.1.0 (or later). * For optimal performance and preset compatibility, we highly recommend updating to the latest available firmware and software versions. * The *minimum* versions for preset compatibility between Helix Stadium devices and the Helix Stadium Native plugin are: device firmware v1.3.2, Helix Stadium application version 1.3.3, and Helix Stadium Native version 1.33. In addition to creating, editing, and managing your Stadium presets and asset files, the Helix Stadium app is also an integral part of the Stadium Showcase™ functionality, where you can build songs within the app by adding audio files and uploading songs to your Stadium device to add flags and markers, enabling real-time triggering of Stadium and external devices. **The Helix Stadium application and Helix Stadium device firmware v1.2.0 (or later) are required for Showcase functionality.** Once you've installed and connected the Helix Stadium application using the instructions on this page, please refer to the[**Creating Showcase Songs**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/song-view.md#731167cc-d1da-4345-99b9-89e4bea38d90) section for details. ![MainAppGUI-PurpleNurple.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e137f098a983a716e88c36472ac2c3b98b96dd1c6e9ff0de894c0fbf220048b5/MainAppGUI-PurpleNurple.png?cb=537695be20740497feb2f18030103bd0) The Helix Stadium application ## Get The Helix Stadium Application Download the latest, free Helix Stadium app installer for macOS or Windows from [**line6.com/software**](https://line6.com/software/), launch the app installer, and follow its on-screen instructions to complete the installation. ### Minimum System Requirements The Helix Stadium application can be used on macOS and Windows computers with the following *minimum* system requirements. Later Operating Systems and higher hardware specifications are recommended. * **Operating System:** * macOS v14, Sonoma, 64-bit (Intel^®^ and Apple Silicon processor types are supported) 
 * Windows^®^ 11 64-bit * **CPU:** Dual-Core 2.0GHz processor * **Memory:** 8 GB * **Storage:** 8 GB (to allow for firmware updates via the app) * Wi-Fi or Ethernet for connectivity to Helix Stadium hardware * Line 6 Helix Stadium ASIO^®^ and WinUSB drivers (Windows only---no driver installation necessary for macOS) * Note that these drivers are installed by default with the Helix Stadium application v1.2 and later on Windows. A stand-alone Helix Stadium ASIO/WinUSB driver installer is also available at [**line6.com/software**](https://line6.com/software/). * USB 2 of faster connectivity (for optional USB firmware updating of Helix Stadium hardware) ## Connect to your Stadium Device To use the Helix Stadium application, you have the option to connect to your Stadium device either via Wf-Fi or USB to "sync" its content for real-time preset loading, editing, and import/export of asset files. When Helix Stadium is not connected, the Helix Stadium app displays the **Disconnected** splash screen. ![App Splash Screen Disconnected.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_905a99cf8695e76a1ea8684188a1091a56e65b9612225051344bb86f2b11b5bf/App%20Splash%20Screen%20Disconnected.png?cb=2722c1190dd431ba2bc2252e805e91e7) The "Disconnected" splash screen The Device Connection button on the app toolbar also displays the current status, as either not connected ![Connection Options button - Not Connected indicator](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f756d3cde564db75e381ee79acd4bb6a1a96a2b78baf50fe6969d1f69a559e61/ConnectionOptions_NotConnected.png?cb=e37e6a2d2e1c5012792c7a9309c7d381) or connected ![the Stadium XL Wi-Fi Connected indicator](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5b66ee37036abfd94ac760c7bae5f282aff00f88213671cf038b7c6bc1e147cf/Stadium%20XL%20USB%20Connected%20indicator.png?cb=b3b9412c6c79f94039dd7e4aa7610894) . Please see the following steps to configure your Helix Stadium app-to-device connection. ### Application and Firmware Update Notification Upon launch of the Helix Stadium application and your Line 6 account log in (via the app's ![The My Account Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_428200f3e70bdb62576bdc37ae2cd5e6a5b1648537f17c08dfbff9b46494e70e/My%20Account%20Button.png?cb=cafa277f64b2e663d36ab115f0693cb8) button), the app will automatically check online for both the Helix Stadium application and firmware updates. If you new versions are available, an Update button appears at the top left of the app, to the right of the Connection Indicator ![Update Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_91a413d0b91d22ee9fe86d283abb28951852512e6a20b5d5333ba36f59b060b5/Update%20Button.png?cb=c7b1b884a7ad772dea116dccd9beb263) . We recommend clicking the Update button to read about and install the available update(s). **If prompted to update** ***both*** **the application and firmware, please update the Helix Stadium application** ***first*** **.** #### Updating the Helix Stadium Application If prompted, click ![The OK Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c0caa01f3320fa6447428e7d878a41e644c137197e71e6c69669299b647f254c/OK%20Button.png?cb=8e335e6feee7981f7587db2ea7c95559) to initiate the Helix Stadium application update. Note that you do not need to connect the app to your Stadium device to perform the application update. In the **App/Device Update** screen, be sure to click the **App** tab to access the details for the available application version, then click ![The Download Update Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_51a5758801844ca03ec5fceaf7432e3981e60241373f789a5d064baa825abfd6/Download%20Update%20Button.png?cb=bfbb25aab83bcf6ba8f6fe781ce43404) to proceed. Follow the instructions on the additional screens to complete the update. ![App_Update.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ae5e95808242abed0a694b8ef872115940195849aa39aef010b764954a5ef88e/App_Update.png?cb=d13354e2896d47d30da03b78c0b2c295) The Helix Stadium application Update prompt and App/Device Update screen #### Updating the Helix Device Firmware If a Firmware Update is available, it can be performed using the Helix Stadium application (version 1.4.0 or later) using the app's "USB-Update" ![The USB-Update Connect Option](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1fe445f7bca80bd1602ec335913cf3f345fb418ce94f2e24d273c91f7cf57ddb/USB-Update%20Connect%20Option.png?cb=47d4429325946a5d298ee7bf066c59a8) option in the app's Connect to Device dialog. (Optionally, firmware updates can also performed on your device itself via its Wi-Fi connection, without the Helix Stadium application.) Please refer to the following [**Device Firmware Update**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/device-firmware-updates-using-the-helix-stadium-ap.md) page for update instructions. ### Managing the App-To-Device Connection 1. By default, your Helix Stadium [**Global Settings \> Preferences**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md) **\> Remote Access** is set to "**Allow**," allowing connections from the Helix Stadium application via any computer. Optionally, you can set Remote Access to "Require PIN" with Wi-Fi and USB connections for added security using the following steps. * Go to [**Global Settings \> Preferences**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md) and set **Remote Access** to **Require PIN**. * Also in Preferences, tap on the **Set PIN** button above Knob 5, type in your desired 4-digit PIN code, and tap ![the Done button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e166e913679f0f6f5c5b65fc0456de006d2db050005fb4c54763716c873d189d/Done%20button.png?cb=fbd577f4cf8331593b5939c56a69ed2d) . ![SetPIN_Device.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_7d55045f0e9315fde445a3778c8bf6cd74cce7f7e998dea88e00a86339907cd7/SetPIN_Device.png?cb=e55c3abea0224643178810a82958504e) Setting a PIN 2. **Connect Using Wi-Fi or USB** * **To Connect via Wi-Fi:** Enable your computer's Internet connection, and ensure your Stadium device is connected to the same network via Wi-Fi (or Ethernet)---see the [**Wi-Fi \& Ethernet Connections**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/wifi-bluetooth-and-ethernet-connectivity.md). * **To Connect via USB:**Connect from the Helix Stadium device's USB-C port to your computer's USB port. 3. Launch the Helix Stadium app, click the ![The My Account Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_428200f3e70bdb62576bdc37ae2cd5e6a5b1648537f17c08dfbff9b46494e70e/My%20Account%20Button.png?cb=cafa277f64b2e663d36ab115f0693cb8) button, and log in to your Line 6 account. 4. Click the ![the Application Connect button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_76fabf9593f465da2ded56280663d0b994106d9fcb06c610b3a644aef934dc27/Application%20Connect%20button.png?cb=611cd5a29a0d71451ee93c63158ac0b1) button to open the **Connect To Device** dialog.\* * If desired, keep the **Auto-connect at Launch** switch **on** (in the right position) ![Auto-connect Switch.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_4fb1a44f3f7c1bebb83cb3ac891c427d9c4fe637e7883955578b717bf4a8fc75/Auto-connect%20Switch.png?cb=945bd1d03096ef12c4aeeb754275436b) , and the app will attempt to connect automatically for future launches. * If you prefer that the **Auto-connect** feature use an existing USB connection rather than a Wi-Fi connection, set the **Prefer USB** switch on (in the right position). 5. Click the **Connect** button ![Connect Button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f0e768d2c3458507a3922aa7ad352eb388571b745bc3549a1fc1f5e8b6df8f99/Connect%20Button.png?cb=9623ff3e448408f250d9c15e62779196) at the right of the desired Wi-Fi or USB instance of your Helix Stadium device within the lower pane of the dialog, as shown below. ![Connect Dialog_ConnectingWifi.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_dac0e3b8b47d1187dea8121f87432945c628dcae22e28a20cd23c0007e53caac/Connect%20Dialog_ConnectingWifi.png?cb=8da6099ecc7a9e40b566e12ada46c011) Connecting to Helix Stadium via Wi-Fi * * When a Helix Stadium device is connected via USB, you'll see two USB-type entries in the "Available" pane, as shown above: * **Connect to the "(USB)" entry** ![Connect dialog - USB entry](/__attachments/a_5338c4b56991203224ec7cb8871c977a1547d164ae15f88e0163559e69ebbdaf/Connect%20dialog%20-%20USB.png?cb=98a324a097b2b4551e1d7e08dbb1b136) **to use the Helix Stadium app for all its preset editing and librarian features.** * **Connect to the "(USB-Update)" entry** ![The USB-Update Connect Option](/__attachments/a_1fe445f7bca80bd1602ec335913cf3f345fb418ce94f2e24d273c91f7cf57ddb/USB-Update%20Connect%20Option.png?cb=47d4429325946a5d298ee7bf066c59a8) ***only*** **to perform a firmware update using the Helix Stadium app** (see [**Device Firmware Updates**](/en/helix-stadium/live/device-firmware-updates-using-the-helix-stadium-ap.md)). * If your Stadium device is not appearing in the "Available" pane, try clicking the **Refresh** button ![The Connect to Device - Refresh Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a60cec566ce1c93ab8e8ed4c0df9725132bed2c16a46945d49645d4531b044ed/Connect%20Refresh%20Button.png?cb=ddfa2122cb36c744eead880afd7e7a79) at the top of the dialog. * If you configured your Stadium's Remote Access for "**Require PIN** " in Step 1, enter your 4-digit PIN when prompted and tap ![Confirm button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_123be6b8d049a704c7d94f75de36a9c2d632bf093c8cba8106a9e63ca10ee876/Confirm%20Button.png?cb=895df81bf120ddd0d8bde3f5fbad3d04) , as shown below. ^**\***^**Note:** Alternatively, on app launch, you can click the ![Auto-Connect button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_91df5f6c5956dab7a1025a0e1e8dc9c13034d156a8160765fff329c08c17f880/Auto-Connect%20button.png?cb=c852596c06341dd2a8fda574bbc5c092) button to skip the Connect to Device dialog and establish the app-to-device connection automatically. If you've configured your Stadium device's Remote Access for "**Require PIN**," you'll be prompted to enter the PIN. **If you encounter problems connecting the Helix Stadium app via Wi-Fi to your device with these steps, please use the** [**Manual IP Address option**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/helix-stadium-edit-application.md#manual-ip)**below.** ![Connect PIN Prompt.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_fdc63ab651aae622ebe15a307bb030d5daff46c78d7468d81bd1fd15c6c75259/Connect%20PIN%20Prompt.png?cb=4c2a4a30dc58f2a635ce9623e218f586) Connecting to a Helix Stadium device using a security PIN 5. Once connected, the app's toolbar button indicates the connection: Wi-Fi ![The Stadium XL Wi-Fi Connected indicator](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5b66ee37036abfd94ac760c7bae5f282aff00f88213671cf038b7c6bc1e147cf/Stadium%20XL%20USB%20Connected%20indicator.png?cb=b3b9412c6c79f94039dd7e4aa7610894) or USB ![The Stadium XL USB Connected indicator](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_37ef8670df3eae52c0fdf2e248ff5f283db745bb466d7d7934414a8413249968/Connected%20Icon%20USB.png?cb=41cac6d7788a2d283492eb09fe9dadaf) and the app automatically syncs with Stadium. You can now start using the Helix Stadium app for real-time remote editing and importing/exporting asset files. #### Connecting Using Helix Stadium's Manual IP Address Some Wi-Fi router configurations may prevent the app from connecting to your Stadium device when using the preceding steps. If you encounter this issue, please use the following steps to manually enter your device's IP address for connection. Click to expand... Steps for Manual IP Address configuration. 1. On your Stadium device, go to the **Main Menu \>** [**Wi-Fi Settings**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/wifi-bluetooth-and-ethernet-connectivity.md)dialog, and note the IP address displayed there. This IP number is specific to your Stadium device's network connection. ![WiFi_IP Adress.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d3d30bbbf02122dd266ffe8d833a2f4f3ce6cd10113a35b22aae0792bdc71c69/WiFi_IP%20Adress.png?cb=67b87e837f33a40741a5fb22be06025c) Your Stadium's IP address appears in the Wi-Fi settings 2. Launch the Helix Stadium app and click the ![the Application Connect button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_76fabf9593f465da2ded56280663d0b994106d9fcb06c610b3a644aef934dc27/Application%20Connect%20button.png?cb=611cd5a29a0d71451ee93c63158ac0b1) button to launch the **Connect To Device** dialog. 3. Enter your IP address in the Manual IP Address field and click ![Add Button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_63e05a3fcd4da66fc26193c137b88c0bfdfce94202a38c56777c5922583a3a7a/Add%20Button.png?cb=a57da89fc61a43fe9b6a4992db8d9804) . When you see your IP Address appear as "Available," click its ![Connect Button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f0e768d2c3458507a3922aa7ad352eb388571b745bc3549a1fc1f5e8b6df8f99/Connect%20Button.png?cb=9623ff3e448408f250d9c15e62779196) button. ![Connect_IPAddress.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_01c4d350a4aff0f71c09d9b17b1ebf48847d149566140f5d21840a16bfb73d9e/Connect_IPAddress.png?cb=5ba07dfba1a1f05d12938fad3437a434) Connecting manually using your IP address 4. The Helix Stadium app should then connect to your Stadium device via Wi-Fi using the entered IP address. 5. Note that the Auto-Connect feature is not supported for future connections using the Manual IP Address method. Repeat step 1 above, and your IP address should be remembered and appear in the Manual IP Address field, making it easy to complete step 2. #### To Disconnect the Helix Stadium app from the Device In most cases, you can simply exit the application. However, if you want to disconnect your current Wi-Fi or USB connection, such as if you want to change to the other connection type, you can do so in the **Connect to Device** dialog. 1. Click the connection indicator at the top left of the app window to launch the Connect to Device dialog. 2. Hover your mouse to the right of the green "Connected" device item at the top of the dialog and click its **Disconnect** button, as shown below. ![Connect Dialog_Disconnecting.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_db0d3c0e91d4880f922b73e72d68d448824199a0da251ce1d6a429d28b0a09e3/Connect%20Dialog_Disconnecting.png?cb=1b7a75ff785e774464fed4c61a755096) Disconnecting from the device (Wi-Fi) ## Main Application Window ![MainAppWindow_Annotated.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_40f973589844f573654b370346a3e1215a74745c943db7dc1ec9e9f515b5e003/MainAppWindow_Annotated.png?cb=9ba3aa079b77ffcb150bd356a1df285e) The main application window ![Item 1](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5c15d7e1068597a4a79d4247ac8295954cb3b7de304bc32b90f8aae8d5db137e/01.png?cb=ce61b591a14429573632afbeb4c2997c) **Device Connection Indicator \& Options:** Indicates the current app-to-device connection, as shown below. Click the indicator to open the **Connect To Device**windows for connectivity options. ![App Connection Status.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1ac5cd1912ad2306be9dff546be7e7296a5355449de5b03763bd5adb6b7d7f0d/App%20Connection%20Status.png?cb=7013af3719c8c7d9384c93ade0ceb4cf) The Device Connection Indicator ![Item 2](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_eff00b9e94af10daed02c625776ab2a1652ea716a91c0b182f0d6e195b0c4e80/02.png?cb=53ead26f31014fd489e07cfbde017dc7) **View Selectors** ![The Toolbar view selectors.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a701c52032cf005f2da82d066ba8e5fd9aba4373cb74dfffe9ef976e8ef8cfc8/Toolbar%20View%20Buttons.png?cb=c590e1846ed151b0618e74d12e4f142c) **:** Selects the main Views displayed in the app. Please see the individual sections on this page for overviews of each: [**Home**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/helix-stadium-edit-application.md#app-home), [**Librarian**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/librarian-view.md), [**Command Center**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/helix-stadium-edit-application.md#app-command-center), and [**Global EQ**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/helix-stadium-edit-application.md#app=global-eq) Views. For details about the **New Song** screen ![Toolbar New Song Screen button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_231276259146399b84cd216f8b2f4cd595e53ac6a8db0a8d4b5d3e3824719660/Toolbar%20New%20Song%20Screen%20button.png?cb=108b64d9df23d34eaf187f2b8142921d) , please refer to the **Songs View \>** [**Creating a New Song in the Stadium App**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/song-view.md#731167cc-d1da-4345-99b9-89e4bea38d90) section. ![Item 3](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_0f59b9339615affdd88ea17793a411df03db52e38a0723dcd84dda6072ad3d61/03.png?cb=632cde3c35c9abd3a51e6bbd6f0126be) My **Account and Help** ![Account-Help buttons.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_71ab0e30e6df4b1a9938e5339f0fba2ed5db4b2a9940108c9d1777530d525fdf/Account-Help%20buttons.png?cb=04b09f2c1dc85021b1558cdeff788359) **:**The toolbar buttons at the right provide access to the following: * **My Account:** Click to Log In, Log Out, and Manage your Line 6 account. When signed in, your account name is shown with a green account icon. * **Help:** Click to access the About Helix Stadium \& Legal Info for app version, copyright, and accreditation details. You'll also find a link for Helix Stadium Online Support, which will direct you to this online *Owner's Manual*. ![Item 4](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_adbcca0c7b6b07453e6815c0353842032fcdf1b9f03cf57969e4e12c9c3ebeb4/04.png?cb=075549902ea87b3442a14dd60557ca0c) **Preset Librarian Panel:** A compact Preset Librarian is displayed on the left of the Home View for easy searching and loading of your presets. Click and drag the panel's right vertical divider to resize its width as desired, or click ![Preset Panel Hide button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_6800225e005070542d97c5e95ac6b359be3577d0312c5ee40aea021fb186e79b/Preset%20Panel%20Hide%20button.png?cb=9bc94c89b5fba71739f246cb201f8655) to hide it. ## The Home View This main application window displays the current preset's signal flow, where you can create and edit your presets, much like within the Stadium device's Home - Edit View screen. To the left of the app's Home View, you can also access the Preset List to select a Setlist and load a preset directly into the Home View, as well as several other preset functions. Click the Manage button ![Manage Button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_dd1943a86ddde137a8a7f90e6bd76c68b2651a5f8d034aba7e4f3caf656380cd/Manage%20Button.png?cb=a6ebc4f5068c1bddfe332f0737643f18) to open the [**Preset Librarian View**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/librarian-view.md) for additional Setlist and Preset management functions. ![MainAppGUI-StadiumRockRig.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e45261c552297f232c941b4a9b628ce9deb8276f055e79e28ced67e23fb2d912/MainAppGUI-StadiumRockRig.png?cb=586b33c25d97ce53c629708b5cd55364) The Helix Stadium application ### Creating New Presets Choose a Preset Template to begin building your own custom tone. Select the **Empty Preset** template to start from scratch, or choose one of the other provided templates for a specific signal routing or input configuration. 1. From the Home View - Menu button ![Menu Button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_df7de91f076e608fd91836841d48944ba2b8647ca29a90b9ef30cf5abe3ce390/Menu%20Button.png?cb=ac16d12b40d1bd96b3f30e1af62f37d5) , select **New Preset** and choose the desired Preset Template. **Tip:** You can also create your own custom Preset Templates. Please see [**Saving Your Presets**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/helix-stadium-edit-application.md#72390ce1-6fc2-4428-b660-944005dd12eb) below. ![Select New Template.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_77b706e20419b29339566e95bdadb5c4db91fe123f8d2c1447856f07d72f4d68/Select%20New%20Template.png?cb=9df13198fe061fadc407366745b3ee98) Select **New Preset** from the menu, choose the desired template, and click ![NewPresetTemplateButton.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_4034022c0d70b7931839622b5376ceb89ebf5765df549c87051b289640a4c971/NewPresetTemplateButton.png?cb=e9abab50ce33cdd0fb2445af1f8e20f8) . ![A new Template Preset is loaded](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_7c301fe63f5b05b73fd5f03745e6a649d707d3c681b8b7411bf6ede85b9cdfb0/New%20Template%20Preset.png?cb=54b304930886be0102682ad221ef2cf1) A new, unsaved preset is created within the User Presets folder from the selected template. 2. Add and edit blocks as desired to build your preset, then be sure to [**save the preset**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/helix-stadium-edit-application.md#72390ce1-6fc2-4428-b660-944005dd12eb) ![The Preset Save Button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_14962e36fec31298dfc37a8d26835ac28202adae73080ce69471c2a000712890/The%20Preset%20Save%20Button.png?cb=a740e2689dab67129a7e262a74bf4c16) to retain it in your library. **Tip:** Use the [**Templates Librarian**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/librarian-view.md#import-templates-favorites) to manage your Preset Templates. ### Editing Your Tones The Helix Stadium app's Home View screen is functionally very similar to your Stadium device's Home \> Edit screen. You can perform the following tasks in the app and hear your edit results in real-time. **Add blocks:** Click on an empty location on any path in the app's Home View and select the desired model from the Model List at the bottom left of the screen. **Tip:** When the Amp category is selected in the Model Browser, when you scroll down the Guitar Amp or Bass Amp list from the top, the Agoura type amp models appear first. When in the List view, a line appears to indicate where the Agoura type amps end and the HX type amps begin, as shown below. ![Agoura Amps Indicator.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_4130725ae2ee15e9c073ffcd23e611e8a6e8bc2defd0bf79b5b8cc48f21c6791/Agoura%20Amps%20Indicator.png?cb=bfe8f7459d1aa83dbb54feacc91ae93d) Agoura/HX amps indicator **Edit block settings:** Click on any block in the app's path to access its parameters in the Inspector panel - Edit Panel at the bottom right of the screen for editing. Also, see the following **Using the Focus View** section for more editing options. * **Sliders or Knobs?** Over the years, our customers have been pretty evenly split on their opinions for slider versus knob controls for parameter editing. Rather than weighing in on that debate, we've provided both options so you can choose. Use the **Slider/Knob** **selector** ![The Slider-Knob Selector](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_bc1a2a59cbb5f599a43e226e865a6898405c5f765694de30e1bcad9ad0d6ec8a/Slider-Knob%20Switch.png?cb=98e52f21e7655d71f8ea38e0997de989) to set your preferred Inspector edit panel mode. 🤓 * **Hold SHIFT + turn the Mouse Wheel or Drag on a Trackpad:**When the mouse cursor is directly over a parameter slider, knob, or its numerical value, turning the mouse wheel/dragging on the trackpad adjusts its value. * When the mouse cursor is directly over the vertical scrollbar at the right of the Edit Panel, turning the mouse wheel/dragging on the trackpad scrolls the panel contents vertically. (When the mouse wheel or trackpad are used ***without*** holding SHIFT, this scrolls the panel vertically, regardless the mouse pointer position within the Edit Panel.) * Hover your mouse cursor over any block in the signal flow to access the **Block Bypass** and **Clear Block** buttons that appear above it: ![Block Hover Buttons](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e16ee9bf6df42329fcaccbf3193ab51274cc99bc98432818bff577b83a199a7e/Block%20Hover%20Buttons.png?cb=61073d6e5ecfc2b64c60966ca26917f5) * Within the app's Inspector edit panel, right-click on an individual parameter slider/knob for additional functions, such as Reset, Controller Assignment, and more. **Tip: Quickly change an existing block between mono and stereo versions.**Say you have a mono Cosmos Echo with your settings all tweaked, but now want to change it to a stereo Cosmos Echo without losing your settings... 1. Click on the Delay block in the signal flow to select it. 2. Click the mono/stereo selector to the right of the Cosmos Delay model name in the Inspector ![Cosmos Echo Inspector header](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8b685eca14113cff1820b3dd95c5adc08125fd4729858d9e68be47e2ad2c3b87/Cosmos%20Echo%20Inspector%20header.png?cb=c06f4f1dae7f106b1bff3921d834445d) . 3. Tap **Yes** when prompted to convert to stereo. The stereo version of the model is now loaded with all your applicable parameter values retained! Note that... * Any existing Controller or Snapshot assignments are not retained when changing the model's mono/stereo version. * You can do the same to change a stereo effect block to mono. * This option is not available for models that are only offered in mono or stereo, or for Legacy type models. * Click and drag any block left/right to change its position in a path. Drag a block down from a main path to create a split/parallel path, or drag a block to any other existing path to move it there. * Right-click on a block to access its **Action Panel** to create Bypass, Controller, MIDI, or Snapshot Control assignments, Copy, Paste, Clear, Add to Favorites, and more. * Remember to click the toolbar's **Save** **button** ![Preset Save Button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c109fe06d1654644aaf573ca9999fc7413d31d950784d0112a1283fe30547754/Preset%20Save%20Button.png?cb=d7759d608a3e207b31c9b9af709801cd) to save your preset to your device's library---see the next section. #### Using the Focus View For editing, you can optionally tap the ![Focus View button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ced5ec64978b811e67ec6b3e1d7d751f528594bb0509caa43a733d5de379a474/FocusButton.png?cb=ed5e6782d6dac50c7c0548eb023b90db) button within the Inspector to open their **Focus View** screen for visual editing of the current Amp, Cab, or Effect model.\* Much like when using Stadium's Focus View screen, you can drag the target cursor toward any corner of the screen and hear the current model's settings morph in real time toward the pre-determined settings for each. The mid-screen setting represents the model's initial default settings. Please also see [**Focus View**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/the-focus-view.md) for details. ![App Focus View - Amp.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_002ccd8d005f67348c56f89c77456023ca7322669c927a69ce5a0cb66cb6aef0/App%20Focus%20View%20-%20Amp.png?cb=6609ce113c4b9af3661f719912a05462) The application's Focus View (Matchstick 30 amp selected) ^**\***^**Note** : Some model types offer different controls and functions in their [**Focus View**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/the-focus-view.md): * **Cab** modes offer a handy mic position controller. * **EQ** models display a parametric or graphic EQ interface. * **Dynamics \> Compressor**models include a Gain Reduction meter. * **Clones** (Amp, Amp+Cab, Preamp, and Distortion clones) display the clone file's metadata that you optionally entered during its creation. The metadata display is for reference only---the fields are not editable. ### Saving Your Presets Once you've edited your preset to your liking, save the preset to retain it in your Stadium's Preset Library. Please also see the [**Saving Presets**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/saving-presets-preset-templates.md) page for additional preset and setlist details. * Click the Save button ![Preset Save Button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c109fe06d1654644aaf573ca9999fc7413d31d950784d0112a1283fe30547754/Preset%20Save%20Button.png?cb=d7759d608a3e207b31c9b9af709801cd) at the top of the Home View to open the **Save Preset** dialog. ![Save Preset Dialog.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d49d18c1f9114ebcc96a04ef8f780a19ed649af0131f54754f67f832a3509fd4/Save%20Preset%20Dialog.png?cb=e1cfb6464d9012e897a53df1984823fa) The Save Preset dialog * To save your changes to the currently saved preset, click the Save button ![Save Button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_97f0d0503007255876d78c748c4cc4e8d46b06b230b284ff9d43197e88dfcae7/Save%20Button.png?cb=2be1db3596505c472b5eee56bdfbbbc0) . * To name the preset, type in your desired name in the field at the top of the dialog ![Preset Name Field.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1ddf5b8ab3905b37c4f8c0c189eda9922b72e044f855b96b445d7a634a0ba132/Preset%20Name%20Field.png?cb=aabfa265c00a40b8bf3956380db51b46) . * To save a unique copy of the preset into a different location, select the desired location in the preset list: * If the selected location is empty, click the **Save As New** button ![The Save As New Buttton](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9b782ad725e0c0067372d3fe5e3fd61b3f2d972cf84b0dbec72d400bce956d58/Save%20As%20New%20Buttton.png?cb=3e3dce9ec412b04d15f16356b6c0acb0) to save a copy there. * If the selected location already includes a preset, click the **Overwrite** button ![Overwrite button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5a71c4c55abca4049d0707e1a6204b64d4e226e3cd0837db6a55ee18da6b4270/Overwrite%20button.png?cb=9a7e17b255093fabe2565c4828406e23) to replace the current preset. * Note that saving a preset into a Setlist location also automatically saves its original preset file within the User Presets list (since Setlists contain only "aliases" that reference their original User Presets). * To save the preset as a Preset Template, click the **Save Template** button ![The Save Template button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ff73e7823974113408ab5b3be4088cad0503d350f8d12093c38a5e0b2e92498b/Save%20Template%20button.png?cb=7dda2e3bc664f6ee9bfdad9c518edbae) and name and save the Template in the Add Template pop-up dialog. * To exit the Save Preset dialog without saving, click the **Cancel** button ![Canel Save button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_618a3fa216eda2f604073f8168e45a23725b0ada9ab76f01db374b9691e6fe8a/Canel%20Save%20button.png?cb=57812e1f0bba3b79fcc4350e6cb1d417) at the top right of the dialog. **Note:** Factory Presets are read-only. Therefore, the Factory Presets folder or list is not selectable within the Preset Save dialog. However, you can use the above "Save as New" steps to save a unique, editable copy of any Factory Preset in the User Presets folder. ## Configuring Bypass and Controller Assignments Within the Helix Stadium application, Bypass and Controller Assignment options are available via right-click Action menus, as described in the following sections. Please also refer to the Stadium device's [**Bypass and Control Assignment**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/bypass-and-controller-assign.md) page for additional details regarding assignment types and behaviors. ### Creating and Editing a Block Bypass Assignment Right-click on the block for which you want to create or edit a Bypass assignment to open its Action menu. ![A block's Action Panel](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_dbff317b409ce8fe53f46e4448f4b17511c19d83d597c972754e6f73ef5e692b/AssignToSwitch.png?cb=27e37d13fbe7c4214dd27c1fd4b97b44) A block's Action panel - Assign to Block * **To assign to a Switch, Pedal, or XY controller:** Choose **Assign to Switch** . In the **Controller Assign** dialog that appears, select the specific switch, pedal, or external controller to which you want to assign the block bypass. To remove an existing Bypass assignment, select "None." * **To create a MIDI Bypass assignment for the block:** Select **Assign MIDI** from the block's Action menu. In the**MIDI Assign** dialog that appears, choose the desired MIDI Command type and its additional Value or Note options. To remove an existing MIDI Bypass assignment, select "None." * **To additionally configure the block so that its Bypass is stored and recalled via Snapshots:** By default, the Set the block Action menu's **Snapshot Bypass** switch is enabled ![Snapshot Bypass Switch - enabled](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_94e5c9494d2687f9827840366b6f7160a47737857307666d046427d8885ccd24/SnapshotBypassSwitch.png?cb=d22430272420cc947a5ed744bba5b97b) . If you want the block's bypass state to not be stored/recalled with snapshots, disable this switch. ### Creating and Editing a Parameter Controller Assignment Practically any parameter for any block can be assigned to a switch, pedal, XY Controller, external, or MIDI for remote control. Most assigned command parameters also allow control via Snapshots. These options are configured in the app's Parameter Panel. 1. Click the block you want to create or edit a Controller assignment for. 2. Within the lower right Parameter Panel, right-click on the desired knob (or slider, if using the panel's Slider View) to open its Action menu. ![Assign Controller.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c8670a8a24e0b656d066ab36cecc6551d89e1cf8bd02d976790572215518e722/Assign%20Controller.png?cb=805ec38c504da3200473cb222e1d7a9e) The parameter's Action menu - Controller Assign options * **To assign to a Switch, Pedal, or XY controller:** Choose **Assign Controller** . In the **Controller Assign** dialog that appears, select the specific switch or controller to which you want to assign. To remove an existing parameter assignment, select "None." * **To create a MIDI Bypass assignment for the parameter:** Select **Bypass MIDI Control** from the block's Action menu. In the**MIDI Assign** dialog that appears, choose the desired MIDI Command type and its additional Value or Note options. To remove an existing MIDI parameter control assignment, select "None." * **To additionally configure the parameter so that its values are stored and recalled via Snapshots:** Set the parameter Action menu's**Snapshot Control** switch to its right position to enable it ![the Parameter Snapshot Control switch - enabled](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1cbb0ef7cc82e98abce277093727386c680ffa99720f1a7699f0f7aba720d745/ParameterSnapshotControl.png?cb=f438aae3c7da6a205348678757967165) . **Tip:** You can custom-name the label and/or recolor the LED for any assigned Stomp footswitch within the Command Center window (see next section). Right-click on the desired Stomp A or B footswitch within the app's Command Center - Stomp A or Stomp B tab and choose **Label/Color**. ## The Command Center View This view displays the Command Center window for editing the Command Center options for the current preset. All functions within this window are the same as editing within the Stadium device's Command Center screen. Please refer to the [**Command Center**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/command-center.md) page for details. ![Command Center.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_0aac783edfab21d5dee7f3b1d99fb44ef1a589bb804b09aac43e51e5e64c23f4/Command%20Center.png?cb=d7ebe549e5c79bd5c8e15cbb858c6aa2) The Command Center View (Stadium XL) Configuring a MIDI CC assignment on a pedal controller **Tip:** To custom-name the label and/or recolor the LED for any assigned Stomp footswitch, right-click on the desired Stomp A or B footswitch within the app's Command Center - Stomp A or Stomp B tab and choose **Label/Color**. **Tip:** Note that the EXP 1/EXP 2 Pedal controller in the app's Command Center includes the purple and turquoise buttons above it (Stadium XL ![XL Only Icon.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e69c2aec356197b1818a91ded885e7e756a5543007635de0c43e371e03ab21ad/XL%20Only%20Icon.png?cb=25d26d1454b42f73ea44e4ad56d536f7) only). You can select the purple button and then select the EXP Pedal controller below it to assign a unique MIDI command for EXP 1. Select the turquoise button and select the EXP Pedal controller to assign a unique MIDI Command for EXP 2. (This EXP 1/EXP 2 switch is not available in the Stadium device's Command Center screen.) ![The app's EXP 1 - EXP 2 buttons](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_36e721ea500c9ff5672fade9bab09fc4671a16362099f4e1674a778ccc398be9/Exp1-Exp2%20buttons.png?cb=4fff06b7722ce5eee7a90593b0372a6c) ### Snapshot Control For Command Center parameters that support it, you can right-click on a parameter slider and toggle the Snapshot Control switch on/off. Enabling Snapshot Control stores its values with snapshots and sends them on snapshot recall. See the [**Command Center**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/command-center.md) page for additional info. ![Command Center Snapshot Ctrl.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_558d8afac2fbbc9adab2e5573c79e91ebcc664e3bdeee55a98d5478bf3178f6e/Command%20Center%20Snapshot%20Ctrl.png?cb=9250e70db60e015d8e42898d63b43322) The Snapshot Control switch ## The Global EQ View This view displays the Global EQ, providing access to the three Global EQs---one for each [**Matrix Mixer**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/matrix-mixer.md) 1/4", XLR, and Phones layer. All functions are the same as editing within the Stadium Device's Global EQ screen. Please refer to the [**Global EQ**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-eq.md) page for details. ![Global EQ.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5f02a54b4f3cb96d5898b32d5ccae77aab270d9c5a984ddee7e5ed1400d8baba/Global%20EQ.png?cb=364e186779fac99ab61c2ab4a33726a0) The Global EQ --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Helix Stadium Maintenance The Helix Stadium Maintenance screen offers several features to keep your device in optimal working order, including creating and restoring backups, formatting a microSD™ card, performing a factory reset, and more. This page covers using the Maintenance screen features to complete these tasks. **Looking to do a firmware update?** 🤔 You can check for and install the latest Heix Stadium family device firmware update by either using the [**Concierge Screen**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/quick-start.md#concierge) or by tapping the**Main Menu** button ![The Main Menu button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_00fc44ebddccc15f9b90bf4552529fcade0c2ae1739620cfcb7d744715cc51e0/MainMenuButton.png?cb=2720e1381664f0fa9434ebc5c375625f) and then **Downloads** ![DownloadsButton.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ef20cf753d3d2fa99b7e9403acbcbef7cbb4e391328410e78b33f05fc9a495dd/DownloadsButton.png?cb=f642d72f892652985748188211572145) **.** ## The Helix Stadium Maintenance Screen **Note that it is necessary to power on your Helix Stadium device using the following procedure to enter the Maintenance screen:** With your Helix Stadium device powered **Off** , press and hold both the **Home** ![Button_Home.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c0aad41718357802c1220986ea78438eec6b8d9108b05a5df8afd623a4291602/Button_Home.png?cb=74c9251dfad53d447c5a2427523f41ee) and **Song** ![Button_Song.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f9f8974f494118c314364514237b5f9b80496d8ea31731f2489423eeb7ed9e54/Button_Song.png?cb=e72f91e5fa209c5fab2dce5b432d67c6) buttons while powering Helix Stadium **On**, and continue holding the buttons for approximately 10 seconds, until you see the Helix Stadium main Display become lit. ![MaintenanceScreen_Annotated.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c9b2b90176d2d4da26e9090775ee8e7be670f61ed924270f09fbc9d83d2cdeb8/MaintenanceScreen_Annotated.png?cb=d6d9c3510b8f4e2895790d571142331e) The Maintenance screen **Important! Note that creating and restoring device backups requires the use of a microSD card, which is sold separately. A microSD card must be formatted by Helix Stadium before its use. Please see the following section for** [**Formatting a microSD Card**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/helix-stadium-maintenance.md#format-sdcard). ![01.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c5162d8077389fa056f93a7b5f61a74fcd5658aa57e468bf98eccfad6bc77ad7/01.png?cb=ce61b591a14429573632afbeb4c2997c) **Internal System Data:** These options clear, reset, or manage the individual files and data types that you have created. Check the box for any item(s) in this list you wish to execute, then tap ![RestoreSelectedButton.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1c6cc909c7c1b94073defe239e9de8ee7a00e84cd0f39fe5c9e2bebf75ebb440/RestoreSelectedButton.png?cb=f5de3ad594c26c9fd2e34768c1a68fd1) . **Important! These actions will permanently delete or reset the selected data from your device. If you wish to retain your current Stadium device's internal data, first follow the steps on this page for** [**Creating a Backup**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/helix-stadium-maintenance.md#83a5eda2-2a1b-4e1e-8759-96f624524c69)**.** ![Item 2](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_265b23daf93064be00ab0aeb0aa159a35871dac01162892404b472393be4306b/02.png?cb=53ead26f31014fd489e07cfbde017dc7) **Restore Factory Defaults:** This action will perform a complete Factory Reset of your Stadium device, ***permanently deleting all user-created data and resetting all settings to their factory defaults*** . Please see the following section for[**Performing a Factory Reset**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/helix-stadium-maintenance.md#factory-reset). **Important! Note that these actions will permanently delete all user-created data and reset all settings to their factory defaults** . **If you wish to retain a copy of your current Stadium device's internal data and settings, first follow the steps on this page for** [**Creating a Backup**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/helix-stadium-maintenance.md#83a5eda2-2a1b-4e1e-8759-96f624524c69)**.** ![Item 3](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_53bfb068732e5ba3ab6e0cde558da4a5ef2f512e9a42ceba865167811857a7ec/03.png?cb=632cde3c35c9abd3a51e6bbd6f0126be) **Reset Selected:** As instructed in step ![01.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c5162d8077389fa056f93a7b5f61a74fcd5658aa57e468bf98eccfad6bc77ad7/01.png?cb=ce61b591a14429573632afbeb4c2997c) , use this button to execute the checked actions. ![Item 4](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_225eb9dcf55e5f3e85b9a02436e1b3f13f217416de1ae3654d3152c063c65852/04.png?cb=075549902ea87b3442a14dd60557ca0c) **Create Backup:** Tap to initiate a complete backup of all your Helix Stadium's user data to an inserted microSD card. See the following steps for [**Creating a Backup**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/helix-stadium-maintenance.md#83a5eda2-2a1b-4e1e-8759-96f624524c69). ![Item 5](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9a55d408d70e7bc620c78882f78d685ea1a94dfe2fc6a69df71f04b5853b86ad/05.png?cb=3c60906905f19136c9550e92d3fb7999) **Restore Backup:** Tap to restore all your Helix Stadium's user data from a backup stored on an inserted microSD card. **Note that performing a Restore will overwrite all user data on your Stadium device.** See the following section for [**Restoring a Backup**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/helix-stadium-maintenance.md#restore-backup). ![Item 6.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a7499409f77885d0a0514c8fb4748c7f08de6f925db2be9b38cf1122af9d754d/06.png?cb=e45c3711194c930a28cb1ba380014ade) **Format microSD Card:** Tap to format an inserted microSD card. ***Note that formatting will permanently erase all backups and data on the card.*** See the following section for [**Formatting a microSD Card**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/helix-stadium-maintenance.md#format-sdcard). ![Item 7.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_397832c61a84956aaf5a69d40b93d49e59f551a11b1d953fc7e27fc5328c886a/07.png?cb=4985f689673b884595ec1665290f3fb2) **Eject microSD Card:** As instructed in some of the following sections, you may need to use this button to unmount an inserted microSD card at the end of a task before performing further actions. ![Item 8.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_6656456ddf38a79a8aff58226b1fb3159d7bf1e4e232e1e6f79e8a4a4754f284/08.png?cb=f9f3b6850564a1dba571fe782b957df5) **Shutdown:** As instructed in the following sections, use this button before toggling the Stadium switch to power the device off (much like you need to select a "Shut Down" menu command to power off a computer). ![Item 9.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b0c4a197bb116146f87121e5aff70cda2afea6da25452910a79da2108e1cd61e/09.png?cb=b204e54eb95e4f32dee046a782f6c5cd) **Firmware Version:** Displays the currently installed Stadium Firmware version. ### Creating a Backup A backup will automatically include the complete set of all User presets, Setlists, Songs with their audio files, clones, settings, and all other user data from your Helix Stadium device's internal memory, storing it all in a single backup file on a microSD card (sold separately). If not already, insert a microSD card into the Helix Native rear panel's microSD slot, then proceed to the following steps to create or restore a backup. 1. With a Helix Stadium-formatted microSD card inserted, tap the Maintenance screen's ![The Create Backup Button.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_33823d3eb5634ae0ed165fc4fd745d9ac3a49ca7c826732bc5709ae35f51dff2/CreateBackupButton.png?cb=67895ffc27e3a4a3b107ec6487d58d11) button. Next, tap ![The OK button.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8411b5b2855e09f6e38f8e41eef6a4934eeda1c945eb0a0c73cbfafe4f2b5963/OKButton.png?cb=3f394bf207d48e521177cd823610d7c6) when prompted to "**Create a backup to the microSD card?**" 2. Wait for the status dialog to complete---***do not adjust any controls or power off your Stadium device during this process*** . Tap ![The OK button.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8411b5b2855e09f6e38f8e41eef6a4934eeda1c945eb0a0c73cbfafe4f2b5963/OKButton.png?cb=3f394bf207d48e521177cd823610d7c6) when the dialog confirms the backup was created successfully. **Note:** If your current microSD card no longer offers sufficient storage capacity, an alert will be presented. You'll need to either free up space on the card by using the Maintenance screen's **Delete Backups** option to remove saved backups from your microSD card (see the ![01.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c5162d8077389fa056f93a7b5f61a74fcd5658aa57e468bf98eccfad6bc77ad7/01.png?cb=ce61b591a14429573632afbeb4c2997c) description above), or insert a different formatted card with sufficient free space. See the following instructions for [**Formatting a microSD Card**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/helix-stadium-maintenance.md#format-sdcard). 3. To exit the Maintenance screen: * Tap the ![Eject micro sd card button.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_18a3f2149bad7f61906739d6a400370ca2a249b72cbf3509a760150f43bc119d/EjectButton.png?cb=a26362d04ee8875c8dd65bbc954d526e) button, tap ![The OK button.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8411b5b2855e09f6e38f8e41eef6a4934eeda1c945eb0a0c73cbfafe4f2b5963/OKButton.png?cb=3f394bf207d48e521177cd823610d7c6) in the "**microSD card is unmounted**" dialog, and then gently push the microSD card inward to physically eject it from the card slot. * Tap ![The shutdown button.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_3664c0edf3b921a8ba2f1902cfd26caa05a2abd36590f4b1fb3fc0e890342a72/ShutdownButton.png?cb=7bfdc63d7bd40a5653eea73c763ffcab) . As instructed in the alert dialog that appears, wait for the Stadium Footswitch 1's LED to become unlit, then switch the Stadium's power switch to **off**. 4. You can now power your Helix Stadium device on normally and resume using it. ### Restoring a Backup Once you've created one or more Stadium device backups on a microSD card, you can use the **Restore Backup** feature to restore all user files and settings from a saved backup. **Important!** Restoring a backup will permanently overwrite your Helix Stadium device's current User Presets, Setlists, IRs, Playlists, Templates, Favorites, User Presets, User Account data, and Global Settings, replacing them with those in the selected Backup file. **Consider creating a backup** ***first*** **, before proceeding with the following Restore Backup process to ensure you have copies of all your current Stadium files and settings, should you want to retain them.** **Note:** Factory Presets are not stored in a Stadium Backup. Therefore, Factory Presets remain within Stadium's Factory Presets folder, unaffected by a Restore From Backup. Factory Presets are only updated or overwritten by performing a Factory Reset or by updating the device's firmware. 1. Tap ![RestoreBackupButton.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_33034c1b562e00aa3cfb98b4eaf03d492cbe1456359127bcf22217f5c758d8a8/RestoreBackupButton.png?cb=d3b07db3f57d0f37593625ecc4224247) . 2. In the **Select Backup File** dialog that appears, you'll see the list of backup files you've created on the current microSD card, named with the date created and sorted with the most recent backup at the top. Tap the desired backup file to select it, then tap the dialog's **Restore Backup** button. ![SelectBackupFile.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_0fd552d462e8f0d916d6c200946bda32ea2d101f2e344bc0b816355da88e8567/SelectBackupFile.png?cb=54b0ad10e8968dc123d81dc0e7f19ffa) 3. When prompted, tap ![The OK button.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8411b5b2855e09f6e38f8e41eef6a4934eeda1c945eb0a0c73cbfafe4f2b5963/OKButton.png?cb=3f394bf207d48e521177cd823610d7c6) to proceed with restoring the backup. 4. A progress dialog informs you of the restore process status---***do not adjust any controls or power off your Stadium device during this process!*** 5. When the**"Restoring from microSD card"** is successful, a pop-up appears, tap ![The OK button.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8411b5b2855e09f6e38f8e41eef6a4934eeda1c945eb0a0c73cbfafe4f2b5963/OKButton.png?cb=3f394bf207d48e521177cd823610d7c6) to return to the Maintenance screen. 6. Tap the ![Eject microSD Card button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_bb2d2c4f5178b0ca88bd751f94925e14a9835c17c195dd13d164d0f96c7fdce0/Eject%20microSD%20Card%20button.png?cb=9699b0e2542791df8cb0da581c939b4f) button, tap ![The OK button.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8411b5b2855e09f6e38f8e41eef6a4934eeda1c945eb0a0c73cbfafe4f2b5963/OKButton.png?cb=3f394bf207d48e521177cd823610d7c6) in the **"microSD card is unmounted"** dialog, and then gently push the microSD card inward to physically eject it from the card slot. 7. Tap ![The shutdown button.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_3664c0edf3b921a8ba2f1902cfd26caa05a2abd36590f4b1fb3fc0e890342a72/ShutdownButton.png?cb=7bfdc63d7bd40a5653eea73c763ffcab) . As instructed in the alert dialog that appears, wait for the Stadium Footswitch 1's LED to become unlit, then switch the Stadium's power switch to **off**. 8. You can now power your Helix Stadium device back on normally. Once powered on, you should see that all items from your backup are now restored. ## Formatting a microSD Card **Important! Formatting a microSD card using Helix Stadium with the following steps is necessary before the card can be used. Formatting will permanently erase all current data on the microSD card.**A properly formatted microSD card must be inserted to add audio files to Showcase Songs and create device backups. A microSD card can be inserted into the rear-panel microSD slot, secured with a screw-on cover. Optionally, unscrew the cover and push the card gently into the slot to remove it. You can purchase microSD cards from most electronics retailers with the following specs: * HC or XC type * U1 speed class or higher * 32GB-512GB in size **Use the following steps to format a microSD card with Helix Stadium.** 1. With a microSD card inserted, tap the Maintenance screen's ![Format microSD Card button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e9bcf57f0b4011423b84fdd47e44b8e39803fdc1a8c91ef962c591d321aadc89/Format%20microSD%20Card%20button.png?cb=26a8ef7bb8c6f395a2683cf25c2c9b57) button. Next, if you are sure it is OK to permanently delete all data on the inserted card, tap ![Yes Format Buttton](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_526a79df06c0205a08c5a2c619a7610368bd7ae7f8ef63f18c0bbd6ee4f75ce2/YesFormat%20Buttton.png?cb=f065929deb8cada985666e4f51318bf7) when prompted to proceed. 2. Wait for the status dialog to complete---***do not adjust any controls or power off your Stadium device during the format process*** . Tap ![The OK button.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8411b5b2855e09f6e38f8e41eef6a4934eeda1c945eb0a0c73cbfafe4f2b5963/OKButton.png?cb=3f394bf207d48e521177cd823610d7c6) when the dialog informs you that the format was completed successfully, and you are returned to the Maintenance screen. 3. While in the Maintenance screen, you can now proceed to create a backup if desired. Once you want to exit the Maintenance screen, perform the following steps: * Tap the ![Eject microSD Card button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_bb2d2c4f5178b0ca88bd751f94925e14a9835c17c195dd13d164d0f96c7fdce0/Eject%20microSD%20Card%20button.png?cb=9699b0e2542791df8cb0da581c939b4f) button, tap ![The OK button.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8411b5b2855e09f6e38f8e41eef6a4934eeda1c945eb0a0c73cbfafe4f2b5963/OKButton.png?cb=3f394bf207d48e521177cd823610d7c6) in the "**microSD card is unmounted**" dialog, and then gently push the microSD card inward to eject it from the card slot physically. * Tap ![The shutdown button.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_3664c0edf3b921a8ba2f1902cfd26caa05a2abd36590f4b1fb3fc0e890342a72/ShutdownButton.png?cb=7bfdc63d7bd40a5653eea73c763ffcab) . As instructed in the alert dialog that appears, wait for the Stadium Footswitch 1's LED to become unlit, then switch the Stadium's power switch to **off**. 4. You can now power your Helix Stadium device back on normally and resume using it. ## Copying a microSD Card's Contents to a New microSD Card If you fill up your inserted microSD card and need more space, your options are to either delete some of your data files from your current card (as covered in the above in the [**microSD Card Data Options**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/helix-stadium-maintenance.md#f1cead70-a567-4c74-9661-39f2001b471f) steps above), or the preferred option, to get a new, larger capacity card, format it in Stadium, and copy all files from your original card to the new card using your macOS or Windows computer. Note that you will need a microSD card reader device for your computer for this process. These steps are as follows. **Tip:** If you plan to create a large number of Showcase songs, it is recommended to purchase a higher-capacity microSD card (e.g., 128 GB or larger), copy your current card's data to it, and switch to the new card now to ensure you have plenty of storage space. 1. **Create a Backup:** With your initial microSD card inserted in Helix Stadium, try to create a Backup first. Power off Helix Stadium and follow the steps for [**Creating a Backup**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/helix-stadium-maintenance.md#83a5eda2-2a1b-4e1e-8759-96f624524c69). Once your backup is complete (or, if your microSD card is too full to create a backup), continue to step 2. 2. **Format a new microSD card:** Power off Helix Stadium, insert a new, larger capacity microSD card into the rear panel slot, and follow the preceding steps for [**Formatting a microSD Card**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/helix-stadium-maintenance.md#format-sdcard). * Once the new card is formatted, power off Helix Stadium and eject the card. 3. **Copy the contents of your initial card to your computer:** Insert your initial Helix Stadium microSD card into a card reader slot on your computer. * Create a folder on your computer's Desktop, or in a location with enough free space to store a copy of all data from your initial card. * Note that the microSD card appears as two different drive partitions on your computer: **STADIUM** and **LOOPER**. * Select the card's **STADIUM** partition and copy the four folders (named **screenshots** , **songs** , **clips** , and **backups**) to your computer folder. * Select the card's **LOOPER** partition and copy the single file (named **loopData.dat**) to your computer folder. * Eject the original card from your computer. 4. **Copy the Data From Your Computer to Your New Card:** Insert your newly formatted microSD card into the computer's card reader and browse to the computer folder where you copied your original card's contents. * Select the four folders in your computer folder (named **screenshots** , **songs** , **clips** , and **backups** ) and copy them into the new inserted card's **STADIUM** partition---***overwriting*** the folder of the same name on the card. * Select the single **loopData.dat** file in your computer folder and copy into the new inserted card's **LOOPER** partition---***overwriting*** the looperData.dat file on the card. * When the copy of all files is complete, eject the card from your computer. 5. Insert the new microSD card into Helix Stadium and power it on. All your original card's song files and other data are available, and you now have plenty more free space for new songs and other data. Note that you'll still also have your original card, along with all its data, which you can retain as a backup and use in Helix Stadium at any time. ## Performing a Factory Reset This action will perform a complete Factory Reset of Helix Stadium. **Important!** A reset will ***permanently delete*** all your created User Presets, Setlists, IRs, Playlists, Templates, Favorites, and User Account data from the device's internal memory, and reset all Global Settings and User Default customized parameters to their factory defaults. It is recommended that you first follow the preceding steps for [**Creating a Backup**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/helix-stadium-maintenance.md#83a5eda2-2a1b-4e1e-8759-96f624524c69) to retain your current data and settings. 1. Tap the **Restore Factory Defaults** button ![Restore Factory Defaults button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e7988352efab08f79d74f8d591ab1fd7c47ca8fef1c380892bb44e272c440909/Restore%20Factory%20Defaults%20button.png?cb=6aeeb1b5fc827549575750de788aff82) . 2. When prompted to reset to factory default settings, tap ![The OK button.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8411b5b2855e09f6e38f8e41eef6a4934eeda1c945eb0a0c73cbfafe4f2b5963/OKButton.png?cb=3f394bf207d48e521177cd823610d7c6) . 3. Wait for the quick reset process to complete---***do not adjust any controls or power off your Stadium device during the process*** . Tap ![The OK button.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8411b5b2855e09f6e38f8e41eef6a4934eeda1c945eb0a0c73cbfafe4f2b5963/OKButton.png?cb=3f394bf207d48e521177cd823610d7c6) when the dialog informs you that the reset is complete, and you are returned to the Maintenance screen. 4. You can optionally proceed with the preceding [**Restoring From Backup**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/helix-stadium-maintenance.md#restore-backup) steps if you wish to restore all data and settings from one of your backups. Or, to exit the Maintenance screen: * Tap ![The shutdown button.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_3664c0edf3b921a8ba2f1902cfd26caa05a2abd36590f4b1fb3fc0e890342a72/ShutdownButton.png?cb=7bfdc63d7bd40a5653eea73c763ffcab) . As instructed in the alert dialog that appears, **wait for the Stadium Footswitch 1's LED to go dark** , then turn Stadium's power switch **off**. * You can now power your Helix Stadium device back on normally and resume using it. ![Helix Stadium Logo.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5bc6580bf43bc398a3ec10217e775b7e0efb89ea9e1e175b93c2021ebcfdd8d7/Helix%20Stadium%20Logo.png?cb=18a3f30492a6729767d0cafc24c2af55) --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Inputs, Outputs, FX Loops, Splits, and Merge Although they may not seem as exciting as amps or effects, Input, Output, FX Loop, Split, and Merge blocks are integral to the sound and performance of your presets. Use these blocks to properly gain stage your levels, create parallel routings, incorporate your favorite external pedals, implement switchable alternate signal paths, and more. Refer to [**Signal Path Routing**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/signal-path-routing.md) for additional details. ![Block_IO_Inst1-2_Signal-Clip.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f83c173a3c5269352179b35653439cbb53a10484e0e83fb659c6db12a662757d/Block_IO_Inst1-2_Signal-Clip.png?cb=249c0bad272f4ce6427089990e042682) Input and Output blocks with signal present (green) and clipped (red) Input and Output blocks appear green to indicate a signal is present, and red if the signal is clipping (overloading). If clipping is indicated, reduce the signal level of your source instrument, the Input or Output block's Trim or Level parameters, the effect and amp blocks' levels, or try adjusting the [**Global Settings \> Ins/Outs**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#6c56362d-db33-4eb0-ac46-2d690ec2d73e) options that affect levels for the Inputs and Outputs in use. Clipping should be avoided to keep your signal free of unwanted distortion. ## Input Blocks By default, all presets, even "empty" New Presets, include at least one Input block (at the left of Path 1A), but each preset can have up to four Input blocks (one each for Path 1A, 1B, 2A, and 2B). ### Selecting an Input 1. **From the Home \> Edit screen, tap an existing Input block** ![Block_IO_Inst1.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5992280932cb96c5cd46139a10918a3f56e006b65dfc883446eb05c70c693508/Block_IO_Inst1.png?cb=fecf9ad042b61a16a0e33b8dbf1bbecc) **.** The Input's source appears in the inspector header; **turn the Lower Knob to change the Output. Tap its name in the inspector header to open the Input List** (below left)**.** 2. **Alternatively, tap an empty Input block** ![EmptyInputBock.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f4d3a1361088b641a74e52fb687f2d287a792a798f303893a5d465c9ca4d48fb/EmptyInputBock.png?cb=29204fce9a566d70d0a43696fede5b6c) **to select it.** Available Inputs appear in the inspector (below right). ![Stadium_InputList.jpg](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_056a9f7a58e0b12bfc1739437d77883666161b8a1234bc391aa1456cae058d05/Stadium_InputList.jpg?cb=a31cc5449bb74084e323d048ba038bf9) Model List \> Input ![Inspector None Input.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_86a8687f27209f0031b2cf26b402008dfa19fab620f2f624387c07e7cf095a96/Inspector%20None%20Input.png?cb=db42e1ea2540ad3204c25edafc809484) Quick input selector (None input block selected on the Home \> Edit screen) **Tip:** Within an empty New Preset, only the main Path 1A and Path 2A are shown. You can also create Paths 1B and 2B as parallel paths, each with its own Input block. See [**Serial vs. Parallel Path Routing**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/signal-path-routing.md). | **Input** | **Description** | |--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | ![Block_None_IO.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1c2fe8026b23711e8346b530df6002f28bebefac93046ad70f37427b3a618da4/Block_None_IO.png?cb=d275a9962ea76419d30896934d189df8) **None** | Disables (mutes) the input block on that path. | | ![Block_IO_Inst_All.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ace13eeb052c1f2c06160cda2b19b15314e2646c285eec5ba730e80baff368f5/Block_IO_Inst_All.png?cb=c6c3cfa1933293b4e7cfe419aab8a415) ![Helix Stadium XL Only feature.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9ab26ca75968a9ba67041de570f1444aa1dbaac5e235cdcac3101e38da111b48/Icon_XL.png?cb=a00c7dd3c9cc40c40e4320fa9670aa23) **Instrument 1, Instrument 2, Instrument 1+2** | Helix Stadium XL ![Helix Stadium XL Only feature.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9ab26ca75968a9ba67041de570f1444aa1dbaac5e235cdcac3101e38da111b48/Icon_XL.png?cb=a00c7dd3c9cc40c40e4320fa9670aa23) has separate Instrument 1 and Instrument 2 inputs. Helix Stadium has a single Instrument input. Connect your guitar, bass, electric violin, electric nose flute, etc. Instrument 1+2 receives the signal from both jacks simultaneously. Note that Instrument 1+2 offers independent parameters, which allow you to connect either two separate instruments or to enable **StereoLink** for connecting one stereo instrument. | | ![Block_IO_Mic.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_bebc352287069046652f1e3dbe1b72fbab5453ffde8c65345069c8c53ce6f4da/Block_IO_Mic.png?cb=48a35199a37e7f7a96e72ad2ee1dcb7c) **Mic** | Receives the signal from the XLR Mic In jack. Overall mic gain is adjusted from [**Global Settings \> Ins/Outs**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#6c56362d-db33-4eb0-ac46-2d690ec2d73e) **\> Mic In Gain**. **Note:** 48V phantom power may be required for some studio microphones and can be enabled from [**Global Settings \> Ins/Outs**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#6c56362d-db33-4eb0-ac46-2d690ec2d73e) **\> Mic In Phantom**. | | ![Block_IO_SPDIF.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_26034238a880160b456cc980686e7691a405983aeb2fc0898928038dc3c9bc5d/Block_IO_SPDIF.png?cb=666e2344edee8e91ec5df7543970f7b1) **S/PDIF** | Receives the signal from the stereo S/PDIF digital input, where you can connect the S/PDIF output from external gear to route its digital signal into Helix Stadium. Set the [**Global Settings \> Ins/Outs \>**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#6c56362d-db33-4eb0-ac46-2d690ec2d73e)**S/PDIF Sample Rate** to match that of your source's S/PDIF sample rate. **NOTE:** Only one digital Input can be used in a preset at the same time. | | ![Block_IO_Return.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_345a5072b5b3b1416a26f7f86b320b7ea7f8e9b63518cbafde1a72a1b2e9cf9c/Block_IO_Return.png?cb=21d718c90ad497173f887d862f86c420) **Return 1, Return 2, Return 1-2** ![Helix Stadium XL Only feature.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9ab26ca75968a9ba67041de570f1444aa1dbaac5e235cdcac3101e38da111b48/Icon_XL.png?cb=a00c7dd3c9cc40c40e4320fa9670aa23) **Return 3, Return 4, Return 3/4** | Returns 1 and 2 (and with Stadium XL ![Helix Stadium XL Only feature.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9ab26ca75968a9ba67041de570f1444aa1dbaac5e235cdcac3101e38da111b48/Icon_XL.png?cb=a00c7dd3c9cc40c40e4320fa9670aa23) , Return 3 and 4) can act as additional mono input blocks. Returns 1/2 (and with Stadium XL ![Helix Stadium XL Only feature.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9ab26ca75968a9ba67041de570f1444aa1dbaac5e235cdcac3101e38da111b48/Icon_XL.png?cb=a00c7dd3c9cc40c40e4320fa9670aa23) , Return 3/4) can act as additional stereo input blocks for processing keyboards, drum machines, or even other multieffects. If a Return or FX Loop processing block exists in the preset, the utilized Return input will be grayed out and unavailable. See [**FX Loop, Send, and Return Blocks**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/input-output-and-mix-blocks.md#input-sendreturn) below. **Note:** Returns 1/2 (Helix Stadium) or Returns 3/4 (Helix Stadium XL ![Helix Stadium XL Only feature.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9ab26ca75968a9ba67041de570f1444aa1dbaac5e235cdcac3101e38da111b48/Icon_XL.png?cb=a00c7dd3c9cc40c40e4320fa9670aa23) ) can be repurposed (via [**Global Settings \> Ins/Outs**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#6c56362d-db33-4eb0-ac46-2d690ec2d73e) \> Return 1/2 \[3/4\] Type) as an always-on **Aux In** for monitoring a Front Of House feed, media player, or stage mixer. | | ![Block_IO_USB.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b137e02c7e4da174766b5cc58c7a431fae7340ba3dcf24a79916e1ea53e0d080/Block_IO_USB.png?cb=6f1480e15c0ef632d0b231a2b9d27f22) **USB 3/4, USB 5/6, USB 7/8** | USB inputs 3/4, 5/6, and 7/8 can all be used for stereo USB audio inputs for your connected computer's DAW software. See [**USB Audio**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/usb-audio.md). Helix Stadium also receives input from USB 1/2, but it's dedicated to monitoring stereo USB audio from your computer, with the USB 1/2 input unprocessed by any of the current preset's processing blocks. As such, USB 1/2 is not available as a selectable Input block source. | ## Input Parameters **Note:** Also see the [**Global Settings \> Ins/Outs**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md) section for additional parameters. ### Input \> Instrument \[X\] Click here to view Input \> Instrument \[X\] settings... **Note:** Helix Stadium XL has **Instrument 1** and **Instrument 2** inputs, where Helix Stadium has a single **Instrument** input. Therefore, parameter names differ slightly between the two. | **Parameter** | **Description** | |------------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Inst \[X\] Input Z** | Helix Stadium has an impedance circuit on its Instrument Input(s) that affects tone and feel by loading your guitar or bass's pickups as they would by an effect pedal or amplifier. When set to **First Block** , the circuit reflects the impedance of the first block, regardless of whether it's enabled or bypassed. When set to **First Enabled** , the impedance circuit reflects the impedance of the first *enabled* block on the path. Or choose a fixed impedance from 10k Ohm to 1M Ohm. A lower value typically results in some high frequency attenuation, lower gain, and an overall "softer" feel. A higher value provides full frequency response, higher gain, and an overall "tighter" feel. | | **Inst \[X\] Pad** | Set to **Off/Inst** for most guitars, basses, or other instruments. Set to **On/Line** for guitars or basses with very hot active pickups or line level devices such as keyboards, synths, and drum machines. There's really no rule here; use what sounds best. **Note:** [**Global Settings \> Ins/Outs**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#6c56362d-db33-4eb0-ac46-2d690ec2d73e)**\> Instrument In \[X\] Pad** settings can globally override all Input blocks' Pad settings. | | **Inst \[X\] Trim** | Sets the Instrument \[X\] digital input level and is used to compensate for overly soft or loud instruments. **Important!** Setting Trim to a value higher (or lower) than 0.0 dB effectively boosts (or attenuates) your signal into the first block, which may result in a less than accurate response. | | **Inst \[X\] Gate** | Turns the Input block's built-in noise gate on and off. | | **1 Thresh** | Sets the noise gate's Threshold. The gate "opens" when the signal's level exceeds the Threshold, allowing audio to pass through. The gate "closes" when the signal's level drops below the Threshold. Adjust Threshold so that only softer, unwanted signals (such as noise or hum) are gated. | | **1 Decay** | Controls the length of time it takes for the open noise gate to close once the signal drops below the Threshold. Increase Decay if you want the gate to gradually lower the signal instead of chopping it off abruptly. | | **StereoLink** | Helix Stadium XL ![Helix Stadium XL Only feature.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9ab26ca75968a9ba67041de570f1444aa1dbaac5e235cdcac3101e38da111b48/Icon_XL.png?cb=a00c7dd3c9cc40c40e4320fa9670aa23) only: When **Off**, Instrument 1 and Instrument 2 parameters are individually adjustable. When **On**, all Instrument 2 parameters are grayed out and their values echo those of the equivalent Instrument 1 parameters. Instrument 1 is routed hard left, and Instrument 2 is routed hard right. | ### Input \> Mic Click here to view Input \> Mic settings... **Note:** 48V phantom power may be required for some studio microphones and can be enabled from [**Global Settings \> Ins/Outs** **\>**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#6c56362d-db33-4eb0-ac46-2d690ec2d73e)**Mic In Phantom**. | **Parameter** | **Description** | |---------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Trim** | Overall mic input gain is set globally from [**Global Settings \> Ins/Outs \>**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#6c56362d-db33-4eb0-ac46-2d690ec2d73e)**Mic In Gain**. This parameter trims the preset's mic input level up or down relative to the overall gain. | | **Low Cut** | Applies a low cut (high pass) filter, letting you remove all audio below a certain frequency. May be useful in removing undesirable plosives or excessive proximity effect. | | **Gate** | Turns the Input block's built-in noise gate on and off. | | **Threshold** | Sets the noise gate's Threshold. The gate "opens" when the signal's level exceeds the Threshold, allowing audio to pass through. The gate "closes" when the signal's level drops below the Threshold. Adjust the Threshold so that only softer, unwanted signals (such as noise or mouth clicks) are gated. | | **Decay** | Controls the length of time it takes for the open noise gate to close once the signal drops below the Threshold. Increase Decay if you want the gate to gradually lower the signal instead of chopping it off abruptly. | ### Input \> Return, S/PDIF, and USB Click here to view Input \> Return, S/PDIF, or USB settings... | **Parameter** | **Description** | |---------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Trim** | Sets the input level and is used to compensate for overly soft or loud signals. | | **Gate** | Turns the Input block's built-in noise gate on and off. | | **Threshold** | Sets the noise gate's Threshold. The gate "opens" when the signal's level exceeds the Threshold, to let audio pass through. The gate "closes" when the signal's level drops below the Threshold. Adjust the Threshold so that only softer, unwanted signals are gated. | | **Decay** | Controls the length of time it takes for the open noise gate to close once the signal drops below the Threshold. Increase Decay if you want the gate to gradually lower the signal instead of chopping it off abruptly. | *** ** * ** *** ## Output Blocks Each preset can have up to four Output blocks (one each for Path 1A, 1B, 2A, and 2B). By default, Output blocks are set to Matrix (1/4", XLR, Phones), which means paths are routed to Helix Stadium's [**Matrix Mixer**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/matrix-mixer.md), where they can be mixed differently for the 1/4", XLR, and Phones outputs. Alternatively, they can be routed directly to a single stereo output (including 1/4", XLR, or Phones), bypassing the Matrix Mixer. ### Selecting an Output 1. **From the Home screen, tap an Output block.** The Output appears in the inspector. **Turn the Lower Knob to change the Output.** 2. **Alternatively, tap its name in the inspector header to open the Output List** (see below)**.** ![Stadium_OutputList.jpg](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8b99b499710d9d30c639523b62c89e645575b91128c6afd3c87fa5db2729e76b/Stadium_OutputList.jpg?cb=b0ff751d7ff49b0b966327dad04d0424) Model List \> Output **Tip:** With an empty New Preset, only the main Path 1A and Path 2A are shown. You can also create Paths 1B and 2B as parallel paths, each with its own Output block. See [**Serial vs. Parallel Path Routing**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/signal-path-routing.md). | **Output** | **Description** | |--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | ![Block_IO_Matrix.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_cf9debb5beb037062beb26489724da965541814e4d7aeb329c1c6513d751b185/Block_IO_Matrix.png?cb=301dc92a3c7cfab508e351f2da698bf6) **Matrix (1/4", XLR, Phones)** | The path is sent to the [**Matrix Mixer**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/matrix-mixer.md), where it can be mixed independently for the 1/4", XLR, and Phones outputs. Even if you don't use the Matrix Mixer, this is still the best option, as it lets you hear the path through all three main outputs simultaneously. The Output blocks of all Factory Presets (and most Preset Templates) are set to **Matrix (1/4", XLR, Phones)** by default. | | ![Block_IO_14Direct.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_589c73a9a7c00414178b058b2a06847abd1ea905bf33dfb6b01d1526086513ec/Block_IO_14Direct.png?cb=8255343a6c3bba57f10465b355ac6d5c) **1/4" Direct** | The path is routed directly to the 1/4" outputs, bypassing the Matrix Mixer entirely. | | ![Block_IO_XLR.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_7120ccde350df3a4baa6c5219578fa6a1907988b5d49108dc4cff1fd8b57df2f/Block_IO_XLR.png?cb=4d95da9cc27d863b9ca42832b780186b) **XLR Direct** | The path is routed directly to the XLR outputs, bypassing the Matrix Mixer entirely. | | ![Block_IO_Phones.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d0b69b77587f8b8aa09e8711e4f639b631d9d25388ff001c8765e778f51bd454/Block_IO_Phones.png?cb=bec0723edbe60863a928bebdcd39348f) **Phones Direct** | The path is routed directly to the Phones output, bypassing the Matrix Mixer entirely. | | ![Block_IO_Path2.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ef3a78e9a000290a2f9780bc45125eb4ea5dd969b916cef237be4d0073661c9e/Block_IO_Path2.png?cb=7ba079c22c783bf63877a864883708f8) **Path 2A, 2B, or 2A+B** | These Outputs only appear for Path 1A and Path 1B Output blocks and are used to route Path 1 into Path 2. This type of "serial" routing provides an extended signal path where more blocks can be added. See [**Serial vs. Parallel Path Routing**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/signal-path-routing.md). | | ![Block_IO_SPDIF.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_26034238a880160b456cc980686e7691a405983aeb2fc0898928038dc3c9bc5d/Block_IO_SPDIF.png?cb=666e2344edee8e91ec5df7543970f7b1) **S/PDIF** | If [**Global Settings \> Ins/Outs \>**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#6c56362d-db33-4eb0-ac46-2d690ec2d73e)**S/DPIF Out** is set to "Direct Out," the Output is routed directly to the S/PDIF digital output. However, the S/PDIF Out can also be set to reflect the Matrix Mixer's 1/4", XLR, or Phones output. This output's level and sample rate can be set using [**Global Settings \> Ins/Outs \>**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#6c56362d-db33-4eb0-ac46-2d690ec2d73e)**S/PDIF Out Level** and **S/PDIF Sample Rate**. **Note:** Set your receiving device and Helix Stadium to the same S/PDIF sample rate. Your receiving device should also be set to follow Helix Stadium as the "master" S/PDIF device. | | ![Block_IO_Send.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_768a7b649a21ed48c14e559e2288a623d96098900672f4aeb6483e9b68f6afd4/Block_IO_Send.png?cb=69cf57fb4a850f7c19451dca50e571b5) **Send 1/2** ![Helix Stadium XL Only feature.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9ab26ca75968a9ba67041de570f1444aa1dbaac5e235cdcac3101e38da111b48/Icon_XL.png?cb=a00c7dd3c9cc40c40e4320fa9670aa23) **Send 3/4** | The path is routed directly to Send 1/2 (and/or on Helix Stadium XL ![Helix Stadium XL Only feature.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9ab26ca75968a9ba67041de570f1444aa1dbaac5e235cdcac3101e38da111b48/Icon_XL.png?cb=a00c7dd3c9cc40c40e4320fa9670aa23) , Send 3/4) in stereo. Sends can act as additional device outputs, added anywhere in your preset's signal path. See [**FX Loop, Send, and Return Blocks**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/input-output-and-mix-blocks.md#input-sendreturn) for details. | | ![Block_IO_USB.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b137e02c7e4da174766b5cc58c7a431fae7340ba3dcf24a79916e1ea53e0d080/Block_IO_USB.png?cb=6f1480e15c0ef632d0b231a2b9d27f22) **USB 1/2, USB 3/4, USB 5/6** | The path is routed directly out USB 1/2, 3/4, or 5/6 in stereo, for routing signals to your computer or mobile devices. USB Outs 7 and 8 are dedicated for DI recording output, and are not available as an Output block. See [**USB Audio**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/usb-audio.md). | ## Output Parameters **Note:** Also see the [**Global Settings \> Ins/Outs**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#6c56362d-db33-4eb0-ac46-2d690ec2d73e) section for additional parameters. Click here to view Input \> Instrument \[X\] settings... | **Parameter** | **Description** | |---------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Pan** | Controls the balance between the Output's left and right channels. When set to Left 100, signal is only heard from the left output; when set to Right 100, signal is only heard from the right output. | | **Level** | Sets the overall level of the Output block. | *** ** * ** *** ## Split and Merge Blocks Split and Merge blocks can be added to create parallel or dual paths, which can be very useful for isolating specific effects, creating alternate switchable routings, and more. See [**Serial vs. Parallel Path Routing**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/signal-path-routing.md). All paths are stereo. When a Split block is added, it splits the signal into Path A and Path B in parallel. When a Merge \> Mixer block is added, it mixes Path B back into Path A. **Note:** The overall output level of the signal is increased slightly for each parallel path added. Adjust the **Level** parameter in the Merge \> Mixer block for the desired output level. ### ![Block_SplitY.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_3930714c7ed6d2559438ca07a78b99736a5548b1069daa0c29ced2f97837f62b/Block_SplitY.png?cb=f6eab808f48efe9b6cd8ac12506d283e) Adding a Split Block 1. **Tap an empty area on Path 1A or Path 2A.** 2. **Tap Split on the left side of the inspector header.** A Split \> Y block is added, and a Path B is created with its own Output block. **Alternatively, drag an existing Amp, Cab, or Effect block down slightly, and it'll be added to a new parallel path B connecting to Path A with Split \> Y and Merge blocks.** 3. **To change the type of Split, turn the Lower Knob or tap the inspector header to open the Split List (see below):** ![The Split block menu list](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_bed846333a4f9cf909b6b9c7d12bf19f97a3646415cc8727d6954b27f73977c4/SplitBlockList.png?cb=40dd997cf492615705756aa34c813dd9) Model List \> Split * Adding a Split to the left of an existing Merge block on path A automatically joins the existing parallel path. * Multiple Split and Merge \> Mixer blocks can be added to Path A for several parallel paths, one after the other. For example, say you want the signal to split into parallel Amp blocks, merge into a dual Cab block, and later, split into parallel Delay and Reverb blocks, and then merge *again* before the Output. There's a lot of flexibility here. * To create a Path B Input block, **drag the Split down to Path B** ---or---**clear the Split by swiping it off the screen.** #### ![Block_SplitY.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_3930714c7ed6d2559438ca07a78b99736a5548b1069daa0c29ced2f97837f62b/Block_SplitY.png?cb=f6eab808f48efe9b6cd8ac12506d283e) Split \> Y Adding a Split block adds a Split \> Y by default. With a Split \> Y block, the stereo input signal is sent to stereo Paths A (upper) and B (lower) evenly, but the **Balance A** and **Balance B** parameters can be used to separate the incoming signal into separate left (to Path A) and right (to Path B) channels. | **Parameter** | **Description** | |---------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Balance A** | Adjusts the stereo balance (pan) of the signal sent to Path A (upper) and Path B (lower). To split the signal into separate left and right channels, set Balance A to **Left 100** and Balance B to **Right 100**. | | **Balance B** | Adjusts the stereo balance (pan) of the signal sent to Path A (upper) and Path B (lower). To split the signal into separate left and right channels, set Balance A to **Left 100** and Balance B to **Right 100**. | #### ![Block_Split_AB.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_15acf7ffa1f47108ab3b22c353d9936db3c1d8cb0a0bbd0415d7c04e8ea82e3a/Block_Split_AB.png?cb=9ac22233c048291ae38c1082975e2937) Split \> A/B Split \> A/B allows for tactile control over which path your signal is routed to---Path A (upper) or Path B (lower). | **Parameter** | **Description** | |---------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Route To** | Determines the amount of the signal sent to Path A (upper) vs. Path B (lower). When set to "Even Split," the signal is split evenly between the two stereo paths. **Tip:** Assign this parameter to a Stomp switch to create an A/B toggle switch, where each press switches between the two paths. Alternatively, assign this parameter to an expression pedal (or MIDI CC) to blend between Paths A and B. See [**Learn Controller**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/bypass-and-controller-assign.md#quick-controller-assign). | #### ![Block_Split_Crossover.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_15bed4e54f0f38f3641df9e7064282853e9b43e4d7b29108e4bbcf1b157e87f6/Block_Split_Crossover.png?cb=93817be2d4801ef6637c34b7f3845602) Split \> Crossover Split \> Crossover splits the incoming signal by frequency, letting you process the high and low frequencies independently. This is especially useful with electric bass, where distortion may be applied only to the high frequencies, allowing the non-distorted low frequencies to pass through. | **Parameter** | **Description** | |---------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Frequency** | Determines the crossover point at which your signal is split into high and low frequencies. Any signal above this frequency is sent to Path A (upper); any signal below this frequency is sent to Path B (lower). | | **Reverse** | When **On** , reverses the path assignments (any signal *above* the crossover frequency is sent to Path B, any signal *below* the crossover frequency is sent to Path A). | #### ![Block_Split_Dynamic.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f973fca35be1c388964e2c36a05d6373c4733220ee2bcb7549ca928d28660393/Block_Split_Dynamic.png?cb=70715706d03540dd67921e016e956880) Split \> Dynamic Split \> Dynamic lets you route your signal based on input level or even your playing dynamics. For example, if Path A has Delay and Reverb blocks and Path B has a Distortion, playing softly (or rolling your guitar's volume knob back) will apply more Delay and Reverb, whereas playing harder (or rolling your guitar's volume knob up) will lower the Delay and Reverb and add Distortion. | **Parameter** | **Description** | |---------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Threshold** | Determines the signal level above which gets routed to Path B. Playing softer (signal below the Threshold) is routed to Path A; playing louder (signal above the Threshold) is routed to Path B. | | **Attack** | Determines how quickly the signal is routed to Path B once reaching the Threshold. | | **Decay** | Determines how quickly the signal returns to Path A once it falls below the Threshold. | | **Reverse** | When **On**, reverses the path assignments (any signal above the Threshold value is sent to Path B, any signal below the Threshold value is sent to Path A). | ### ![Block_Merge.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9026d69ff1f51159315ba998ca10d297a5404994480662ea1e3d122138859bbc/Block_Merge.png?cb=313383d05a5f74c9efc442393319e9de) Adding a Merge Block The primary purpose of a Merge block is to place it after a Split block to rejoin and mix the Path B signal back with Path A. 1. **Tap an empty area on Path 1A or Path 2A.** 2. **Tap Merge on the right side of the inspector header.** A Merge block is added, and a Path B is created with its own Input block (provided a Split block hasn't already been added to the Merge's left). **Alternatively, drag an existing Amp, Cab, or Effect block down slightly, and it'll be added to a new parallel path B connecting to Path A with Split \> Y and Merge blocks.** * Adding a Merge to the right of an existing Split block on path A automatically joins the existing parallel path. * Multiple Split and Merge \> Mixer blocks can be added to Path A for several parallel paths, one after the other. For example, say you want the signal to split into parallel Amp blocks, merge into a dual Cab block, and later, split into parallel Delay and Reverb blocks, and then merge *again* before the Output. There's a lot of flexibility here. * To create a Path B Output block, **drag the Merge down to Path B** ---or---**clear the Merge by swiping it off the screen.** #### ![Block_Merge.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9026d69ff1f51159315ba998ca10d297a5404994480662ea1e3d122138859bbc/Block_Merge.png?cb=313383d05a5f74c9efc442393319e9de) Merge \> Mixer ![MergeMixer_Inspector.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1172332e3639ee7d2e16be2e5faa5d5a94e78ce033a790caa83cec8f717ba05b/MergeMixer_Inspector.png?cb=758181e477d9754b70dbe19d46ac725e) | **Parameter** | **Description** | |----------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **A Level** | Adjusts the output level of Path A (upper). | | **A Pan** | Adjusts the left/right stereo balance of Path A (upper). When set to **Left 100** , only the left signal is passed through; when set to **Right 100**, only the right signal is passed through. | | **B Level** | Adjusts the output level of Path B (lower). | | **B Pan** | Adjusts the left/right stereo balance of Path B (lower). When set to **Left 100** , only the left signal is passed through; when set to **Right 100**, only the right signal is passed through. | | **B Polarity** | Inverts the polarity of Path B. Typically, this should be set to "Normal." | | **Level** | Adjusts the overall output level of the Merge block. | ## FX Loop, Send, and Return Blocks An FX Loop block combines a Send and Return (either mono or stereo) to let you patch your favorite external effects pedals (or rack gear) into your preset's signal flow. The FX Loop block category also has separate Send and Return blocks (mono or stereo) that let you route out to---or in from---external gear in the middle of a signal path. **Note:** Multiple instances of the same **Send** can be used more than once in a preset. However, only one instance of the same **FX Loop** or **Return** can be used in a preset. **Note:** Returns 1/2 (Helix Stadium) or Returns 3/4 (Helix Stadium XL ![Helix Stadium XL Only feature.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9ab26ca75968a9ba67041de570f1444aa1dbaac5e235cdcac3101e38da111b48/Icon_XL.png?cb=a00c7dd3c9cc40c40e4320fa9670aa23) ) can be repurposed (via [**Global Settings \> Ins/Outs** \>](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#6c56362d-db33-4eb0-ac46-2d690ec2d73e) **Return 1/2** \[**3/4** \] Type) as an always-on **Aux In** for monitoring a Front Of House feed, media player, or stage mixer. ### Clip Indicator FX Loop and Return blocks turn red if their input signal is too high (as shown below), at which point you should reduce the level of the preceding Stadium blocks and/or external gear to avoid clipping. ![Block_FXLoop_FXLoopClipped.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_4d6be275e39357eb92f0360625ccdd541edc7fc54885a7066dcb3085b56173a4/Block_FXLoop_FXLoopClipped.png?cb=2347151781ad4294196fb13a1b3ded8d) FX Loop block -clipping ### ![FX Loop block](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a2631efd623b6d0306799526fb5ad1d4ebb9b51f73674c28c976d1bf0089f793/Block_FXLoop_FXLoop.png?cb=0930bd92825371310e6186baf9454094) Adding an FX Loop Block 1. **From the Home \> Edit screen, tap an empty area on a path where you want to add an FX Loop block.** Categories appear in the inspector. 2. **Press \[\>\] (or swipe the category buttons) and tap the FX Loop category button.** The Model List opens (see below). 3. **Tap the desired item to load it. Alternatively, double-tap the desired item to load it** ***and*** **close the Model List.** ![ModelBroaswer_FXLoop.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9b66458acb97f21146e535b4d149006066e51d0ca262ee055993447d0bab6ec4/ModelBroaswer_FXLoop.png?cb=ff100f7b2edd64ca22979d981c9a9746) Model List \> FX Loop **Note:** The FX Loops' input and output level can be changed globally from [**Global Settings \> Ins/Outs \>**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#6c56362d-db33-4eb0-ac46-2d690ec2d73e)**FX Loop \[X\] Level**. An FX Loop block's Send and Return level can further be adjusted individually within your preset using the FX Loop's Send and Return parameters, as shown in the following tables. #### ![FX Loop block](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a2631efd623b6d0306799526fb5ad1d4ebb9b51f73674c28c976d1bf0089f793/Block_FXLoop_FXLoop.png?cb=0930bd92825371310e6186baf9454094) **FX Loop \> FX Loop** | **Parameter** | **Description** | |---------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Send** | Adjusts the level of the FX Loop's Send output(s). 0.0 dB is unity gain. | | **Return** | Adjusts the level of the FX Loop's Return input(s). 0.0 dB is unity gain. | | **Mix** | Blends the FX Loop signal vs. the dry signal passed through the FX Loop block. When set to 0%, the path bypasses the FX Loop completely. When set to 100%, the entire signal is fed through the FX Loop, and no dry-through signal is heard. (This means that if you don't currently have your external gear connected to the Send \& Return jacks, you won't hear any output signal unless you bypass the FX Loop block!) When connecting time-based pedals like delays or reverbs, it's best to leave the pedal's Mix at 100% and control the amount of the pedal's effect from the FX Loop block's Mix knob. This helps minimize phase issues and latency. For pedals like distortion, fuzz, or compression, it's common to keep the FX Loop block's Mix knob at 100%, but lowering this value can sometimes provide cool parallel effect sounds. | | **Trails** | When **Off** , the return signal from any external gear is instantly muted when the FX Loop block is bypassed. When **On,**the return signal continues to decay naturally when the block is bypassed, or a different snapshot is selected. | #### ![Send block](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_768a7b649a21ed48c14e559e2288a623d96098900672f4aeb6483e9b68f6afd4/Block_IO_Send.png?cb=69cf57fb4a850f7c19451dca50e571b5) FX Loop \> Send | **Parameter** | **Description** | |---------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Send** | Adjusts the level of the Send's output(s). 0.0 dB is unity gain. | | **Dry Thru** | Adjusts the level of the dry (unaffected) signal passed through the Send block, independent of the Knob 1 (Send) level. Normally, this should be set to 0.0dB, but when set to -120.0 dB, the Send block can act as an A/B switch, toggling between sending signal to the external device (block enabled) and sending signal through to the next block (block bypassed). | #### ![Return block](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_345a5072b5b3b1416a26f7f86b320b7ea7f8e9b63518cbafde1a72a1b2e9cf9c/Block_IO_Return.png?cb=21d718c90ad497173f887d862f86c420) FX Loop \> Return | **Parameter** | **Description** | |---------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Return** | Adjusts the level of the Return's input(s). 0.0 dB is unity gain. | | **Mix** | Adjusts the balance between the Return signal and the dry signal passed through the Return block. When set to 0%, the path bypasses the Return completely. When set to 100%, the entire signal is fed from the Return, and no dry signal is heard. | --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Librarian View The Librarian window provides access to all Helix Stadium file assets, which include **Presets** , **Cab IRs** , **Favorites** , **Preset Templates** , **Showcase Songs** , and **Proxy Clones**. ![App_Librarian_Preset.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_fe9239e4e493792bf28278c40d77f27d495f1c864c4be028ab355552c946b0ff/App_Librarian_Preset.png?cb=bab902d35ce668ef45e8e5779bd3e404) The Librarian View \> Preset List Select a Library in the left column (Presets, Cab IRs, Favorites, Templates, Songs, or Clones) to display its contents list. Much like working in the Librarian lists on your Stadium device's screen, you can fully manage all your files in the app. Additionally, the Librarian's Import and Export options allow you to copy and move files between your computer and Stadium device. See the following sections for details. **Tip:** Type into the Search field ![SearchPresets.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_cb2a28f0c67fe7fed02fe1b34890c0d24acd3ee08dffa0c0f1f4f52e3cbe6695/SearchPresets.png?cb=9ebcbff881732bdf5b293d5935583018) at the top of the Preset Librarian to easily find the presets you want. ## Importing \& Exporting Presets and Setlists Helix Stadium presets and setlists can be exported using the Helix Stadium app to build a virtually unlimited library of Stadium preset (.hsp) and setlist (.hss) files. These presets and setlists can be imported into your Stadium device's internal memory at any time using either the app's Home View \> Preset Panel or the Preset Librarian. Please also refer to the [**Presets and Setlists**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/presets.md) page. **Tip:** Helix Stadium presets, setlists, IRs, Clones, and Favorites can be imported and exported between your device and the **Helix Stadium Native plugin** , as covered in the sections on this page and in the [***Helix Stadium Native Owner's Manual***](https://line6.com/support/manuals/helix-stadium-native). You can also import original Helix/HX/Native Plug-in preset files (.hlx) and setlist files (.hls) to add them to your Stadium preset library, following the steps below. Please see the **Presets \>** [**Importing Presets**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/presets.md#451aaa01-5512-4407-92ac-47968b6bb986) section for details on preset compatibility. ### Importing \& Exporting Presets **To Import a Preset:** From either the app's Home View Preset Panel or the Preset Librarian, select an empty preset location and use one of the several **Preset** **Import** options, as shown below. ![Import Preset Panel.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a3d0bffc6109f1067ac063790ae90756538eb7cc313f9dcfafaf27892302be97/Import%20Preset%20Panel.png?cb=023c4b9b2d6791933c2f3180e64a6ae0) Importing a preset \> Preset Panel ![Import Preset Librarian.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ce2effa0073fe51b2ab32c8494c006c3a033637b484487383dd9a3ddfab4800a/Import%20Preset%20Librarian.png?cb=f059acdbd2c49648b3a888156bc77147) Importing a preset \> Preset Librarian ![Import Preset Context Menu.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_62532dfbe4434ecd9ad81bec0facc6ecc949fb97b58fa8467b2b62f51b61b90d/Import%20Preset%20Context%20Menu.png?cb=54aff8a0d0e68eb348f921a2942bff1c) Importing a preset \> Preset right-click menu * Browse to your computer folder where preset files are stored, select one (or multiple presets), and import. Note that if you select a preset location that already contains a preset, the imported preset will **permanently overwrite it**. * Alternatively, access the **Import Preset** command from the application's main File menu, or drag preset files directly from your computer and drop them into the desired preset list location within either the Helix Stadium app's Home View Preset Panel or Preset Librarian. **Tip:** You can also import preset (.hsp) files created with the Helix Stadium Native plugin. Also, see the [***Helix Stadium Native Owner's Manual***](https://line6.com/support/manuals/helix-stadium-native). **To Export a Preset:** Select any Factory, User, or Setlist preset(s) within either the app's Home View Preset Panel or the Preset Librarian View list and use one of the several Export Preset options. ![Export Preset Panel.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c15affc52f10f651c474468e8957b4c738c871d05cdd62f325d891823a31c057/Export%20Preset%20Panel.png?cb=0ad22f6e011fc8a2407e8a15de9885bd) Exporting a preset \> Preset Panel ![Export Preset Librarian.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_00c21ea85ebca9050906ed2a0813a96853a9332a49eeb05e64ce296b2d06cb64/Export%20Preset%20Librarian.png?cb=694fa717b12941228bb1d27c04d99aa6) Exporting a preset \> Preset Librarian ![Export Preset Context Menu.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_68bdcc057329ba544654486330bedb5fb762830fce06030e4e3f4ee42471206d/Export%20Preset%20Context%20Menu.png?cb=d9b7f264de83766e26fbac9cf7b0c7bf) Exporting a preset \> Preset right-click menu * Browse to the desired computer folder where you'd like to store your Stadium preset files and export them. * Alternatively, access the **Export Preset** command from the application's main File menu, or drag preset files directly from any preset list location within either the Helix Stadium app's Home View Preset Panel and drop them into a computer folder to export them. **Tip:** You can also export preset (.hsp) files to be used in the Helix Stadium Native plugin by exporting directly the plugin's Preset folder (which, by default, is located in the /Documents/Line 6/Helix Stadium Native directory). Also, see the [***Helix Stadium Native Owner's Manual***](https://line6.com/support/manuals/helix-stadium-native). ### Managing Presets Use the buttons at the top of the Librarian's Presets panel to **Delete** presets from the current User Presets folder or Setlist, or to **Create a Setlist** that includes alias copies of the currently selected presets. (Presets within the Factory Presets folder are read-only---they cannot be deleted, but can be exported to your computer or dragged into other preset folders/setlists to make editable copies of them.) ![Preset Manage Buttons.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a3b7cbaf36043d0d1db4ae5ad658c2f57d138aa8069152134d9312bd4a0a3d1c/Preset%20Manage%20Buttons.png?cb=2e515be9d4009ea31c01bc1cb439f5e2) The Manage Preset buttons **Tip:** Click and drag any preset(s) up/down within the Preset panel to reorder the Library list. ### Importing \& Exporting Setlists **To Import a Setlist:** Use one of the **Setlist** **Import** options from either the app's Home View Preset Panel or the Preset Librarian. ![Import Setlist Panel.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8d680734fceb7865f266629f5d43857835de52ba9356ed10521d435598f8a6c2/Import%20Setlist%20Panel.png?cb=4f6f238b2907064a28a762410841ba19) Importing a Setlist \> Preset Panel ![Import Setlist Librarian.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ca3e48890a1a29319388e50c6804dc0d6c6264f5c6dcddcc41cc4e356cc55e1b/Import%20Setlist%20Librarian.png?cb=f519bf85c073579a951224aa5934b852) Importing a Setlist \> Preset Librarian * Browse to the computer folder where Stadium setlist files are stored, select one or more setlist(s), and import them. The imported setlist will be added as the last Setlist. * Alternatively, you can access the **Import Setlist** command from the application's main File menu. **Note:** Since setlists contain only "alias" type presets, an original reference preset file for each imported setlist preset is added into the User Presets folder. **To Export a Setlist:** Use one of the several **Export Setlist** options from either the app's Home View Preset Panel or the Preset Librarian. ![Export Setlist Panel.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e913340de117cd2f9283418759abf796fe1c4fcdf5b21bdd73fb524c525f2e7e/Export%20Setlist%20Panel.png?cb=75b1dc698723d45e10226954da720a8e) Exporting a Setlist \> Preset Panel ![Export Setlist Librarian.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d402c8f3efc0d630ff49f74e52d7a3cdf430db51d3592514132828e0a4551c10/Export%20Setlist%20Librarian.png?cb=13d9f9dfee92256c6842580fcf0b1e6f) Exporting a Setlist \> Preset Librarian ![Export Setlist Context Menu.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_65c7cfac6b54ccd41ebd84b133f4adba5d1b3219b36b25dd162f807cf9a95d7e/Export%20Setlist%20Context%20Menu.png?cb=b73bb7d3fdf445ed517610885bbff21b) Exporting a Setlist \> Preset Librarian right-click menu * Alternatively, access the **Export Setlist** command from the application's main File menu. * Browse to the desired computer folder where you'd like to store your Stadium setlist files and export them. **Note:** An exported setlist is saved as a single (.hss) file on your computer. It includes full copies of each of its preset files. Therefore, when you import a setlist back into Stadium, it is added as a new setlist, and all its presets are added as new presets in the USER PRESETS folder. If presets by the same name already exist in your USER PRESET, copies of the presets are added, appended with "(1)" to their names (rather than overwriting any of your existing presets). **Tip:** You can also export Setlist (.hsf) files to be used in the Helix Stadium Native plugin by exporting to any folder on your computer, then using the plugin's Import Setlist function. Also, see the [***Helix Stadium Native Owner's Manual***](https://line6.com/support/manuals/helix-stadium-native). ### Managing Setlists Use the buttons at the top of the Preset Librarian's Setlist panel to create a **New** setlist or **Delete** or **Duplicate** the currently selected setlist(s). **Tip:** Click and drag any setlist(s) up/down within the Setlist panel to reorder the list. ![Setlist Manage Buttons.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f20d3211f2e8cb83bb946715a9173fba49804f53af64e63fcd840586f66e085c/Setlist%20Manage%20Buttons.png?cb=6d970e6f2cb9ea9a52bc3710cedc3215) The Manage Setlist buttons ## Importing \& Exporting IR Files Helix Stadium devices can utilize third-party Impulse Response .wav files within one or both tab locations within a Cab block, providing endless possibilities for speaker emulation. Please refer to the [**Cab IR**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/cab-blocks.md#cab-irs) section for details on using IRs. Many vendors now offer expertly captured IRs of practically any speaker and mic combination. Once you've purchased and saved IR .wav files to your macOS or Windows^®^ computer, launch the Helix Stadium application and import your desired IRs into your Stadium device's IR library. **Note:** The Helix Stadium device can store a library of up to 2,048 IRs, which can either be created or imported. If you import several hundred IR files, the next time you power on your Helix Stadium device, it may take a few extra minutes to complete a necessary indexing process for the IR Library. Future startups of your device will not require this additional indexing time. ### Importing IR Files Within the Librarian View, click the **Cab IRs** button ![Edit_CabIRLibButton.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_99a48bda0db555fecf7b717781b50d2524d8b4e5faa2e33be3bcbc62c2c60441/Edit_CabIRLibButton.png?cb=7973c6fc7d4154b366d599e59d3d8cf6) within the left column to open the Cab IRs librarian. The Cab IRs librarian is initially empty. **Note:** Import of mono or stereo IR .wav files of any sample rate and bit depth is supported. IRs are automatically converted and processed within Helix Stadium as 48kHz, 32-bit float, mono. 1. Click on the **Import** button ![Edit_UploadButton.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c3e50adcf5fa156263a6061e05ffc7d6d671564a73ff7ee2324455d2d8b7c34a/Edit_UploadButton.png?cb=d74b25c4a569dc3a9ec6cfe6cb2be9fe) , browse to the folder on your computer where your IR .wav files are stored, select the desired IRs, and import them. * Alternatively, you can drag IR .wav files from your computer folder and drop them directly into the Cab IR librarian to import them. 2. When the import is complete, you'll see all IRs appear in the librarian's right pane. These IRs are then available for any preset's Cab blocks. ![Cab IR Librarian Empty.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f6c0188450a1fe2b419bb8f1117bbb3cf663e87a2f71f8db8e8f38e65f55d145/Cab%20IR%20Librarian%20Empty.png?cb=ccc6d38b871017389b304bf24af9cc2c) The Cab IRs Librarian - initially empty ![Cab IR Librarian Imported.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b9a1caadac732cd3116ccbe59aa4c36126fe0f970f84564bda0b87536d48eb25/Cab%20IR%20Librarian%20Imported.png?cb=a70f6bc072a6af0457580b780f1c7b5a) The Cab IRs Librarian - IRs imported 3. **To Use Your Imported IRs:** Add a Cab block within your preset, select either of the tabs within Cab's Inspector, select the Cab IR category, and your list of imported IRs is available for selection. You can add up to two IRs within a Cab block. Please refer to the [**Cab IR**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/cab-blocks.md#cab-irs) page for additional details. ### Exporting IR Files * **To Export IRs:** Select the desired IR file(s) within the Cab IRs Librarian right pane, click the **Export** button, browse to the desired folder on your computer, and save. ![Export IRs.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f7e905d18377ed879765bd8e2943c532431bcf5c0c7bc3ed5c6772110b25993f/Export%20IRs.png?cb=97505da544234926d9f6a7a9aca0ebaa) Exporting Cab IRs ### Managing IRs Use the buttons at the top of the Cab IR Librarian to **Delete** ^\*^ or **Rename** the selected IRs, or to create a**New Folder** for managing your library of IR files. Please also refer to the [**Cab IR List**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/cab-blocks.md#cab-ir-browser) section for additional details. ^**\***^**Note:**Deleting an IR file from the IR Library that is used within any saved preset will result in the preset's Cab block changing to "UNRESOLVED," with no IR loaded in the respective tab. * Note that you can select the desired IRs in the list, then click **New Folder** to automatically move all selected IRs into the newly created folder in a single step. * Folders always appear at the top of the Cab IR list. Drag IRs between the IR list and your folders to move and arrange them as desired. * Click on a folder to show its contents on the right. ![Manage IR Buttons.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8588b97b111eaed4e885a0b7b1639453ac0022cb389b7cbf0139fd93c1e2077a/Manage%20IR%20Buttons.png?cb=ec852a1a69636c16ac33d322543711e9) The Manage Cab IRs buttons ![Cab IR Folder.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f03c64540e5b0e3e40aa2a0971735706f380d1ef8607bf629a1ada728510cddd/Cab%20IR%20Folder.png?cb=27190ff1297bf29860153aea5bca37e2) The Cab IR List \> IR Folder selected ## Importing \& Exporting Favorites and Preset Templates The Helix Stadium app's Librarian View also offers import and export for your Favorites and Preset Templates. This allows you to back up these files on your computer and restore them individually as desired. Within the **Librarian** **View** , click **Favorites** ![Edit_FavoritesButton.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_3464b6cd6ed563b5f8df847aceef5177e14478326ed1f9ade3d43f8051d1d286/Edit_FavoritesButton.png?cb=e0579158fa245e6d2aaefb7787541a63) or**Templates** ![Edit_TemplatesButton.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e7940b7399598d758914f8b5a7b9ed9f8a0aba4c37b41675312211d0d3fed846/Edit_TemplatesButton.png?cb=db9e607c3d12302bdd5a3d9be782a06c) within the left column to open the desired Librarian window. The Librarian will show all Favorites or Preset Templates stored within the connected Helix Stadium's internal memory. Please also refer to the [**Favorites**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/favorites.md) and [**Saving Preset Templates**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/saving-presets-preset-templates.md#saving-template) sections for details. ### Importing Favorites or Preset Templates Click on the Librarian's **Import** button, browse to the folder on your computer where your Favorite or Template files are stored, and select and import the desired file(s). Alternatively, you can drag Favorite or Template files from your computer folder and drop them directly into the app's respective Librarian to import them. ![Favorites Import.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d615a26016deaab0a976ff2008d6cc19f33d4f481fadb118ec12d0c0982e20d1/Favorites%20Import.png?cb=b817b4a0120d67fa28fe1c5250e15dbd) Favorites Librarian - Importing Favorites **Tip:**You can import either Stadium Favorite (.hls) or original Helix Favorite (.fav) files. ![Import Template.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_57936dc68df25acfd376dcdfa22be8ce743718f54389a49971554a7303de6f5d/Import%20Template.png?cb=159ce7059cb902c073e0c2be96e1377d) Templates Librarian - Importing Templates **Tip:** A set of Preset Templates is already included to get you started. ### Exporting Favorites or Template Files Select the desired file(s) within the Librarian right pane, click the **Export** button, browse to the desired folder on your computer, and save. Alternatively, you can drag Favorite or Preset Template files to a computer folder to export them. ![Export Favorites.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1cfabbf1f02fba6afab5a3e6b41fb920d1f660a27a5c3a3ef18f8ed46a6d8122/Export%20Favorites.png?cb=b4569694601ce7b8f577b99ae7338646) Favorites Librarian - Exporting Favorites ![Export Template.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_60481a2cd47b033d17a8bd2bb94a1a2bc17516fca469a9c67a60b4d22ae3a3b8/Export%20Template.png?cb=50dc7930775c0b11c965946789ae1781) Templates Librarian - Exporting Templates ### Managing Favorites and Templates Use the buttons at the top of the Favorites or Templates Librarian to **Delete** or **Rename** the selected files, or to create a**New Folder** to manage your Favorites and Templates. ![Manage Favorites-Templates Buttons.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_28564e1aab5618c5520eb1dd8800003a418f17983cdc13b8d32d282e809b85a5/Manage%20Favorites-Templates%20Buttons.png?cb=a5a95092aea7865132e8f3d3c21c08cb) The Manage Favorites buttons (left) and Manage Templates buttons (right) * Note that you can select the desired Favorites or Templates from the list, then click **New Folder** to automatically move all selected files into the created folder in a single step. * Drag files between the Librarian list and your folders to move and arrange them as desired. * Click on a folder to show its contents on the right. **Tip:** You can also export Favorite (.hsf) files to be used in the Helix Stadium Native plugin by exporting to any folder on your computer, then using the plugin's Import Favorites function. (Helix Stadium Templates are not supported in the plugin.) Also, see the [***Helix Stadium Native Owner's Manual***](https://line6.com/support/manuals/helix-stadium-native). ## Managing Songs and Playlists The Songs Librarian manages all Showcase songs and playlists stored on Helix Stadium. Click the Songs button in the left column to display all current playlists and songs. Click on the SONG LIBRARY folder or an existing playlist to access its list of songs. **Note:** Creating a new song is accomplished in the app's New Song window---see [**Creating Showcase Songs**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/song-view.md). ![Song Library List.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_621479d4e7a979bdb4c3d3f3a7fe4fdb6d5cb5d19049ec2d31b0ac52936fdd3a/Song%20Library%20List.png?cb=1c878b9547239ab4bba70bd266beb2fd) Songs Librarian \> SONG LIBRARY list ### Managing the Song List * **To Reorder Songs in the List:**Click to select one or multiple songs in the list and drag up/down to the desired position. * **To Rename a Song:** Click twice on a song in the list, type in your custom name, and press Enter/Return. * **To Add Songs to a New Playlist:** Select the desired songs in the list and click the **Create Playlist button** ![Create Playlist Button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_03efb967617ad3352ebb33346ea6ab8638ef6f71233065b008407855ca66a44e/Create%20Playlist%20Button.png?cb=dc3733539430f107e1c6c24e708005b9) at the top of the list. This creates a new playlist in the left pane and adds the selected songs to it. * **To Add Songs to an Existing Playlist:** Select the desired songs in the list and drag them onto the desired playlist in the left pane. * **To Clear Songs from the SONG LIST or a Playlist:** Click to select the songs in the list and click the **Clear button** ![Song Clear Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_24403778459ae1aef5346f579d8c5a518d91c86d2701efc226feb4f17cb8cc8b/Song%20Clear%20Button.png?cb=e0598a9a72f2b4def8ec3b6b1bd624b1) at the top of the list: * Deleting any SONG LIST song permanently deletes the song from Helix Stadium, including all "alias" versions of the song from playlists. * Deleting any playlist song clears the alias song from the current playlist only. The original, referenced song in the SONG LIBRARY and any other playlists' instances of the song remain undeleted. **Note:** When the currently loaded song is selected in the Song List (as shown in the Song Library List image above) the Clear song button is dimmed. You cannot clear the current song. ### Managing Playlists ![Manage Playlists.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8c1750bccaf856fd58950e0659f9bc639caa4918bd8679dfa5cb591571146c9c/Manage%20Playlists.png?cb=cd436d31d08404d11ab80f1a3b49e766) Songs Librarian \> Playlists column Once you create one or more playlists, they appear in the Playlists column of the Song Librarian, as shown above. Click to select a playlist to access its contents in the right column list. * **To Reorder Playlists:**Click to select a playlist and drag it up/down to the desired position. * **To Rename a Playlist:** Click twice on a playlist, type in your custom name, and press Enter/Return. * **To Create a New Playlist:** Click the **New button** ![New Playlist Button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b2ec387ef23f2c60ddb4be51868c09c457f2158c27320e22583dcc7359f80544/New%20Playlist%20Button.png?cb=32f41246fcb6bf5d2997b2f51b07cf44) at the top of the Playlist column. This creates a new, empty playlist in the left Playlists column. Optionally, enter a custom playlist name and press Enter/Return. You can drag Songs from the SONG LIST folder's right column list onto a playlist to add alias songs to it. * **To Duplicate a Playlist:** Select the desired playlist in the Playlists column and click the **Duplicate button** ![Duplicate Setlist.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_52bfdbae873892f6237108d5b47aa3f2a97c08963605e4152ab045c3c742ffce/Duplicate%20Setlist.png?cb=4a2bc19d233ebd7917192a675ca59bf8) . This creates a copy of the selected playlist and all its songs. * **To Delete a Playlist:** Click to select a playlist and click the **Delete button** ![Delete Songs button.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_97c280e5ad551f33710e634e9168a20c204e148f50ced0e2ae7599b018f981d7/Delete%20Songs%20button.png?cb=d83a87299f8a00372939a5654a9debfe) at the top of the Playlists column. This deletes the selected playlist and all its "alias" songs. (The original, referenced songs in the SONG LIBRARY remain undeleted.) ## Importing \& Exporting Clone Files Helix Stadium devices can create Amp+Cab, Amp, Preamp, and Distortion clone files. The Clones Library folders are initially empty, awaiting your creation or import of clone files---please refer to the [**Clones**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/clones.md)section for details on creating your own Clones. Helix Stadium can store a maximum of 2,048 Clone files. ### Importing Clone Files Within the app's Librarian View, click ![The Clones Librarian Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1d004a3f1171c3a15398d2c71fe415af3af79ed7f0a7f55031a4df30983ac687/Clone%20Librarian%20Button.png?cb=ed112e0918ec54d860ec25e32816a65c) within the left column to open the Clones librarian (below left). Select the desired clone type's folder (Amp+Cab, Amp, Preamp, or Distortion) to access its files. You can optionally also create your own subfolders to manage your clones, as covered below. ![Clones Librarian.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_aca006fd462bf9179317281b2e9d6cdf1ab05c1defbb8ac510e47f2a6cc39e58/Clones%20Librarian.png?cb=c97bf710d45c30947fb18abfb035986d) The Clones Librarian 1. Click on the **Import** button ![The Clones Import Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f1c7e83602b42636ee36270d29c8ea0c82df3e99e8ed560d2daac714df63913b/Clones%20Import%20Button.png?cb=3fb50dab9fd3f1a03ebdac9e692a11f2) , select the desired clone files, then click **Open**. (Note that it is not necessary to choose the clone type folder---the selected clone file(s) are automatically imported into Stadium's correct Amp, Amp+Cab, Preamp, or Distortion folder.) * Alternatively, you can drag clone files from your computer folder and drop them directly into the Clones Librarian - USER folder to import them. 2. When the import is complete, you'll see all clones appear in the respective clone folder's right pane, as shown below. These clones are now available for clone blocks within your Stadium presets. ![Imported Clones Librarian.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_2bf6d802582672f3c3290e8ce894593681f1aaebc2a3bc7ba98c22d620f3f624/Imported%20Clones%20Librarian.png?cb=d1bcf26af7bfd70f7240c898fb79209a) Clone files are imported (Distortion clones) 3. **To Use Your Imported Clones:** In the Helix Stadium app's Home - Edit screen, add an Amp+Cab, Amp, Preamp, or Distortion Clone block to your preset, select the CLONES category in the Model List, then click in the Inspector's Clone Selection box to display the list of clone files, as shown below. Please refer to the [**Clones**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/clones.md) section for additional details. ![Selecting Clone.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_bdfa0f29109a87c27f6a21c030c6acf89af64af61fcc84b4d4eaa15f616ddb5c/Selecting%20Clone.png?cb=1717add53ce6af08d106cf0e81c61e74) Selecting a Distortion clone in the Home view ### Exporting Clone Files * **To Export Clones:** Select the desired clone file(s) within the Clones librarian right pane, click ![The Clones Export Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_0fa9290285f959bced9797f8f4995c22d4429879e689c96b7441e350dba6373d/Clones%20Export%20Button.png?cb=19f6a399cde4e83d440a74cf1165868f) , browse to the desired folder on your computer, then save. This is a simple way to create backup copies of all your clones and to share them with other Stadium owners. * Alternatively, drag clone files from the app's Clones Librarian and drop them in a folder on your computer to export them there. **Tip:** You can also export Clone (.clone) files to be used in the Helix Stadium Native plugin by exporting directly the plugin's Clones folder (which, by default, is located in the /Documents/Line 6/Helix Stadium Native directory). Also, see the [***Helix Stadium Native Owner's Manual***](https://line6.com/support/manuals/helix-stadium-native). ### Managing Clones Select a clone type folder in the left column and select the desired clone file(s) in the right pane. Use the buttons at the top of the Clones Librarian to **Add a New Folder** or **Rename** or **Delete** the selected clone files. * **To add a new folder** , select the desired Amp, Amp+Cab, Distortion, or Preamp category folder in the left column, click ![Clones - New Folder button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_60e1ab6cc8cb3ef1072b350770fd2081e0c2e906002ea2acc90439e86d5368f5/Clones-Add%20Folder%20button.png?cb=a28546299d29f2c4702ea74d27dee99e) , then enter a name for the folder. Clone folders automatically appear at the top of the list. Adding folders is a great way to help you manage your clone files. * To move clone files, drag them up in the right-column list and drop them into the desired folder. * Click on a folder to show its contents, where you can select its individual clones, as shown below. ![Adding a clone folder.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d5a925ce8c3dca8285c1f442d788268ea38dd10453b79319f49e9f9a87941ec7/Adding%20a%20clone%20folder.png?cb=f25d37bce82275e6540022e025a4d0cc) New folders added in the Amp Clone category * **To rename a clone file** , select any individual clone or folder within the Clones librarian right pane, click ![The Clones Rename Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_6f21d197a4c285f419ab377f13b33130a6558818aa3b8956645906bb5ef3ac8c/Clones%20Rename%20Button.png?cb=03229236a79c60d16be8e163d7c4ac29) , enter your new name, and press your Enter/Return key to accept the name. * **To delete one or more clone files** , select the clone(s) or folder(s) within the Clone category, and click ![The Clones Delete Button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9d4237a9a3c4134858f66c9a9c055cac4852fddeedf7eb8b3f585cfbbfe57d3e/Clones%20Delete%20Button.png?cb=6b176f584cf8df345f1b2dde8845fde2) to permanently delete them from your device.\* **\*Important!** Deleting a folder will also delete all clones within it. There is no undo for deleting clones and folders. Use the **Export Clones** option (see above) or [**create a full Helix Stadium backup**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/helix-stadium-maintenance.md#83a5eda2-2a1b-4e1e-8759-96f624524c69) ***before*** deleting clones to ensure you have copies. **Note:**Deleting a clone file from the Clones Library that is used within any saved preset will result in the preset's clone block changing to "UNKNOWN," with no clone loaded within the block. --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Loopers Helix Stadium has a few different Loopers: **Deluxe** , **1 Switch** , and **Shuffling Looper**, each of which is available in Mono and Stereo versions. A Looper block can exist anywhere on either Path 1 or Path 2---one Looper block per preset, maximum. The Looper records to Stadium's internal memory, with the following maximum loop recording times. | **Looper Model** | **Maximum Loop Time (Full Speed)** | **Maximum Loop Time (Half Speed)** | |-------------------------------|------------------------------------|------------------------------------| | **Deluxe Looper (Mono)** | 120 seconds | 240 seconds | | **1 Switch Looper (Mono)** | 120 seconds | 240 seconds | | **Shuffling Looper (Mono)** | 60 seconds | n/a | | **Deluxe Looper (Stereo)** | 60 seconds | 120 seconds | | **1 Switch Looper (Stereo)** | 60 seconds | 120 seconds | | **Shuffling Looper (Stereo)** | 30 seconds | n/a | **Important!** If you load a different preset while looping, loop playback/recording will stop unless the preset you select next includes the ***same*** type of Looper block (the same Deluxe, 1 Switch, or Shuffling Looper type, and the same Mono or Stereo type), *and* the Looper block exists on the same path in both presets. Your recorded loop is not saved with the preset and is cleared from memory once you power off your Stadium device. ## Adding a Looper Block 1. **From the Home \> Edit screen, tap an empty area on a path where you want to add the Looper block.** Categories appear in the inspector. 2. **Press \[\>\] (or swipe the category buttons) and tap the Looper category button.** The Model List opens (see below). 3. **Tap the desired item to load it. Alternatively, double-tap the desired item to load it** ***and*** **close the Model List.** ![ModelBrowser_Loopers.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_7da085ab7a3652dce2ffd026c409538d0b6fa23a4d12964d00b846ee10b7532e/ModelBrowser_Loopers.png?cb=afc8c8a612f5da12fa9326042e3b10b4) Model List \> Looper Note that Looper types are available as Mono or Stereo, selectable in the right sidebar. If stereo loop playback is not required, or if you'll be placing mono blocks after the Looper in your signal flow, it is best to choose a mono Looper. Once the Looper block is added, a Stomp mode footswitch assignment is created to access the Looper (also see [**Footswitch Modes**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/top-panel-and-footswitches.md)). Please take a look at the section below for details on each Looper model type. **Tips:** * Use the**Command Center \>** [**Looper Commands**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/command-center.md)to customize your Stomp Mode footswitches with multiple Looper functions for a Looper block. * Use the [**Song View \>** **Flags**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/flags.md)**\> Looper flags** to automate your preset's Looper block functions within your Showcase songs. * Control the Looper remotely via MIDI---see [**MIDI CC**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/midi.md). ## Deluxe Looper The Deluxe Looper utilizes a dedicated footswitch mode for full-featured control of loop recording and playback functions. **Tip:** If you import a Helix/HX preset that includes a 6 Switch Looper block, its looper is automatically converted to a Deluxe Looper. ### Deluxe Looper Parameters ![The Inspector showing the Deluxe Looper parameters](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_7a6b47bdf6eb5b5eeafdba5a48d953c054378723c0cc6d84f123117a27d17cec/DeluxeLooper_Inspector.png?cb=2f859aa5774791f32ed6abc965a8298b) Click to expand the Deluxe Looper parameter descriptions... | **Parameter** | **Description** | |---------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Playback** | Controls the level of looper playback. You may find it helpful to turn this down a bit so your live guitar can be slightly louder. | | **Overdub** | Controls the level of your recorded loop *relatively, over time,* while overdubbing. For example, if Overdub is set to -6.0 dB, each time your loop repeats, its volume will be reduced by that amount, becoming quieter with each overdub pass. | | **Low Cut** | Applies a low cut (high pass) filter to loop playback, letting you remove the effected signal below a specified frequency. Filtering your loop can sometimes improve the mix with your live instrument. | | **High Cut** | Applies a high cut (low pass) filter to loop playback, letting you remove the effected signal above a specified frequency. Filtering your loop can sometimes improve the mix with your live instrument. | ### Deluxe Looper Footswitch Mode 1. **From Stomp A or Stomp B footswitch mode, press the Deluxe Looper switch.** Deluxe Looper Footswitch mode appears (see below). If no loop has yet been recorded (or the loop has been cleared), the device's switch LED rings appear dark and its footswitch labels are dimmed. The Speed and Reverse switches can be "pre-engaged" prior to recording your loop if desired. ![10SwLooper_XLSwitches_V1_0.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b8bcf8e6146f7b9e2353fa89e76b6e55cdcc9a39af9c98da5ba20b72a8ea0801/10SwLooper_XLSwitches_V1_0.png?cb=fd922d81bea0d53921da2d8b96e803d4) Helix Stadium XL's Deluxe Looper footswitch mode^\*^ ^**\***^**Note:** On Helix Stadium XL ![Helix Stadium XL only](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c99532f53f8c1f5ca563d9657cd1d373b6d3635c0bdf32034dfb5e56a7c2fc1f/Icon_XL.png?cb=eb82c58bec6c3f8aaf1811bc572e962e) , the Looper footswitch labels appear on the scribble strips when the Deluxe Looper block is enabled. On Helix Stadium, Deluxe Looper footswitch labels appear on Home \> Play view (see below). ![HelixStadium_LooperMode.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_6bdbacb2141fc6f155968f518442e0dee3d63fc40e4110ce2d242184155a4520/HelixStadium_LooperMode.png?cb=52a2a530a2adda7ca702675d3f67a2f9) Helix Stadium Play View \> Deluxe Looper footswitch mode Click to display the list of Deluxe Looper footswitch functions... | **Function** | **Description** | |--------------------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **FS1 (Clear)** | **Press to instantly clear the loop from memory, whether it's currently recording, playing, or stopped.** | | **FS2 (Undo/Redo)** | **Press to undo the most recent overdub pass.** Once the switch is released, the function changes to Redo. **Press again to restore the last cleared overdub pass.** The function changes to Undo again. | | **FS3 (Speed)** | **Press to toggle between Full Speed and Half Speed.** If **Half Speed** is engaged before or during loop recording, pressing FS3 again will double the speed. The speed also affects the pitch of the loop playback. Playing a Half Speed-recorded loop at Full Speed raises its pitch one octave, while playing a Full Speed-recorded loop at Half Speed lowers it one octave. | | **FS4 (Reverse)** | **Press to toggle loop playback between forward and reverse.** | | **FS8 (Record/Overdub)** | **If a loop is not playing, press FS8 to record a new loop.** The switch's LED turns bright red. **If a loop is playing, press FS8 again to overdub.** The switch's LED turns bright orange. Overdubbing records your input signal as a new part, without removing the existing loop. If you remain actively overdubbing, a new, additional Overdub layer is recorded every time the loop playback cycles. | | **FS9 (Play/Stop)** | **Press to start loop playback. Press again to stop playback.** | | **FS10 (Play x1)** | **Press to start loop playback.** Playback continues until the end of the loop and automatically stops. **Tip:** Press **FS10** rapidly and repeatedly for a "stuttering" playback effect! | ### Deluxe Looper - Simple Tutorial To follow, we've provided a quick example for using the Deluxe Looper to get you up and going on the marvels of Looping. Of course, the number of possibilities for how you combine and utilize all the features is practically endless, but you'll get the idea. For the following steps, we're using all the factory default settings for the Looper parameters. 1. From Stomp A or Stomp B footswitch mode, press the Deluxe Looper switch. On Helix Stadium, press Home until you see Home \> Play view. 2. Count yourself in and press **FS8 (Record)** on the downbeat of a measure to start recording. 3. Record four measures of chords or a riff for a rhythm, then press **FS9 (Play/Stop)** on the downbeat of what would be the fifth measure to stop recording. Your loop automatically exits recording and starts playing. * You've now recorded a loop that you can play along with to your heart's content. Adjust the **Playback** parameter (Knob 1) to set the loop playback volume as desired. Go to the next step if you want to overdub some riffs on top of your loop. 4. Press **FS9 (Play/Stop)** to start loop playback. Once you're ready for your big moment, step on **FS8 (Overdub)** as the loop plays to enter Overdub record mode and go wild for a solo for four bars. * If you're really feeling fancy, you can keep the overdub running after the first loop cycle and record a second layer for a doubled solo. 5. Press **FS9 (Play/Stop)** at the end of your four bars to exit Overdub, and your loop will keep playing---now featuring both your rhythm and solo parts. * Keep repeating the last two steps to add additional overdub layers as desired. * If you mess up an overdub, press **FS2 (Undo)** once to delete the most recent overdub while retaining your original loop. 6. To delete the entire recorded loop, press **FS1 (Clear)**. #### Additional Deluxe Looper Tricks * Press **FS3 (Half Speed)** and you'll hear the whole thing at half speed. * Press **FS4 (Forward/Reverse)** and you'll hear everything playing backwards, and still at half speed. * As the loop plays, press **FS8 (Overdub)** and lay down some more guitar. Press **FS9 (Play/Stop)** to stop overdubbing and play the whole shebang, and then press **FS4 (Forward/Reverse)**. Now the loop is playing forward again, and the last part you recorded is backward in relation to everything else. * Press **FS3 (Half Speed)** and playback returns to normal speed. You can imagine where a half hour of this kind of thing could get you. * At any time, press **FS10 (Play 1x)** to play the entire loop once from its start. Or, for fun, you can tap FS10 fast and repeatedly to keep re-triggering it for stuttered playback. * Remember that looping doesn't need to be limited to guitar parts! Connect a mic and capture vocals or any type of instrument or noise you can think of to add to your loops. *** ** * ** *** ## 1 Switch Looper The 1 Switch Looper offers simplified Loop recording and playback, all from a single Stomp mode switch. 1. **Add a 1 Switch Looper block to your preset. If not already assigned, assign it to a Stomp mode switch.** 2. **Press the 1 Switch Looper switch.**The LED lights red, indicating the loop is recording. 3. **Press the 1 Switch Looper switch again.**The LED lights green, indicating the loop is playing back. 4. **Press the 1 Switch Looper switch again.**The LED lights amber, indicating the loop is in overdub mode. Subsequent presses of the switch toggle between play and overdub mode. 5. **While the Looper is in play or overdub mode, press and hold the switch for 1 second.**The most recent recording is undone. Holding the switch again will redo the recording. 6. **Quickly double-press the 1 Switch Looper switch.** Playback/recording stops, and the LED appears dim green, indicating a loop is in memory. **Press again to start playback.** 7. **While Looper playback/recording is stopped, press and hold the switch for 1 second.**The complete loop and any overdubs are deleted, and the LED lights dim white. **Tip:** Intended to be quick and simple, the 1 Switch Looper offers fewer functions via its single switch than the Deluxe Looper (such as 1/2 Speed, Reverse, etc.). However, all the functions available for the Deluxe Looper can also be accessed by assigning Command Center \> Looper commands to Stomp switches. As long as the current preset includes a Looper block of any type, Looper command switches will control the looper. This effectively lets you create a "custom" layout of Looper switches within Stomp A and/or Stomp B footswitch modes. See [**Command Center - Looper Commands**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/command-center.md). ### 1 Switch Looper Parameters ![The Inspector showing the 1 Switch Looper parameters](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_f8ec3b87656e839bb19f446d00877b73f33a98f7a8689fa11c6ed5cd23ae9f2f/1SwLooperParameters.png?cb=c8057c4799395cd2c6c708c1bdf1f96a) Click to expand the 1 Switch Looper parameters descriptions... | **Parameter** | **Description** | |---------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Playback** | Controls the level of looper playback. You may find it helpful to turn this down a bit so your live guitar can be slightly louder. | | **Overdub** | Controls the level of your recorded loop *relatively, over time* while overdubbing. For example, if Overdub is set to -6.0 dB, each time your loop repeats, its volume will be reduced by that amount, sounding quieter and quieter with each overdub pass. | | **Low Cut** | Applies a low cut (high pass) filter to loop playback, letting you remove the looper signal below a specified frequency. Filtering your loop can sometimes improve the mix with your live instrument. | | **High Cut** | Applies a high cut (low pass) filter to loop playback, letting you remove the looper signal above a specified frequency. Filtering your loop can sometimes improve the mix with your live instrument. | *** ** * ** *** ## Shuffling Looper The Shuffling Looper is a distinctly different animal from the other Loopers. Part looper, part sampler, part performance instrument­---the Shuffling Looper chops up your recorded loop, randomizes the slices, and gives you control over reordering, octave shifting, reversing, repeating, and more. Before starting, select the Shuffling Looper block within the Home \> Edit screen and observe and adjust the Looper parameters as desired (see the following table of Shuffling Looper parameter descriptions). 1. **Add a Shuffling Looper block to your preset. If not already assigned, assign it to a Stomp mode switch.** 2. **Turn Knob 1 (Slices) to set the number of slices your loop will be chopped into.** 3. **Press the switch to begin recording.**The LED lights red, indicating the loop is recording. 4. **When done recording your loop, press the switch.**The LED lights green, and the sliced loop sequence starts playing immediately. 5. **During playback, adjust the Shuffling Looper knobs.** See [**Shuffling Looper Parameters**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/looper-block.md#Shuffling-Looper-Parameters) below. 6. Want to change it up? **While the loop is playing, press the switch to randomize its slice sequence.** 7. **Quickly double-press the Looper switch.** Playback/recording stops, and the LED appears dim green, indicating a loop is in memory. **Press again to start playback.** 8. **While the loop is playing or stopped, press and hold the switch.**The recording is deleted, and the LED lights dim white. **Tip:** Try assigning an expression pedal to the Shuffling Looper parameters for even more creative control! ### Shuffling Looper Parameters ![ShufflingLooper_Parameters.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5b35579a832429930dfd363559fa784fd49ea70d1ed8a012940cb80fe210ad26/ShufflingLooper_Parameters.png?cb=459308851667528889a3cfa552e3faed) Click to display the full list of Shuffling Looper parameters... | **Parameter** | **Notes** | |----------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Slices** | Changes the number of slices your loop will be chopped into | | **SeqLength** | Determines the number of slices in the sequence. This can be changed even after recording a loop. | | **Shuffle** | Determines the likelihood of slices shuffling/reordering. At 0%, the slices never shuffle; at 100%, they're constantly reshuffling. | | **Pitch** | Determines the likelihood of slices playing back an interval higher or lower, determined by the Interval 1 and Interval 2 parameters. | | **Reverse** | Determines the likelihood of slices playing backward. At 0%, all slices play forward; at 100%, all slices play backward. | | **Repeat** | Determines the likelihood of slices repeating. At 0%, no slices repeat; at 100%, all slices repeat. | | **Smoothing** | Higher values apply smoothing between slices and can give a synth-pad type quality. Lower values maintain transients. Or set it just high enough to avoid pops and clicks. | | **Seq Drift** | Determines the likelihood of the entire sequence changing every time it loops around. When set to 0%, the same sequence repeats forever; when set to 100%, the sequence changes completely every time it loops. | | **Playback** | Sets the overall level of the playback sequence. | | **Low Cut** | Applies a low cut (high pass) filter to loop playback, letting you remove the looper signal below a specified frequency. Filtering your loop can sometimes improve the mix with your live instrument. | | **High Cut** | Applies a high cut (low pass) filter to loop playback, letting you remove the looper signal above a specified frequency. Filtering your loop can sometimes improve the mix with your live instrument. | | **Interval 1** | Sets the pitch of some slices, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up). If you want slices to change to a single pitch, set one Interval to that pitch and the other Interval to 0. | | **Interval 2** | Sets the pitch of some slices, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up). If you want slices to change to a single pitch, set one Interval to that pitch and the other Interval to 0. | --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Main Menu ## The Main Menu **Tap** ![The Main Menu button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1dfbb6fc834118c6883f408733146b02d9bd11ad6fdd8f0bb9e8930e8c17f6dc/MainMenuButton.png?cb=2720e1381664f0fa9434ebc5c375625f) **to open the Main Menu.** Here you can choose from several common commands or screens, such as creating a new Preset or Clone, opening the Bypass/Control, Global Settings, Command Center screens, and more. ![MainMenu_1_4.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_bf83995e25a493b6563fd419dc510938eb59db03a56b47075e037ac6e92824d5/MainMenu_1_4.png?cb=5b5ca304f1beb6ad699c27679b8c1ad9) The Main Menu ![New Preset Menu button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ed7bd05795e418b8ba62a6c76a5a3f7cd5169bb67609f20711b63384a7eaaf62/Menu_NewPreset.png?cb=e858726035276572430a32dba18b831a) **New Preset:** Tap to create a new preset from the Templates list. If you want an empty preset, choose "Empty Preset." See [**About Presets**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/presets.md) for details. ![New Clone menu button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1747b37d5aeadf70af25781141b06f62e5a61dcb1bcdee6332b9e61a5986a299/New%20Clone%20button.png?cb=e6e1d25b1ec2df8afe4ab9207d72c03f) **New Clone:** Tap to create a "Clone" of your Amp, Amp+Cab, Preamp, or Distortion using Stadium's Proxy Cloning feature (firmware v1.3.0 and later). The New Clone screen allows you to choose the type of clone and guides you through the capture process. See the**Blocks \>** [**Clones**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/clones.md) page for details. ![Bypass-Control menu button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_887aea0830f0622eb013ee56b544824ebb6dc9a715d1eb2156dad53ecf8fa173/Menu_Bypass-Control.png?cb=0405654bbb7d93248f4a3a9fac6ce9af) **Bypass/Control:** Tap this button to enter the Bypass/Control screen to create, learn, and edit block bypass and parameter control assignments for the block's parameters. Bypass/Control is grayed out when no block is selected. See [**Bypass and Control Assignments**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/bypass-and-controller-assign.md) for details. ![Command Center menu button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_19792fb7280d16ee2b3f6110ef18c5cc03d5f13b7e99e482718e786accf5da9d/Menu_CmdCtr.png?cb=53a8d3dca1b2cf77d560d1117d102d5e) **Command Center:** Tap to enter the Command Center, where you can configure Helix Stadium's numerous controllers (Stomp A or Stomp B switches, expression pedals, trigger inputs, the XY Controller, Instant commands, etc.) to transmit various types of commands to control external devices, software, or even Helix Stadium itself. See [**Command Center**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/command-center.md) for details. ![DownloadsButton.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c49f5d25065e5517eaef1548f72d942c8b07da0a08b983e2b3f07ca7c84a834a/DownloadsButton.png?cb=f642d72f892652985748188211572145) **Downloads:** Tap to download and install Stadium device updates. **Note:** When Helix Stadium is connected to the Internet, and you're signed in to your [**Line6.com**](https://line6.com/account) account, the Main Menu icon appears with a red dot ![Main Menu button indicating an update is available.](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d93575baca3ce75b2434ac6579b210302eef5243bf2c0acf44195b7e178b9b7b/MainMenuButton_Update.png?cb=b55298df8e5adfea89d11ff9d8ba1bf7) if an update is available. We highly recommend you keep your device updated for the latest and greatest amps, effects, and features. Remember to also update the free [**Helix Stadium application**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/helix-stadium-edit-application.md) to keep it current for optimal functionality. ![GLobal Settings menu button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5431d95f8adc40dbcf75704773b316b53d650ad202df837c6f61fdd938c4a8ac/Menu_GlobalSettings.png?cb=8ffa8690c8f7d23ce7ee72baefaacb04) **Global Settings:** Tap to enter the Global Settings screen, where you can customize Helix Stadium's settings and preferences to suit your preferred workflow. See [**Global Settings**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md) for details. ![GLobal EQ menu button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_347ca12776ed0b48571ed30ebf466806df91ec79c8533e1b2ee767134224303a/Menu_GlobalEQ.png?cb=e2cc1c1e9b95da48a10bdd8cc3228218) **Global EQ:** **Tap to open the Global EQ screen.** Global EQ is applied independently of your presets, post-processing, and is used to compensate for the wide disparity in acoustic environments on tour or when traveling from studio to studio. See [**Global EQ**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-eq.md) for details. ![Disk Image - Utility menu button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_68616ed5617bdd66a327eadf60b7df66bfb5a9a90140eb73ed89c80ea58c6280/Menu_Disc.png?cb=3ac41db04656fff227d3d1e9e5867d27) **Disk Utility/Backup** : This menu item is reserved for potential future use. Currently, you can use the [**Helix Stadium Maintenance**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/helix-stadium-maintenance.md) screen to perform all microSD card tasks, such as formatting a microSD card, creating and restoring backups, and more. ![Wi-Fi menu button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_07a5b460f769bc3deb702147735bf48e4cc3b10bf22c647eadeff64d2524d48d/Menu_WiFi.png?cb=b916d87beeef515a503937826410e49b) **Wi-Fi** , ![Bluetooth menu button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_13502868baa7e93139e04ca26a5997ac8ce22d470ddb2623093144fc9843ffb0/Menu_Bluetooth.png?cb=d3af645cb837c28acf4702e56bffb08c) **Bluetooth, and** ![Ethernet menu button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a55e1d766e312bd7376b8b079dd6b59ca9082e6d2aa4aede951fc72fd9c2930b/Menu_Ethernet.png?cb=53086f7f139d5f3000fb7c1e03b9b7f7) **Ethernet:** Tap the respective item to open its panel and configure the connectivity settings for these features. Please see [**Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and Ethernet Connectivity**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/wifi-bluetooth-and-ethernet-connectivity.md) for details. ![RenameDevice.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_57d4d4029e2d7079a0ed7293dc921f2e7c12d616193fc7bd745b6bb5b07edef4/RenameDevice.png?cb=3873d51aa9be9aec69c555be8e67eee7) **Rename Device:** By default, your device is named "Helix Stadium XL" or "Helix Stadium," but you can customize it, which may be helpful if more than one Helix Stadium or Stadium XL is on the same network. Tap Rename Device and type in your desired pet name. ![Account login button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b207a5e05222e79e7800c011c8a1d1fcbc28c804b67fd4ee5c92c40c1882d002/Menu_AcctLogin.png?cb=ed62744568b8593e77e80951bf68239d) **Account Login:** Tap to sign in to your [**Line 6 account**](https://line6.com/account). You'll need to sign in for various online features, such as update notifications, installing firmware updates, etc. ![Licenses button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_89200d47da9c3b61fc5f2ea097dc5f94c3a423bfccf908f999e81d42ca88b2f3/Licenses.png?cb=625b5d4bc86851652e8654c0e434d4f9) **Licenses:** Lists legal and licensing information. **Firmware Version:** The currently installed Stadium firmware version is listed at the bottom of the sidebar for your reference. --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # Main Volume/Matrix Mixer Please check out the video below for an overview of the Main Volume control and Matrix Mixer. Then, consult the sections on this page for additional details. ## Main Volume Helix Stadium's large **Volume knob** controls the level of one output pair at a time (or more than one, if outputs are linked)---1/4", XLR, or Phones. 1. **Press the 1/4"** ![Quarter Inch Out button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_49a68d574b0461724dff2a81ad93a788c46754920b6187555bd53c6284143eed/Button_QtrInchOut.png?cb=9feda74ee7ac3672471d451409cb1ce8) **, XLR** ![XLR Out button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a4652769c13c535b93d8e4975439463661324ab10f97803fd9a681806ed2b4d8/Button_XLROut.png?cb=9d3dbfcfdea4a86c87ccc141b3706631) **, or Phones** ![Headphones Out button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8f139bd4d83a198849d683765bc7d592d4cc303e0914b0a2a92391f0449e9a41/Button_Phones.png?cb=6acd729f16d66341809575cab1af7485) **output button to select which output you want to control.** 2. **Turn the large Volume knob** ![Volume knob](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_54931cefba01f20beb541a870450ffbb25d8ed8a909ee5de932d45d700c308cf/Knob_Volume.png?cb=c505545342e99113cb46870450307396) **.** The Volume panel briefly appears with active metering for the overall signal at the selected output (see below). ![Stadium_VolumePanel_1_1meters.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_dc719e5363ec09410cfd782533faf083f1aa8b56e4b5633c913b0f8035434570/Stadium_VolumePanel_1_1meters.png?cb=a046842d6a50752b63d65fc1fc2d9ee9) Volume panel (1/4" outputs selected) Worried that someone (or your guitar cable) might bump the Volume knob mid-show? Stop taping it down! Volume knob control can be quickly disabled. 1. **Press and hold the** ***currently lit*** **output button(s) to completely disable Volume knob control.** Turning the Volume knob while it's disabled displays an alert (see below). 2. **Press any output button to re-enable the Volume knob.** ![VolumeDisabled.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_759eae524f651e677b32aee0bc3ad44ed874326777b95419edcce828b64468f3/VolumeDisabled.png?cb=1c941b50e0d0e70999f753a98cf87b8b) Volume Knob Disabled dialog ## Matrix Mixer The Matrix Mixer lets you quickly mix the numerous signals going through Helix Stadium. What's more, the 1/4", XLR, and Phones outputs get their own Matrix layer so you can send a completely different monitor mix to, say, the 1/4" outputs feeding your on-stage playback system, the XLR outputs feeding the Front of House console, and the Phones output feeding your In Ear Monitors or drummer. Each Matrix layer provides real-time metering, level, pan, mute and solo control over the 4 stereo paths on the Home \> Edit screen, 8 stereo tracks on the Song screen, Click, Count In, USB In 1/2 (for monitoring your DAW), Bluetooth audio (for jamming along with Apple Music^®^, Spotify^®^, or YouTube™), and Aux In. (Aux In is unavailable unless [**Global Settings \> Ins/Outs \>**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#6c56362d-db33-4eb0-ac46-2d690ec2d73e)**Return 1/2 Type** is set to **Aux In**.) Each Matrix output also gets its own Global EQ. **Note:** All metering in the Matrix Mixer is "Pre-Fader" (i.e., each meter displays the signal level *before* its channel fader's level is applied). Further, you can "link" the Stadium outputs so that any two---or all three---outputs are controlled from the same Matrix Mixer layer and main Volume knob. See [**Linking Outputs**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/matrix-mixer.md#linking-outputs) for details. 1. **Press the** ***lit*** **1/4"** ![Quarter Inch Out button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_49a68d574b0461724dff2a81ad93a788c46754920b6187555bd53c6284143eed/Button_QtrInchOut.png?cb=9feda74ee7ac3672471d451409cb1ce8) **, XLR** ![XLR Out button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_a4652769c13c535b93d8e4975439463661324ab10f97803fd9a681806ed2b4d8/Button_XLROut.png?cb=9d3dbfcfdea4a86c87ccc141b3706631) **, or Phones** ![Headphones Out button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_8f139bd4d83a198849d683765bc7d592d4cc303e0914b0a2a92391f0449e9a41/Button_Phones.png?cb=6acd729f16d66341809575cab1af7485) **output button to open that output's Matrix Mixer.** 2. To view the Matrix Mixer for a different output, **press that output button.** ![MatrixMixer_Annotated1_3.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_b006be70487d8727879c3da84a400e54a230bd8286a536ee5dec90a9815c8d67/MatrixMixer_Annotated1_3.png?cb=b6c0a388b1a0f951cf5d289be12e5fe0) The Matrix Mixer (1/4" outputs selected) **Tip:** Matrix Mixer controls can also be controlled remotely via MIDI CC messages. See [**MIDI**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/midi.md). ![Item 01](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_6f7298bf01dfccceadf18261f3c0936974ef89cc9915d8e14763c667a3605e78/01.png?cb=ce61b591a14429573632afbeb4c2997c) **Matrix Mixer Layer:** The current Matrix layer is indicated at the top of the screen (1/4" Outputs, XLR Outputs, Phones Output, or multiple outputs when two or more are linked). ![Item 2](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_efa35cc22e77a1892ca70c09f40fbb12243f25cb87cd5b1f9e3f70402e88c6b5/02.png?cb=53ead26f31014fd489e07cfbde017dc7) **Global EQ Shortcut:** Tap to open the Global EQ for the selected Matrix layer. Each Matrix output (1/4", XLR, and Phones) gets its own Global EQ, regardless of whether any of them are linked. See [**Global EQ**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-eq.md) for details. **For All Matrix Mixer Channel Strips:** Adjusting the Matrix Mixer's controls determines the mix heard from the selected output (1/4", XLR, Phones, or linked outputs). * Tap and drag a channel strip's vertical**Fader** ![Channel strip fader handle](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ec0d31ed488ef0d01df663dcc7c4c09bb5f3b9c60839f69f73f472a7af905795/FaderHandle.png?cb=dc852ce8e5cb0753af7b5d539a6c7793) , or turn Knob 1\~8 beneath the respective fader to adjust its level. Press the Knob 1\~8 to reset the fader to 0.0 dB. The fader's current setting value is shown in white at the top of each channel. * A multi-color level meter is displayed on each channel for reference. * Tap a channel's **Pan slider** ![Channel strip Pan slider](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_cf8348db534917c92a2205d669214a228a72fbf8c947ad35a0639b085556e431/PanSlider.png?cb=8ca487d27b00df92183a23fbf1394946) to open the Pan panel and drag to adjust its Left/Right stereo balance. Tap the **Reset** button within the Pan panel to reset it back to Center. * Tap the **Mute button** ![Mute button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_be4d2b624db7420c7f38cb546699a5253126d8b5f84868322307a4bba2ce6ba5/MuteButton.png?cb=a4226afed833f886683794859d081677) to mute the channel. Tap again to un-mute the channel. * Tap the **Solo button** ![Solo button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_4ab0c8b58da74c35d7b2f126d573748743a9a1252c461713ace66870d52ddd2c/SoloButton.png?cb=3be18cb1e9183528aee080cb6bbdd445) to mute all other non-solo-enabled channels. Tap again to un-solo the channel. (Note that the currently lit Output button flashes when any channels are solo-enabled, serving as an indicator when you're in other screens.) * Tap the Solo buttons of multiple channels to add them to the solo bus. * Tap-hold any enabled Solo button to clear all solos. * Tap and hold on the "Matrix" title at the top of the screen, and a prompt will appear alerting you that things could get loud (since some of your channel levels might currently be set significantly lower than the default 0.0 dB). Note that by default, the main output volume (the large Volume knob) is not reset---you can check the "**Reset output volume?**" box to reset it to 0.0 dB as well. ![MatrixResetAlert.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c335beaed65022438b65f875c576b9f41ac56e0d2b76a92b4afb00b0085d93f1/MatrixResetAlert.png?cb=7aaad9e833f31f52cfdc495cd83000ba) Matrix Mixer prompt/alert * Tap **Reset** and all the current Matrix Mixer's controls to their initial defaults (Level to 0.0 dB, Pan to Center, and Mute and Solo to off). ![Item 3](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1db4d3fe997f7be0cf91deb38d81fefd55af91b5adb7cb82d62c506b219ba8fd/03.png?cb=632cde3c35c9abd3a51e6bbd6f0126be) **Home Channel:** Use this channel's controls to adjust the combined signal of all four Home \> Edit paths. ![Item 4](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_e454cd2368e5d8c7423f829c50fd4430c2c97967c336956eeec66d01215ab246/04.png?cb=075549902ea87b3442a14dd60557ca0c) **Home Paths Show/Hide:** Tap the ![The expand button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_97f5da11cb66d50505d775c4c3a0a70d7826b4386d1a41c4857510f52a5dbfcc/ExpandButton.png?cb=1e51f007fe81c9298c7082cf94cfd89f) button to expand the Home channel to show its four individual path channels (1A, 1B, 2A, and 2B). Use these channels to meter and adjust each path independently. Tap the ![The hide button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c2513cb5f5d33c8e83d58fa6186f9deb2e4d727a020b5e76acec6c417f2c79de/Hidebutton.png?cb=57f83e65cae865c60dc81baa42c1c98d) button to hide the individual path channels. ![Matrix_HomeExpanded.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_6b9c3493d30addfa36fe4d7399aa4a7371bf3cfec49dcf8c0e199a7d34c80207/Matrix_HomeExpanded.png?cb=8155859fa2962d770820c08f552ebdc8) The Matrix Mixer with the Home channel expanded ![Item 5](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_998947d4438c866458b5fec81c4f84389df119b1793cd9552736b2ab22c2da9d/05.png?cb=3c60906905f19136c9550e92d3fb7999) **Song Channel:** Use to adjust the combined signal of all eight Song tracks. ![Item 6](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_598cd45ea7105ee60f2f6e61c5d21b43ce528a65ac22297d18f6d2554d427e45/06.png?cb=e45c3711194c930a28cb1ba380014ade) **Song Tracks Show/Hide:** Tap the ![The expand button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_97f5da11cb66d50505d775c4c3a0a70d7826b4386d1a41c4857510f52a5dbfcc/ExpandButton.png?cb=1e51f007fe81c9298c7082cf94cfd89f) button to expand the Song channel to show its eight stereo track channels. Use these channels to meter and adjust each track independently. Tap the ![The hide button](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_c2513cb5f5d33c8e83d58fa6186f9deb2e4d727a020b5e76acec6c417f2c79de/Hidebutton.png?cb=57f83e65cae865c60dc81baa42c1c98d) button to hide the individual track channels. * Swipe the screen left or right to access all channels when the Home Path or Song Track channels are displayed. **Tip:** When a song is uploaded from the Helix Stadium application, its track names are automatically added for the labels at the bottom of each Song Track 1-8 channel, as shown below. Optionally, you can tap the label for any Song Track channel to edit the name. These names are saved individually with each song. Also see [**Song Settings**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/the-song-screen.md#song-settings). ![Song_Expanded.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_1ba2419b8f7f36e0d328f785528e791dae896acd92eb8ac41282009413d50d57/Song_Expanded.png?cb=493c9141a90ecce4a86407540c82eb74) The Matrix Mixer with Song Track channels expanded ![Item 7](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_4b6449bdb3d2bcb32e2668a5330e41ba073445bd1db93b774574a5f5614d60ea/07.png?cb=4985f689673b884595ec1665290f3fb2) **Click Channel:** Use to adjust the Metronome's Click signal. ![Item 8](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_41e19e2d48715ec14c7543d52f71adfc21ba4e534be4fff4271fbdfe48b61c92/08.png?cb=f9f3b6850564a1dba571fe782b957df5) **Count In Channel:** Reserved for future functionality.^\*^ ![Item 9](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_7f719e9d50bb85681a94082b8562f50976415fc75584ac529349b54c05000dbe/09.png?cb=b204e54eb95e4f32dee046a782f6c5cd) **USB In 1/2 Channel:** Use to adjust the audio USB 1/2 monitor signal (for monitoring your DAW when Helix Stadium is operating as your computer's audio interface). ![Item 10](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_ac88ae56bf54b4fb827e63fe5818bf2d0f97c9c1510e2c08bedce2f55c3fd092/10.png?cb=d700093662e1b8496789e095d710ab9e) **Bluetooth Audio Channel:** Use to adjust the playback signal from a paired Bluetooth^®^ audio device, for jamming along with Apple Music, Spotify, YouTube, etc. The Bluetooth Audio channel is grayed out unless a Bluetooth audio device is currently paired. See [**Bluetooth Connectivity**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/wifi-bluetooth-and-ethernet-connectivity.md) for details. ![Item 11](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_24f6eda4f4cf553e7ca48b61497f4f5436c99cdbea6f10d479001459c316c262/11.png?cb=66bdb69bb0f2388d29f46f747e5ccc0e) **Aux Channel:** Use to adjust the signal from the rear panel Aux L/R input (Helix Stadium's **Return 1/2** or ![Helix Stadium XL devices only](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5dbfccb245cfb983dbd10bd13dd583fad2240c1122e96b6fc897690f6e60883b/Icon_XL.png?cb=a00c7dd3c9cc40c40e4320fa9670aa23) Helix Stadium XL's **Return 3/4** ) for receiving a monitor feed from the Front of House console or connecting a drum machine, mixer, etc. The Aux channel is grayed unless the [**Global Settings \> Ins/Outs \>**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#6c56362d-db33-4eb0-ac46-2d690ec2d73e)**Return Type** is set to **Return 3/4** ; to enable it, set Return Type to **Aux**. ### Linking Outputs Man, what a pain to constantly switch back and forth between outputs just to change Volume or tweak a Matrix cue mix! If you'd prefer to keep things simple, you can link any two---or all three---outputs so that they share the same Matrix Mixer layer and Volume knob control. 1. **Press and hold two (or all three) output buttons for 2 seconds.** A dialog appears, asking which output's Matrix layer you want as the reference (see below). 2. **Choose the desired output reference and then tap Link Outputs.** To unlink outputs, press and hold the linked output buttons again. ![Stadium_LinkOutputs.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_aff268163e0e9e8dee881ea57310430c2c1ba7c6d45ba5f2980719f7d3172d21/Stadium_LinkOutputs.png?cb=eb8e8c00ab0bb6ff47dd99896f15ccc5) Link Outputs dialog **Note:** Global EQ remains independent per output, regardless of whether any outputs are linked. --- version: "v1.4" language: "en" --- # MIDI Helix Stadium supports MIDI control via external MIDI DIN (the good ol' 5-pin connection) for a myriad of functions, including preset selection, block bypass, real-time parameter control, Matrix Mixer control, MIDI Clock sync, and more. Additionally, MIDI is transmitted and received via Stadium's USB-C using the options within your Stadium device's [**Global Settings \> MIDI**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#globals-midi) settings.^\*^ Stadium's MIDI Clock can be enabled or disabled using the [**Global Settings \> Tempo/Click \>**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#globals-tempo)**Receive MIDI Clock** and **Send MIDI Clock** options. ^**\***^**Note:** For USB MIDI operation when connected to a Windows^®^ computer, you must download and install the Helix Stadium ASIO^®^ driver, available from [**http://line6.com/software**](http://line6.com/software). (This driver is automatically installed with the Helix Stadium application, v1.2 and later, installation on Windows.) No driver installation is necessary for MIDI functionality with macOS computers or mobile devices. In this chapter, we'll cover external remote MIDI control of Helix Stadium functions. Many of Stadium's Global functions are pre-configured with MIDI CC commands, and block bypass and most block parameters can be custom-assigned either manually or via MIDI Learn and stored per preset. Refer to the lists of all Global MIDI CC mappings in the following sections. **Tip:** Helix Stadium is also highly functional as a MIDI controller device, allowing you to configure and send many types of MIDI (and other) commands to your external gear via 5-pin MIDI DIN or USB. See [**Command Center**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/command-center.md). ## Preset and Snapshot Recall via MIDI MIDI can be frustrating enough as it is without having to slog through a manual to figure out what messages your particular device needs to change presets or snapshots. Conveniently enough, Helix Stadium provides handy helper text to tell you exactly which MIDI messages recall the current preset and snapshot. 1. **From the Home \> Edit screen, tap the Preset name in the header to open the Preset List** (below left). Alternatively, **tap the Snapshot icon to open the snapshot panel** (below right).The small text in the sidebar displays the required MIDI messages for recalling the current preset and snapshot from external MIDI devices or software. In the illustrations below: * The **3 Practice List** setlist is recalled with a CC32 (bank select) message of 7 * The **2D Simple Jack** preset is recalled with a PC (program change) message of 7 * The **1---INTRO** snapshot is recalled with a CC69 message of 0 ![Preset List MIDI Recall.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_5467333d33461d52ebff3f969b696057174e90b8902b5ef0ca330c5fdf64d188/Preset%20List%20MIDI%20Recall.png?cb=711df938a291970851513873d9b5ca68) MIDI Recall CC/PC values in the Preset List ![image-20251115-020220.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_9962c2d76cc2f9234610cd924c79ef4e188152cec6ede7e883c7efe8c365de50/image-20251115-020220.png?cb=df70dd03dafa27d9b899bab190b3a886) MIDI Recall CC/PC values in the Snapshot panel In most cases, you do NOT need to send a CC32 message every time you recall a preset---**just send the PC message** . The exceptions are if you want to select a preset in a different folder or setlist---or, in the case of the USER PRESETS folder (as it contains 512 preset locations), if you want to select a preset in a *different group* of 128 presets. In this case, send the folder/group/setlist's CC32 message first, followed by the preset's PC message. Snapshots work in a similar way. To change snapshots in the same preset, **just send the corresponding CC69 value** (0 for Snapshot 1, 1 for Snapshot 2, 2 for Snapshot 3, etc.)---no need to send CC32 or PC messages. ### Bank and Program Change List | **Bank** | **CC32 Value** | **PC Value** | **Preset Locations** Preset numbers change depending on [**Global Settings \> Preferences**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#globals-preferences) **\> Preset Numbering**: ||| | **Bank** | **CC32 Value** | **PC Value** | |---------------------|----------------|--------------|-------------|------------|------------| | **1A-128D** | **0-511** | **1-512** | | **FACTORY PRESETS** | 0 | 0-XXX | 1A \~ XXX | 0 \~ XXX | 1 \~ XXX | | **USER PRESETS** | 1 | 0-127 | 1A \~ 32D | 0 \~ 127 | 1 \~ 128 | | **USER PRESETS** | 2 | 0-127 | 33A \~ 64D | 128 \~ 255 | 129 \~ 256 | | **USER PRESETS** | 3 | 0-127 | 65A \~ 96D | 256 \~ 383 | 257 \~ 384 | | **USER PRESETS** | 4 | 0-127 | 97A \~ 128D | 384 \~ 511 | 385 \~ 512 | | **Your Setlists** | 5-127 | 0-127 | 1A \~ 32D | 0 \~ 127 | 1 \~ 128 | **Note:** When navigating saved Presets from the Helix hardware (Upper Knob, preset footswitches, Preset Up/Down, etc.), Helix Stadium automatically transmits a MIDI Program Change message to its MIDI DIN and USB MIDI Outs, corresponding to the selected preset. If you'd prefer Helix Stadium not automatically transmit PC messages, turn [**Global Settings \> MIDI**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md) \> Send MIDI PC off. Please note that "Empty" presets in the USER PRESETS folder or a Setlist that have not yet been saved do not transmit a MIDI PC message when selected. Likewise, Empty presets cannot be recalled via MIDI PC unless they have been saved first. ## MIDI Clock Helix Stadium can receive and send MIDI Clock via its MIDI DIN In/Out as well as via USB for tempo sync with external devices and software. **MIDI Clock Send** and **Receive** can be enabled and globally configured within the [**Global Settings \> Tempo/Click**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#globals-tempo) options. ![Temo_MIDIClock_Globals.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d2e6fd7d5204bc81fb8cf5094142a65c1d6c712e4efcbd123b625ee26ee80d73/Temo_MIDIClock_Globals.png?cb=4afa61287af2edf50e5b1e13fa4fbee3) The Global MIDI Clock settings * **Receive MIDI Clock:** Receive MIDI Clock via MIDI In or MIDI USB In (or both) to synchronize Helix Stadium's time-based effects (such as delay and modulation) to external DAW software, drum machines, keyboard workstations, or other modelers. Note that the Helix Stadium TAP footswitch flashes blue when receiving MIDI Clock. * Receive MIDI Clock is set to **Auto** by default, so Stadium's tempo will automatically sync to MIDI Clock when received via USB-C or MIDI In. * **Send MIDI Clock:** Transmit MIDI Clock to MIDI Out or MIDI USB Out (or both) to synchronize the tempo of external pedals, rack gear, and software to the current Helix Stadium TAP Tempo or Song Tempo. (Note that the TAP Tempo vs Song Tempo behavior is determined by the[**Global Settings \> Tempo/Click \>**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#globals-tempo) **Follow Song Tempo** setting.) ## MIDI CC Helix Stadium has the potential of reserving so many specific MIDI CC messages, so we've configured things so that each function type requires its own dedicated MIDI Channel, as listed below. Note that you can change the MIDI Channel for each using the [**Global Settings \> MIDI \>**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#globals-midi)**Channel** options. * **Global functions**, such as bank select, snapshot select, looper functions, emulation of knobs, pedals, etc. are accessed on MIDI Channel 1 by default. * **Bypass/Control functions**, which include block bypass states and parameters, are all custom assignable and are accessed on MIDI Channel 2 by default. * **Matrix Mixer functions**. Each Matrix Mixer output layer (1/4", XLR, and Phones) is accessed on its own channel (channel 3, 4, and 5 by default, respectively) allowing independent control for each layer. ### Global CCs Click to display the Global CCs #### **Pedals, Footswitches, and Knobs** | **MIDI CC#** | **Value** | **Function** | |--------------|-----------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **1** | 0-127 | Emulates EXP 1 Pedal | | **2** | 0-127 | Emulates EXP 2 Pedal | | **3 \~ 6** | -- | *Reserved for potential future use* | | **7** | 0-127 | XY Controller, X-Axis (0 = bottom of the screen) | | **8** | 0-127 | XY Controller, Y-Axis (0 = left edge of the screen) | | **9** | 0-34^\*^ | Emulates pressing a top panel button, pressing a More Mode switch, or tapping an onscreen icon: 0=Home View, 1=Song View, 2=Amp, 3=Save Screen, 4=XY Open/Close, 5=\, 7=Matrix 1/4" Open/Close, 8=Matrix XLR Open/Close, 9=Matrix Phones Open/Close, 10=Undo, 11=Redo, 12=Preset Down, 13=Preset Up, 14=Preset List Open/Close, 15=Preset Info Open/Close, 16=Info Scroll Up, 17=Info Scroll Down, 18=Info Zoom In, 19=Info Zoom Out, 20=Preset Clip Open/Close, 21=Stopwatch Start/Stop, 22=Stopwatch Reset, 23=Click On/Off, 24=Mute All On/Off, 25=Focus panel Open/Close, 26=Song List Open/Close, 27=Flag List Open/Close, 33=Song Settings Open/Close, 34=Tuner Open/Close ^**\***^**Note: Values 28\~32 have no assigned function.** | | **11 \~ 35** | -- | *Reserved for potential future use* | | **36** | 0-127 | Emulates Toe Switch (alternates switch state on each send of any value) | | **37** | 0-6 | Footswitch Mode (0=Stomp A, 1=Stomp B, 2=Preset, 3=Snapshot, 4=Combo, 5=Unassigned, 6=Transport) | | **38** | 0-127 | Emulates Knob 1 | | **39** | 0-127 | Emulates Knob 2 | | **40** | 0-127 | Emulates Knob 3 | | **41** | 0-127 | Emulates Knob 4 | | **42** | 0-127 | Emulates Knob 5 | | **43** | 0-127 | Emulates Knob 6 | | **44** | 0-127 | Emulates Knob 7 | | **45** | 0-127 | Emulates Knob 8 | #### Transport Control **Tip:** Playlists and songs can be recalled via MIDI CC, and Stadium makes it really easy to see what messages to send. **From Song view, tap the song's name to open the Song List.** The MIDI CC messages used to recall the current playlist and song are displayed at the bottom of the right sidebar: ![SongList_MIDIRecall.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_d0c379794c24354882ab777f1382545b8fde418d2b2a1ed0d62a78bd5a934e89/SongList_MIDIRecall.png?cb=18905911d0108e158ecf68209b1fcd33) Song List MIDI Recall Info * **Playlist**: CC63, values 0-127 (SONG LIBRARY is value 0; each subsequent playlist is value 1-127) * **Song**: CC10, values 0-127 | **MIDI CC#** | **Value** | **Function** | |--------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **10** | 0-127 | Cues a song within the current Playlist (0=first song, 1=second song, 2=third song, etc.) | | **63** | 0-127 | Selects a Playlist and cues its first song (0=the main SONG LIBRARY folder, 1=Playlist 1, 2=Playlist 2, etc.) | | **46** | 0-127 | Cues a Marker flag within the current song (0=song's Start flag, 1=Marker 1, 2=Marker 2, etc.) | | **47** | 0-127 | Return to Zero (any value) | | **48** | 0-63: Clear Cycle (or, create a Cycle between markers) 64-127: Cycle Enable/Disable | If a Cycle exists, 0-63 will clear it. If no Cycle currently exists, one will be created between existing Markers and/or Start/End flags Values 64-127 act like pressing Stadium's Cycle switch; that is, it sets the in and out points. | | **49** | 0-63: Previous Song 64-127: Next Song | Cues the Previous/Next Song | | **50** | 0-63: Previous Marker 64-127: Next Marker | Cues the Previous/Next Marker type flag | | **51** | 0-127 | Toggles Play/Pause (first CC received toggles the current state); starts playback of a cued song or marker | The following images show how the above MID CCs correspond to Stadium's Transport footswitches: ![Showcase_MIDITransportXL.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_02fd350cfaca4d022d572903679927d18e3a73ce9f74eab1e0c1cd7e36ce8f6e/Showcase_MIDITransportXL.png?cb=5e743a06ce427e71ac92763720f7326b) MIDI CCs for Transport functions - Helix Stadium XL ![Showcase_MIDITransport.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_92b14b587611ebecaf434414b1e69fbdab6b9715a1f7bcb43271bbde91a42485/Showcase_MIDITransport.png?cb=72554293d32d51762a5c9f80913d8666) MIDI CCs for Transport functions - Helix Stadium #### **Looper Control** | **MIDI CC#** | **Value** | **Function** | |--------------|--------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **52** | 0-127 | Clear Loop | | **53** | 0-127 | Undo/Redo | | **54** | 0-63: Full, 64-127: Half | Full/Half Speed | | **55** | 0-63: Forward, 64-127: Reverse | Forward/Reverse | | **56, 57** | -- | Reserved for potential future use | | **58** | 0-63: Overdub, 64-127: Record | Record/Overdub | | **59** | 0-63: Stop, 64-127: Play | Play/Stop | | **60** | 0-127 | Play Once | | **61** | -- | Reserved for future use | | **62** | 0-63: Off, 64-127: On | Looper block on/off; for the Deluxe Looper, also enters Looper footswitch mode | #### **Additional Controls** | **MIDI CC#** | **Value** | **Function** | |---------------|--------------------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **32** | 0-127 | Setlist select: the FACTORY PRESETS setlist always responds to value 0, and the USER PRESETS setlist responds to values 1 through 4, with subsequent setlists (your created setlists) responding to value 5+ | | **64** | 64-127 | Tap Tempo | | **69** | 0-7: Snapshot select, 8: Next snapshot, 9: Previous snapshot | Snapshot select (8=Next snapshot, 9=Previous snapshot) **Tip:** Set the [**Global Settings \> MIDI \>**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#globals-midi) **Send Snapshot CC** option to "On" if you want Helix Stadium to automatically send the respective CC69 value to MIDI Out | | **71 \~ 102** | -- | Reserved for potential future use | | **128** | 0-63: Skinny jeans, 64-127: Lip ring | Helix Stadium replaces all your social media thumbnails with photos from your emo phase | ### Bypass/Control CCs Bypass/Control MIDI CCs, such as for any block's bypass and control of block parameters, are user-assignable. Use the Bypass/Control screen's MIDI CC and MIDI Learn options to create your own custom MIDI CC assignments. Bypass/Control CCs are saved per preset. * To assign block bypass to a MIDI CC, see [**Quick Stomp Bypass Learn Assign**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/bypass-and-controller-assign.md). * To assign parameter control to a MIDI CC, see [**Quick Controller Assign**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/bypass-and-controller-assign.md). **Note:** By default, Bypass/Control type functions are set for MIDI Channel 2. You can set a different MIDI Channel from [**Global Settings \> MIDI \>**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#globals-midi) **Bypass/Control MIDI Channel**. You should always choose a different MIDI Channel than the ones used for Global or Matrix Mixer CC functions. ### Matrix Mixer CCs All Matrix Mixer controls are accessed using the pre-configured CCs listed in the following table. **Note:** Each mixer layer has its own dedicated MIDI channel (these channels can be changed using the respective [**Global Settings \> MIDI \>**](https://manuals.line6.com/en/helix-stadium/live/global-settings.md#globals-midi) **Matrix MIDI Ch** options): * **Matrix 1/4"** layer default is MIDI Ch 3 * **Matrix XLR** layer default is MIDI Ch 4 * **Matrix Phones** layer default is MIDI Ch 5 You may, however, assign two (or all three) Matrix layers to the same MIDI channel, at which point their levels, pans, mutes, and solos respond to the same incoming MIDI CC. For example, you could control specific channels on both the 1/4" and Phones outputs by assigning both Matrix layers to the same MIDI channel, but leave the layers themselves unlinked so you can control their output levels (and/or different channels) separately. Click to display the Matrix Mixer CCs... * **Level** CCs respond to values 0-127 * **Pan** rCCs respond to values 0 (100% Left) \~ 64 (Center) \~ 127 (100% Right) * **Mute** and **Solo** CCs respond to any value 64 or above, and toggle their state * **Clear Solo** CC (globally clears all enabled Solo controls in the current layer) responds to any value 64 or above | **Channel** | **Level** | **Pan** | **Mute** | **Solo** | **Clear Solo** | |-------------------------|-----------|---------|----------|----------|----------------| | **Home (All Paths)** | CC11 | CC34 | CC57 | CC80 | | | **Path 1A** | CC12 | CC35 | CC58 | CC81 | | | **Path 1B** | CC13 | CC36 | CC59 | CC82 | | | **Path 2A** | CC14 | CC37 | CC60 | CC83 | | | **Path 2B** | CC15 | CC38 | CC61 | CC84 | | | **Song (All Tracks)** | CC16 | CC39 | CC62 | CC85 | | | **Track 1** | CC17 | CC40 | CC63 | CC86 | | | **Track 2** | CC18 | CC41 | CC64 | CC87 | | | **Track 3** | CC19 | CC42 | CC65 | CC88 | | | **Track 4** | CC20 | CC43 | CC66 | CC89 | | | **Track 5** | CC21 | CC44 | CC67 | CC90 | | | **Track 6** | CC22 | CC45 | CC68 | CC91 | | | **Track 7** | CC23 | CC46 | CC69 | CC92 | | | **Track 8** | CC24 | CC47 | CC70 | CC93 | | | **Click** | CC25 | CC48 | CC71 | CC94 | | | **Count In** | CC26 | CC49 | CC72 | CC95 | | | **USB In 1/2** | CC27 | CC50 | CC73 | CC96 | | | **Bluetooth In** | CC28 | CC51 | CC74 | CC97 | | | **Aux In** | CC29 | CC52 | CC75 | CC98 | | | **All Matrix Channels** | |||| CC103 | Or, here are the CCs laid out on the Matrix Mixer for another reference... ![Matrix Mixer CCs.png](https://manuals.line6.com/__attachments/a_746f66b53427da71055ef49c9a3b9817e6ea24935a4a57a6157cb4f92fc6903c/Matrix%20Mixer%20CCs.png?cb=d8bef8710f60b2c6c17315fc25031b2f) Matrix Mixer MIDI CCs [Next Page](https://manuals.line6.com/llms-full.txt/1)